MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN - 06-0022-UT�
�1
�„ �
�."". �m . �„.�'" w^" w� � �w
"�
� u �� ,�
ir ��
...., �� �"' � � �
���a� �ro,� mmw� "^�m� ��w.n %u���'��„ �
�' ��rew�����i��� m����� ���� �"����h� �
!' �� 1 : � `� 1 ���. �� � 1 . ; i " � .
�,
�� � � Ni 7 t�� �' " ��
�, �:°� f � �
; �
u. , � ,., �„ � �
n,
G /,&� I�' �' ���' 'M', � Fr, r� f
I ��'i ?. 1 � �� � � I i � ! " { � p� ?i ,� %d; i�'% 'u r..
_ ��ii -�n , . ; ; �
�
r „ . ✓ � � � i � � e., „�
;l!� :Eti�. ��7
'1' i�, II�: .�. .:�. .i �,,�.
4 i, I �
J ��0. I ��' i -
f
�� � � , �" '� I; 'i � �,
�`�a����r�����" c�����i���� a� ���� ���,��s m°� ��a���^��m���t���� �����a ��������� a��"��������`��'�a������� s"�����,��'�
�a���z�r����� �;����ra����� i� ��^��a��"r���� ����'i'� �°�a����°��.^�� �,�r����a���ra�.� ��� ��,�� ���� ¢�w���� c�� ���� �'��� ���� c��
;����r��� ��3�����'�""�� �t� ���t�r���� �r�e. .��`�a��r t�a�� ������ ���a���r��' �r����,�i�� ���c���r��tac�� a�"��� ���r� �������
�� ���a�a�� m��c.��r����v��,� �a,���
N
,
� � �;
�� � ° �
u� � � P�' .m .�., �, �
�,� ��� f � �
��i���w��ww�����������i �, ° � �.�
_.._�_ _�._.�� m.. �'� ���'��'��, ��.�� e.�A�.�� ����.��� ,�.w,�� �mm. � ���" �, � N �
I����ar� � ���� ���c��u����m�.������������.�� �.���
�� ����°����� �����s�� ��� ����� ���t��a���� �� ��b��:��i�� �"��ap���� ��� �,�c�� ��� ���p���� d
��rr��t ���� ������� �� �1�� ����������� iis� �ra�� ��� ���� ��� '��t,���
I� Y }
� � � �e'�0'��� u��d� "� � � � �� �
� � �
,� _....._._. n� �,� � ..���w��.��.,....�.....�...,�,......_�....._._� ��& �,��"��: �. �� .�. �� �e...�..... .`w� . w�.��.
�
""�'�.` �"��A'��&��$�,� �1��, � �� ��* I�°� la�� �'ka '�' � d ���,�
'I'�� �����-� ���°��� �� ����%�� �r��� �� ����� �"��ji���� � ��b����i���� C""�����a����� ��� ����� ����a��� �"���
�r�����a���, �� ���� � ���°i�� ��� ��" ���� ���,���� �.�� �' ��° ��° ��� ��� � �. ""�"'��� ����°������i��t�� �"��° a���������p
�c��rit�� d �r���;� �� ��z��r �� �����t �������� �l��lti �� �� ��,� ����� �� ���� ��r������� �::����������;�.
�.� � .�....� .m. .',...°�
T�r� �����t ��' ����u�.:'� �� �,�.����,M���^�.. �������.
�, � ��....... �...�. vn �,w.._.. �_.... . . ° � � lw.�e�.
it��f+���r����� ���t����k�� ����r�������, ���
� ���� . ����
�,
� ���
��� ., � ., � m... .�
���°ki����� ��'` ���r���a�t��l �'s������������, ����� � ���
���,�����"'� �°����;�-� �..��:'��'
.� �;a�,���� li�� �d�` i��,��ns �� �� �ea�a��ryw��:t���! �r �;cw��re�te�� I��� 6l� ���� ,� �°�� � s:� ��a�c�a�a:f�� ����•����, �'���� Ii�t z��say�
�°a�.�4 ���,, �����.��tiv,�, �r�c� ���� ���.D��r� �� in�����1� �fl� ute:,��� +����. �� d��s ��c�t �li�r ��� ��;����:����f������ag� �i' tl��
����������caa�� tcr �cr��pl�te ;���� ��� �,����-�� �� ��.c�:����a��ce ��ith �d��: �'�a��.������:t l�r.��;������i���.
���,���+�°�" ��1� ���� "���'�.����'i�"�'
� �r, f
,, � � �- �� r � , �; , � , : � �
F� ,
�� ��i��'��rr na�e �re�r �,ft�cr� dh�Y �;���8�� c���.S'�eb�x�r�r����r� �_'�����p�"�3��c�:��a c�� .��ae�� �"�.��������° ���:����s� �,��'" �'i�n�� �r,�° ����` J�� �������se°������c�r.�
t`��,, �.���;.� ��e• ��.;,����c��'ec:�r�� �r�,. ���r ����� �`e��°r�a.� ��;��r�y� �r�,��li��r���c� s�a�c�T��� �a�cr�����rt�°�-� r°c-�e�r�r"�°���%} ���rc C,'�:r�r����;��°!
�t�c�ra��nl,� cra° ,�a,y� �a���y ��r��� �;��c� ��-�a��,�a�.ar� �af �,��e �'r�r��tr�x��d �ac.�r;°a��r���zR`�s, cr��} T���°�c r�.��..�`�.rt���ct' ��� �a�� c��°������v�,.
�:",�����Pa��c��ar� ,w���Cl �r�•c�ra�r,��"I��r ��°d��a�.���rt �;r�,��� f� ���� ��"�a���re�,� ���r�' irr c��°�earc;�"ca'��:°e ����r��� t�� C���a�acY�• �� ��a�°���a:�rr
�t�.��a•���•li��r,�� (a",� cyr.�r°r��� .����°�� �`���"'����`��,�� ��a�°�C, r���, r�"'�� �rra.� ���e;��a a°�jee��c�' �`��r ��rc�^ �;��r�c�a�� ���a���,�;� r"�,f�°���� �I��° ���e
cr�� �°�-��a�cr�� r� uAr��"� ��r,�r•� ��a�� �,�� �r�t� �a"Ga1��.�e���x,�:* c��a� �i�j .s��t�„�f���c��°�d� �:.��.r�°��c� caa-. r°�a��crv� ���� r°�:�>��r�.°i: ���a� c��r��aea�;�e
�r� c.�tl��:�� aW���k r�r t��� ��r�r� �:s�''�,��%���r;� �°�:k,���r�'��'�a�„� t���°�.�fr�rr�...
�f�����,� cl����a�tt�,��� �^"�:aa°k (���° �'a��ra�r���r �"�� ���h�xr• ��`��rk r�:�.�•���t��a�,� P��°�����arr�,� ���r,� �����r c�a�°r°�c��c�r �°c�����.a���� r��•
���lcs��c,� r,rra�lc'�-0 i�a��� �r�rcr;�°��-r�`a �'�� c��r°r�cicl����a ���r�r.�� �'�����°r�►��"c�� ����a ,�•�a.��a��� ���� ,�i��°� �'�:�� w��r��l �b�� �°.��`c�r�a��c�.��r
c�ra ��c����tr���rcrd �����ic�� r�f ����-�. � ,v rrY ct��i�;�� ��a:ac�h �°c��.��c���reaa� �sr ������c.�����1 u�r�'rs���"dxc4�r��ra� ���r.s� �„ �.� �� ,����a���r�:n�c��°r�'�
�c� ���� �
c•�^�a;�,���}�`c'�
, , � ,�. » . �� � ��
�,'�a����r�ti�Il �;a�����taa�� ����. 4��21�04/����4 �'�a°��°�r��� �� �����e�� Iq����° ��{������ .�,��,µ,��,...mm �.... �W
.� ���a�r ���hi� s�����c� �� �����a��� ���ur���t�t °��c��zlc� �� �a���,F��'�� t�� �he �`���ca�,�F���� ��������:
i�1an E3a:,a�n�,�t, �°it�,r �� �"�������r, �JCi�i�i��
"� � �_' L:�iv��si�ec�, ���,
hrlatch �"�i�;�r�a�cal�, "'�c�iz� � �"ar���
C'i�y �'��r�st�-sacti�� ������e ��a;c;aali�t
Pr�j�c� �"il�,
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES
FILTER DESIGN
�'roject No.: 06-0022-UT
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS &
�
�
SPECIFICATIONS
Prep are d for
� ��'�r�l 1'1�
�
ISSUE FOR BID SPECIFICATIONS
APRIL 2012
�'1 � ''
oRo CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DA���mw)
� o�/ao/aoia
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED A3 A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THfS
CERTiFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, IXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE OOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.
IMPORTANT: If the certiflcate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the
certificate hoider in Ifeu of such endorsemen s.
PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 N�E CT Diaaa Defreeurr
M. 8. Wilaoa Co., Iac. �,F ��Y
300 11. Platt St.
sta aoo
Tampa, FL 33606
INSURED
TLC Diveraified, Iac.
2719 17th Street 8aat
Palmetto, FL 34221
813-229-8021
ddefreeuvrvmeailson.com
A: 1PSSTFIBLD INS CO
a� FCCI ZNS CO
2411Z
10178
COVERAGES CER7IFICATE NUMBER: 28379064 REVISfON NUMBER:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY TF+AT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE �NSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN iS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
x+sR L POLICY EFF no��cr �
L7R IYPE Of INSURANCE pOLICY NUMBER D LiM1TS
A t3ENERALLue�u'rY TRA3972460 04/O1/1 04/O1/13 EpCHOCCURRen�CE S 1,000,000
% COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABiLITY DAMAGE T RENTED $ 15 0, 0 0 0
CWMS-MADE a OCCUR MED FJ� M one n j 10, 000
X Coatractual Liability PERSONALBADVINJURV S 1,000,000
X$500 Piop Dmg Ded GENERALAGGREGATE q 2,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE UMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2. 000 , 000
POLICY g PRO- X �� g
A p�pMpg�� upg��rcy TRA 992 60 � BIN�B SIN LE LIMIT 1, 000, 000
X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY (Per person) S
ALL OWNED SCHEDULED BOp�IY INJURY (Per aadderk) $
AUTOS AUTOS
R HIRED AUTOS 7[ NON-0NMED PROPERTY DAMAGE $
AUTOS P
a
A% uMBRELU►UAB X p�CUR TRA397Z460 04/O1/1 04/01/13 EqCH OCCURRENCE E 5,000,000
EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ 5, 000, 000
DED X RETENTION O $
S WORKERSCOMPENSATION OO1NC12A61661 04/O1/1 04/01/13 7( .� STATU- OTH-
AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
ANY PROPRI£TOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y� N E.l. EACN ACCIDENT S 500 � 000
OFFICEWMEMBER EXCLUDED? � N � A
(Mmd�tory�eMM� E.L.DISEASE-EAEMPLOYE S 500,000
�f s'deea�beunder 500,000
a e
D SCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS bebw E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S
A Inetallation Floater TRA3972460 04/01 1 04/O1/13 Any Oae Site: 1,000,000
Tranait & Storage: Included
DeBuctibles 1,000
DESCR�PTIOII OF OP8RA710M3 / LOCATIONS I VEHIClE3 (Attad� AC�D 101, AddkienN Remarks SeheduN, B more spaoe Is roquirod)
Certificate Holder ia listed as ABditioasl Iasured oa all Coverage.
RS Marahall Street Saleaea Filter Design 06-0022-IIT
TLC Job 120701
City of Clearwater
P.O. Box 4748
Clearwater, lL 33758-4748
IISA
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN
ACCORDANCE YYRH THE POUCY PROVISION8.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATNE
� 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATlON. AI! righta reserved.
ACORD 25 (2010l05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
JI.o 02
28379064
�
�coRd CERTIFICATE C?F �IABILITY INSURANCE oizo��'"'
n�ss c�n�►� �s issu�c �s � warr� oF u�owu►noN a��Y aNa co�ERs No �Hrs u� niE cErri��c.�►i� �� n�s
CERTiFICATE DOES MOT AFFlRN111TIVELY QFt NE<3ATNELY AMEND, EX'TE!!O OR ALTER THE COVERAQE AFf-QRpEQ 81( TME POUqEB
BELOW. T11i8 CERTIFICATE OF INBURANCE DOE8 NOT CON$1TTIJTE A t�ti1'RACT BE7INEEN TNE ISStNNR iNSURER(S�, AUTFKlRIZED
i�PRESENTATiVE OR PROMJCER, ANQ THE CERTIFICATE HQ�DER
(MPORTANT: If th� wrllAc� hohl�r b an A�NAt, f1iSUR�D, ths Poqry{i�sl must b� endo�t�d. M atJBROQATKlN i8 WAFVED, subJ�t 10
tl�s t�rms and oo�itions of tM poYcy. t�naFn polid�s may requiro ��don�t, A sqbnwnt oo this cartlfic�t doss not opnt�r rbtrts M 1M
c�flCeMe t�old�r In N�u of such �ndora�msnN.1_
raootx�e
S. !. 1til�oa Co.. Iaa.
300 N. Fiwtt 8t.
st• aoo
Tqpa, 1rL 33606
YIpJREQ
TLC Diwr�ifiaS, Iac.
2719 17Ch Strs�t tut
Palsstto, PL 34Z21
Diaaa D�lr�wn
�g 813-2Z9-8011
dd.�frs�nrilsoa. aae
M�(�) ARFO�Y�i C�/E
; 11s$TRSLD IlfB CO
. ICCI INS CO
14112
iai�e
vV1/CRAiiCS CER'i1FiC/�7'E NUMBlEj,C �8379064 �$� ��.
THIS iS TO CERTtFY THAT THE POLIC�S OF It�.StNiAMCE IISTED BEL(3YV FfAYE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED A90VE FOR THE PQLIGY PERiOp
ItdDICATED. NC}TINITHSTANOING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITIOW OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCtJ�AENT WtTH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY TME POLICIES DESGR�EO HEREIN IS SUBJ£CT TO ALL THE TERM3,
EXCLUSION8 N�D CONDITIOMS OF SUCH POLICtES. LIMITS StiOWN MAY HAYE BEEN REDUCED BY PAt� CLAbnIS.
1'YP�E aR Yy{1RIYIC! ���
� �� TRI13972460 0�{/01/1 04/01/13 ����E ; 1,000.400
� C.�A�1L {i�RAL UA81LfTY
= 150,000
�DE � OCCUR MEp p4+ p» = 10 , 000
X Contractual Liability p�a�y� ; 1,000,000
a;soo r�y ao.�� a.a s, 000, o00
��� s
C,�f7' AC�ATE t.�NT AP�L�S P�t: pRt1pUCTg - qp+ppp q�t3G i 2. 000. 000
POL1Ct� = z lpC i
�
B
001NC12�61661
04J41/1.� 04/O1/13
04/01/13
o�r�w oF o�u►no� � wcwnoMs i v�p.� (�,p.a� �cam to�, �ssren.� rt...�. a�.aern r aw�..a.o. r wrrns�
C�rtifiasto �lANr is listad u 1►dditioaal Iasusyd oa all Covsrags.
R1R #Nra2►all $trNt Ss2uus fiitar D�ai.qn 06-0022-DT
TLC Job 12Q?01
oE Cl�svatsr
. Sos 4748
!L 33758-474Q
�s�.00� Z3 (201W�0'.�
Z8379064
eoat.v u+tnxtv A'"K P�+) t
80�LY INJl/RY lPor aopp�nq i
f
f
000,000
aoo,000
000,000
0,040
E.I.DISEAbi-EABApI,OYE' = SOq.000
E.LtM$EA�-PULIGYI,N�T : SOO.Q00
aay �t�s 1,000.00
Transit i Storay�: Iac1uQ�G
D�ductibl�s 1,000
IIFIOUL,D /MtY QF TF� I1LSWfE DE3CRIBED POi.IC1EE BE CAtlf:ELLED BEf�
TiIE EXrIRATION DATE Ti�Of, 1�710E YYq.L oE DSLM�D IN
/uCCOr10ANCE NRTN Ti1E PDUCY PROVISIOl18.
�U�01� 1�lBf�AlM:
IISA ( V � �` 4
m 18QA-�010 ACORD CGRPORATION. A� � rwrtrv�d.
'iM I►CORQ n�e and bpa s�ra rpisbncl muks of ACORO
� V
� I�I�:K:IIVI�CREED
'
'
'
'
�
�
To All Bidders,
,,
Subject: Invitation for Bid
Marshail Street Salsnes Filter Design
Ciearwater, FL / Clearwater Project No.: 06-0022-UT
ENGINEERS
SURVEYORS
PLANNERS
Addendum No. 2 May 22, 2012
The following items are issued to modify and clarify the bid and contract documents.
These items shall have the same force and effects as the original bidding and contract
documents, and costs involved shall be included in the bid prices. Bids to be submitted
on the specified bid date shall conform to the additions and revisions listed herein.
PART 1— PERTAINING TO THE SPECIFICATIONS
1. SECTION 01630 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: Add the following:
1 5. Bid Item No. 5: Sludge Removal from Primary Clarifiers
a. The Per Cubic Yard Bid Price Payment shall be full compensation for
1 furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the removing,
dewatering, hauling and disposing of the solids remaining in the existing
primary clarifiers.
, 2. SECTION 01630 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (1.7)(C)(5): Revise Bid Item
No. 5 to the following:
, 6. Bid Item No. 6: Owner's Contingency
3. SECTION 01630 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (1.7)(C)(5)(b)(1): Revise to
' read'`The subtotal of Bid Items 1 through 4 rounded up to the nearest cent.
PART 11— CLARIFICATIONS TO BIDDER QUESTIONS
1 1. Question: Also Question 2 of the clarification section states that the plant flow is a
minimum of 25 MGD? What does this mean? What is the maximum?
'
�
'
3802 Ehrlich Rd, Ste 306
' Tampa. Florida 33624
813.549.3740
' FGx 813.549.3744
www.mckimcreed.com
�
Response: 25.0 MGD firm pumping capacity with a redundant pump is the minimum
bypass pumping that must be provided for this project by the Contractor. There is
no maximum.
Sincerely,
McKIM & CREED, Inc.
,.
. �r
Matthew S. Love, P.E.
Project Manager
P�ge t o! I
n4C�: G492-0205
'
�
�
�
�
�
r
L
lJ
1__J
�
'
'
'
1�
'
�
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
PROJECT NO.: 06-0022-UT
BID TAB
BID ITEMS UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL
1 Mobilization/Demobilization LS 1 $ $
2 Demolition LS 1 $ $
3 Marshall Street Improvements
A Civil / Site (yard piping, backfill, LS 1 $ $
grading, sidewalk, sodding, etc.)
B Mechanical (pumps, above grade LS 1 $ $
piping, appurtenances, etc.)
C Structural (Concrete, pads, slabs, LS 1 $ $
catwalks, grating, handrail etc.)
p Electrical (Power supply, panels, LS 1 $ $
modifications, etc.)
E Instrumentation & Controls (Panels, LS 1 $ $
equipment, modifications, etc.)
4 Paving, Grading and Drainage LS 1 $ $
5 Sludge Removal from Primary Clarifiers CY 500* $ $
6a Salsnes Filters (Equipment only) - ODP EA 2
6b Salsnes Filters Sales Tax EA 2
6c Salsnes Filters LS 1
7a Magnetic Flow Meters - ODP ITEM EA 2
7b Magnetic Flow Meters Sales Tax EA 2
7c Magnetic Flow Meters LS 1
SUBTOTAL (ITEMS 1 - 5) $ $
8 Owners Contingency LS 1 $ $
TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COST (ITEMS 1 THRU 6) $ $
" Quantity is the EngineePs estimate of sludge remaining in the primary clarifiers based on 25% of the total volume.
,
'
'
�
vI M�I<IlVI�CREED
To All Bidders,
Subject: Invitation for Bid
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
Clearwater, FL / Clearwater Project No.: 06-0022-UT
ENGINEERS
SURVEYORS
PLANNERS
' Addendum No. 3 May 23, 2012
The following items are issued to modify and clarify the bid and contract documents.
' These items shall have the same force and effects as the original bidding and contract
documents, and costs involved shall be included in the bid prices. Bids to be submitted
on the specified bid date shall conform to the additions and revisions listed herein.
�
'
�
'
I�
�
CI
'
�
'
' 3802 Ehrlich Rd, Ste 306
Tampa, Florida 33624
813.549.3740
� Fax 813.549.3744
www.mckimcreed.com
'
PART I— PERTAINING TO THE SPECIFICATIONS
1. SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Replace Section V with attached.
2. SECTION 01630 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (1.7)(C)(5): Revise Bid Item
No. 5 to the following:
8. Bid Item No. 8: Owner's Contingency
Please note that this addenda supercedes Addenda #2.
Sincerely,
McKIM 8� CREED, Inc.
`.
`�J� ���{
x_-=
�,,,
Matthew S. Love, P.E.
Project Manager
Page 1 of 1
MC#: 0992-0205
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRACTBOND .....................................................................................................................1
CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6
PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 7
AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 8
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9
PROPOSAL.................................................................................................................................10
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET .................................................................13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL .............................................................................................................14
� 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page i 2/8/2012
�
'
lI
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
�
BOND NUMBER:
CONTRACT BOND
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we
Contractor and
(Surety) whose home address is
as
HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of:
Dollars ($ )
for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of
, 20_, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for:
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
PROJECT #: 06-0022-UT
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement far Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 1 of 15 2/8/2012
'
'
�
'
�
l _J
'
u
u
�
'
CONTRACT BOND
�2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be
recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by
reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or
servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done;
as aforesaid, or otherwise.
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms
of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this
day of , 20_
,
ATTEST:
'
,
WITNESS:
'
�
'
'
COUNTERSIGNED:
� 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 2 of 15
CONTRACTOR
:
SURETY
:
ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
2/8/2012
�
,
CONTRACT
' This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of , 20_ by and between
the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and
, of the City of County of
' and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor".
'
,
C
��
,
'
'
'
WITNESSETH:
That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements
on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows:
The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the
sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at
their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the
following:
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN(06-0022-UT)
in the amount of $
In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special
provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any
advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto
attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this
contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors
and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the
City.
If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations
as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the
Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf
and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in
accordance with the provisions as contained herein.
THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY
' AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE
BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES
' ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF
THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES
TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR
' DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY
CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE
CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS
' OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED
CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES.
'
' 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 3 of 15 2/8/2012
'
,
CONTRACT
�2)
' In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
1 In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision sha11 include, but not be limited to, the following:
' employrnent, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitrnent or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
, or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
�
�
,
�
�
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in a11 contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 ner dav for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per
d� shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the
Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to
be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor
to complete and perform a11 work within the time period as specified in this contract.
' It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
t sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
' bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payrnent shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
' performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
'
11
'
' 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 4 of 15 2/8/2012
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By:
William B. Horne, II
City Manager
Countersigned:
By:
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor-Councilmember
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
Page 5 of 15
(Seal)
Attest:
Rosemarie Call
City Clerk
Approved as to form:
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Attorney
(Contractor)
By: (SEAL�
2isi2oi2
CI'�
'
'
'
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
(CORPORATION FORNn
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE)
' of , a Florida Corporation, with its principal place
of business located at (herein, the "Contractor").
' That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
, 20 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as
Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
' MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN(06-0022-UT)
'
l�
,
t
'
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged a11 sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
That he is making this �davit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this �davit sha11 mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Staiutes.
Sworn and subscribed to before me
' This day of , 20
,
NOTARY PUBLIC
'
My Commission Expires:
'
�
:
I:\�I�i���ll
PRESIDENT
' 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 6 of 15 2/8/2012
,
�
L�
'
'
l_ l
�
'
'
'
'
�
PROPOSAL BOND
(Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted)
KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
as Principal, and _
as Surety, who's address is _
That we, the undersigned,
are held and firmly bound unto
the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of
Dollars ($ )(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of
which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns.
The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of
as Principal, and
Surety, for work specified as:
as
all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and
specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the
above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a
contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved
by the City Manager, this obligation sha11 be void, otherwise the same sha11 be in full force and virtue
by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated
damages.
Signed this day of , 20
(Principal must indicate whether
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
t
The person signing shall, in his own
' handwriting, sign the Principal's
name, his own name and his title;
the person signing for a corporation
' must, by affidavit, show his authority
to bind the corporation.
LJ
'
'
Principal
By:
Title
Surety
' 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 7 of 15 2/8/2012
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF )
being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
Secretary of
a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
Street & Number City County State
Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
Affiant further says that
(Name of Corporation)
is
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for
for said corporation by virtue of
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of
Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption).
Sworn to before me this day of , 20
Affiant
Notary Public
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 8 of 15 2/8/2012
,
1
'
,
,
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF )
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
of ,
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
' said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or
indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from
, bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
' advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed
contract; and that a11 statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder
has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data
, relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
'
�
,
Sworn to and subscribed before me this
,
,
'
�
l_
�
day of
� 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 9 of 15
Affiant
�
Notary Public
2isi2oi2
[j
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
'
�
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing sha11 be considered a binding contract
without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is
hereby charged with this notice.
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representa.tive has made such
investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and
agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form
of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or
apparatus, do a11 the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General
Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 10 of 15 2/8/2012
,
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
t
PROPOSAL
�2)
If the foregoing Proposal sha11 be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
sha11 be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, sha11 be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond sha11 be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, sha11 be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on
Bank, for the sum of
i$
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's
improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman,
agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES:
'
'
'
'
,
'
'
ADDRESSES:
Signature of Bidder:
(The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual).
' 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 11 of 15 2/8/2012
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing sha11, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal:
By:
Business Address of Bidder:
City and State:
Dated at
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
this
Title:
day of
Page 12 of 15
Zip Code
A.D., 20
2/8/2012
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUMSHEET
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
(Name of Bidder)
(Signaiure of Officer)
(Title of Officer)
(Date)
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 13 of 15 2/8/2012
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
CONTRACTOR:
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL $
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL
(Numbers)
(Wards)
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS i1NIT
PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR
EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF
OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER,
IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL
GOVERN.
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
PROJECT NO.: 06-0022-UT
BID TAB
BID ITEMS UNIT QTY UNIT RRICE TOTAL
1 Mobilization/Demobilization LS 1 $ $
2 Demolition LS 1 $ $
3 Marshall Street Improvements
3a. Civil / Site (yard, piping, backfill, LS 1 $ $
grading, sidewalk, sodding, etc.)
Mechanical (pumps, above grade
3b. LS 1 $ $
piping, appurtenances, etc.
3c. Structural (Concrete, pads, slabs, LS 1 $ $
cafinralks, grating, handrail, etc.)
3d. Electrical (Power supply, panels, LS 1 $ $
modifications, etc.)
Instrumentation & Controls
3e. (Panels, equipment, modifications, LS 1 $ $
etc.)
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 14 of 15 2/8/2012
�
�
1
'
C�
C�I�
'
II
'
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
'
�
4 Paving, Grading and Drainage LS 1 $ $
5 Sludge Removal from Clarifiers CY 500* $ $
Salsnes Filters Package
6a �Equipment Only) - ODP EA 2 $ $
6b Salsnes Filters Sales Tax EA 2 $ $
6c Salsnes Filters LS 1 $ $
7a Magnetic Flow Meters — ODP EA 4 $ $
ITEM
7b Magnetic Flow Meters Sales Tax EA 4 $ $
7c Magnetic Flow Meters LS 1 $ $
SUBTOTAL (ITEMS 1-7c) $ $
8 Owners Contingency LS 1 $ $
TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COST (ITEMS 1 THRU 8) $ $
Fcauanuty is tne engineers esUmate of siudge remaining in the pnmary clarifiers based on 25°/a of the total volume.
, 020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 15 of 15 2/8/2012
L�
'
'
'
'
L'�
�
�
�
�
'
t
'
�
L_ J
�
�
v� M�KIMf�CREED
To All Bidders,
Subject: Invitation for Bid
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
Clearwater, FL / Clearwater Project No.: 06-0022-UT
Addendum No. 1
ENGINEERS
SURVEYORS
PLANNERS
May 21, 2012
The following items are issued to modify and clarify the bid and contract documents.
These items shall have the same force and effects as the original bidding and contract
documents, and costs involved shall be included in the bid prices. Bids to be submitted
on the specified bid date shall conform to the additions and revisions listed herein.
PART I- PERTAINING TO THE SPECIFICATIONS
1. Scope of Work - Section IV has been revised to reflect a listing of Owner Direct
Purchase items (see attached). Contractor shall reference Section II, paragraph
16.4, Section III article 16 and the forms in the Appendix.
2. Section 11175, 1.1.6, PRETREATMENT FILTER SYSTEM, change the following
filter system parameters:
TSS removal value is 40% to 70%
BOD removal value is 20% to 35%
3. Section 11175, 2.7.A, PRETREATMENT FILTER SYSTEM, add the following:
The filter system manufacturer shall be responsible for providing an industrial grade
water softening unit. Water supply piping shall be adjusted as needed.
PART II - CLARIFICATIONS TO BIDDER QUESTIONS
1. Question: Would you be able to provide us with the Mandatory Pre-Bid attendees
list?
Response: Pre-bid Sign In sheet is attached.
2. Question: Item 10, Phase 2, what is the max flow that needs to be bypassed?
Response: The Contractor must provide enough bypass pumping to handle all
influent plant flow, a minimum of 25.0 MGD.
3. Question: Item 9, Phase 1 and item 14, Phase 2, how long can the RAS be down to
do the finro relocations?
3802 Ehrlich Rd, Ste 306 Response: Sludge return (RAS) to the first anoxic reactors can be offline no greater
than four hours at any one time and should occur at times of off peak influent flow
Tampa, Florida 33624 into the facility. All interruptions in RAS flow must be coordinated with plant staff in
813.549.3740 advance to allow for proper process alterations.
' Fax 813.549.3744
www.mckimcreed.com
�
Page 1 of 3
MC#: 0992-0205
'
',
4. Question: 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS & JOINTS — The last sentence calls for fittings and
, accessories to be domestic (USA) manufactured. Nowhere else do I see the need
for materials to be domestic (USA) manufactured. Is it the intent to have only these
items (fittings & accessories) to be domestic (USA) manufactured?
'
'
�
Response: Equipment and materials provided under this contract sh<all be per the
Contract Documents.
5. It is indicated on the drawings to support the cable tray and a few conduits routed
along the primary clarifier outside wall. However, are there any other conduits and
cables that currently travel through the area to be demolished that will have to be
re-routed that are not associated directly with equipment to be removed on this
project?
Response: Conduits and circuits serving existing lighting, receptacle circuits, etc.
, shall remain and be reconnected during constn.iction. Most of the existing conduit
at the existing primary clarifiers will be removed along with the existing primary
clarifier equipment. Plant retrofit projects in general have uncertainty as to the
' exact nature of all conduits, circuits, cables, pipes, etc. The Contractor will be
responsible for identifying unknown conduits and cables and to coordinate with the
Owner as to their final disposition.
C
�
'
�
,
�
'
6. Sheet E06 (upper right) indicates "existing terminal box to be replace�d". Is this to
be included in this project and in our bid? If so, please provide the details on the
new enclosure and back plate.
Response: Provide 20"H x 20"W x 8" deep stainless steel NEMA 4X terminal box
with Aluminum Subpanel. Provide barrier terminal strips to reconnect wires.
Contractor shall field measure existing terminal box and match.
7. Question: Please clarify the connectivity of the 6" sludge line that runs under the
proposed sludge box.
Response: Please reference Yard Piping Plan on Sheet C-05 and Section C/C-07
on Sheet C-08. The 6" scum line connects to an existing 6" scum line at STA 0+11,
41' LT, runs underground bearing southwest until reaching a 45° bend at STA 0+43,
11' LT, bears west underneath the proposed metering assembly, passes
underneath the sludge well in concrete encasement, connects to a tee at STA 0+43,
40' RT, and the combined 6" scum and sludge proceeds west until connecting to the
existing primary sludge line at STA 0+41, 82' RT.
8. Question: Please clarify the concrete encasement requirements for underground
piping.
Response: All pressure pipes buried directly beneath load bearing structures shall
' be concrete encased a minimum of 2' beyond that load bearing structure. This
includes the 6" scum line when beneath the sludge well and the 8" WAS line
beneath both the mixing chamber and the future Salsnes Filter #3.
�
'
9. Question: The Specifications for Nuts & Bolts reads: K. Bolts and nuts on flanged
fittings shall be Grade B, ASTM A-307, cadmium plated and conform to ANSI 616.1
Page 2 of 3 �
' `v M�IQM�CREED
�
' .
for Class 125. We see less and less of the Cadmium plated bolts. This is a result
' of the EPA classification of this material (Hazardous). WII you please verify if
Cadmium is needed or if optional material should be provided?
Response: Materials provided shall be per the Contract Documents. Alternates will
' be considered after the award of bid.
10. Question: We request that Milliken Plug Valves be listed as an approved equal in
' Specification 15100-5(2.13).
Response: Approved equals will be considered after the award of the bid.
' Sincerely,
McKIM 8� CREED, Inc.
' f . �{
/ ''
' Matthew S. Love, P. E.
Project Manager
�
�
l__.,
�
�
'
'
'
'
�
Page 3 of 3 �
' v� M�I�IMM�CREED
'
�
u
l,'�
,
,
�
�
CII
'
u
�
,
,
Ll
'
,
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SCOPE OF WORK
SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
Project Number: 06-0022-UT
Scope of Work:
The work for which proposals are invited consists of, but is not limited to, the following:
demolition of existing primary clarifiers, equipment, electrical and incidentals; temporary
supports, power, coffer dams and bypass pumping to maintain the facility in complete and full
operation; installation of two (2) Salsnes Filters, a filter feed pump, relocated sludge pumps,
piping, appurtenance, electrical and instrumentation; construction of the concrete pads, concrete
structures, site work, utility relocations associated with the design, and all other work necessary
for a complete and operational pretreatment system; installation of 24" RAS metering assembly,
piping, fittings supports, concrete pads and ancillaries as necessary for a complete and
operational RAS system; and integration of new filters into plant PLC/SCADA system that will
include modifications and/or expansion of existing PLC equipment, equipment interconnections
and connection routing and Record Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide 1{Fixed/Portable} project signs as described in SECTION III,
ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents.
List ODP Items to be included in the Contract Document.
Salsnes Filters — Complete Package
Magnetic Flow Meters
CONTRACT PERIOD: 210 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS
SectionIV.doc Page I of 128 5/18/2012
Sign-in Sheet
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES PROJECT 06-0022-UT
TOM ROBERTSON, PROJECT MANAGER
100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130
_ FRIDAY, MAY 11, 2012 -1:00 PM
Signature Organizatian Phone E-Mail Address
%i;t�1. 1 � �.. l ��/ �6Z"� y�j��� tAlr'�'b�'r4'lA�t �'rrtyt%i►�l+�lt
• Ct11r�'f
�1 � � `' f� � `` � 4. . � ��� � ,
f �
t 1t��� � �� ` �' ���`'Y� � vE'�.::.t"`C�,,r,�_l���1 C�;;r,
V�l ttCc t t-�: �����c �i_ k�.c k-�� � C' ��=� '`� 72�-4�1 2-71 `t�. w�'w��t�t,� �(a., w�e�c. �� c.�.
%lrn . If:4 c' �r�
� n
% � �� �,' i.�' .S 7z � �/� j � �_ /' l �# �l,; k�'` S , z,�, ;� ;,u�-r>,�,.�F:ti� , c �
A-L-�� Z�"i'�`�..�....--- �3� .��a s,-� �-nd 8 r3 —783 -91 � `�`@�- -�r�r-�i.--
1�Td c�•JST�os�•-"� • G,.1
r.�b ct�'. �`+-�t Q �r +C,..
1�p � i 2T �/'�'!•i �"j G. � 7`'� T t�t S6 Z� �( 60'� rl' f�. I e srw +tet .�.aati
._ ,� .
,._ ; � -�
.. . � „r . - , . `i
� ,�� � _ . �.. . � � . _ , .. f �_ :� - . _ , f � � _. .. . ,,
� _ . .,. .. ,..''ro.+• •i`y�' �
' . -.. . t `p � . , . � . � , � . .
/�r.L: ��c�•v �c • r►rt,,rR C��frrsclC. rcn�,
7 ar3) ts/ - x43�
,rv�c,c .�,✓c,� �-- c�= ru,e,�,�..__ •��� • � h•-.,o� • c.�.�,
'� �, �" t �
� s.� ..�'� .r , r-r� «� , z t
,� r.---_-"' iy,;
. r�, z « t ! `` �.`: . -
�>%/� - .... ' {� ��•t' a-f��t- �_C's; i�- �;e",�r =-�� �i� }`. t_i+rt,.
� �,� f%. �..�
��� �v�
a.�"i� �'!�`Z6 G�''�S `'�5`� "�3�. � uc.� � c..aNzo • G R.�
_ t", . �,.. , , - , .. . . � _ . .
�"�� � _ � m �, j �„ � - � � �
�. "f " j _w � .._ .
!
Page 1 Pre-bid Conf Sign-in sheet.xls
LJ
'
'
�
'
�_ �
1
�
�
'
1
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
'
Sign-in Sheet
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES PROJECT 06-0022-UT
TOM ROBERTSON, PROJECT MANAGER
100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE, CONFERENCE ROOM #130
FRIDAY, MAY 11, 2012 -1:00 PM
5ignature Organization Phone E-Mail Address
4�l- ���.� rht��-�N
fY114�1� �C. +��`-1� �'� C.... t���..I ?����G�� r 1��t� c.o�
��q,v Y,t,,vct� /�.r,s ��� �� 3- yS �ii¢ v,a.vcF_ �.
r �,,�ro r�r�' 7'��' p 7 ,o,�-a-��.� �-lo�.vn� �-
� .
�C��t�'M���� Pt-.�.�s �s� �ARR�,t1~cK�`t ta
�-.Ai{ZY �i t C K.�. `1 �c��.i� �c � � 0�5 .� � 7 - t�S�`f e1��-� `�'w��'�'r-t�.��s�Hc .<o
s �'N€:
Page 2 Pre-bfd Conf Sign-m sheet.xls
City of Clearwater, Florida
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
SECTION I
SECTION II
SECTION II
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ��F rr�EDED>
SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION IIIa SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS ��F rrEEDED�
SECTION IV
SECTION IVa
APPENDIX
SECTION V
Cover.doc
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT
DOCUMENTATION �iF NEE�E�>
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer
Page II
May 20ll
�
�
�
'�
�
�
�
�
��
�
ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN # 06-0022-UT
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or
purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address:
www.mvClearwater.com/citYprojects, ON MONDAY, APRIL 23, 2012, until no later than close
of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as
indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only.
The work for which proposals are invited consists of demolition of existing primary clarifiers,
equipment, electrical and incidentals. The work includes temporary supports, power, coffer
dams and bypass pumping to maintain the facility in complete and full operation. Installation of
two (2) Salsnes Filters, filter feed pump, relocated sludge pumps, piping, appurtenance and
electrical and instrumentation. The work also includes construction of the concrete pads,
concrete structures, sitework, utility relocations associated with the design, and all other work
necessary for a complete and operational system. installation of 24" RAS metering assembly,
piping, fittings supports, concrete pads and ancillaries as necessary for a complete and
operational system. Integration of new filters into plant PLGSCADA system; modification
and/or expansion of existing PLC/SCADA equipment, equipment interconnections and
connection routing; and Record Drawings.
A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on FRIDAY,
MAY 11, 2012 AT 1:00 P.M. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be
present to discuss this Project.
Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located
at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3�d Fioor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520,
until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, MAY 24, 2012, and publicly opened and read at that hour and
place for MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN 06-0022-UT.
A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits
and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers,
vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from
those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction
category of WASTEWATER/WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES with a minimum pre-
qualification amount of $2,000,000.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10)
workdays prior to the bid opening date.
A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects.
T'he right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids.
� The City of Clearwater, Florida
Purchasing Manager
(727) 562-4633
�Times ad.docx
,
�
Page 1 of 1
8/27/2008
�
�
J
SECTION II
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Table of Contents:
� SECTION II ................................................................................................................................... i
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1
� 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. I
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1
� 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2
5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3
� 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3
7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3
� 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3
9 SUBCONTRACTORS ......................................................................................................3
10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4
� 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5
', 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5
� 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5
16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5
� 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7
19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 9
� 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENTMEASURES ....................................................................................... 9
� 040312SectionlI.doc i 2/9/2012
�
�
�
L
1_ J
�
�
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
].1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan
Room — website address: www.myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract
Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only,
which is non-refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications,
bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is avaitable oniy to pre-qualified
bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a
possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a"Subcontractor"
package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items.
1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor
the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others.
13 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so
only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant
any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose.
2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction ofthe
City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial
resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining
drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre-
qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering
Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); ] 00 South
Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727)
562-4750. Pre-Qualification reyuirements information is also available on City of
Ctearwater Website at address:
www.myclearwater.com/ ov/depts/pwa/engin/Construction/prequal.as�.
Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so
two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre-qualified by
the City do not have to make reapplication.
3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract
Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in
any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and
abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and
(d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and
notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.
3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification
of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have
been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely
upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical
data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the
purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical
040312Sectionll.doc
Page 1 of 9
2/9/2012
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities)
which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in
preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical
data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of
bidding or construction.
3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not
assume responsibility far the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in
the Contract Documents.
3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective
Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions,
possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing
conditions appear in the General Conditions.
3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any
additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any
additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface
and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost,
progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such
explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for
submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former
condition upon completion of such explorations and tests.
3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access
thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are
identified in the Contract Documents. AlI additional lands and access thereto required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and eyuipment are to be provided by
the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing
structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents.
3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the
Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that,
without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required
by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures
of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding
of alt terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work.
4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the
Engineer. lnterpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response
to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded
by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions
received after the time frame specified at the pre-bid meeting prior to the date for opening of
040312SectionII.doc
Page 2 of 9
2/9/2012 �
�
�
�
�
Section 11— lnstructions to Bidders
Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be
binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect.
Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the
City or Engineer.
BID SECURITY OR BID BOND
S.l Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in
an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of
a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting
the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted.
5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed
the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the
Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the
Ageement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract
by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be
forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable
chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of
the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid
opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after
the Bid opening.
The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favar of the City of Clearwater by a surety company
qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida.
CONTRACT TIME
The number of consecutive calendar days within which the wark is to be completed is set
forth in the Technical Specifications.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement.
SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the
Drawings ar specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or
"or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications
that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance
will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract
Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General
Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications.
9 SUBCONTRACTORS
9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so
requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer
an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence
of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the
040312SectionII.doc
Page 3 of 9
2/9/2012
9.2
10
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If
the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award
of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable
substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder
declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest
and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and
other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not
constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any
Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom
the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the
City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance
after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions.
No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or
organization against whom he has reasonable objection.
BID/PROPOSAL FORM
] 0.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in
ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices
shall be to no more than two decimal points in doltars and cents. The Bidder must state in
the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures,
the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents.
Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each
section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labar for completing the
section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities
or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or
should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for
each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid
for the listed individual items.
10.�' Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-
president (ar other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the
corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be
shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or
partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind
the corporation or partnership.
103 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general
partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the
partnership shall be shown below the signature.
]0:�
11
All names shall be typed or printed below the signature.
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the
Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the
project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall
be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and
040312SectionlI.doc Page 4 of 9 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
Section Il — Instructions to Bidders
addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at
the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or
facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted.
12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the
manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of
Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person
duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to
submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for
receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified.
12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid far
typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a
typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the
requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction
is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or
modify any bid.
13 REJECTION OF BIDS
131 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City
reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds
for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized
alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or
irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City
believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that
Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful
financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the
City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in
the interest of the public.
14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER
14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists
among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future
proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit
contained in the Contract Documents.
15 OPENING OF BIDS
I S.l
16
Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement
for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids.
LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES
16.1 The Contractar shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees} except as
specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply
with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which
in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees
040312SectionII.doc Page 5 of 9 2/9/2012
Section 11— lnstructions to Bidders
and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical
Specifications.
16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any
construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically
stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be
stated by the Contractor.
l63 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law.
The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales
tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements.
16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the
WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase
(ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical
Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions.
17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE
l 7.l In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor
Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders
with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with
respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of
commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has
implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process.
Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied
bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace
program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six
statements and the accompanying certification statement:
(1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution,
dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and
specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such
prohibition.
(2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy
of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and
employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees far
drug abuse violations.
(3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that
are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
(4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of
working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will
abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or
plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled
substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the
workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
(5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance
or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee
who is so convicted.
040312SectionII.doc Page 6 of 9 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
Section II — Instructions to Bidders
(6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above
requirements.
18 AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words.
Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in
favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of
figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.
18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or
not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may
be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and
experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by
the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems
necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility,
qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and
other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time.
l 8.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive
Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the
best interest of the City.
l 8.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items
in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will
be awarded to only one Contractar.
19 BID PROTEST
19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the
solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with
the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accardance with
protest procedures set forth in this section.
19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE:
A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for
proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the
opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved
person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts
giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals.
Opening dates for bids or due dates for reyuests for proposal will be printed on the
bid/request document itself.
B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of
five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each
bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders
upon telephonic or written reyuest. Protests of recommended award should cite
� 040312SectionlI.doc
�
Page 7 of 9
Z/9/2012
Section ll— Inswctions to Bidders
specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly
been violated.
C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be
granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have
knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of
intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should
be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception.
D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5)
work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response wi11 be fully coordinated
with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager.
E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager,
he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that
response his/her reason far dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original
formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City
Manager.
F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the
matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10)
work days of receipt of the appeal.
193 PROTEST FEE:
When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5%
of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the
protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. lf either the Purchasing
Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund l 00% of the fee paid.
19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the
Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until a}1
administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written
determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best
interest of the City.
040312Sectionll.doc
Page 8 of 9
i
�
��
�
��
�
,
�
�
2/9/2012 '�
���I
L__J
l
i
�
�
Section 11— Instructions to Bidders
20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT
20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance
related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety
Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s
1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws.
� 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
MANAGEMENT MEASURES
�l
21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit
and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater
management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively
reduce or prevent the discharge of pollatants into receiving waters.
A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining
water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control
practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment
loadings to surface waters.
B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and
sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion
and sediment control provisions.
NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater En�ineering
Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best
Management Practices.
References EPA website
1 040312Sectionll.doc
�
Page 9 of 9
2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SECTION III
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents:
1 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1
2
2.1
2.2
23
2.4
2.5
2.6
PRELIMINARYMATTERS ........................................................................................... 5
DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5
COPIESOF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 5
COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOT]CE TO PROCEED; STARTING
THEPROJECT ................................................................................................................ 5
BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................... 5
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6
PROGRESSMEETINGS ................................................................................................ 6
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7
3.l INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7
4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;
REFERENCEPOINTS .................................................................................................... 8
4.l AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 8
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 8
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .................................................................................................... 9
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 9
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 9
5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 9
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE ......................................................... 10
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10
5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11
53 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. l2
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. l2
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 14
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14
6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 15
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS ...................................................................... .............................. I S
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS .............................................�--................................ I S
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 16
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16
6.8 PERMITS ............................•------.....-•----•--...-�---.............------...........................................16
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17
6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................18
6.11 DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................18
SectionIII.doc i 4/11 /2011
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 18
6.11.2 AS-BUILTDRAWINGS ............................................................................................19
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ................................................................................................... 21
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :....................................................................................................23
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 23
6.l 3 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION .......................................... 24
�
7. l
7.2
8
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
10
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
12
13
14
13.1
132
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
l 4.5
14.6
14.7
l 4.8
OTHERWORK .............................................................................................................. 24
RELATEDWORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 24
COORDINATION......................................................................................................... 25
OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 25
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25
OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ................................................................................... 25
CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25
REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 26
SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 26
DECISIONSON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 26
LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............. 27
CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 27
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 28
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 28
ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 30
UNIT PRICE WORK ...................................................•----�---------------- - - �n
CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE
OFDEFECTIVE WORK .............................................................................................. 31
TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 31
UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 32
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................... 32
CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ......................................... 33
WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 33
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 33
OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 34
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34
APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 34
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 35
REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 35
PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 36
FINALINSPECTION ................................................................................................... 36
FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 37
FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 37
WAIVEROF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 38
SectionllI.doc
4/ll/2011
�
�
�
�
r
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
�
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 38
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 38
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38
] 5.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 39
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................. 40
17 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................... 40
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40
17.2 GIVING NOTICE .......................................................................................................... 40
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..................................................................................................... 40
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ..................................... 4l
17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 41
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................................... 4l
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS ................................................. 41
18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK .............................................................. 41
19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ....................................................... 41
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION .......................... 42
22.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 42
22.2 EXAMPLE .........................................:...................................•---•--.........--------................42
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 43
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................... 43
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 43
23.3 FIXED SIGN ................................................................................................................. 43
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ...................................................................................................... 44
23.5 SIGN COLORING ......................................................................................................... 44
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ..................................................................................................... 44
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 44
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT S1GN .......................................................................................... 45
24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 45
SectionDl.doc iii 4/11 /2011
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
'
u
Section ]II — General Condi[ions
1 DEFINITIONS
Addenda
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct
or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents.
Agent
Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the
City.
Agreement
The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed;
other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment
The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress
or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Contract Documents.
Approve
The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or
methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given
in the Contract Documents. lt does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer
to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications.
Bid
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the work to be performed.
Bidding Documents
The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the
proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids).
Bonds
Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order
A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time issued on ar after the effective date of the Agreement.
Clly
The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida.
Construction Inspector
A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects
City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the
intent of the Contract Documents.
Construction Manager
The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The
Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction
contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the
Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding
SectionIII.doc Page 1 of 46 4/I1/20l 1
Section lll — General Conditions
contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the
Owner's Representative during construction.
Contract Documents
The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid
(including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the
Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any
Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits
identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of
the Agreement.
Contract Price
The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work.
Contract Time
The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
Contractor
The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of
this contract, the person, firm or corparation with whom this contract or agreement has
been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative.
Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM
A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate
to one another for the purpose of identifying the most e�cient way to perform the work
in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution
of the schedule.
A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defect ive
An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the
requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the
Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final
payment.
Drawings
The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement,
which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been
prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop
drawings are not Drawings as so defined.
Engineer
The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the
purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County,
Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as
the Owner's Representative during construction.
Engineer's Consultant
A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent
Sectionlll.doc
Page 2 of 46
4/11 /201 l
�
�
�
�
�
�
I�
�'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
Section 111— General Conditions
professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as
such in the Supplementary Conditions.
F.D.O.T Specifications
The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida
Department of Transportation (latest English edition).
Furnish
The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar
meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and
install complete in place and ready for service".
Inspection
The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to
ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and
Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or
overseeing.
Laws and Regulations
Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind
of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction.
Liens
Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal
property.
Milestone
� A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate
completion date or time prior to the final completion date.
�
�
�
C�
Notice to Proceed (NTP)
A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the
Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his
obligations under the Contract Documents.
Owner
The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the
City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be
responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed.
For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative
during construction.
Owner's Representative
Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction.
Person
Project
A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial
entity.
The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents
may be the whole ar a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
� SectionlII.doc
�
Page 3 of 46
4/ll /20ll
Section 111 — General Conditions
Partial Utilization
Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is
intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work.
Representative of Contractor
The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the
construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these
persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction
conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City
Engineer.
Request for Information (RFI)
An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from
the Contractor to the Engineer.
Shop Drawing
All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other
information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
Specifications
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the
Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor
A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion
The Work (or a specified part thereo� which has progressed to the point where, in the
opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so
that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended;
or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment
as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the
Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions
The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions.
Suppl ier
A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct
contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or eyuipment to
be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor.
Surety
Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be
responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid,
Performance or Payment Bond.
SectionlII.doc
Page 4 of 46
i
�
�
�
�J
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
L__I
u
4/11/2011 �
�
�
�
Section llI — General Conditions
Underground Facilities
All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such
facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity,
gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable
television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or
water.
Unit Price Work
Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work
� The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result
of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the
� construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive
1 A written directive to Contractar, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement
and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or
responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be
� performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or
Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or
documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued
� Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract
Price or Contract Times.
, 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS
,
�
�
�
2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to
the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be reyuired to furnish by
this contract.
2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction.
2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED;
STARTING THE PROJECT
The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor
� shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall
be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run.
�
'
�
2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
SectionllI.doc Page 5 of 46 4/11/2011
Section III — General Conditions
field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or
discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or
clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however,
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy
in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should
reasonably have known thereof.
No verbal agreement ar conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or
Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify
any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any
time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this
insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's
Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor,
Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the
parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures.
Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the
Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction
conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction
Manager.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a
color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a seyuence of events
including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this
conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also
bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is
complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log.
The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a
completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a
project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of
construction stakeout and as-built survey.
The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractar at the preconstruction conference a
Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for
reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification.
2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a
weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall
bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a
look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting,
and all material test reports generated in the same time period.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
r
;�
LJ
�
�
�
Sectionlll.doc Page 6 of46 4!I 1/20t 1 �
�
CJ
��
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
U
Section I II — General Conditions
3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT
3.1 INTENT
The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor
concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents
are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereo� to be
constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment
which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or
from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and
performed whether or not specifically called for. When words ar phrases, which have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials
or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority,
whether such reference be specific ar by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification,
manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be
otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any
referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by
reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractar as set forth in the Contract Documents,
shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's
Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's
Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in
these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and
enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such
provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the
Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion.
3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES
If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or
discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any
such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor
shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed
with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to
Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General
Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's
Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless
Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof.
SectionIll.doc Page 7 of46 4/11/201]
4
Section ll] — General Conditions
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands
which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or
restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with
which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent
structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS
Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for
identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical
conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress ar performance of the Work which
have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such
reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any
subsurface ar latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially
from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review
those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer
shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer
and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there
are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the
contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a
work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions.
4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing
Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to
Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise
expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for
the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following
will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i)
reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities
shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coardination of the Wark with the owners of
such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such
Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The
Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER
prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a
member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any
excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the
protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in
local telephone directory.
SectionIII.doc Page 8 of 46 4/11/2011
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
l _�
'
I�
�
�1
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
_�
�1
�
�
r��
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
Section III — General Conditions
4.4 REFERENCE POINTS
Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which
in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor
shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference
points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner
and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or
destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor
licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for
more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew
is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of
Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the
Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual
time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge
of one hour.
5 BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND
Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the
Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's
obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after
the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws
and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as
are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed hy the
Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of
"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff,
Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an
agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall
be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such
language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified
to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety
on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to
do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet
the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice
thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner.
5.2 INSURANCE
Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the
Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below
which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and
Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or
furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability
benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily
SectionllI.doc Page 9 of 46 4/11/2011
Section III — General Conditions
injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability
coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related
to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v)
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for
damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the
ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner,
with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of
insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional
insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this
paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and
maintained shalL• (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect
of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include
coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include
completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's
indemnity obligations in Article far Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or
endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal
refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor
and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a
certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the
Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at
all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed
operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in
effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each
other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of
insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and
telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer.
The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the
following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations:
5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory
(2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000.
5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE
Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and
Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual,
Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities:
SectionIII.doc Page IOof46 4/ll/2011
V I
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�'
�
�
�
�
l_�
�
LJ
u
'
�
�
Section II] — General Conditions
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(I) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $I,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
$1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
Aggregate Aggregate
(3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual
employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate
� 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
C�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles:
Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount
Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over
(1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person
$500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident
(2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each
Occurrence Occurrence
Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar
document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which
may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for
purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor,
Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's
Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide
full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be
accepted without prior approval from Owner.
Longshore and Harbor Worker's Comqensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932,
reyuires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of
benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S.
Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer.
For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable
for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7,
8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor
fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be ]iable for and be required to
secure the payment of compensation.
SectionlII.doc Page 11 of 46 4/I 1/201 ]
Section IIl — General Conditions
5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS
The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on
Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants
and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured
or additional insured in such policies and wil) provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the
effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of
recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents
for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by
such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all
such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or
entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured
under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to
the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise
payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,
Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and
agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential
loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused
by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and;
(ii) loss or damage to the completed Project ar part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting
from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed
Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or
after final payment.
6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting
such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be
responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, techniyue, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and
expressly required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the
Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a
competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's
Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All
communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The
Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted
whenever necessary.
Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's
Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed
'
,
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
��
�
�
L_ _I
�
SectionIIl.doc Page12of46 4/11/2011 ,
��
LJ
�
r
�_
��
�
�
Section III — General Conditions
from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the
Owner's Representative.
Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a
result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally
approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor sha}1 sign
an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his
records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the
Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full
reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the
Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on
weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be
$60.00 per hour.
Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary
� accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the
requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer.
�
�
�
�
�
6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct
the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good
discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of
persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated
in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours
and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday,
or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full
responsibility for all materials, eyuipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and
machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities,
temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as
� otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and
equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used
' in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly
stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing.
All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and
, conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
�
�
�
,
The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to
be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in
the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of
Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures.
SectionIII.doc Page 13 of46 4/11/201I
Section ]ll — General Conditions
6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or
description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the
specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or
"or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material
or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an
item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and
sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by
Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a
proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the
Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is
essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review
of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other
than Contractor.
Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to
Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a
determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or
eyual" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of
acceptability.
6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND
OTHERS
Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the
Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a
direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own
acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer
and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of
Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor,
Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating
the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the
work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all
Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to
communicate with the Engineer through Contractor.
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
work to be performed by any specific trade.
All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically
binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer.
'
'
�
,
�J
�
�
Il
n
�
�
�
,
�
�
,
�
��
I�
SectionIIl.doc Page 14of46 4/11/2011 �
'
��
1
�
�
I
'
�
Section Ill — General Conditions
Contractor shal) not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier ar other person or organization
whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable
objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable
objection.
Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his
Subcontractors or between Subcontractors.
6.5 USE OF PREMISES
Contractor shall confine construction eyuipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the
� operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract
Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and
easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or
� other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any
such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting
from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant
, because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party
by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in
or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify
, and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors,
employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or
resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant
� against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or
based upon Contractor's performance of the Work.
During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of
' waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the
Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction
' equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractar shall restore to original condition all
property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
�_�
�
��
6.5.1 STAGING AREAS
The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging
and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction.
6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS
The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the
Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed:
• Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days.
� • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (l0) consecutive
calendar days of removal. Resident access shalt be maintained at all times.
�
• All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP.
• Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is
generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days.
Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times.
� SectionIII.doc
'
Page I S of 46
4/11/2011
Section lIl — General Conditions
• Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe
pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed.
Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times.
If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod
restaration may be considered.
6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES
Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the
performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular
invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to
others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract
Documents.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold
harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents
and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and
damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident
to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall
defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in
accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental
agencies, which are applicable during the performance ofthe work.
6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be
responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor
performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations,
Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work:
however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the
Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not
relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as
described above.
When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02
shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E-Verify System to verify employment
eligibility.
6.8 PERMITS
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for
all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in
obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and
inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of
SectionIII.doc Page 16 of 46 4/11/20ll
C�
'
�
,
�
,
�
�
LJ
'
�
,
�
�
'
�
�
�
,
Section IIl — General Conditions
opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work,
and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as
plant investment fees.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees
' will be waived.
6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION
, Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i)
' all persons on the wark site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials
and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other
property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
� roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation
or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work,
or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall,
� and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or
injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or
materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or
, any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident
prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and
� supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition,
avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid
services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an
, effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of
contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition.
Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
� is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of
immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This
provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the
� Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all
safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract
performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic
materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall
� take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent
disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity.
r
,
'
LJ
Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss;
and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor
shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when
prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection,
removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any
other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish
any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by
Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall
SectionIII.doc Page 17 of 46 4/1 I/20ll
Section Ill — General Conditions
continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner
and Contractor that the Work is acceptable.
6.10 EMERGENCIES
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or
the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor
shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in
the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's
Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the
action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive ar
Change Order will be issued to document the conseyuences of such action.
6.11 DRAWINGS
6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW
Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the
Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will
be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria,
materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to
provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples
to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, yuantities, dimensions,
specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar
information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication,
shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work,
and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and
programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop
Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work
and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to
Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall
give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample
submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a
written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific
notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and
approval of each such variation.
The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and
Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the
Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The
Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The
Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress
meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive
calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a deiay
claim from the Contractor.
�
�
�
,
�
'
'
[�
C�
�
'
,
SectionlIl.doc Page18of46 4/11/2011 �
'
I�]
,
�l
'
u
'
��
'
'
,
,
'
�
Section ill — General Conditions
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the
items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to
the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's
review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety
precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will
not indicate approva) of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make
corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of
Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall
direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer
on previous submittals.
Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for any variation from the reyuirements of the Contract Documents unless
Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of
submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written
notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor
will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with
the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to
achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves
the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a
number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's
Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number
of first time sUbmittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and
Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings,
Samples or other items requiring approval wi11 be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0
times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work
completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all
of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to
Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor.
6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
� The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order
and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and
annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes
' or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans,
including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the
construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the
' plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not
indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which
are revealed during the construction period.
'
'
'
The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant,
and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project.
SectionlII.doc Page 19 of 46 4/I 1/201 ]
Section III — General Conditions
T'he As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for
accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the
monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not
conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay
request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by
the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness.
Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains.
The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings.
6.11.2.1 General
The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 6l G 17-6, Florida
Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land
surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built
Drawings and an AutoCAD file.
61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey.• a survey performed to obtain horizontal
and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and
delineated: also know as Record Survey.
This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida
registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction
Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will
procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and
will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the
Owner with the required As-Built Survey.
6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems
Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation)
based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the
construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service
connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes,
cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions,
pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if
one exists.
2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted.
6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain)
All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the
approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction
plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, vatves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new
and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described
above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than l00 feet apart on linear
type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points.
�
l_I
�
�
'
'
'
�
�
�
�
,
,
SectionIII.doc Page 20 of46 4l11/2011 ,
�
i�
,
L_I
'
'
,
Section lll — General Conditions
6.11.2.4 Electricai and Control Wiring
The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built
drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where
this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall
prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional
conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic
diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder
diagram.
6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control
' The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans
or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of
1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of ineasurement
, shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or
vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department.
r
'
LJ
,
�
I�
,
�
'
'
6.11.2.6 Standards
The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 6l G] 7 and the
Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that
pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points
at every change in direction and no more than l00 feet apart on all pressure pipes.
6.11.2.7 Other
The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same
level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans.
6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS
6.11.3.1 Layer Naming
6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes
DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities
EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected
EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols
PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols
FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line
work and symbols
TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix
6.11.3.1.2 La er Namin Definitions:
GAS gas lines and appurtenances
ELEC power lines and appurtenances
PHONE
' SectionIIl.doc
'
telephone lines and appurtenances
Page 21 of 46
4/11/2011
Section III — General Conditions
CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances
BOC curbs
WALK sidewalk
WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers
STORM storm lines and appurtenances
TREES trees, bushes, planters
SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances
FENCE all fences
BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation
DRIVE driveways
EOP edge of pavement without curbs
TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes
TOPBANK top of bank
TOESLOPE toe of slope
TOPBERM top of berm
TOEBERM toe of berm
SEAWALL seawall
CONCSLAB concrete slabs
WALL walls, except seawall
SHORE shoreline, water elevation
CL centerline of road
CLD centerline of ditch
CLS centerline of swale
CORNER property corners, monumentation
BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks
Other Iayers may be created as required, using above format.
6.11.3.2 Layer Properties
All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer.
All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer.
All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts.
6.11.3.3 Text Styles
Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008
times the plot scale.
SectionIII.doc Page 22 of 46 4/11/2011
,
'
�
Section ]ll — General Conditions
Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text
height of .010 times the plot scale.
6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:
' The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20'
unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format.
Accepta b te f i le formats inc lu de: D W G, D X F o f a s hape f i le.
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
r
,
'
'
�
'
'
Please address any yuestions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail
address Thomas.Mahony�(cr�myclearwater.com.
6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work
will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's
warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism,
modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until
the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the
Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part
thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution
or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own
expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its
completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any
defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom
which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance".
Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by
Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage far any portion of the Work,
which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the
Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by
Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's
Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by
the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or
any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review
and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance
by the Engineer.
6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK
Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or
disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any
disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.
6.14 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the
officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and
against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
SectionllI.doc Page 23 of 46 4/] I/2011
Section llI — General Conditions
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other
dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itsel�,
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or
omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such
indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person.
If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor
shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or
Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so
settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such
account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims
against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or
employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any
Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of
the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of
damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor,
Supplier ar other person ar organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts
or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this
paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers,
directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any
of them.
6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION
Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in
company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email
addresses, etc.
7 OTHER WORK
7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE
The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and
perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether
related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for
these purposes.
The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work
will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity
is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with
the Contractor's work or schedule.
SectionlII.doc Page 24 of46 4/I1/20ll
'
CJ
�
�
'
'
LJ
L1
,
�
�
�
,
�
�
,
r
,
'
�
J
�
�
u
,
'
,
�
'
Section III — General Conditions
7.2 COORDINATION
If the Owner contracts with others far the performance of other work on the Project at the site,
the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have autharity and
responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be
identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility wilt be
itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and
responsibility in respect of such coordination.
8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY
Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all
communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative.
The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly
and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General
Conditions.
The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The
Work.
The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in
the Article on Tests and Inspections.
In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer
may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's
right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances.
Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for,
' Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety
precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws
and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be
� responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
'
'
�
�
LJ
'
9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE
Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will
either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The
duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during
construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written
consent of Owner and Engineer.
9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of
the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of
Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine
necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract
SectionIIl.doc Page 25 of46 4/11/2011
Section 111 — General Conditions
Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued
form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. lf Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation
justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to
agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as
provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time.
9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK
The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's
Representative ar the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to
the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the
completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's
Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of
the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop
Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change
Orders, see the articles on Changes of Wark, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection
with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on
Payments to Contractor and Completion.
9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other
matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the
Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under
the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will
be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in
accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will
be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement
promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event
giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and
the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's
Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more
accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit
any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of
the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's
Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the
opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's
written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner
and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty
(30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a
Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or
(ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention
to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor
SectionIll.doc Page 26 of46 4/I1l2011
LJ
'
r
L�J
�
�
'
�
I
��
�
�
�I
1
�
�
'
I�
,�
�
I�
�
�
�
�
�
L��
,
�
��
'
��
�
Section III — General Conditions
to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision
and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction
to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim,
dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60)
days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and
Contractor.
When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the
Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision
rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative
with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have
under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute
or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution.
9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S
RESPONSIBILITIES
Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any
other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in
good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking,
exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall
create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or
agent of any of them.
Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be
responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of
Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of
the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or
furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the work.
Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and
certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered
by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and
approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.
The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to
Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants.
10 CHANGES IN THE WORK
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions,
deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work
SectionIIl.doc Page 27 of 46 4/11/2011
Section liI — General Conditions
Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with
the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided).
If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the
Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a
Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions.
Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions
except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in
article for Uncovering Work.
The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments
recommended by Owner's Representative covering:
changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance
of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective
Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the
parties;
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on
Disputes;
provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any
such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable
Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and
adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work.
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice
of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to
the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days)
after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the
claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such
occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to
submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by
SectionlII.doc Page 28 of 46 4/ll /20ll
'
C'
�I
C
�
Section 111— General Conditions
claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the
claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the
Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any
Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be
determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii)
where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii)
where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work.
' Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and
where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and
Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for
directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall
, apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and
other items of direct costs required for the directed work.
�
The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:
Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual
payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes
� established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with
negotiating the subject change.
'
�I
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
1
2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall
be substantiated through vendors' invoices.
3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of eyuipment, including necessary transportation
costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current
rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for
Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as
the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment
and shall cover the costs of al] fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs
associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned
equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize
lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed
estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for
equipment on stand-by.
4.
SectionIIl.doc
Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater.
The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed
by the Contractor or Subcontractor.
A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If
work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five
percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%).
B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above.
C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4.
The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation far all cost of general
supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense.
Page 29 of 46 4(ll/2011
Section lII — General Conditions
11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT
It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all al(owances so named in the
Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such
sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances
include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment
required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii)
Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract
Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the
foregoing will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's
Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by
altowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shalt
be correspondingly adjusted.
11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK
Where the Contract Documents provide that a11 or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work,
initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to
the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of
items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of
Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and
classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's
Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to
be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The
Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity
of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from
the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no
corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes
that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred
additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract
Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On
unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adeyuate unit quantities to satisfactorily
complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project
construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a
finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually
used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract
Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor
in his original bid.
12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME
The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written
Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on
written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's
Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of
SectionlII.doc Page 30 of 46 4/I1/2011
'
I�
�
��
�
�
�
�
I J�
,
�
�
�
I'
!J
�
'
'
'
'
,
,
Section lll — General Conditions
the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence,
unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate
data in support of the claim, and shal) be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that
the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is
entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract
Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with
the requirements of this paragraph.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the wark within the Contract Time
� (or Mile"stones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones)
may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made
therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the
�
�
�
LI
'
�
Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall inctude, but not be limited to, acts by the
Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the
article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.
Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be
delays within the control of Contractor.
Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times
(or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension
of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall
be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable
to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused
by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including
but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by
utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for
Other Work.
13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION
� Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the
Work for all reyuired inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests.
'
�
�
'
Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these
inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereo fl
specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such
public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments,
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or
approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required
SectionlIl.doc Page31 of46 4/ll/2011
Section III — General Conditions
certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner
permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and
obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required
for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work,
or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase
thereof for incorporation of the Work.
If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by
Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by
Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this
paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative
and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's
Representative has not acted with reasonable prompfiess in response to such notice.
13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if
requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and
replaced at Contractor's expense.
If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's
request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question,
furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. lf it is found that such Work is defective,
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting
from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of
work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price
for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof,
may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however,
such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract
Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if
the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim
therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time.
13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK
If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to
any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of
Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this
paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract
Price.
�
'
�
'
�
�
u
�
,
�
�
�
,
'
�
Sectio�III.doc Page 32 of46 4/11/2011 '
'
'
'
Section I11 — General Conditions
13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
� If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either
correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has
been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with
� Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by
or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others).
'
LI
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
'�
��
13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in
accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has
been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective
and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of
others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such
instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the
Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and
all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement
(including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) wiil be paid by
Contractor.
In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service
before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from
an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Where defective Work (and damage to other Wark resulting therefrom) has been corrected,
removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such
Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and
replacement has been satisfactorily completed.
13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
If, instead of reyuiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner
prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so.
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation
of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's
Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner
Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating
the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall
be entitted to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for
Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's
recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the
Owner.
SectionIII.doc Page 33 of 46 4/71/2011
Section III — General Conditions
13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK
If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to
correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's
Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or
if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if
Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may,
after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In
exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously.
In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from
all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's
services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the
site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall
allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors,
and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable
the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and
damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be
charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to
an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the
amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of
Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs
of repair or replacement of wark of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or
replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable
to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder.
14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described
herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for
review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work
completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as
is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated
in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not
incorparated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully
installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of
the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey
and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and
acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be
construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract.
The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all yuantities and
work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an
Official Pay Reyuest. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L��
�
SectionlII.doc Page 34 of 46 4/ll/2011 �
�
LJ
,
,
�
,
Li
�
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
Section Ill — General Conditions
marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the
Contract Documents.
In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative
may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any
progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have
been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report
as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the
report is provided.
14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by
any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work
shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.
Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work,
free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner
harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers,
workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the perfarmance of this Contract.
Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do
so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid
bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid
compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful
claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this
Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and
the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith.
14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and
process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment,
unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires
review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment
will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment
is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the
reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in
writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper.
In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.
The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any
payment to Owner. Owner's Representative ar Agent may also refuse to recommend any such
payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent
inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be
SectionIII.doc Page 35 of 46 4/11/20ll
Section III — General Conditions
necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because:
(i) the Wark is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the
Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's
Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated
in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination.
The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's
Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of
Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with
the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to
secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner
to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of
the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay
in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative
or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the
amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when
Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action.
14:4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION
Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which
(i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the
Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference
with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final
Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such
part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially
complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor
will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is
substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial
Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work
ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time
after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make
an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's
Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that
part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles far Substantial
Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial
Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and
accessthereto.
14.5 FINAL INSPECTION
Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is
complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and
Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which
SectionlIl.doc Page 36 of 46 4/11/2011
'
'
�
��
�
�
�
�
1
�
��
�
�
�-
�
�
�
�
�
Section Ill — General Conditions
this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will
produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and
assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list.
Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the
contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract.
Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or
remedy such deficiencies.
14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative
and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating
instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other
evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of
inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other
documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as
previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii)
consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally
effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in
connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the
Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i)
the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness
connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be
responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to
furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien.
Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all
surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an
acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the
prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition.
14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE
If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Wark is significantly delayed and if
Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final
Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without
terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully
completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully
completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the
surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for
such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final
payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and
SectionIII.doc Page 37 of 46 4/11/2011
Section Ill — General Conditions
accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's
Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations
under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in
writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment.
Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the
Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative
will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to
recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and
resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as
to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay
contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative.
14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner
against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing
after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any
special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the
Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK
At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which
will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractar shall resume the Work on the date
so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an
approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of
Contract Time.
15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE
Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails
to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,
failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere
to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time);
if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction;
if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative;
if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract
Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this
Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the
Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise
than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to
the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or
that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed.
SectionlII.doc
Page 38 of 46
�
l�
'
'
�
�
�
�
4/11/2011 �
�
�
'
,
�
�J
�
u
�
Section III — General Conditions
The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and,
to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude
Contractar from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools,
appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion),
incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has
paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem
expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the
Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and
damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such
excess will be paid to Contractor.
If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be
reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by
Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any
rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price
for the Work performed.
Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not
release Contractor from liability.
Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may,
� without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy ofthe Owner, elect to terminate
the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
� Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
'
r
�
�
C_�
�
'
for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in
connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and
profit on such expenses;
for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly
attributable to termination.
Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE
If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety
(90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's
Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to
be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's
Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such
suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner
SectionIII.doc Page 39 of 46 4/11/201 I
Section TII — General Conditions
payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if
the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement
and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act
on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has
failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor
may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work
until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended
to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or
Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to
Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article.
16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION
If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for
resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution
method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for
resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on
Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may
otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any
dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding
arbitration.
17 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS
The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other
documents permitted or reyuired to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall
be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner.
17.2 GIVING NOTICE
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice
will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corparation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of
the notice.
17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM
Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury ar damage to person or property because of any
error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or
agents or others for whose acts the other party is Iegally liable, claim will be made in writing to
the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The
provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the
provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose.
�
�
'LJ
l�
�
�
�J
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
SectionIII.doc Page 40 of 46 4/11/2011 �
�
Section Ill — General Conditions
17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED
, Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in
each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other
professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs.
, 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without
' the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights
to notice of assignment.
�
�
17.6 RENEWAL OPTION
Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2)
years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions
and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or
in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be
agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds,
and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction
Department.
17.7 ROLL-OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS
All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll-off containers
, and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Tom Glenn at the
City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562-4923 or email:
tom.glenn@myclearwater.com.
� 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to
� the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the
Contractor shall work and order thereof.
'
�
�
�
'
'
�
19 MATERIAL USED
All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all
materials.
20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or
discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General
Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical
Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern.
21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION
The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's
documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in
Sectionlll.doc Page 41 of 46 4/l I/201 I
Section III — General Conditions
the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is
exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable
taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The
Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various
construction materials included in the Contractor's contraet. The Owner purchasing of
construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis.
Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION far ODP items included in the Contract
Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents.
22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
22.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius,
unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating
the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing
the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of
construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water
service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the
Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo
(optional); requirement far residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances
which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the
scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by
the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and
durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-'/4 by l l inches in size. Notification (door
hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's
activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected
by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas,
eyuipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor
cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to
maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain
appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours.
Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items
provided in the contract proposal.
22.2 EXAMPLE
CITY SEAL
Of
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION
TODAY'S DATE: / /
PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE
We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater
in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property.
This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property
owners of the pendin�start of construction.
SectionllI.doc Page 42 of 46 4/I 1/2011 ,
�
Section 111 — General Conditions
(Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners)
The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way.
Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the
contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks
will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for
the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors,
textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or
structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will
not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property
owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within
the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere.
We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or
any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager
at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you.
Construction is anticipated to begin on:
Company Name
Company Address
Contractor Phone Number
23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE
The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public
funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this
purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during
the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active
work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s)
shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in
SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION.
23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE
Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended
locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined
after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on
sign at the preconstruction conference.
23.3 FIXED SIGN
Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade
� plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of l/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a
minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4"} below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts
and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring
' in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate
mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered far
approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint.
� SectionIIl.doc Page 43 of 46 4/ll/2011
�
Section III — General Conditions
23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS
Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be
attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080-
inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl
lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic
barricade.
23.5 SIGN COLORING
Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other
lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional
to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall
be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black.
23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT
Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the
project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either
pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the
signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-
way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations
of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in
several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and
will remain in place until the request for final payment.
23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE
The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement,
removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The
Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs
are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced.
SectionIIl.doc Page 44 of 46 4/11/20ll
�
L�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
Section lli — General Conditions
23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN
,
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
'
,
24
�
,
L.J
�
�
�
' �- PROJECT NAME
(CONTRACT NUMBER)
(DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT
` � CONTRACTOR: _-____ _ ____-
� COMPLETION DATE: _ ____
FUNDING: __ _ _.-____._-- -__ _- --
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE:
_r _ �
°�rwater
_ .� �
U
I __ __
_ _ _ �
� ,,, .
i ' ;;
AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the
Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice sha11 be given as outlined in
Article 2 of these General Conditions.
It is further reyuired that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number
of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE
DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor
fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the
Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be
discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee
Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the
SectionlII.doc Page 45 of46 4/11/2011
,
Section III — General Conditions '
Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars
($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage ,
to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
final acceptance.
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
'
,
�
�
,
�
SectionIII.doc Page 46 of 46 4/ll/2011 �
�
�
1
SECTION IV
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
, Table of Contents:
1 SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 1
1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 1
� 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 2
2 FIELD ENGINEERING .................................................................................................. 3
� 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 3
2.1.1 GRADES, LINESAND LEVELS ............................................................................. 3
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ....................................................................................................... 4
' 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 4
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 4
' 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 4
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 4
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 6
� 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 6
6 CONCRETE ......................................................................................................................7
' 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 7
7.1 EXCAVATION ................................................................................................................7
� 7.2 FORMS ........................................................................................................................... 7
8 REINFORCEMENT. 7
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................•................................................. 8
� 9 OBSTRUCTIONS .............................................................................................................8
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS
� AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 8
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 9
� 12 DEWATERING .................................................................................................................9
12.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................9
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 10
' 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL ...............................................................................•--- 1 D
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND
WATER FROMANYNON-CONTAMINATED SITEACTIVITY ........................... 10
� 13 SANITARY MANHOLES ..............................................................................................12
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .......................................................................................................... 12
' 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 13
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 13
13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 13
� 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ............................................................................................ 13
020912 SectionIV.doc i 2/9/2012
,
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 13
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................. 14
I4BACKFILL ......................................................................................................................14
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC . ....................................................................................... 14
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 14
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 14
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL .....................................................................15
17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 15
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 15
18 UNDERDRAINS .............................................................................................................15
l 8.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 15
l 8.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 16
19 STORM SEWERS ..........................................................................................................16
191 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 16
19.2 TESTING ......................................................................................................................16
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ..............................................................17
20.I MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 17
20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 17
20.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................... 17
20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 17
20. Z. 2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 18
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 18
20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 18
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 18
20. 4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 19
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 19
20.5.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ........................................................................................ 19
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19
21 DRAINAGE .....................................................................................................................19
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE ..........................................................................19
22.1 BASE ............................................................................................................................ 19
22.1. I BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 21
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ............................... 21
22.2 SUBGRADE ................................................................................................................. 21
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ................................................................................ 21
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 22
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 22
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 22
020912 SectionN.doc ii 2/9/2012
,
�
�
�
,
�
�
��I
�
'
'
�
'
�
'
�J
,
'
23.1.1 AGGREGATE ........................................................................................................22
23.1.2 BITUMINOIJS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 22
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT &
QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 22
233 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 23
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 23
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 24
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 24
23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................24
23.6.2 POTHOLES ...........................................................................................................24
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 25
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 25
23.9 SUPERPAVEASPHALTIC CONCRETE ....................................................................26
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 26
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 26
24 ADJiJSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 27
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 27
2 5.1 I RRI GATI ON ........................... ............................ .. ....................................................... 2 7
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................27
25.1.2 PRODUCTS ..........................................................................................................29
25.1. 3 EXEC UTION ..................................... ................... . . ..... ..................... . . ........... ........ 33
25.2 LANDSCAPE ............................................................................................................... 36
25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 36
25.2.2 PRODUCTS .....................................................................................................�---- 41
25.2.3 EXECUTION .........................................................................................................44
26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 51
26.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................ 51
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 51
263 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 5 I
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 52
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 52
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 53
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 53
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 53
26.9 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................53
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 53
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 54
29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 54
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 54
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 54
020912 SectionlV.doc iii 2/9/2012
31
32
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS....
302 CONCRETEDRIVEWAYS...
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...........
..................................................................................... 54
..................................................................................... 55
..................................................................................... 55
..................................................................................... 55
'
�
�
SODDING........................................................................................................................ 55
SEEDING.........................................................................................................................56 '
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................ 56
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 56
33.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 57
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 57
�
�
34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 57
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 57 �
36 STREET SIGNS .............................................................................................................. 57
37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 57
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................ 57
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIOMDEO RECORDING ................................................... 57
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 58
37.4 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 58
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... 58
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 58
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 58
37.8 LIGHTING ................................................................................................................... 59
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL .................................................................................................... 59
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ................................................................................................... 59
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE ............................................................................................... 59
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ................................................................................... 59
38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 59
38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 60
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 60
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ 60
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ....................................................................................... 60
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... 61
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 61
38.9 MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 6I
38.10 COMPLIANCE .............................................................................................................61
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 64
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... 64
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES....................................................................................................... 64
020912 SectionIV.doc iv 2/9/2012
�
,
L�
r
,
'
'
'
l_ 1
'
�
'
,
�
'
�
4 ] . l SCOPE .......................................................................................................................... 64
4l.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 65
41. 2.1 GENERAL . ............................... ............................... .............................................. 65
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 65
41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 67
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................................... 67
41.2.5 HYDRANTS....-� ..................................................................................................... 68
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 69
41.2. 7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS .................................................................. 69
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ................................................................................ 69
41.2. 9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 70
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HY➢RANTS ...................................................................................... 70
41.3 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................70
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 70
41. 3.2 PIPE LAYING ....................................................................................................... 70
41.3.3 SETTING OF UALVES, HYDRANTSAND FIT7'INGS ......................................... 72
41.3. 4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 72
41.4 TESTS ...........................................................................................................................73
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 73
41. 4. 2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................ ................ 73
41.5 STERILIZATION ......................................................................................................... 73
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT .......................................................................................... 73
41. 5. 2 FL USHING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 73
41. 5. 3 STERILIZATION PROCED URE .......................................................................... 73
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 74
41. S. S BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 74
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 74
41. 6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 74
41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 75
41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 75
41.6.4 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITHBOXESAND
CO VER S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 75
42
43
GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 76
TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 76
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ..........................
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS .............................
43.1.2 BASE COURSE .....................................
43.1. 3 PRIME COAT .......................................
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ............................
43.1.5 SURFACE CDURSE .............................
43.1. 6 COLOR COAT ......................................
43 2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
......................................................... 76
.................................
.................................
. ..............................................................
' 43. 2.1 GENERAL ...............................................................................
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ..............................................................
43.2.3 SLOPE .................................•---................................................
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION .........................................................
' 020912 SectionlV.doc
'
v
............................. 76
.............................. 76
............................:. 76
............................ . 76
.............................. 76
.............................. 77
.............................. 78
.............................. 78
.............................. 79
.............................. 79
.............................. 80
2/9/2012
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING ......................................
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ............................................
43.2. 7 ROOT BARRIER ..................................................
43.2.8 FENCING ............................................................
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS......._ ...........................................
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT .........................................
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE ..........................................
43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) .................................
43. 2.13 CONCRETE .........................................................
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.15 WATER COOLER ................................................
43. 2.16 DEMONSTRATION ....................... ......................
43 2 17 WARRANTY
. . ................................................................
........................... 80
........................... 80
........................... 80
........................... 81
........................... 81
........................... 81
........................... 83
........................... 83
........................... 83
........................... 83
........................... 84
........................... 84
........................... 84
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 85
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 85
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 85
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY ......................................................................................... 85
443 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ....................................................................... 86
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS ................................................................................................... 86
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ................. 86
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ......................................................... 86
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ........................................•--...............................-�---.............. 86
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................... 86
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 87
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 87
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 87
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING .............................................................................. 87
46
45.1
45.2
45.3
45.4
45.5
45.6
45.7
45.8
45.9
INTENT........................................................................................................................ 87
PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 88
MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 88
CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION .................................................................... 88
TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 89
LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 89
LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 89
TIMEOF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 89
PAYMENT.................................................................................................................... 89
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 90
46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 9Q
46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................... 90
46.1.2 QUALITYCONTROL ........................................................................................... 90
46.1.3 SAMPLES ..............................................................................................................90
46.1.4 REJECTION ..........................................................................................................90
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................... 90
46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ................................................................................. 91
46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ........................................................................................... 91
46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS .................................................................... 91
020912 SectionIV.doc vi 2/9/2012
,
'
,
'
,
� 47
'
'
i
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
46. 3.3 PIPE JOINING ..................................................................................................... 91
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE ............................................................................. 91
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................................................................91
46.=�.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTSAND DIMENSIONS ...................................................... 91
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION ........................................................................... 91
46. 4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS .......................................................... 92
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ................................................................................ 92
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ...................................................................... 92
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................................ 92
46.4.7 BACKFILLING .....................................................................................................93
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR ..................................................................................................... 93
46. 4. 9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ................................................................................... 93
47. l
47.2
47.3
47.4
47.5
48
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ...................... 93
SCOPE.......................................................................................................................... 93
MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 93
PIPE.............................................................................................................................. 93
JOININGSYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 94
FITTINGS..................................................................................................................... 94
GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................94
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 94
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 94
48.3 COMPOSITION ........................................................................................................... 94
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 95
48.5 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 95
48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 95
48.7 REINFORCEMENT .....................................................................................................95
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 95
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ......................................................................................... 96
48.10 PROPORTIONING .......................................................................................................96
48.11 MIXING ........................................................................................................................96
48.12 APPLICATION .............................................................................................................96
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ......................................................................................... 97
48.14 SURFACE FINISH ....................................................................................................... 97
48.15 CURING ....................................................................................................................... 97
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 97
48.17 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 98
48.18 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................... 98
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ........................... 99
49.1 SCOPE AND 1NTENT ................................................................................................. 99
49.2 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................99
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ............................................................................ 99
49.3.1 MATERIALS ..........................................................................................................99
49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND E.YECUTION .................................................................. 100
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .......................................:...... 100
49.4.1 MATERIALS......--� ...............................................................................................101
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ...................................................................................... 101
020912 SectionlV.doc vii 2/9/2012
49.6 GROUTING MIX ....................................................................................................... l O1
49.7 LINER MIX ................................................................................................................ I Ol
49.8 WATER .......................................••-............................................................................. 102
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 102
49.10 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. ] 02
49.1 l INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... ]02
49.11.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................................102
49.11.2 MIXING .....................................................•---......................................................103
49.11.3 SPRAYING .......................................................................................................... 103
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 103
49.11.5 CURING ..............................................................................................................103
49.11. 6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 104
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... l04
49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 104
49.12.2 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................104
49.12. 3 INSTALLATION AND EXEC UTION ... ......................... ...................................... 106
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ..........................................................................108
51
52
53
54
IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................108
51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 108
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ..................................................................................... ]09
51.2.1 ASPHALT ............................................................................................................109
51. 2. 2 CONCRETE ... ..................................................................................................... 109
51.2.3 COURTPATCHBINDERMIX ...........................................................................109
S l.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... 109
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... 1 l 0
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .................................................................................... 1 l 0
51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................................................................... 110
5 l.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 1 I 0
51.8 LIMITATIONS ........................................................................................................... l l0
RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................111
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................111
53.1 MATERIAL .................................................................................................................1 l 1
53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ...................................................111
53.1.2 GABIONAND MAT7'RESS FILLER MATERIAL : ...............................................113
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................................................114
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC ........................................................................................114
53.2 PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................... 1 l 4
LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................115
54.1 SCOPE .................................................................
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK .................................
54.3 WORK METHODS .............................................
54. 3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHED ULING ................
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ....................
54.4 LITTER ................................................................
54.5 VISUAL CHECK ................................................
020912 SectionIV.doc viii
....................................................... 115
....................................................... 115
....................................................... 116
........................................................116
........................................................116
....................................................... 116
....................................................... l I 6
'
'
'
'
�j
'
'
�
�
'
,
�
,
C�
�
�
'
2/9/2012 '
'
L
,
'
C_J
�
,
,
'
'
'
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .......................................................... 116
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)..... 116
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .................................................................................................. 116
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................ l l 7
54.] 0 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................ } 17
54.1 l PLANT FERTILIZATION .......................................................................................... l l7
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA ......................................................... l l 7
54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................................................................................... l l7
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .................................................................... 117
54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ..................................................... 117
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 117
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................ 118
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE ................................................................................................. 118
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ....................................................................................... 118
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............................................................................. 118
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 118
55 MILLING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................119
55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ...................................... 119
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 1 l9
55.3 SALUAGEABLE MATERIALS ................................................................................. 120
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ..................................................................................... 120
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROIJND UTILITIES .................. l 20
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANNOLES ............................................................ 120
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................ 120
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 121
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121
SS.lO BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 121
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................................................121
, 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.......
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..................
'
'
�
LJ
'
................................................................. l21
................................................................. 121
57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 121
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 121
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 122
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 122
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL ............................................................................................. l22
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 122
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 122
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
60 SIGNING AND MARKING .........................................................................................123
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING ..............................................................................................123
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 123
� 020912 SectionIV.doc
II�
�x
2!9/2012
62 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 124
62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 124
62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 124
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................................................................ 125
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 126
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 126
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 126
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... l 26
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 127
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ............................................................................................ 127
63.6 POSTING ....................................................................................................................127
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 127
64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE ...................................................... 127
64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 127
64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES ............................................ 127
020912 SectionN.doc x 2/9/2012
,
,
'
'
r
,
'
f�
'
'
'
'
'
'
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
SCOPE OF WORK
SCOPE DESCRIPTION
Project Name: Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
Project Number: 06-0022-UT
Scope of Work:
The work for which proposals are invited consists of, but is not limited to, the following:
demolition of existing primary clarifiers, equipment, electrical and incidentals; temporary
supports, power, coffer dams and bypass pumping to maintain the facility in complete and full
operation; installation of two (2) Salsnes Filters, a filter feed pump, relocated sludge pumps,
piping, appurtenance, electrical and instrumentation; construction of the concrete pads, concrete
structures, site work, utility relocations associated with the design, and all other work necessary
for a complete and operational pretreatment system; installation of 24" RAS metering assembly,
piping, fittings supports, concrete pads and ancillaries as necessary for a complete and
operational RAS system; and integration of new filters into plant PLC/SCADA system that will
include modifications and/or expansion of existing PLC equipment, equipment interconnections
and connection routing and Record Drawings.
The Contractor shall provide 1{Fixed/Portable} project signs as described in SECTION Ill,
ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents..
List ODP Items to be included in the Contract Document.
CONTRACT PERIOD: 210 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS
' 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 128 2/9/2012
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST
�roject Name: Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
�roject Number: 06-0022-UT
The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X"
as shown below:
1 � Sco e Of Work
2.1 � Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Contractor
2.2 � Line and Grade Shall Be Performed B The Cit
3 � Definition Of Terms
4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work
5 � Excavation For Under round Work
6 ❑ Concrete
7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work
8 ❑ Reinforcement
9 � Obstructions
l 0 � Restoration Or Re lacement Of Drivewa s, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement
l 1 ❑ Wark In Easements Or Parkwa s
l2 � Dewaterin
13 ❑ Sanita Manholes
14 � Backfill
15 ❑ Street Crossin s, Etc.
l 6 ❑ Raisin Or Lowerin Of Sanita Sewer, Storm Draina e Structures
17 ❑ Unsuitable Material Removal
18 ❑ Underdrains
19 � Storm Sewers
20 � Sanita Sewers And Force Mains
2l � Draina e
22 � Roadwa Base And Sub rade
23 � As haltic Concrete Materials
24 � Ad'ustment To The Unit Bid Price For As halt
25 ❑ General Plantin S ecifications
26 ❑ Hd e Deformed - Reformed Pi e Linin
27 ❑ Plant Mix Drivewa s
28 ❑ Re ortin Of Tonna e Of Rec cled Materials
29 � Concrete Curbs
30 � Concrete Sidewalks And Drivewa s
3 t � Soddin
32 ❑ Seedin
33 � Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures
34 � Material Used
35 � Conflict Between Plans And S ecifications
36 ❑ Street Si ns
37 � AudioNideo Recordin Of Work Areas
38 � Erosion And Siltation Control
39 ❑ Utili Tie In Location Markin
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 128 2!9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
40 � Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee
41 � Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and A urtenances
42 ❑ Gas S stem S ecifications
43 ❑ Tennis Courts
44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control
45 ❑ Cured-In-Place Pi e Linin
46 ❑ S ecifications for Poi eth lene Sli linin
47 ❑ S ecifications for Pol vinyl Chloride Ribbed Pi e
48 ❑ Gunite S ecifications
49 ❑ Sanita and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration
50 � Pro'ect Information Si ns
51 ❑ In-Line Skatin Surfacin S stem
52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction
53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses
54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance S ecifications
55 � Millin O erations
56 ❑ Clearin and Grubbin
57 ❑ Ri ra
58 � Treatment Plant Safet
59 ❑ Traffic Si nal E ui ment and Materials
60 ❑ Si nin And Marking
61 ❑ Roadwa Li htin
62 ❑ Tree Protection
63 ❑ Pro'ect Web Pa es
64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance
2
2.1
FIELD ENGINEERING
LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE
CONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service reyuired for the project. Such
work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site
improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the
work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the
Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals
under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-
built Survey to the Engineer prior to fina} payment being made as outlined in Section III
(General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents.
2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
' Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the
Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the
Engineer. T'he Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and
' shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any
permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or
disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the
' 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 3 of 128 2/9/2012
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land
Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida.
2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA
The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the
Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing
locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record
drawings for the project.
2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY
At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project
inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project.
Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and
grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the
rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be
computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the
project Record construction drawings.
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III,
ARTICLE 1- DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply.
For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that
the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a
basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not
assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated
quantities nar shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate
of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations
pertaining thereto.
3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of
local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard
adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise.
3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows:
AA Aluminum Association, Inc.
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMA Acoustical Materials Association
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
020912 SectionN.doc
Page 4 of 128
'
,
'
,
�
r
�i
,�
'
'
u
'
,
,
�
�I
'
l� J
2/9/2Q12 '
L_I
��
�
�
�
,
'
^1
J
i�
'
,
�
�
�
APA
ASAE
ASCE
ASHRAE
ASME
ASSE
ASTM
AWG
AWMA
AWS
AW WA
CFR
CISPI
CRSI
CS
DEP
DOT
EPA
FAC
FBC
FFPC
FGC
FMC
FPC
FedSpec
HI
IBBM
IEEE
IPS
MIL
NAAMM
NBFU
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
NPT
NWMA
PCA
PCI
SBC
SBCCI
SDI
SFPC
SGC
SJI
SMACCNA
020912 SectionlV.doc
Section IV — Technical Specifications
American Plywood Association
American Society ofAgricultural Engineers
American Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wire Gauge
Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Code of Federal Regulations
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards
Department of Environmental Protection (Florida)
Department of Transportation (Florida)
Environmental Protection Agency
Florida Administrative Code
Florida Buitding Code
Florida Fire Prevention Code
Florida Gas Code
Florida Mechanical Code
Florida Plumbing Code
Federal Specifications
Standards of Hydraulic Institute
Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Iron Pipe Size
Military Specification
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Board of Fire Underwriters
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association
National Pipe Thread
National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association
Portland Cement Association
Prestressed Concrete Institute
Standard Building Code (SBCCI)
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
Steel Doar Institute
Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI)
Standard Gas Code (SBCCI)
Steel Joist Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association
Page 5 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI)
SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI)
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TCA Title Council ofAmerica
UL Underwriters' Laboratories
4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
�
�
'
I_ I
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE �
WORK.
5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK
The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner
which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times
maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property.
The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements
of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in
these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory
agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor.
For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to
consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as
OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for
excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the
removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of
a"Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent
Person to City staff at the stari of construction.
City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or
other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with
the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with
these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's
excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is
unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must
either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the
accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense.
The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain
sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open
cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to
OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the
Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all
safety reyuirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work
necessary to complete the project.
Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the
completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance
specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than
the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe ar conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 128 2/9/2012
r
�
�
�
'
�
'
,
'
,
,
�
�
'
'
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the
body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place,
excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling
and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without
compensation.
6 CONCRETE
Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest
editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the
American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall
be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials.
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum
compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall
conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete
shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except
when admixtures or special placement considerations are required.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
concrete placement.
All concrete shall be tested in the following manner:
Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise,
for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3
compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and Z at 28 days). At the discretion
of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as
determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and
compensation or denial thereof.
�
7.1
EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK
EXCAVATION
Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon
which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a
point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the
dry��
7.2 FORMS
Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by
written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth
equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall
be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or
sprmgmg.
8 REINFORCEMENT
When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be
deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel
A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 7 of 128 Z/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete
reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 22l (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated
reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements.
8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the
contract unit price for the item of work specified.
9 OBSTRUCTIONS
Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be
carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and
properly repaired by the Contractar to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof.
Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains,
or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims
for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made.
Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or
obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or
benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless
otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land
surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the
nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means.
10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS.
CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT
Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and
shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards,
whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be
replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is
unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved
material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as
base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T
180.
Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor,
materials and eyuipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or
square yard of base.
The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals,
shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid
for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of
replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the
pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense.
The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in
the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and eyuipment required to complete the work and
shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard:
concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot.
'
�
,
��
�
�
�
�
'
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 8 of 128 2/9l2012 ,
IJ
'
,
�
'
�
u
Section N — Technical Specifications
Concrete walks at drives shail be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10
welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work.
11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS
Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the
construction progress.
The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time
following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration
within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction
activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests.
Reasonable care shal) be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery
removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work.
The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on
� any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local
residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission.
�
I�I
�i
�
�
Reuse water is available far the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater
treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for
Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-
construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory
requirements.
12 DEWATERING
12.1 GENERAL
Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the
dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as reyuired for the proper execution of the
work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity
underdrain system, or sumps with pumps.
Well point systems must be ef�3cient enough to lower the water level in advance of the
excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain
firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and
the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of
handling large volumes of air as well as of water.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering
operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work,
the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in
excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to
conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer.
The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 9 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS
12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL
The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for
the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to
dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways.
Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must
collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The
following document has been incorporated into this section for reference...
12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED
GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE
ACTIVITY
City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental
Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities:
l) A copy of all groundwater Iaboratory results
2) A copy of the FDEP Notification
It is recommended that the Contractar call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have
any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance.
STATE OF FLORIDA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER
FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY
The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site
activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-
620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table l do not exceed any of the
listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites,
analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to
determine if contamination exists.
Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be
sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement
of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued
coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit
shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be
sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1.
TABLE 1
Screening Values for Discharges into:
Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 10 of 128
[l
'
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
[�
�
2/9/2012 '
1
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/I
PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5
Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631 E 0.0] 2 µg/I 0.025 µg/1
Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/I 9.3 µg/I
Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/I 2.9 µg/1
Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 µg/1
Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1
Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) I l.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/I
Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1
Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1
If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table l, except TOC, the
discharge is not authorized by this permit or bv the Cit�ofCleanvater.
(a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which
may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic
compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC
requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additionat
information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the
method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The
Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee aff3rmatively demonstrates
that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight
organic compounds.
(b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty
(30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information:
1
2
3
4
5.
6.
the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued
to;
the name and address ofthe facility, including county location;
any applicable individuai wastewater permit number(s);
a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and
longitude);
the name of the receiving water; and
the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit.
(c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the
Department.
For fresh waters and coasta} waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0
units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless
the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 11 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV — Technicai Specifications
this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units
for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH sha11 not vary below natural
background or vary more than one (l) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal
waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units,
the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural
background of fresh and coastal waters. T'he permittee shall include the naturai background pH
of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (Z) of this
permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration
of less than I500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration eyual to or
greater than 1500 mg/l.
In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from
floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on
surface waters.
If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph
(2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an
individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface
waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other
applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit.
If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any
source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having
to submit an NOI reyuest for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed
activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office
within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during
discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge
Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department.
All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic
Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit.
13 SANITARY MANHOLES
13.1 BUILT UP TYPE
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the
drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to
inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of
as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and
evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into
concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full
section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe.
The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed
twenty four inches.
Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of manholes.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�J
'
�
�
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 12 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
�
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a
stretcher course.
13.2 PRECAST TYPE
Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the
City Engineer.
AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5
inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be
a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum
concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days.
Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for
� approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance
to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by
the City Engineer.
�
�
u
�
�
�_J
�
�
�
�
��
Location inventary submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as
numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before
being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering
system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered.
Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of
Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2.
Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings
are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed.
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5)
inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing.
13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS)
Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring
shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade
changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section N, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete —
Adjustment of Manholes.
13.3 DROP MANHOLES
Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as
detailed on the drawings.
13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS
Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush
with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301.
13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS
The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type lI
Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 13 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which
have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have
the inside plastered with I/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below.
The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry
thickness of Type Il Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227
Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite.
13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES
Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a
manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling.
14 BACKFILL
Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources
as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or
debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all
fill shall be similar material.
Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand
shovels and thoroughly compacted to l2" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means.
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness
unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98%
compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a
minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test.
The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the
case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure.
15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC.
At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be
bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon
the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The
material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation.
16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM
DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or Iowered as indicated on the plans
or as indicated by the Engineer.
16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shalt be included in the cost of the work.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 14 of 128
l�
�
�
�
�
�
2/9/2012 ,
�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL
� All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the
site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said materiai off=
site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer.
� 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated
1 and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation,
truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal.
�
�
�
17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment,
tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable
material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item.
18 UNDERDRAINS
The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of
� Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe
shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and
aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A#57 aggregate
� may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be
stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8"
diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification
� For Smoath Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of
46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189
described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 -
�
�
C�
u
�
SDR 35.
Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe
exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C,
manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of
splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60%
flatting and with a double gasket joint.
Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe
with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure
to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall
be the same as specified far potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain
aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved
equal) per the construction detail drawings.
18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
� Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted.
1 020912 SectionlV.doc
�
Page 15 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above,
which shatl be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and
shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain
(specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway,
road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item.
19 STORM SEWERS
All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless
otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941
of the current FDOT Specifications.
All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall he wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent
(as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit
price for the pipe.
All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty
is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street
befare laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No
pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and
not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that
the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout.
19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes,
inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream
manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole
cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter)
19.2 TESTING
The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all
conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer
which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration.
The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by
filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the
crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer,
whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or
exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish
all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the
Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own
expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer,
remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No
trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be
acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation.
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 16 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
��
V
l�
,
L1
L�
Section N — Technical Specifications
19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
� Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted,
measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of
storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price
� includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap,
labar and incidentals, etc.).
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
�
20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1 MATERIALS
20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON.
Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R.
35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly
marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber
sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying
length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20-feet.
Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and
fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP
water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline
easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral
connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets
shall be C 900, SDR l 8 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41.
A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line.
20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless
otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile
iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 4l of these Technical Specifications
for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures
recommendations.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet
radiation shall be rejected.
20.2 INSTALLATION
20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained
in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell IJNI B 5.
The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable
� width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and
compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be
� 020912 SectionN.doc Page 17 of 128 2/9/2012
�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted
haunching material or pipe alignment.
Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow
preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without
standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to
prevent flotation or misalignment.
Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to
remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (l/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm
support of pipe.
Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an
approved water stop around pipe joint entry.
The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is
required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction
inspector the location of all new laterals.
20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical
Specifications for water main pipe.
20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings
describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from
the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings
will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main
pipes in manholes.
20.4 TESTING
20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS
T'he Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all
conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level
may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying
above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a
hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test
section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the
exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter
per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the
amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or
exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to
remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire
length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after
they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The
Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of
bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-
inches shall be cause for rejection.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 18 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
l�
L',
�
�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the
line.
20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS
Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of l50 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as
described in Section 41.04 ofthese Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains.
20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT
20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE
� Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per
appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for
payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes.
� Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline
of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the
property line.
�
u
�
�
�'
�
�
r
�
�
�
Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete
the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering,
backfill and grading.
20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE
Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of
these Technical Specifications for water main pipe.
21 DRAINAGE
The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the
progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them.
22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE
22.1 BASE
This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall
refer to Section N, Article 1"Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional
roadway base and subgrade items.
Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or
directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a
minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor
and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing
laboratory perform all reyuired density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the
limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply.
Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 19 of 128 2!9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done
to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can
commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material
shall be included in the bid item for base.
The Contractor shall notify the Project lnspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base
and subgrade placement or reworking.
The following base materials are acceptable:
l. SHELL BASE: Shel} base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted
thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the
prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base.
2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections
200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a
minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a
FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shafl be included in the bid item
price for base.
3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition),
and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed
concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified
laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms
to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation
tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous
operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more freyuently by the City
Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price
for base.
4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed
in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have
a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane
Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 34l of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise
noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with
asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for
the work.
The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered
Florida Professionat Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design
shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S1. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall
be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer.
The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use
of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement
shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests
(i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing freyuency shall be
at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil
cement design.
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 20 of 128
�
�
��
�
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
2i9i2o � 2 ,
,
�
u
�
�
'
�
��
i
Section IV — Technical Specifications
5. ASPHALT BASE: Fuli depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum
compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and
compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in
the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item
price for asphalt or base.
6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans cal] far the working of the existing base, the
finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless
otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in
accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The
density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200-7
of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements
are per Section 330-11 and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
, The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as
called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (U2"). Areas
deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if
� so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be
made for such deficient areas that are left in place.
�
�
'
22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE
The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item),
stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to
complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt
unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
22.2 SUBGRADE
All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of
' FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall
have a minimum compacted thickness of l2" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by
the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's
� Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of
the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract
Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in
� accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing,
grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to
prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or
� subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value
after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade.
�
�
,
22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place
and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 21 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values
shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in
thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable
tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment,
however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition).
22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading,
compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in
the bid item for base.
23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS
This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design
asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted.
23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
23.1.1 AGGREGATE
All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections
901 through 9l 5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS,
EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE
The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous
materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications
(latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance
procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing
laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all
materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every l 000 tons
include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to
determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along
with the tests or analyses made by the Contractar, to determine compliance with the applicable
specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractar hereby understands and
accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent
testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the reyuirements of the Contract
documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of
removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the
Contractor.
Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the following_
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 22 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�J
�
'
,
�
�
�
��
i�
�
�
�
�
�
,
LJ
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
��
'
�
,
�
r
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
l. Density per Section 330-1 l of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications.
3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of'/4" or greater shall be
corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness
for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the
Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-I52.3 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of '/4" or greater, the Engineer will
determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the
pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness
specified in the contract.
The Contractor shall notifv the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all asphalt.
23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES
All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's
2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR
to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may
be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight.
23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS
All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements:
Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction)
COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches)
THICKNESS
(Inches) Type S—I Type S—I with Type S—llI FC-3 Type S—III Type S—I
Type S—Ill with FC-3 with FC-3
Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer
1 st 2nd 1 st 2"d 1 st 2nd l st 2°d l st 2nd 1 st 2nd
1 l 1
l'/z I'/z
2 ���4 3�4 * 1 1
2'/z 1'/a l'/a 1'/z l 1'/a l
3 1'/z l'/z 2 l 2 l
* At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets
Additional Notes:
1. Type S—Ill shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only).
� 020912 SectionIV.doc
I
Page 23 of 128
2!9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 33l and 337
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement
design detail.
5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S—III per Section 33l of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed
limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000,
and all residential streets.
6. An FC-3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall
be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of
3000 or greater.
23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of
operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture,
surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with
Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION
23.6.1 CRACKS
Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired priar to the application of asphaltic concrete by
the following steps:
1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method.
2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as
appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the
level of the surrounding roadway surface.
3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks
are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking.
4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
23.6.2 POTHOLES
Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps:
1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method.
2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole.
3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted.
4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 24 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
i
�
i
_�
i
�
��
�
�
,
�
r
�
'
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall
be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each
item.
The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions:
The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements.
The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exeeeding the minimum
requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel
adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or
fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per
manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each
riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring
section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original
casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that
the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are
thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each
riser.
If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of
� pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and
compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is
acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable.
� All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final
asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs ar on the plans, the paving
operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On
� arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between
initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree
aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included
1 in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they
are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of
impending wark and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled
�
pavmg.
23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS
� 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed
by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid
item for asphalt.
,
�
2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the
road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans.
3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely
manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements.
4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving,
' all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or
mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be
eyuipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the
� 020912 SectionlV.doc Page 25 of 128 2/9/2012
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day
before leaving the job site.
5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's
discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost
(including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the
plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard
Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless
otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
7. If an asphalt rubber binder is reyuired, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336
of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications.
8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be '/4" above the lip
or face of said curb per City Index l O1.
23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in
Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All
asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT
Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition).
2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to
Sections 90l and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition).
3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise
specified in the Scope of Work.
4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition).
23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Basis of ineasurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and
accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used.
23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and
measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack
and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching,
filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 26 of 128
r
r
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�'
�
'
�
��
2/9/2012 �
,
r
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
LJ
�
,
�
�
'
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT
When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in
accordance with the following provisions:
l. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price
Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening.
2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT
shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet
site. The address is: http://wwwl l.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business
with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For
additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000.
3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be
used for the initial determination of the asphalt price.
4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt
will be used for payment calculation.
5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period
for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index.
6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat.
7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made
for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time.
8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt.
25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS
25.1 IRRIGATION
25.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic
underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the
underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or
specified. Wark noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay
item.
B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the
turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be
sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of
the Engineer.
25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The irrigation work shall be installed by yualified personnel ar a qualified irrigation
subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope,
mainline, system pressure, controls, etc.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
,
Page 27 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all
applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work
shall apply.
C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with
the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject
material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall
be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the
Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of
three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information:
l. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour
emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and
address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where
replacement equipment can be purchased.
2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract.
3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment.
4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and
"hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the
Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered.
a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and
maintenance.
b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and
maintenance.
25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground
improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting
requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of
main lines.
B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials.
C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until
final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen,
or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the
contractor.
D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to
the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to
comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the
public.
25.1.1.3 WARRANTY
A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory
service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 28 of 128 2/9/2012
,
'
�
'
'
�
,
,
,
�
��
,
�
�
�
�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or
faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT.
25.1.2 PRODUCTS
25.1.2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations
from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted.
25.1.2.2 PIPING
A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and
tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, ll20, Schedule 40,
conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785.
C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the
mainline is reyuired to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80.
25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS
A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification far Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or
trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with
threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples.
25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER
A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as
recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end.
B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The
Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe.
25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant.
25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES
25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve
2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals
3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors
4. Non-Shock Safe-T Shear Stem
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
'
Page 29 of 128
2/9/2012
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal.
25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/Z" IN. AND LARGER
A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings:
l . AW WA-C-509
2. 200 Ib. O. W.G.
3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B
4. Deep socket joints
5. Rising stem
6. Bolted bonnet
7. Double disc
8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle
B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5'
long with a 2" square operating nut.
25.1.2.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater)
25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the
diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a
pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating
shall not be less than I50 psi.
B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic,
stainless steel and other chemical/LJV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece
diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice.
C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip
inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections.
D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable
from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California, or approved equal.
F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings.
25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES
A. For remote control drip valve assembly and IJNIK control timer use a Brooks #36
concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal.
B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek # 181014 (10") circular valve box with # 181015
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 30 of 128
�
�
�
,
2/9/2012 ,
'
J
�
1
i
�
'�J
�
,
�
,
'
,
'
'
�
�
'
,
'
,
Section IV —Technical Specifications
C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box
cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal.
25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION
25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION
Wlth # 1 g2��2
A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear
polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning,
integra) drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be
brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside
diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded
to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers
shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-
flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper.
25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION
A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet
pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and
with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating
pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9
gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure
compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The
drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be
available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified.
Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum
system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius
shall be 7".
B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be
installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction.
25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES
A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each
independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning
of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect
directly to the dripline.
25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high
point(s}. The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi.
25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds
per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating
accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high-
impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed
stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the
water passage.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 31 of 128 2/9/2012
Sectio� IV —Technical Specifications
25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS
A. The filter shall be a mu}tiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial
size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be
constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance.
25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS
A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings
and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the
integrity of the subsurface irrigation system.
25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER
A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate
transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from
the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type
which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function
normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall
function if submerged in water.
B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to
insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for
screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box.
C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless
of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either
sequentially or independently.
D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station
run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a
seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed
on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to
the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of
manual single station or manual program operation.
E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora,
California USA.
25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER
A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field
Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an
infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS
plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall
operate on one 9V alkaline battery.
B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad.
A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after
one minute when not in use.
C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of ITNIK
Control Modules.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 32 of 128 2/9/2012
,
�
LJ
'
�
�
�
�
,
'
,
C�
1
'
'
,
�
'
�
�
,
,
'
'
'
'
�
,
'
Section IV —Technical Specifications
D. The Fie1d Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID
A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing
installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series
valve.
B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.,
Glendora, California USA.
25.1.3 EXECUTION
25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before wark is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general
details of the work.
B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced.
C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary
shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed,
except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor
in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given
to the Contractor.
D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by
outside authorities.
E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically
mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions.
F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific
interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation ar
clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the
decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall
be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost.
G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of
sprinkler eyuipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other
underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract
Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the
manner by which it relates to the installation.
H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that
obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or
specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer.
I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving
prior to roadway base.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 33 of 128 2/9/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL
A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches.
Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on
Drawings.
B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all
lines of other trades.
C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind.
D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45
degrees to 90 degrees.
E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities.
25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING
A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have I 8" of fill placed over the pipe.
B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter
larger than '/2 in.
C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition.
D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil.
E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs.
F
Compact each layer of fill with approved eyuipment to achieve a maximum density per
AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed
95% of maximum density.
Compaction shall be obtained by the use of inechanical tampers or approved hand
tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more
than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall
have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to
prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities.
25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING:
A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on
Drawings.
B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines.
1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations.
2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated.
C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure
supply line.
D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between
site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original
Drawings, and without additional cost.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 34 of 128 2/9/2012
,
,
�
'
'LJ
,
,
�
�
,
,
,
'
I'
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of
approved layout.
25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION
25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY
A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the
Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost
to the Owner.
25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES
A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install
lines and required assemblies in accardance with details on Drawings.
B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own
outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly.
C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical
Special Provisions.
D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the
male.threads only.
25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER)
A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway,
utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE
A. Install p}astic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent.
1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling.
2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water
pressure is on.
3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for
solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent
manufacturer.
C. Curing
' 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24
hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure.
,
,
D. Flushing the system:
1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control
valves and flush out the system with a full head of water.
E. Installing piping under existing pavement:
1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & baring.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
'
Page 35 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing
pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be
accomplished at no additional cost.
25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS
A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans.
1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior
to installation.
25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the
top of the valve to finish grade.
B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other
eyuipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer
than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways.
G Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for
each sprinkler zone.
25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES
A. Install where indicated and with sufficient ciearance from other materials for proper
maintenance.
B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill.
25.2 LANDSCAPE
25.2.1 GENERAL
25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal,
Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and
Special Conditions when required.
25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory
agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and
environmental matters.
B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the
contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the
Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing.
25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to
the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 36 of 128 2/9/2012
�J
�J
�
u
'
,
�
�
r
'
'
,
,
--,
��
,
'
,
,
'
�
,
'
'
,
,
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
incidental to executing and completing all landscape wark shown on the Plans,
Schedules, Notes and as specified herein.
B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to
prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish
grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish,
plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to
execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans.
C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to
prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will
appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the
landscape drawings.
D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document.
25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who
shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors
under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work,
shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their
commencement of work on the project.
B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices.
C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the
� Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the
Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate
and be considered the controlling document.
,
I �'.
�u
'
'
'
,
,
D. During this work, the Contractor shali be responsible far maintaining safety among
persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape
Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting
from compliance or non-compliance with these standards.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is
built into or affects the work in this Section.
F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to
excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770.
G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the
work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in
conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect.
25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance
period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established
by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year.
B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all
specified work.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
'�
Page 37 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS
A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor
must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of
bidding.
B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of
the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void.
C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any
substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without
approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk.
D. All material acyuired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions
and warranties stated herein.
25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATtONS/DEFINITIONS
O.A. or HT.:
The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of
the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
C. T.:
C. W.:
SPR.:
Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with
no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or
similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds.
Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf
sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms
or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the
fronds.
Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not
including extreme leaves, branches or fronds.
ST. TR.:
Straight trunk.
MIN.:
Minimum.
GAL.:
O. C.:
DIA.:
L vs.:
Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc.
On center, distance between plant centers.
Diameter.
Leaves.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 38 of 128
LJ
'
�
,
LJ
'
'
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
�
li
�
2/9l2012 '
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifica[ions
D.B.H.:
Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1 /2 feet above
grade.
CAL.:
�
B&B:
'
PPP:
'
FG:
� STD.:
' Owner:
�
�
,
�
'
'
L_J
'
'
Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade,
larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade.
Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American
Association of Nurserymen.
Plants per pot.
Field grown.
Standard, single, straight trunk.
To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work
is performed.
Owner's Representative:
Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of
materials specified and execution of installation.
Contractor:
Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor.
Landscape Architect:
This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the
landscape Plans and Specifications.
25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune
prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark,
break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If
plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shatl be suitably covered.
B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected
from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have
been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be
pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time.
C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than
1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less
than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B& B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall
have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
'
Page 39 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burtapped, and wire bound if needed. Root
pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at
the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except
plastic shrink wrap for transport only.
E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches
of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a
minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling.
Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be
removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of
delivery.
F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs
in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots
moist.
G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof
tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.
H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after
stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing
in a shaded area.
25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS.
A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions
under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project
Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of
conditions and full responsibility for the completed work.
B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become
available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and
following the approved schedule. If seasona] limitations apply, notify the Landscape
Architect for adjustments to the Schedule.
C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting
procedures.
D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage
conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing
prior to planting.
E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns,
protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations.
25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon
award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 40 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
'
'
i�
r--,
I�I
�
�
'
�_ �
'
'
,
��
�,
�
'
I',
'
'
'
�_J
'
LJ
'
,
'
�
�
,
,
'
,
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The
Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule.
B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order
to complete the wark within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the
progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
C. The Owner's Representative's may reyuest in writing work stoppage. Upon written
request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend
delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the
Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any
additional costs which may result from work stoppage.
25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities.
Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties
concerned.
25.2.2 PRODUCTS
25.2.2.1 MATERIALS
25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE
A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material
Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of
Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint
Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names
accepted in the nursery trade.
25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in
the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the
species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant
diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in
leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems.
B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant
materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided
tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees
that have the main trunk forming a"Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable.
, C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality
for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part 1 and II,
Florida Department ofAgriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition).
' D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at
the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with
requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
'
Page 41 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by
governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that
are applicable to landscape materials.
F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit
Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape
Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source.
When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by
adjustment to Contract amount.
G. Height and/or width of trees sha11 be measured from ground up; width measurement shall
be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This
measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be
taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to
measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant materia) larger
than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with
no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery.
H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where
symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible.
I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balis of earth of sufficient diameter
and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the
plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.
Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B& B
procedures.
J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa
provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect
approves the substitution.
K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but
not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound
condition exists.
25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED
A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of
even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed
befare cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24
hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be
installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation.
B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place.
Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements.
25.2.2.1.4 MULCH
A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a
pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the pIan.
B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 42 of 128
I�
�
i
�
,�,
'1
�
'
2/9/2012 '
I�
Section ]V — Technical Specifications
25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER
A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for
application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully
conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws.
B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the
appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein.
C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for
all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling.
D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release
Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St.
Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square
feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the
nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be
l:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the
nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese,
iron, zinc, copper, etc.).
25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS
A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree
trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used.
B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper.
Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A
minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used.
C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with
� a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2" x 4"
by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk.
,
'
,
�
I _I
D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved.
25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL
A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and
loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test,
prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be
unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to
the Landscape Architect immediately in writing.
B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist
of I/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1".
C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil.
There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of
calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps,
roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or
, 020912 SectionIV.doc
�
Page 43 of 128
2/9/2012
Sec[ion IV —Technical Specifications
a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily
organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill, dirt.
D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of
Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width
of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil.
25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting
soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's
recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans.
25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION
A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal
members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed
so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree
within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at
breast height DBH at 4-'/z feet above grade.
25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM
A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for
protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install
as directed by the manufacturer.
25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS
A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the
site.
25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES
A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's
directions.
25.2.3 EXECUTION
25.2.3.1 PREPARATION
25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities,
irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work.
B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation
of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a
relocated position for any materials necessary.
25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS
'
�
A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas '
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 128 2/9/2012
I_ . I
'
1
Section IV — Technical Specifications
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's
specifications.
' B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been
achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting
bed.
,�
C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or
"Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect.
D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals,
' the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
�'
,
E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the
Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish
grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will
conform to the required fmish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface
drainage without puddling.
F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1-'/z inches in any
' dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated
material off the site.
'
1
,
J
'
1
1
�
'
25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING
A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of
Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the
full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8
inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface
drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release
fertilizer according to product instructions and rate.
25.2.3.t.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS
A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with
Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas
adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's
Specifications.
B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-
grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth,
even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf
flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing
yard drains.
D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1)
pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed
granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form.
Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil.
' SectionN.doc
l 1
Page 45 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
25.2.3.2 I NSTALLATI O N
25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (lF SPECIFIED)
A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated.
Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction.
B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper
drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect.
C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill diri which is well-
drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 -
6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction.
25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans
by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as
the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent
blockage of signage, etc.
B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material
schedule (if provided), otherwise plants witl be placed in the planting beds at the
normally accepted spacing for each species.
C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of
installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant
sizes.
D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the
Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as
possible to the intent of the plans.
25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES
A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides
and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after
settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground
surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain
conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root
ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade.
C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved
equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting
tablets shall be placed uniformly around the mot mass at a depth that is between the
middle and the bottom of the root mass.
Application rate:
SectionIV.doc Page 46 of 128 2/9/2012
1
'
'
'
'
'
1
�
,
,
�
�
'
�
�
�J
Section IV — Technical Specifications
1 gallon 1- 21 gram tablet
3 gallon 2- 2l gram tablet
5 gallon 3- 21 gram tablet
7 gallon 4- 21 gram tablet
Trees 3 tabiets each '/z" (12 millimeters) caliper
Palms 7- 2] gram tablets
D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers.
E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the
base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the
sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all
tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of
the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade
Roots of bare ptants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in
among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection.
F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of
' the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball.
Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly
water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade.
�
,
G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each
variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to
straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant
a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant.
H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free
, Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at I20 degree
angles in a triangular pattern.
I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved.
'
�
'
25.2.3.2.4 SODDING
A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered suf�3ciently at its arigin to moisten the
soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut.
B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made
to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen
per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place.
C. Solid sod shalt be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface
� edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub
areas. Cut down soil level to l inch to 1-l/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying
sod.
�
�
D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water
shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50
millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the
application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will
prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to
keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade.
� 020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 47 of 128 2/9/20I2
Section IV — Technical Specifications
E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller ar other
approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and
insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of
sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall
be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated.
F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean
silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be
leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas.
G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable
wooden pins or by other approved method.
25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING
A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of
Transportation. See plan for type of seed.
25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING
A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound
nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum
of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at ] 20 degree spacing shall be used.
Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved
plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake
above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade.
B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be
used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x
16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a
minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade.
C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months
after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work.
D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially
hazardous areas.
25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING
A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching.
B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied
mulch.
C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before
compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified
on the Plans or General Notes.
D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of
buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a
minimum 6 inch clearance far the walls of buildings.
E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed
in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched
clearance from the outside edge of annuals.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 48 of 128 2/9/2012
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
LJ
Section IV —Technical Specifications
25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING
A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape
and form of the plant.
B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches,
and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree.
25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job,
keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess
soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition.
C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying,
staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications.
25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION
� A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on,
about, or adjacent to the work, as reyuired under the parameters of the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards.
�
�
�
��
B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage.
C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to
landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms
as specified.
25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES
E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials,
property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage.
F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees
� to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be
done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the
Contractor who is responsible for the damage.
'
�
25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the
beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance.
B. Operations:
1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds,
mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control,
replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections,
replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out
repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural
practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of a11 work under
� 020912 SectionlV.doc
,
Page 49 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the
University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service.
2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance
practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy,
vigorous growth of the landscape.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of
water for all planted materials befare leaving the site.
25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's
Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the
installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic
inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor.
25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any
part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set
forth in Plans and Specifications.
B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within I S days and notify the Landscape
Architect that the correction has been made.
25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of
all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in
writing.
B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the
terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty
period.
C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the
Owner.
1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in
performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment
suf�icient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such
claim.
2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved eyuivalent", or
in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species
specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract
price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative.
3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to
request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to
compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 50 of 128
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
2/9/2012 �
,
�
I
�_
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that
exceed specifications.
25.2.3.5 WARRANTY
� A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a
period of one (l) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is
either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no
�
,
Z6
� 26.1
charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation
during the warranty period, due to the Contractar's use of poor yuality or improper
materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same
with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant
shall be given the eyual amount of warranty.
HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING
INTENT
' It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12"
sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and
form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic
' sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and
functioning installation.
�
jl
u
�
�
�
�
�
,
26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record far the
fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for
prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the
installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system
has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The
installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system.
The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the
liner system and the installer.
26.3 MATERIALS
Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell
classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to
ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer,
from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material
shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum
property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements:
Materiat Pro e ASTM Method Value
HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi
Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi
� 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 51 of 128 Z!9/2012
'
Section IV —Technical Specifications
HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in
Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi
Expansion Coeff: c=0.009 in/in/deg F
At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D] 693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, fareign materials, blisters, or
deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results far review by
the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable
requirements. The Engineer may at any time reyuest the Contractor provide test results from field
samples to the above requirements.
Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded.
Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design
calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading,
water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural
strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications
of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or
approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal
system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system
approval must be received by the Engineer no later than l4 days prior to the date for receiving
bids.
26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage.
All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal
in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to
control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the
City's treatment plants.
26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit colar
television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television
system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of
the entire periphery of the pipe.
�
�
�
i�
I�
��
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
f
�
�
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 52 of 128 2/9/2012 I�
�J
�
,
'
�
��
�
�
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
26.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the
full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner
product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods
approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe,
pressure and heat reyuirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately
notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation.
Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or
problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of
irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, ar other defects in the liner
shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met.
26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the
ariginal opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer.
Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be
� resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected
unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect
any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local
' system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of
door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project.
�
�
�
�
'
26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
26.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully
completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center
of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems.
27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS
� New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the
pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be
constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the
� exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified
for the street paving.
� 020912 SectionlV.doc Page 53 of 128 2/9/2012
u
Section IV —Technical Specifications
When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment
shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways.
27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted
27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above,
which price shall be fu11 compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications
and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the
work.
28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
This Article deleted.
29 CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans.
Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a
minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to
exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition,
all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs.
29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted.
29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation far
all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all
materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans
or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh
reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise
specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete
sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings
where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh
reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be
positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shalI be given if the
welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 54 of 128 2/9/2012
1
,
��
i
r
�J
�
��
�
�
�
�
i
,
C�
�
�
'
�
u
�
�
1
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
Section IV — Technica] Specifications
more than l00 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the reyuirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS
Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6)
inches in thickness with 6/6 x l 0/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal
distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The
wetded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No
compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be
poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8
shall also apply.
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the
placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways.
30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete
sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted.
30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price
shall be fu11 compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the
specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where
required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
31 SODDING
Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at
the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and
excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and
structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform
finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be
graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod
that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in
advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall
continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure,
soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract.
Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be
determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials,
placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these
associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly
placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor,
equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 55 of 128 2/9/2012
Section N —Technical Specifications
basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shali be made until the
Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass.
32 SEEDING
Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The
seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to
be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic
conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982
and 983. However, no wildflower seed sha}1 be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used
instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 Ib. of Rye
Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required
that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured.
When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment
(including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in
place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such
work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work.
33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER
STORM STRUCTURES
For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to
235.
When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans
and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the
Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other
causes until acceptance of the work.
33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES
Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index
Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape
conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a
smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be
made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of
concrete base.
The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be
smoothed from inside of the manholes.
The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar.
Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course.
In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a
concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer.
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 56 of 128 2/9/2012 �
�
'
�
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
33.2 PRECAST TYPE
The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to
secure proper seating and bearing.
Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and
junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets
will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be
in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option.
Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or
outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of
precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be
provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated.
Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be
acceptable for storm structures.
33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment far Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis.
34 MATERIAL USED
� This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED.
C�
'
�
,
35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND
SPECIFICATIONS.
36 STREET SIGNS
T'he removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED.
All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division
in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest
edition).
The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in
advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal.
� 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS
�
�
�
�
�
37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording
taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets,
easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve
as a record of a pre-construction conditions.
37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING
The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in
any area.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 57 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS
The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio
videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly
engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation.
37.4 EQUIPMENT
All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with
accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection.
The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with
proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio
video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such
eoverage shall be obtained by walking.
37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUD10
Each recording shall begin with the current date, project. name and be followed by the general
location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each
video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio
recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in
viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective
description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio
recording shall also be free from any conversations.
37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO
All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the
date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time
information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be
displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name,
contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall
appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom
out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during
videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens
focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be
properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture yuality. The construction documentation
shall be recorded in SP mode.
37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION
The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end,
overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas
where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer,
highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly
indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used
as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the
ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the
camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 58 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
i
�
�
,
�
��
�
�
I�
r
�
u
u
�
�
�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
37.8 LIGHTING
All recording shall be done during time af good visibility. No taping shall be done during
precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to
properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of
those subjects.
37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL
The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional
to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of
influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping
shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute.
37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX
All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number
and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall
describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of
the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video
unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the
date.
37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE
Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of
construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be
limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features,
mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc.
within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults,
fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or
right of way at any one time.
37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES
The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items
provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work.
� 38
38.1
��
�
,
'
�
EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS
No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise
authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by
mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent
vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a
project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization
measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 59 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES
Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent
erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required,
depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. ln
no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days.
38.3 PROTECTION OF EXtSTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS
During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by
sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and
modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer
before installation.
38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES
Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative
buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment
onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the
case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration
process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other
disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters,
dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one
week of installation.
38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS
Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive
remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans.
During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided
they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City.
The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during
construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before
installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally
cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty
period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of
containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area
tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular
removal of sediment from the basin.
38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES
Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent
waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and
the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel
work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land
alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area
are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after
the in channel work is completed.
�
'
�
��
�J
I
�
��
�
�
�
LJ
�l
'
�
�
�
�
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 60 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
�
�
��
,
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of
the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream
crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractar and
removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a
condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity.
38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS
, All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of
excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to
issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy.
'
�
38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION
The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance
with the following standards:
a. No more than 4001ineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time;
� b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast
to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of
any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway.
,
'
r
r
,
�
�
�
�
,
I I
U
38.9 MAINTENANCE
All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall
and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required.
38.10 COMPLIANCE
Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more
stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a"Stop Work Order".
City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 60l and 607 are examples of accepted methods
that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 61 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
City of Clearwater - Erosion Control
This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible
for soil erosion control on their site.
The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of
soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways.
The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site
creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and
subcontractors accessing the property with equipment ar construction materials. Then rain storms
redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways.
When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The
procedure will be as follows:
1 st occurrence - Warning
2nd occurrence - $32 Re-inspection Fee
3rd occurrence - $80 Re-inspection Fee
4th occurrence - Stop Work Order
Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify
the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly.
The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to
support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on
an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check.
If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact
Construction Services at 562-4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741.
Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on
all land development projects.
Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result
in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder.
Contact Engineering Department with specific yuestions at 562-4750.
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 62 of 128
�
'
�
�
LJ
r
�
'
��
U
u
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
2/9/2012 ,
�
� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Sec[ion IV — Technical Specifications
CITY OF CLEARWATER
NOTICE OF
EROSION VIOLATION
UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7— EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF
ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION
CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE.
Warning
$32.00 Re-inspection Fee
$80.00 Re-inspection Fee
Stop Work Order
DATE POSTED:
Inspector's Name:
Inspector's Signature:
CITY OF CLEARWATER
PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741
&
ENGINEERING/CONSTRUCTION 727 562-4750
Received by:
(Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been
received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt
or concurrence with findings of the inspector.)
IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE
ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 63 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING
The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on
the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb
of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals
cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to
service connection.
Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by
the American Public Works Association as follows:
SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission
Municipal Electric Systems
HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission
Oil Distribution and Transmission
Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines
SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems
Police and Fire Communications
Cable Television
SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines
SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems
LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER
WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION
Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension
perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall
be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical
curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face.
40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND
GUARANTEE
This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK
SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.
41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND
APPURTENANCES
41.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in
connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and
appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up.
'�J
�
'
�
�
��
�
�
�
,
�
�_ �
�
�
'
�
,
,
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 64 of 128 2/9/2012 �
�
,
,
'
'
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
,
I�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
41.2 MATERIALS
41.2.1 GENERAL
Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall
he of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of
workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and
engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment
and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation,
except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings
and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects
during shipment and construction.
41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS
41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.S1 81 or latest revision.
Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table:
Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure
(In.) (PSI)
4" 51 0.26 350
6" 50 0.25 350
8" 50 0.27 350
12" 50 0.31 350
The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backf 11 lightly consolidated to
centerline of pipe.
Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision.
Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with
approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 104/A21.4 80 or latest
revision.
41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
' Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241
and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784.
, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be
compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings.
Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table:
'
' 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 65 of 128 2/9/2012
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length
(OD/Thick.) (PSI} (Ft)
4 18 150 20
6 18 I50 20
8 18 l50 20
Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the
use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage.
The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross
section elastomeric ring which meets the reyuirements ofASTM D 1869.
Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling,
storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe
material for potable water service.
All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid
strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece
of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to l2-inches minimum
above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the
adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass
plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M
brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and
elbows.
41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS
Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in
accordance with reyuirements ofANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall
be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require
reyuirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in
accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 111 /A 21.1 l. When reference is made to ANSI/AW WA
Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic
(USA) manufacture will be acceptable.
41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT
Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved
mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants
shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on
hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint
connectors.
41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING
All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining
gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing
spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 66 of 128 2!9/2012
'
��
L�
'
�'�
r
'
,
�
�
�
,
�
LJ
�
,
'
,
,
I_J
'
�
'
�
'
'
'
LJ
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris
within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method
by the Engineer.
41.2.3 GATE VALVES
Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with
respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures,
shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall
be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted
with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all
valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise).
Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown ar specified, valves for high pressure service shall be
rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock.
The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body.
Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines
shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves.
Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves.
Three lnch Diameter: Not allowed.
Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be
resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with
ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the
foltowing features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage
at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing
body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with O ring
bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body..
Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the
� service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in
conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent
with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure.
, All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers,
bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass.
'
�
'
,
'
41.2.4 VALVE BOXES
Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast
iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3-
piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to
accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be
provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their
installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of
5& Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2& Sheet
2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 67 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.2.5 HYDRANTS
No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of
the City of Clearwater potable water system:
• Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant,
• Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant
• AVK Nostalgic 2780.
• American Darling B-84-B.
No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater.
Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AW WA Specification C 502
and include the following modifications:
1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery.
2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard G502 latest revision and must be UL/FM
listed.
3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure.
4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and
bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil.
5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two
sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line.
Breakaway bolts not allowed.
6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction.
7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and
corrosion due to moisture.
8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate
operation.
9. Operating nut shall be a#7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut.
10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into
upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device.
11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber.
12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with O-
rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe.
13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections
with a breakable coupling.
14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories.
15. Hydrant shall have a 5-l/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open
16. Hydrant shall be without drains.
17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper
nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread
Specifications.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 68 of 128 2/9/2012
1
'
�
�--
,
,
�
'
'
'
�
'
�
'
'
�
,
'
,
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
l8. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with
AWWA standard G502-85 or latest revision.
All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AW WA Specification C 502.
Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from
' the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent
movement of the hydrant.
,
�
All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may
be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system.
No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of
Clearwater's Engineering Department.
41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
' Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service
connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be l-1 /2-inch. Service saddles shal) be used on all 2-
inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC
' 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy ar nylon coating and shall have stainless
steel straps.
,
,
,
�
,
'
'
'
,
'
41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS
]. All materials shalt be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA
Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the
tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials.
2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery;
and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or
unsatisfactory material shall be used.
3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects
shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site.
4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in
handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The
Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that
are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be
purchased from the City and installed by City work forces.
Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery
(service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest
revision.
Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when
required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from
possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed
are:
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 69 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting,
approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the
assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve.
2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum
of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically
operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit
must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each
device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks.
41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES
Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 4l2 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel
body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel
bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug.
41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS
Blow offs are not allowed.
41.3 CONSTRUCTION
41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING
Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shal} be loaded and unloaded by lifting
with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall
such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against
pipe already on the ground.
2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any
part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his
expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite
or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench.
41.3.2 PIPE LAYING
41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the reyuired lines and grades with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems
plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and
sterilization of the pipe can be completed.
The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42-
inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and
obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress
of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is reyuired, the Engineer
shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or
arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the
obstructions.
�"
L
'
'
'
'
'
'
Cl
�
,
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 70 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
'
'
, Section 1V —Technical Specifications
41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION
' Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used
by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves
and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick,
' ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materiafs
and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or
dumped in the trench.
� If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage
shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective
repairs or rejection of the damaged items.
,
'
�
'
�
,
'
L�
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended
above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined
with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe
or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs
or rejection.
All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each
pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped
clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is
being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place
without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the
trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there
until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools,
clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the
pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with
approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to
prevent dirt from entering the joint space.
At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a
watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer.
The cutting of pipe far inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and
, workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth
end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the
' Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at
bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade.
'
'
Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal
plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of
ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions.
No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
,
Page 71 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS
41.3.3.1 GENERAL
Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified
above for installation of pipe.
41.3.3.2 VALVES
Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended
unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to
exceed 18-inches from the main line.
The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb
over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished
pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5&
Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet I of 2& Sheet 2
of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail.
41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS
Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and
minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located
l0-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the
hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of
two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants
shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's
Engineering Department.
All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the
curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with
nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer.
Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an
independent 6 inch gate valve.
41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE
Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by
attaching approved mechanical restraining rings ar glands and installed per manufacturers
recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining
mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use
of hydrant connecting swivel joints.
Where special ancharage is reyuired, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown
on the plans.
41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this
contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made
until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met
and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer.
'
�
I
' I
�
�
I
J
'
�
'
'
�
,
�
�
��
�
��
,
'
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 72 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
,
,
'
'
'
��
,
,
r
,
'
,
'
,
'
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be
made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the
actual conditions. Alt fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed
before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed
under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division.
41.4 TESTS
41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service
taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of I50 pounds
per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AW WA C600 latest revision.
All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any
hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and
all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor
at his expense.
The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water
for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line.
41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST
The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance
notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing.
41.5 STERILIZATION
Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new
construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance
with AW WA C651.
41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT
The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlarite solution conforming to
Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or
"Perchloron".
41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM
Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing
' shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are
not available far flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices
generally at the ends of the lines.
'
'
'
41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE
All piping, valves, fittings and alI other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a
minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then
remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never
more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 73 of 128 2/9/2012
Section N — Technical Specifications
41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS
After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free
residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall
be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set.
41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS
After the water system has been sterilized and tharoughly flushed as specified herein, City of
Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water
from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall
forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial
examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of
coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the
absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system
is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as
outlined above.
3f inethods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in
accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall
have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of
samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all
respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into
operation.
41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
41.6.1 GENERAL
Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form.
Payment for the wark of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum
payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate
payment wi11 be made for the following items and the cost of such wark shall be included in the
applicable pay items of work:
• Clearing and grubbing
• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal
• Shoring and/or dewatering
• Structural fill
• Backfill
� Grading
� Tracer wire
• Refill materials
• Joints materials
• Tests and sterilization
• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 74 of 128
CJ
r
'
,
'
Cl
�
'
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
C�
2/9/2012 ,
1
,
,
'
'
,
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS
41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type
satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line,
including the length of valves and fittings.
41.6.2.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation.
41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS
41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron
fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped
on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the thearetical weights by more
than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case,
the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance.
41.6.3.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation far furnishing all plant, labor,
materials, and equipment reyuired to furnish and install ductile iron fittings.
41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES
AND COVERS
41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished
and installed.
41.6.4.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all
plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover.
41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS
41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT
The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and
installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are
listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions.
41.6.5.2 PAYMENT
Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor,
material and eyuipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 75 of ]28 2/9/2012
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the
hydrant lead.
42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
This article not applicable.
43 TENNIS COURTS
43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS
43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS
All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per
l ,000 square foot.
Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned
into the Engineer's Office.
43.1.2 BASE COURSE
Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the
same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical
Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required.
Surface shall be cut to within I/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to
applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer.
43.1.3 PRIME COAT
The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RG250 and shall
conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction".
43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE
A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of l" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in
Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be
constructed running East and West.
Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot
straight edge. lf a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE
Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-Ill Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section
33l of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed
running North and South.
Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface
shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as
approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will
'
'
�
�
,
1
'
'
'
'
,
CI
'
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 76 of 128 2/9l2012 ,
l�
L1
�
,
�
�
�
�
,
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface
should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
43.1.6 COLOR COAT
43.1.6.1 MATERIALS
Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured
specifically for Tennis Court Application.
All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for
approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for
approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and
date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material.
43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials.
Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor
depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the
Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for use.
After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a
� deficiency of more than l/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled
or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation.
' In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications
of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the
Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not
� require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and
rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix.
,
!I
u
��
'
'
'
1
No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured.
43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE
The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required.
Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play.
The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for
all other others.
The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks.
43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES
Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines
shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint.
020912 SectionN.doc Page 77 of 128 2/9/2012
Section iV — Technical Specifications
43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be
conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50
degrees, Fahrenheit and rising.
NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of
all base and asphalt related work.
43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS
43.2.1 GENERAL
43.2.1.1 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of
clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The
scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with
sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal.
43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and
data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if
the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such
Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the
Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court
installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years.
The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of
five (5) years. The qualifications and experience ofthe personnel assigned to the project will be a
determining factor in the award of the Bid.
43.2.1.3 STANDARDS
The Contractor shall perform all work in a tharough, workmanlike manner and conform to
standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn)
Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The
Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment.
43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES
The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will
waive all permit fees.
43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT
The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The
Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in
conformance with the specifications and drawings.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 78 of 128 2/9/2012
�
'
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
��
�
'
,
'
'
'
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS
' The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an
area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within
fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided.
�
'
'
43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE
The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable
time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and
complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its
sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to
Proceed."
43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION
' 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY
The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for insta}lation ofthe courts.
, 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION
The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence
� surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction
area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The
existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the
� proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade materia) beneath the existing
tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade
material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new
� courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide
documentation of any recycled materials.
'
�
�
�
,
�
��
43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE
The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade
elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of
the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor
shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE
The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded
to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage
away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a
density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is
reyuired. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner.
43.2.3 SLOPE
43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS
Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in
one plane, as indicated on the drawings.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 79 of 128 2/9/2012
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION
43.2.4.1 LINER
Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a
minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to
deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows:
a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade.
43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE
The base course shall consist of six (6} inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality
Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it
shall be within one-yuarter (1/4) inch of the established grade.
43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on
four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be
two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the
pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five
(5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control
wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system.
43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING
43.2.5.1 CURB
Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of
one-quarter (1/4) to one-half(1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation.
43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE
43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE
A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be
installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The AqualHydroblend
material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by
rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary
from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch.
43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER
Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the
outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (l8) inches in depth with herbicide coating
buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis
courts.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 80 of 128 2/9/2012
'
i
i
i
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
'
�
'
�
�
t�
�
�
�
�
�
�
L_ I
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
43.2.8 FENCING
43.2.8.1 DESIGN
The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and
described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design
Ameristar HT 25 ar prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published
specification.
43.2.8.2 POSTS
All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT 25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25
pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system.
43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC
Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire
with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages.
43.2.8.4 GATES
Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically
engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for
double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and
designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes
as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock.
Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with
padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size,
non-lift-offtype, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2)
pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height.
43.2.9 WINDSCREENS
The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing.
Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high-
density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12)
inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties.
43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT
43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS
Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in
� width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance
between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles
court.
i43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES
Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven-
� eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a
reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support
� 020912 SectionlV.doc Page 81 of 128 2/9/2012
C�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
the net a height of forty-two (42} inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be
Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation.
43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR
A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA.
43.2.10.4 NET
A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall
have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the
exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic
material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel
cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length
between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic
material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc.
43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP
Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide
buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to
the center strap anchor.
43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES
Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly
secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 — 1/2) inches.
Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA.
43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Deliver the following equipment to the owner:
1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse
transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine.
2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles;
Proline.
3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline.
4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle
brush; with fence hook cast aluminum.
5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline.
6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation
location by Owner.
7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels.
8. Court Rake (1 each) — six-foot length aluminum.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 82 of 128
�
i
�
2/9l2012 �
'
�
�
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE
� Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana
Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation.
Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture.
� 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)
The owner shal} supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per
� square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30
gallons of water per minute for each court.
��
�
�
�
L�
�
�
'
�
C__ �
�
�
�
�
43.2.13 CONCRETE
Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C l 50, aggregates per ASTM C 33,
and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size
aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump.
43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING
43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional
electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport
lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings sha11 include all
necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating
system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the
maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play.
Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval.
43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP
The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the
light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps.
43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT
The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development
Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works.
43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES
The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures.
The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any
other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8} tennis
courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite
# 104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A.
Stewart.
Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information:
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 83 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Pole TI existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole TS
Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole TS new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2
circuits
Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits
Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole TS
Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole TS
Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles.
Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall
plan relocation light poles accordingly.
43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS
Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the
Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits.
New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include
the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles.
43.2.15 WATER COOLER
43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area
of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation
Department for approval.
43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN
Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal.
43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION
Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment.
43.2.17 WARRANTY
43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all
equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project.
43.2.17.2 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against
defective materials and /ar workmanship for a period of one (l) year from the date of
completion.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 128 2/9/2012
'
��
�
�
ii�
L�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM
The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of
two years from the day of completion.
44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC
CONTROL
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone
traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization,
hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be
necessary at outlying points.
44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of
performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction
permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the
Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for
Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident
Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the
U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of
Transportation, or most recent addition.
44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY
The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians,
� bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective
may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:
�
n
��
�
• Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones.
• Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he
proceeds through or around the work zone.
• Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle.
• Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material.
• Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site).
• Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices.
• Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or
maintenance work zones.
The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600
"When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone,
accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only
approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control
zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall
be provided by appropriate signs".
2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction
' 020912 SectionIV.doc
1_ J
Page 85 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
102-5 Traffic Control: 102-51 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum
standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans
44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES
Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local
Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of
requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting
business or sole access routes will increase in process reyuirements as appropriate. For all but
local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the
designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer.
44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS
Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways.
Traffic controi devises conform to national and state standards.
44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected
by the construction process.
44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS
Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options.
Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary.
44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
�
�
Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer ��
for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor.
44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS
44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
C-View Release
44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS
44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION
News Release
The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days.
44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a
specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the
Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone
562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan.
�.�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 86 of 128 2/9/2012 �
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
Section 1V — Technical Specificaiions
All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and seated by a Professional Engineer or
an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida.
44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION
The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic
control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may
make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The
Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector.
44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the
construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in
the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone
Traffic Control in the proposal form.
44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL
SUPERVISOR
The City may require that the Supervisar or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on
the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control
Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic
Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of
Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or
sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the
Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted.
The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review
the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The
Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain
traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traf�ic Supervisor shall ensure
that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period.
The Worksite Traf�ic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification
of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control
or to provide alternate traffic arrangements.
Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may
be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a
designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in
temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities
deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety.
45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING
45.1 INTENT
It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer
� and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin
impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand
� 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 87 of 128 2/9/2012
C�
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
exposure to domestic sewage including alI labor, materials and equipment to provide for a
complete, fully restored and functioning installation.
45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY
The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding
contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the
liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval
for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed
liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and
successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified
by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and
complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the
installer.
45.3 MATERIALS
The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type
and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following
properties:
Tensile Strength
Flexural Strength
Flexural Modulus of Elasticity
Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years)
ASTM D638 3,000 psi
ASTM D790 4,500 psi
ASTM D790 300,000 psi
ASTM D2290 150,000 psi
Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved
by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as reyuested,
complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20
traf�ic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no
structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures
specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box
181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach
Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be
approved by the Engineer as an eyual system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor
prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later
than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids.
45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for
rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean
interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior
to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of
restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local
traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation
operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the
sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's
responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency reyuirements. The
Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid
heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 128 2/9/2012
��
�
�
�
�
f�
�
��
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION
� After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is
completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color
television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The
� television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear
picture of the entire periphery of the pipe.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
l_J
45.6 LINER INSTALLATION
Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on
the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by
the liner manufacturer including operations far inversion, heat curing and reconnection of
laterals.
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place
during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass
pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes
shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots,
excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION
Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be
reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the
original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method
and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to
manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered
during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City.
The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a
later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be
available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information
regarding the construction project.
45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION
Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no
time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour
period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage
backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and
property damage costs and claims.
45.9 PAYMENT
Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation,
hypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to
provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of
manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for
storm systems.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 89 of 128 2/9/2012
46
46.1
46.1.1
Section IV — Technical Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING
MATERIALS
PIPE AND FITTINGS
The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight,
high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc.,
Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or
approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D
3350 latest edition. if fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall
be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to
or exceeding the compound used in the pipe.
To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall
be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied.
46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus
maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound
except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from
the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks,
holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density,
melt index, and other physical properties.
The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in
plant blending is not acceptable.
The Engineer may reyuest, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the
pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from
manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM
standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the
testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at
selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM
D 3350, 101.9.
46.1.3 SAMPLES
The owner or the specifying engineer may reyuest certified lab data to verify the physical
properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and
have them tested by an independent laboratory.
46.1.4 REJECTION
Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this
specification.
46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS
Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (lron Pipe Size) O.D. unless
otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as
specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 90 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
' 46.3
■ 46.3.1
Section IV — Technical Specifications
CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
HANDLING OF PIPE
Pipe shall be stored on clean, ]evel ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If
� the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that
it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment.
� 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS
Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of l 0% of the wall thickness of the pipe should
� be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt
fusion joining method.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
46.3.3 PIPE JOINING
Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the
manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of
meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to,
temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures.
46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE
Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused
sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred.
Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid
cutting or gouging the pipe.
46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE
46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS
The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes:
12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer.
16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer.
l 8-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer.
2l'/z-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer.
28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer.
34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer.
42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer.
46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
T'he existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or
insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a
bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will
be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to
inserting the liner.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 91 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS
All excavations shall conform to OSHA reyuirements and any additional requirements as set by
the specifying engineer or his representative.
Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall
be determined by the engineer.
An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the
polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of
the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times
the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible.
The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and
the water table.
46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER
After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and
removed for the full length of the access shaft.
A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be
connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer.
Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to
the project requirements.
Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion.
Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours
shall be allowed far the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow
the liner pipe to stress relieve itself.
The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it
terminates.
After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner
shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from
forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric
properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer.
T'he liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs
or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement.
The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of
access to the area, and the working space available.
46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES
T'he Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and
installation of the liner.
46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED
After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe
connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 128 2/9/2012
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A
neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water
seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel
bands.
46.4.7 BACKFILLING
All excavations shall be backfifled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost
� for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid
for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose,
it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to
� determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide
adeyuate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage
areas will be arranged for by the contractor.
46.4.8 POINT REPAIR
The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has
� been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be
made for each repair.
The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top
� of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing
pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner.
�
�
46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS
All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor.
Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be
graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in
street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer.
� 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE
�
�
47.1 SCOPE
This specification designates general requirements far unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints far the conveyance of storm
water.
47.2 MATERIALS
� All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter".
�
�
�
The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic.
47.3 PIPE
The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be
factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 93 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not
more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths.
47.4 JOINING SYSTEM
Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to
manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt
tight joint.
47.5 FITTINGS
All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or
approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.
48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS
48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT
Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the
ratio of 1.5 (one and one hal� cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1(one) cubic foot
(7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide
penetration in the operator's judgment.
Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the reyuirements of the American Society
for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland
Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot.
Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,
vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 833 pounds per
gallon.
Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing
adequate pressure to penetrate the area.
All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer.
48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH
GUNITE
Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit,
Michigan, except as modified by those specifications.
Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent,
set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified
strength.
48.3 COMPOSITION
Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to
produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
� Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete
which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall
have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi.
� 48.5 MATERIALS
Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the
� American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C l 50
for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds
per cubic foot.
�
L.�
r
�
�
�
�
Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong,
durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing
Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates.
Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture.
Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following
limits:
Passing No. 3/8 Sieve
Passing No. 4 Sieve
Passing No. 8 Sieve
Passing No. 16 Sieve
Passing No. 30 Sieve
Passing No. 50 Sieve
Passing No. 100 Sieve
48.6 WATER
l00%
95% to l 00%
80% to 100%
50% to 85%
25% to 60%
10% to 30%
2% to 10%
Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil,
acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing
833 pounds per gallon.
48.7 REINFORCEMENT
Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming
to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for
Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn
steel wire conforming to the reyuirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial
Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7.
48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It
� shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each
shipment.
Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the
inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling.
� 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 95 of 128 2/9/2012
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION
Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and
inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all
cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45
degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive
pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets
to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping
shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite eyuipment and the air pressure at the cement
gun shall not be less than 50 psi.
Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to
remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air/water blast to
remove all particles from the cleaning operation.
To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water
prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running
water exists.
48.10 PROPORTIONING
Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a
ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior
experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be
required.
If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of
all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring
materials shall be subject to approval.
48.11 MIXING
Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all
large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to
become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer
should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes
and from the drum at regular intervals.
Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of
water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as
required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of
cement, including the water contained in the aggregate.
Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without
being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused.
48.12 APPLICATION
Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be
placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below
32 degrees, Fahrenheit.
Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed.
Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the
020912 Sectio�IV.doc Page 96 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
r—,
'�J
�
��
�
�
t_J
�
�
�
,fl
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
i
Section IV — Technical Specifications
surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in
confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or
wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty
conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses.
Guniting shall be suspended if:
1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle.
2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected.
Gunite sha11 be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the
area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All
cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of
gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of inesh
shall be used far each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind
existing reinforcement.
The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be
sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the
surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond
with succeeding applications.
48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge,
preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and
adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air
jet.
48.14 SURFACE FINISH
Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to
ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal.
After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove
high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true,
flat surface.
After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish
except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings.
48.15 CURING
Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77
depending upon atmospheric condition.
48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION
During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which
may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be
adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping,
brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 97 of t28 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
48.17 INSPECTION
Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual
inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and
replaced with sound material.
48.18 EQUIPMENT
Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber
type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize
the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized
mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of
sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all reyuired material to the
delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall
have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall
by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled
by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of
drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour
shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts.
Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle.
The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shal) be approximately 150
feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air
pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following
table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using I50 feet of
material hose:
Comp. Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press.
(cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi)
365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60
600 2 2 80
750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90
For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be
increased by 5 psi.
Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient
capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the
longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made
for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses.
Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer
capable of producing the required material velocities.
Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the
operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line
water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line.
The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating).
��
I
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
�
u
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 98 of 128 2/9/2012 �
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION
49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT
It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of
manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to
these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion
protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular
system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All
OSHA regulations shall be met.
49.2 PAYMENT
� Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the
installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate
payment will be made far the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the
� pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation,
including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and
compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions
� and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or
shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as
required for a complete and operable system.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS
49.3.1 MATERIALS
49.3.1.1 LINERS
Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound
vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise
stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The
contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is
solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory
certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D
3753.
49.3.1.2 MORTAR
Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts
clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve.
49.3.1.3 GROUTING
Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of
clean, well graded sand.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 99 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the
removal of the manhole ring and corbel section.
Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls.
Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole.
Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the
manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner.
If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar
Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing
inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts.
Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout.
Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the
outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically
as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular
void to insure an adequate bottom seal.
Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the
existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to
seal the area around the manhole liner and piping.
Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with
grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure.
Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed.
Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage.
Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing
sod.
Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness
and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 l/2" of Pinellas County Type II
surface.
49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM
This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious
liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong
Seal MS 2 product.
Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The
applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory
training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, eyuipment and materials for applying
the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural
cementitious liner of a minimum l/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the
application_ All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and with the following specifications which includes:
I. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application.
2. The removal of any loose and unsound material.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page ]00 of 128 2/9/2012
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
'
,
Section IV—Technical Specifications
3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2
coat application.
49.4.1 MATERIALS
49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX
Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations
and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi
2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, I50 psi
3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, I50 psi
4. Cement Sulfate resistant
5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf
49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's
recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements:
1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; ] 000 psi 24 hrs.
2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs.
49.6 GROUTING MIX
Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according
' to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum
28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi.
� 49.7 LINER MIX
Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole
surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days:
/ I. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi
2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi
� 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi
4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H.
� 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi
6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf
� Product must be factory blended reyuiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight
shall be 50 S l pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot.
Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to
� 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a
lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight.
� 020912 SectionlV.doc Page ]01 of l28 2/9/2012
u
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according
to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide
conditions.
Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site.
Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per
cubic foot.
Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag.
One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108
pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume.
Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater
than 5/8" in height.
Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for
any heavy metal.
Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process.
A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough
troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray
applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively
smooth finish.
49.8 WATER
Shall be clean and potable.
49.9 OTHER MATERIALS
No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or
recommendation from the manufacturer.
49.10 EQUIPMENT
A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of
producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles
with discharge, and an air system far spray application of product. Equipment must be complete
with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered.
Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete
with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power
the hydraulic system and air compressor.
49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.11.1 PREPARATION
1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines
and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole.
2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high
pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 102 of 128 2/9/2012
'-1
J
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�I
�
�
�
�
C�
LJ
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
Section N — Technical Specifications
concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any
large voids with quick setting patching mix.
3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to
the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the
infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the
quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present,
drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout.
Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required.
4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting
mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations.
5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material.
49.11.2 MIXING
For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using
the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have
been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another
batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption
until each application is complete.
49.11.3 SPRAYING
The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running
water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all
cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light
troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the
bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface
sheen which could be l5 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second
application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then
troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the
surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel
marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have
elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is
sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at
the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to
a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a
minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow.
49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING
At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or
from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or
Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109.
49.11.5 CURING
� Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is
imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been
completed.
� 020912 SectionlV.doc Page 103 of 128 2/9/2012
��
Section IV — Technical Specifications
49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT
SYSTEM
49.12.1 SCOPE
Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring
structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of:
Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume
infiltration
2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows:
a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or
b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks
3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing}
4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch
5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils
49.12.2 MATERIALS
49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT
A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to
instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofng processes may proceed unhindered. The
repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall
have the following properties:
Set Time
Tensile Strength
ASTM C 307
Compressive Strength
ASTM -C 109
020912 SectionN.doc
1-3 minutes
1 day 510 psi
3 days 745 psi
28 days 855 psi
1 day 3,125 psi
7 days 7,808 psi
28 days 9,543 psi
Page 104 of 128
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
'
,
�
�
�
�
�
2/9/2012 �
�
�
�
�
�
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Flexural Strength ASTM C 78
49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING
1 day 410 psi
3 days 855 psi
28 days 1,245 psi
Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either
one or both of the following materials:
I. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in
and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows:
Tensile Strength
� Elongation
Bonding Strength
380 psi ASTM D 3574-86
400% ASTM D 3574-86
250-300 psi
� 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent
seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior
of manhole. Physical properties are as follows:
� Density
Tensile Strength
Elongation
� Shrinkage
Toxicity
'
,
�
�
�
�
i
�
'
�
49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING
8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574
l 50 psi ASTM D- 412
250% ASTM D-3574
Less than 4% ASTM D-1042
Non Toxic
A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system
combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to
seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three
components-two powders and a special liyuid) react with moisture and the constituents of the
substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks
the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for
approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are
as follows:
Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement
ASTM (to be given) ],200 1,800 psi
Tensile Strength
(7 day cure)
ASTM C 190
Permeability
(3 day cure)
CRD 48 55
49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING
380 psi (2.62 MPa)
325 psi (2.24 MPa)
8.l xl0 llcm/sec to
7.6x10 cm/sec
at 100% RH
at 50% RH
A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and
provide corrosion resistance qualities. T'he cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following
properties:
Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 105 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 1 I000 12000 13000
Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi ] 000 I500 1800 2000
Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90%Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08
AsUn C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage
Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile
AsUn C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3%
Astm C 497 PorositylAdsorption Test 4- 5%
Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F.
The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C
1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture
shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will
have a dark grey color.
49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING
A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This
epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including
excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be ] 00% solids, can be
applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its
uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the
following properties at 75 degrees F:
Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume l:l
Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray
Pot Life, hrs 1
Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000
Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20
Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5
Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi I,800
49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE
Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK,
Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin
Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others.
49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION
49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW
Work shall proceed as follows:
1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client.
2. Clean manhole and remove debris.
a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris.
b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease.
c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 106 of 128
LJ
�
�J
LJ
�
u
�
'
�
'
�
�
�
�
lJ
'
�
2/9/2012 '
�
Section IV — Technical Specifications
d. Remove debris from work area.
3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repair'tng cement.
(Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as
required by client.
4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration.
5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as
needed.
6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces.
7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces.
NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step
6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to
cement lining.
49.12.3.2 PREPARATION
An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the
rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to
remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from
entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective
screens.
49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR
Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill
cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying
waterproofing/crystal l izati on.
49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL
Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam.
1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface.
2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Inject material until water flow stops.
4. Remove fittings (if necessary).
49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS
1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiffbrush, forming an undercoat.
2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand.
3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal
forming process.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks.
5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat.
6. Allow one (l ) hour to cure before applying cement lining.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 107 of l28 2/9/2012
Section N—Technical Specifications
49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING
l . Dampen surface.
2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application.
3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches)
has been achieved.
4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole.
5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish.
6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating.
NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing
times.
49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING
Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a
thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6)
hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours.
49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP
The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area.
49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes
entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn
into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of inercury shall be drawn
and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the
vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60)
seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and
ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial
test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained.
Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer.
49.12.3.10 WARRANTY
All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years,
provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used.
50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS.
51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM
51.1 SCOPE
1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over
recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 108 of 128 2/9/2012
�
�I
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
�
n
�1
�
u
�
�
�
��
�
'
�
�
�
LI
�
�
�
�
Section 1V —Technical Specifications
site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex
System.
2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a
satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface.
3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution.
4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System
• 1 Coat ofAcrylic Resurfacer
• 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave
� 2 Coats of Plexiflor
• Plexicolor Line Paint
51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS
51.2.1 ASPHALT
Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths,
cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California
Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to
indentation).
51.2.2 CONCRETE
� Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL
FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the
concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer
according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and
� other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification
Section 10.14.
�
�
51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX
Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder
1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement.
51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT
� 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, Ievel
surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to
California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix:
�
�
�
I—J
'
Acrylic Resurfacer
Water (Clean and Potable)
Sand (60-80 mesh)
Liquid Yield
55 gallons
20-40 gallons
600-900 pounds
112-138 gallons
2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending
on surface porosity) at a rate of .OS -.07 gallons per syuare yard per coat.
3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with
California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 109 of 128 2!9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still
tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate
of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat.
51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE
After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted
rate of .OS-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix:
Plexipave Color Base
Plexichrome
Water
51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION
30 gallons
20 gallons
20 gallons
l. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be
diluted with one (l ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and
provide uniform application.
2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.OS gallons per square yard per coat.
3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with
sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light
pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee.
Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action.
4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to
application of subsequent coats.
51.6 PLAYING LINES
Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately
located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line
Hockey Association.
51.7 GENERAL
1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion
of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner.
Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local,
State and Federal regulations.
2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed,
property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled
with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner
will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site.
Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified.
51.8 LIMITATIONS
1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1 40°F.
2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent.
3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 110 of 128
2/9/2012 '
,
'
,
'
�
�
'
Section IV —Technical Specifications
4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings.
5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun.
6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use.
7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring.
8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates.
9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78
10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to l hour at 70°F with 60% relative
humidity.
11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery.
In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear.
� 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION
This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START
� OF CONSTRUCTION.
GABIONS AND MATTRESSES
I►'�/_� � �:7/_\ �
GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL
53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS 8� MATTRESSES
� Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a
double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of
a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge
, 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal
Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5,
Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating
, shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or
Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall eyual ar
exceed four 1-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239.
�
�
�
�
The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC
coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3
1/4 inches by 4'/2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC
coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire
core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall
diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire
shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily ga}vanized wire core, 0.087 inches in
diameter (approx. US gauge 13 Yz), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized
wire care plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be
permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge
joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed
condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a
minimum 3/4 syuare inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite
020912 SectionIV.doc Page l l l of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener
shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class l, or equal.
All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with
ASTM A-641.
53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING
The coating shall be gray in colar and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not
less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist
deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show
any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to
attack from acids and resistant to abrasion..
1. Specific Gravity:
a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34.
2. Tensile Strength:
a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi.
3. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. According to ASTM D-4] 2; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain.
4. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <l2% (Method B).
5. Brittleness Temperature:
a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 83 degrees centigrade
below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but
not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade.
6. Hardness:
a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested.
7. Creeping Corrosion:
a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall
not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a
50% SOLUTION HC l(hydrochloric acid 12 Be).
53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS
Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is
submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests:
1. Salt Spray Test:
a. According to ASTM B-1 l 7
b. Period of test = 3000 hours.
2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays:
a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test =
3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page ll 2 of 128
C�
Li
�
2/9/2012 '
I�
,
�
,
Section IV —Technical Specifications
3. Exposure to high temperature:
a. Testing period: 240 hours at ] OS degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287.
, 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS
After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit
the following properties:
, l. Appearance:
a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable
� change in color.
2. Specific Gravity:
'
,
�
�
�
'
'
'
'
�
�
,
a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial vatue.
3. Durometer Hardness:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
5. Elongation:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
6. Modulus of Elasticity:
a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value.
7. Resistance to Abrasion:
a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value.
8. Brittleness Temperature:
a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade.
b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade.
53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:
The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is
started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or
supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. T'he stone shall have a minimum specific
gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability suf�cient to insure permanency in the structure.
The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote
deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be
retained in the gabion or mattress baskets.
The stone shall meet the following physical requirements:
• Absorption, maximum 5%
• Los Angeles Abrasion (FM l OT096), maximum loss 45%
• Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12%
020912 SectionIV.doc Page ll3 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
• Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest
dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight.
All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical
diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by
weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening.
53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE
Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows:
I. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866
inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A
641, Table 3.
2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table I. The minimum weight of
the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. far the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and
lacing and 0.80 ozs./sy. ft. far the O.l 06 wire used for selvedge.
3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close
helix at a rate not exceeding l5 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel
having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is
completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such
an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard
Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985.
53.2 PERFORMANCE
Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed accarding to the manufacturer's
recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such
a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses
shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a
single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a
manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the
mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width,
they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall
be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no
additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not
ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections
forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of inesh is cut.
Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The
binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single
and double loops are alternated.
A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and
binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical
reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled
line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 114 of 128 2/9/2012
'
�
,
�
,
,
�
�
L� 1
'
�
r
�
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended.
� Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions
shall be filled to one third fall and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to
opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full
� and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one
two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top.
�i
�
,
�_l
'
Filler stone shall not be dropped more than l2" into the gabions and mattresses.
Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the
cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or
cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against
movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be
replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work
shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the
manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less.
54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPEClFICATIONS
54.1 SCOPE
� To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of
plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems;
ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces
' at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance
activities and reporting irregularities in the wark zone.
�
��
'
'
�
�-
'
�
,
The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street
medians including:
• Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traf�7c;
• Trash and debris removal from the job site;
• Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces;
• Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms;
• Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted);
• Irrigation service and repair;
• Mulch replacement;
� Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the
� Reporting of irregularities at the job site.
54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK
The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract
between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed
holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract
maintenance at other hours.
All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc.,
be completed before leaving the job site.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page ] 15 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
54.3 WORK METHODS
54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING
The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service).
Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in
writing by an authorized representative of the other party.
54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT
The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated
location:
54.4 LITTER
Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and
debris is a reyuirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes,
tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor
should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the
extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered.
54.5 VISUAL CHECK
The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or
damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours
after providing the service.
54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING
All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature
size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants
in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while
maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants
shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope.
Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following
flower formation, according to the following specifications:
54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY
DATE, ETC.) ,
Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to
remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded
heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation;
such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the
trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed
on palms.
54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL
All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the
contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion.
�
LJ
,
'
�
�
�
'
�
r
�j
'
,
'
�
�
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 116 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
�
'
'
�
�
'
,
l __I
,
�
'
,
Section 1V — Technical Specifications
54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL
Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the
contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications.
54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY
Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park
users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high
pedestrian use areas.
54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION
All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur
coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in
mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and
amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials.
54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA
Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable.
Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied
by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor
at his/her expense.
54.13 MULCH CONDITION
Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil
moisture, usually 3 inches.
54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR
� Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing
should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and
operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired befare the next scheduled
, system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in
advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to
the monthly maintenance fee.
r 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL
Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a
� less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be
replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on
City properties.
�
,
'
54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION
Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across
the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 1]7 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION
The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost
sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet
to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from starage and install over the
sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's
directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City
will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to
protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it
to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or
remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about
removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may
cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day
(5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site
work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for
the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate
per employee reyuired. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations
with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform
remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City.
54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE
This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage
working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits shoul
further than ten calendar days apart.
54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
�
�
'
�
,
or vandalism to be made within 7 !
d occur no closer than six and no
Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to
monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a
phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between
6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m.
54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL
Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the
following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City
shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be
given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been
completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed.
54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month
period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate
irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the
landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm
heads/fronds as he feels appropriate.
2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 118 of 128
'
,
r
,
r
�
'
�
2/9/2012 �
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with
trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature
caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing
of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option,
invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next
regular payment to the Contractor.
, 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked
vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular
schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall
, schedule to perform the reyuired maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining
circumstances are relieved.
� 55
55.1
'
'
�
'
,
�
�
MILLING OPERATIONS
EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE
Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be
performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Iatest edition).
The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all
milling.
55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS
1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating deviees, the contractor is responsible
to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal
environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment.
2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless
otherwise noted in the contract documents.
3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of
the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The
sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust.
Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in
addition to the roadways before leaving the job site.
4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled
to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line
, and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this
removal shall be included in the bid item for milling.
'
,
'
6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling.
7. Any leveling ar base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the
road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000
Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for
superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for
asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans.
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 119 of 128
2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed
that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a
failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and
at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City
approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item far
milling.
9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after
the milling operation is complete.
55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the
City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to
schedule delivery of material.
55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS
All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory
requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City.
55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their
owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners
the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility
adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing
operations.
55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES
The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances
shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's
Technical Specifications.
55.7 TYPES OF MILLING
There are two types of milling used by the City:
A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the
pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height
and pavement cross section.
B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of
pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry
shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer.
020912 SectionlV.doc
Page 120 of 128
�
�
�J
'
�
'
�
�
'
r
'
,
'
'
'
2i9i2o12 ,
,
'
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS
, Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to
restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend
approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale.
�
,
55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted.
55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT
' The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and
stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of
radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required ar placed at Engineer's
� discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals
necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications.
'
'
56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures,
appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles,
posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through
the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction.
Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section l 10 of FDOT's Standard
� Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the
Contractar shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in
accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements.
,
'
,
�
56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and
grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and
structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape
trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
57 RIPRAP
, The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble
riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's
Standard Specifications (latest edition).
'
�
i�!
57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT
The basis of ineasurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand-
cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble.
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 121 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV — Technical Specifications
57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling,
equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and
shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill,
dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap.
58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY
This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants
(WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs.
58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL
The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water
reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and
ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include:
• An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns
to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided
with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response
Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the
contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of
these documents.
58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING
Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding
employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must
include:
• Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training
in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around
gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas.
• The date of the training, and
• The means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents
and plans.
This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment,
materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit,
signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power
service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors,
��
�
'
,
�J
!�
�
'
,
'
,
�
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 122 of 128 2/9/2012 ,
,
Section IV — Technical Specifications
pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controlter cabinets and accessories, removal of
existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs.
All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's
Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer
registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report,
shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All
mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the
manufacturer.
All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both
the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown
features.
Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the
City's Traffic Engineering Division.
59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
� The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to
complete the work per the plans.
�
'
�
,
,
'
,
�-,,
60 SIGNING AND MARKING
All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard
Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traf�c stripes and
markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular
delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972).
The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or
markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No
payment will be made far these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or
markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made.
60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the
work per the plans.
61 ROADWAY LIGHTING
All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard
Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans.
61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
' The basis of ineasurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans
and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work
per the plans.
' 020912 SectionIV.doc Page 123 of 128 2/9/2012
'
Section IV — Technical Specifications
62 TREE PROTECTION
62.1 TREE BARRICADES
A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land
preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all
staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows:
1. At ar greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms.
2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer
species.
3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species
4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand.
B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts.
Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in
the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart.
Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and
shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative
must approve any variation from the above requirements.
C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is
terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during
construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall
remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor
utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative.
D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign materiat, trash or
debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier
no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No
eyuipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such
protective barriers.
E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any
protected tree or palm.
F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this
section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees.
62.2 ROOT PRUNING
A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/ar impacts to the critical
root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society
ofArboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce
the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to
any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the af�ected roots must be severed by clean
pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be
pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand
digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other eyuipment
designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching eyuipment or excavation equipment is
strictly prohibited. Roots Iocated in the critical root zone that will be impacted by
020912 SectionIV.doc
Page 124 of 128
�
�
r
'
'
�
LI
�
�
2/9/2012 ,
,
�
'
,
,
�
Section IV — Technica} Specifications
construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade
or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than l 8 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz,
Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects
for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction
inspector assigned to the project.
B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International
Society ofArboriculture (ISA) certified arborist.
C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted)
inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning.
D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is
� feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated
tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning.
'
,
�
E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any
root pruning activities.
F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter
from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said
root pruning.
G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be
done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less
than l8".
' H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent.
Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to
any work adjacent to trees to be preserved.
, I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any
excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected.
J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree
� roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled
around to prevent damage to the root.
' K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or
burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established.
L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may
� require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root
pruned trees.
M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root
' pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional
boring as opposed to open trenching.
�
1
�
62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING
A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or
under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified
arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and
other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300.
020912 SectionlV.doc Page 125 of 128 2/9/2012
Section IV —Technical Specifications
B. Proper pruning techniques far all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts
(pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree)
are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be
recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require
replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances.
C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed.
D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been
improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing
condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage
trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been
damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy
growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and
Ordinances.
63 PROJECT WEB PAGES
63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN
If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the
current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project
information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project
Contacts.
Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer
shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the
Project Web Pages.
63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES
Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section
508 guidelines whenever possible:
http:Uwww.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/
http://www.section508. �ov/
In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for
images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics.
63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND {TS USE
The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic
material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles,
apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion
shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to
fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside
vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public
Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public
Communications. This is for internal use only.
0209I2 SectionlV.doc Page 126 of 128 2!9/2012
i�
I II
J
�
�
'
�
.J
�
�
�
,
'
�
,
�
�
�
1
�
�
'
�
C�
,
'
'
'
Section IV —Technical Specifications
63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS
Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics
should be posted to the Project Web Pages.
63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS
The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back
to the City regarding the Project.
63.6 POSTING
The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web
Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved,
should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity
issues.
63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES
� Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages
up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's
Webmaster far posting.
� 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE
� 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS
When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractar shall utilize one of the
following options:
1 Option 1- Having the power lines de-energized and visibly grounded.
Option 2- Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350
� kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV.
Option 3- Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table
included in Section 64.2.
' 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
�
'
'
1
VOLTAGE MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE
(nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet}
Up to 50 10
Over 50 to 200 15
Over 20 to 350 20
Over 350 to 500 25
Over 500 to 750 35
' 020912 SectionN.doc Page 12? of 128 2/9/2012
�
Section IV —Technical Specifications
Over 750 to 1,000 45
Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or
registered professional engineer who is a
qualified person with respect to electric power
transmission and distribution)
'
�I
�
�
�
Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200
means up to and including 200kV. �
�
�
�
�
�
�_ �
�
,
�
020912 SectionIV.doc Page 128 of 128 2/9/2012 '
�
SECTION IVa
SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The Technical Specifications of the Construction Contract; Articles 1 through 63 inclusive;
are a part of this contract.
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the Technical
Specifications of the Construction Contract. Where any article of the Technical Specifications is
modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these
supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall
remain in effect.
MODIFICATIONS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ARTICLES 1-63
Basis for measurement and payment for all Articles shall be superseded
� by Division O1630 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical
Specifications.
ARTICLE 3- DEFINITION OF TERMS
3 Add to the definition of "Estimated Quantities" the following statement:
The basis of payment for work and materials will be the actual amount
of work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that he will
make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account
of any difference between the amounts of work actually performed and
materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts thereof.
ARTICLE 9 - OBSTRUCTIONS
� 9 Revise the 5`h sentence to read, Any survey monument or benchmark
which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal,
and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of
� the work by a Florida registered Professionai Surveyor and Mapper
(PSM).
'
�
,
ARTICLE 14 - BACKFILL
l4 Replace the 3`d and 4`h paragraphs with the following:
Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to
exceed 6" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the
Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Supplementary Technical Specifications
0992-0205 IVa - 1
L�
determined by AASHTO T 180 (Modified Proctor Density Test) to the
bottom of pavement.
Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the
ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction as determined by
AASHTO T 180 (Modified Proctor Density Test).
Backfill for structures shall be in accordance with Division 02200 IVa
Supplemental Technical Specifications.
ARTICLE 20 — SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS
20.1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe shall be superseded by Division 15062 in Section IVa
Supplemental Technical Specifications. �
Fittings and Joints shall be superseded by Division 15062 in Section Na
Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Anchorage: See restrained joint table in drawings for length of pipe to be
restrained.
Hydrostatic Tests shall be superseded by Division 15062 in Section IVa
Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Flushing shall be superseded by Division 15062 in Section IVa
Supplemental Technical Specifications.
ARTICLE 41— WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES
41.2 Article 41.2.2.1 Ductile Iron Pipe shall be superseded by Division 15062
in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Article 41.2.2.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe shall be superseded by
Division 15063 in Section Na Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Article 41.2.2.3 Fittings and Joints shall be superseded by Division
15062 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Article 41.2.2.4 Restraint shall be superseded by Division 15062 and
15063 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Article 41.2.4 Valve Boxes: Add the following statement- "All valve
boxes within roadways shall have heavy duty load rating meeting
highway traffic loads (16,000 lb wheel loads)."
Article 41.3.2.1 Alignment and Grade: Replace the second paragraph
first sentence with- "The depth of cover over the main shall be a
�
��
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Supplementary Technical Specifications
0992-0205 ►Va - 2
,
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
minimum of 36" and a maximum of 60" below finished grade, except
where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions."
Article 41.3.22 Installation: Add the following statement- "For push-on
joint connections, cut ends shall be ground smooth and beveled."
Article 413.3.4 Anchorage: Add the following statement- "See
restrained joint table in drawings for length of pipe to be restrained."
Article 41.4.1 Hydostatic Tests shall be superseded by Division 15062
and 15063 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications.
Article 41.5.2 Flushing shall be superseded by Division 15062 and
15063 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications.
The following divisions are included as part of supplemental technical specifications.
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REOUIREMENTS
01010
O1030
01040
01045
O1050
OI300
01380
01420
01500
01505
01600
01630
01640
01650
01660
01670
01690
O1700
01711
01800
Summaryof Work .......................................................................................01010- l- 6
Special Project Procedures ..........................................................................01030- 1 - 7
Coordination...............................................................................................O1040- ] - 1
Cuttingand Patching ...................................................................................Ol 045- l- 2
Field Engineering ........................................................................................01050- l - 2
Submittals...................................................................................................Ol 300- 1 — 7
Construction Photographic Record .............................................................01380- l- 2
General Equipment Stipulations .................................................................01420- 1 - 4
TemporaryFacilities ........................................................••--•......................01500- 1 - 2
Mobilization ................................................................................................01505- 1 — 2
Material and Equipment ..............................................................................01600- l- 4
Measurement and Payment .........................................................................01630- 1 - 4
QualityControl ...........................................................................................01640- 1 - 3
Testing Laboratory Services .......................................................................01650- I— 3
Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ................................................01660- l- 3
Substitutions and Product Options ..............................................................Ol 670- l— 4
Starting Process Systems ............................................................................01690- l- l
ContractCloseout .......................................................................................Ol 700- l— 2
Hydraulic Structures Testing ......................................................................Ol 71 l- 1- 5
Openings and Penetrations in Construction ................................................01800- l— 6
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02050 Demolition and Removal ...............................
02200 Earthwork .......................................................
............................................02050- 1 — 3
............................................02200- 1 — 12
� Marshall Streef Sa/snes Filter Design Section !Va
Supplementary Technical Specifications
0992-0205 /Va - 3
'
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03300 Cast in Place Concrete
DIVISION 5 — METALS
05500 Miscellaneous Metal Items ...........................................................
05532 Aluminum Grating ........................................................................
DIVISION 7— THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07900 Joint Sealers .......................................................................
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09900 Painting and Coatings
09902 Pipe Painting .............
DIVISION ll — EQUIPMENT
11175 Pretreatment Filter System.......
1 l 308 Submersible Wastewater Pump
.................................................
.................................................
.03300- 1 — 20
...05500- 1 - 8
...05532- 1 - 4
......07900- 1 - 4
..........09900-1 - l 4
..........09942- l - 1
.............................:..........11 l 75- 1 - 9
........................................1 1308- 1 - 9 �
DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13100 Instrumentation & Control — General Requirements
13120 ICS Field Equipment .................................................
13130 ICS Control Enclosures ............................................
13140 ICS SCADA Hardware .............................................
............................13100- 1 — 28
............................13120- 1 - 10
...................... 13130- 1 - 12
...........................13140- 1 - 9
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings — General Statement ................................................15060- 1- 10
15062 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings .....................................................................15062- 1 - 7
15064 Plastic Pipe ..................................................................................................15063- 1 - 2
15066 Tracer Wire and Alarming Tape .................................................................15066- 1- 2
I5100 Valves and Appurtenances ..........................................................................15100- l— l0
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Supplementary Technical Specifications
0992-0205 IVa - 4
�
�
�
�
�
�
IDIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010 Electrical Basic Reyuirements ....................................................................16010- 1 - 14
� I6050 Materials and Methods ................................................................................16050- l= 5
16l 11 Conduit and Raceway . .161 l I- l 1 l
16115 Underground Conduit MH and HH ............................................................16115- 1 - 10
� 16120 Wire and Cable — 600 Volt & Below ..........................................................16120- l— 8
16130 Outlet, Pull & Junction Boxes ....................................................................16130- 1 - 4
16450 Grounding and Bonding ..............................................................................16450- l— 4
� 16475 Safety Disconnect Switches :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::.16475- l— 3
16483 Variable Frequency Drives . .] 6483-1 - 3
16671 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1 kV or less .. ......... ........16671- l- 8
�
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
�
�
■yJ
�
�
�
�
�
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Supplementary Technical Specifications
0992-0205 1Va - 5
'
�
�
�
�
�
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The work consists of, but may not be limited to the following improvements:
Demolition of existing primary clarifiers, equipment, electrical and
incidentals. The work includes temporary supports, power, coffer dams
and bypass pumping to maintian the facility in complete and full
operation, whether or not specificed herein or shown on the Construction
Drawings.
� 2. Installation of two (2) Salsnes Filters, filter feed pump, relocated sludge
pumps, piping, appurtenance and electrical and instrumentation. The
work also includes construction of the concrete pads, concrete structures,
� sitework, utility relocations associated with the design, and all other work
necessary for a complete and operational system, whether or not
specificed herein or shown on the Construction Drawings.
�
LJ
4
�
Installation of 24" RAS metering assembly, piping, fittings supports,
concrete pads and ancillaries as necessary for a complete and
operational system, whether or not specificed herein or shown on the
Construction Drawings.
Integration of new filters into plant PLC/SCADA system that will include
modifications and/or expansion of existing PLC equipment, equipment
interconnections and connection routing.
5. Provide Record Drawings including but not limited to
� coordinates/dimensions/offsets of all new installations. Record Drawings
shall clearly show field changes, details not on original contract drawings,
as well as equipment and piping relocations.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and incidentals, which are
necessary for the full completion of the work whether specifically indicated in the
Contract Documents or not. This includes, but is not limited to, miscellaneous
concrete, dewatering, workplace safety, cleanup, etc.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Plans and the Specifications indicate the extent and nature of the work to be
performed.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
� Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-1
'
:
�
�
Plans: When obtaining data and information from the Plans, figures shall be
used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference �
to small scale drawings.
C. Copies Furnished to Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish each of the
subcontractors, manufacturers, and material men such copies of the Contract
Documents as may be required for their work. Additional copies of the Plans and
Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost of
reproduction.
D. Supplementary Drawings: When, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, it
becomes necessary to explain more fully the work to be done or to illustrate the
work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as
Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared
and five paper prints thereof will be given to the Contractor.
E. Contractor to Check Plans and Data: The Contractor shall verify all dimensions,
quantities and details shown on the Plans, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules,
Specifications or other data received from the Owner, and shall notify him of all
errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover
or correct errors, conflicts or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction or improper operation
resulting there from nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He
will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full
instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be
discovered. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Owner and the
Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume
all responsibility for the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of
materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract.
F. Specifications: The Technical Specifications consist of three parts: General,
Products and Execution. The General Section contains General Requirements
which govern the work. Products and Execution modify and supplement these by
detailed requirements for the work and shall always govern whenever there
appears to be a conflict.
G. Intent:
All work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not
shown on the Plans in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like
effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the
Plans or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent
or in the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and
shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically
delineated or described.
2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the
apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-2
�
�
�J
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as
1 meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only
material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, and
interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis.
�
�
�
�
�
�
3. The inclusion of the Retated Requirements (or work specified elsewhere)
in the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the
Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related
Specification Sections.
1.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer
The names of proposed manufacturers, materials, suppliers and dealers
who are to furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other
fittings shall be submitted to the Engineer and Owner for approval. Such
approval must be obtained before shop drawings will be checked. No
manufacturer will be approved for any materials to be furnished under this
Contract unless he shall be of good reputation and have a plant of ample
capacity. He shall, upon the request of the Engineer, be required to
submit evidence that he has manufactured a similar product to the one
specified and that it has been previously used for a like purpose for a
sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory performance.
� 2. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through
the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the
Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the
� Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the
Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract.
LJ
�
�
�
3. Any two or more pieces or material or equipment of the same kind, type
or classification, and being used for identical types of services, shall be
made by the same manufacturer.
B. Delivery: The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the
most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work
within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order
to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any related
Contractor. Storage of the Generators or Fuel Storage Tanks at the Project Site
will not be allowed. Contractor shall provide for off-site storage, at his expense,
should generators or fuel tanks require storage prior to installation.
C. Tools and Accessories:
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of
suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
� Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-3
�
C
needed to adjust
and appliances
properly labeled
duplicate keys.
�
�
, operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools
shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, �
and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and
2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified.
3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate,
securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's
name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating
data.
Installation of Equipment.
The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and
machinery of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all
emergencies normally encountered in work of this character.
2. Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the
foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Plans, unless
directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall
be correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and
shall be installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made
readily between the various units.
3. The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and
attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation
of the devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be
as approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the
purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for
installation shall be furnished.
4
5
The Contractor shalf, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor
for, and shall properly bed in non-shrink grout, each piece of equipment
on its supporting base that rests on masonry foundations.
Grout shall completely fill the space between the equipment base and the
foundation. All metal surFaces coming in contact with concrete or grout
shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy equal to Koppers 300M.
E. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: The Contract prices for equipment shall
include the cost of furnishing (as required by equipment specifications sections)
a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shalf represent
the manufacturer and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust,
test and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract
Documents. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner,
such engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by
the Engineer to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-4
i
�
�
�
O
�
��
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
l�
�
�
�
�
�
1.4
condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner
in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment.
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, within ten days after receipt of
Notice to Proceed, a schedule of Shop Drawings Submittals which shalt include:
1. The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers, and dealers,
2. A list of materials and equipment for shop drawing submittals, and
3. Proposed shop drawing submittal dates.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all submittals with the related Vendor in a
manner not to impede construction on the individuaf project(s).
1.5 CONTRACTS
A. Furnish all the labor and needed materials as ordered on a project basis under
the Contract (Agreement).
1.6 WORK SEQUENCE
A. All work done under this Contract shall be done with a minimum of inconvenience
to the users of the system or facility. The Contractor shall coordinate his work
with the Chief Operator of the Marshall Street APCF. There shall be no
disruption of the treatment processes, unless otherwise specified herein.
B. The Contractor shall construct the work in stages to accommodate the Owner's
use of the premises during the construction period; coordinate the construction
schedule and operations with the Owner and the Engineer.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION AREAS
The Contractor shall:
A. Limit his use of the construction areas for work and for storage, to allow for:
1. Work by other contractors.
2. Owner Use.
B. Coordinate use of work site under direction of Owner's Representative.
C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under
this Contract, stored on the site.
D. Move any stored-products, under Contractors control, which interfere with
operations of the Owner or separate contractor.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-5
E. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage of work areas needed for
operations.
1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of
the entire work. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility,
including testing, if the Owner, at its sole discretion, desires to accept the
individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion
and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership
and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year
guaranty period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of not
accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a
whole when it is completed and tested.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Summary of Work
0992-0205 01010-6
�
�
�
SECTION 01030 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1
1.1
� 1.3
GENERAL
PERMITS
A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for and/or obtain all
applicabfe permits not previously obtained by the Owner to do the work from the
appropriate governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all
applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Owner's
Representative. The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the
Contractor.
CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM
A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and prepare
for connections to the terminus of the existing systems all as shown on the
Drawings or where directed by the Owner's Representative. The cost for this
work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be included in
the price bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the
Owner.
RELOCATIONS
� A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of the relocation of
structures, including but not limited to light poles, power poles, signs, sign poles,
fences, piping, conduits, drains and irrigation components that interfere with the
� positioning of the work as set out on the Drawings. No relocation of the items
under this Contract shall be done without approval from the Engineer.
� 1.4
��
�
EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
A. The attention of the Contractor is drawn to the fact that dunng excavation, the
possibility exists of the Contractor encountering various water, sewer, telephone,
electrical, or other utility lines not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall
exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag these lines
as to avoid damage to the existing lines. Cost for relocation of all existing lines
shall be included in the price bid for the project. Should damage occur to an
existing line, the Contractor shall bear the cost of all repairs to said line.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that atl utility or other poles, the
stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, are
temporarily stayed in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and
that the utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice
of any such excavation by the Contractor.
C. The existing utility locations are shown without express or implied representation,
assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or that they represent
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
� Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-1
�
1.5
1.6
a true picture of underground piping to be encountered. The Contractor shall be
responsible for notifying the various utility companies to locate their respective
utilities in advance of construction in conformance with all requirements provided
for in the Florida Underground Facilities Damage Prevention and Safety Act
(Florida Statutes, Title XXXIII, Chapter 556).
D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be
rerouted as shown, specified, or required. Before any piping and utilities not
shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of
the location of the pipeline or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or
utility as directed. Cost for relocation of existing pipelines or utilities shall be
included in the price bid for the project.
E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing piping
and utilities. All utilities which do not interfere with complete work shall be
carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any way by
the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his expense as
directed by the Owner's Representative and/or the owner of the utility.
F. It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, sewer, telephone,
electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within
recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the obstruction
unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. However, when in the opinion of the
Owner's Representative this procedure is not feasible, he may direct the use of
fittings for a utilities crossing as detailed on the Drawings. No deflections will be
allowed in gravity sanitary sewer lines or in existing storm sewer lines.
SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER
A. Refer to FDOT Standards and Specifications Book, Section 8.
HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN
A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to
the Owner's Representative and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The
plan should outline the necessary measures which the Contractor proposes to
perform at no additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning.
B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative shall
direct, Contractor shall insure that he and his Subcontractors shall carefully
protect work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the
opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of work or materials is
damaged due to the failure on the part of the Contractor or Subcontractors to
protect the work, such work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the
expense of the Contractor.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-2
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
POWER SUPPLY
Electricity as may be required for construction and permanent power supply shall
be secured and purchased by the Contractor.
SALVAGE
A. Any existing equipment or material, including, but not limited to, valves, pipes,
fittings, couplings, building materials, etc., which is removed or replaced as
a result of construction under this project may be designated as salvage by the
Owner's Representative or Owner and, if so, shall be protected for a reasonable
time until picked up by the Owner. Any equipment or material not worthy of
salvaging, as directed by the Owner's Representative, shall be disposed of by
the Contractor at no additional cost.
�
�
,
DEWATERING
The Contractor shall do all groundwater pumping necessary to prevent flotation
of any part of the work during construction operations with his own equipment.
B. The Contractor shall pump out water and wastewater which may seep or leak
into the excavations for the duration of the Contract and with his own equipment.
He shall dispose of this water in an appropriate manner.
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
A. Before commencing work on any of the existing pipelines, structures or
equipment, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, in writing, at
least 10 calendar days in advance of the date he proposes to commence such
work.
B. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all necessary temporary
facilities for access to and for protection of, all existing facilities. The Owner's
personnel must have ready access at all times to the existing facilities. The
Contractor is responsible for all damage to existing structures, equipment and
facilities caused by his construction operations and must repair all such damage
when and as ordered by the Engineer.
C. Contractor shall provide protective matting, fuel containment and all other
materials, equipment and labor during construction. Any spill of fuel, hydraulic
fluid, or oil shall be contained. Any contaminated soil shall be removed and
disposed of according to all applicable federal, state and local regulations,
entirely at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall, prior to beginning
construction, submit a"Fueling Spill Prevention Plan" that shall clearly indicate
how fuel spills will be prevented.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section ►Va
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-3
1.13
1.14
CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the
governmental unit(s) and/or agency(ies) having jurisdiction over the work.
Wherever there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and
these Specifications, the more stringent shall apply.
PUBLIC NUISANCE
A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including but not limited to
encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, excessive noise or
d ust.
B. Sound levels must comply with all applicable state and local codes. Sound levels
in excess of those listed in said codes are sufficient cause to have the work
halted until equipment can be quieted to these levels. Work stoppage by the
Engineer or City for excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor of the other
portions of this specification including, but not limited to contract time and
contract price.
C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting from
the creation of a public nuisance.
FIELD OFFICES
A. Space will be made available at the site for the temporary field offices of the
Contractor (and his subcontractors) and for storage of construction materials.
The Contractor (and his subcontractors) shall provide all necessary temporary
fencing and gates to protect materials from pilferage. The location and type of
temporary buildings shall be subject to the approval of the OWNER.
�
�
�
�
�
�_�
��
�J
�
�
�
B. Record documents required by the General Conditions and other sections of the �
Contract Documents shall be kept in the office.
EXISTING FACILITIES- PLAN OF OPERATION
A. The functions of the existing wastewater treatment facility include screening, grit
removal, aeration, secondary clarification, sludge recycle, sludge wasting,
filtration, chtorine disinfection prior to discharge to the reclaimed system, sludge
digestion, and sludge dewatering facilities. These functions must be maintained
and shall be maintained by the contractor throughout the construction period
unless otherwise specified herein, such that there is no deterioration in the quality
of the treated effluent. At no time will an overflow of wastewater of a quality less
than that which meets the City's discharge permit and which is not disinfected as
required by State regulations, be allowed as a result of the Contractor's
operations. Construction operations shall be scheduled and undertaken so that
treatment of the wastewater is continuously maintained, as specified above,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-4
�
�
�
�
�
L_ !
'
�
�
�
��
,
�
�
,
�
�
�
u
L�
�
;_1
LJ
throughout the life of the project. The existing permit limits for the facility must be
met during the construction period.
B. All electrical work shall be scheduled to allow continuous electrical operation of the
existing facilities with a minimum of required outages. Any power outage or any
work which required interruption of the plant flow shall be scheduled during a
normally dry weather period of the year and at those times of the day and/or night
when sewage flows are low. In such cases, the Contractor shall submit a written
request at least seven days prior to the scheduled work or outage and obtain the
written permission of the Owner. Such permission shall give consideration to
recent weather conditions and plant flow patterns, as well as projected weather
forecasts for the area, and the Contractor's preparedness to perform the work.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the electric utility, as required, regarding the
scheduling of the power outages.
C. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed construction sequence to maintain
continuous treatment to allow the facility to meet the required effluent limitations.
Continuous treatment shall be defined, at a minimum, as consisting of the
following unit processes:
• Screening
• Grit Removal
• Aeration & Mixing of Process Reactors
• Secondary Clarification
• Sludge Recycle
• Sludge Wasting
• Filtration of Plant Water
• Disinfection
• Effluent Pumping and Flow Measurement
• Plant Water System
• Anaerobic Digestion
• Sludge Dewatering
1. Any process equipment, utility etc. necessary to maintain treatment must
be maintained. The primary goal is to maintain continuous treatment to
the required levels.
2. The Owner's personnel shall be responsible for the day-to-day operations
including meter reading, process monitoring, and establishing control
system modifications to ensure compliance with the effluent limits.
Maintenance of temporary process equipment including routine corrective
repairs and maintenance shall be performed by the Contractor as part of
the base bid price. Operational changes (valves, etc.} shall be performed
by the Owner of the Owner's representative.
3. As part of the construction sequence, the Contractor may find that
temporary pumping facilities and temporary piping will be required for
wastewater or other pracess streams. These facilities or other means
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section /Va
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030.5
4
that the Contractor elects shail be subject to the review and approval of
the Engineer and shalf be provided by the Contractor to maintain
continuous process operations.
Additionally, the Contractor shall make whatever provisions are
necessary to protect and maintain the continued operation of the existing
facilities.
5. All existing electrical underground services shall be located and identified
prior to starting any new construction. As each process becomes
operational, the existing electrical service to that particular building shall
be removed.
�
�
��
i
P�,
LJ
�
6. Contractor shall coordinate with the Wastewater Treatment Plant
personnel, in advance, all power interruptions to existing equipment that �
is to remain.
7. All other work including new construction and demolition not mentioned in
the above schedule may be performed concurrently with any stage of the
work as long as the pertormance of such work witl in no way jeopardize
the continuity and quality of treatment of wastewater. Nothing contained
herein shall preclude the Contractor from suggesting improved
sequences of work. The Contractor shall coordinate his work closely with
the ongoing functions of the existing treatment facility, chemical and other
deliveries and with the work of all subcontractors.
D. In addition to the master schedule, prior to commencing alteration work on any
existing facility, The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a proposed method
and schedule of constniction in the immediate area, taking into account the
precautions and requirements specified herein. Such work shall not commence
until approval is obtained with the Engineer and interruptions of normal plant
operations reviewed with the Owner. In general, temporary isolation of existing
plant components for construction operations shall be carefully coordinated
beforehand with the Owner and Engineer so that treatment of wastewater can
continue. All work shall be closely coordinated with the Owner's operating
personnel so that they can adjust their normal operating procedures to any
temporary conditions imposed upon them. No temporary isolation of plant
components will be permitted until the Contractor has on hand all materials, labor,
tools and equipment necessary to accomplish the work in that isolated area. Such
work shall begin immediately and be expedited to satisfactory completian as soon
as particular area or plant component has been isolated.
E. The Contractor shall submit a sequence of operations, including description of his
projected plans for maintenance of existing facilities. This plan shall require
approval by the Engineer before any of the existing facilities are modified. In this
plan he shall successfully demonstrate to the Engineer that the continuity and
degree (quality) of treatment will not be adversely affected.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Fi►ter Design Section IVa
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-6
�
�
�
�
I�
�
�
f�
J
l�
�
�
�
'
I]_1:�t+%
PART 3
F. The Contractor shall assist the Owner in maintaining any process equipment,
utility, etc., necessary to maintain continuous treatment. Any such equipment that
must be relocated, either temporarily or permanently, or any process equipment,
utilities, etc., that must be installed, either temporarily or permanently, to maintain
wastewater treatment shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The
Contractor shall include the cost of all temporary facilities required to maintain
treatment, meeting secondary standards, during the construction period in his bid
prices. The cost shalt include the cost of all labor, tools, equipment and materials
necessary.
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshalf Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Special Project Procedures
0992-0205 01030-7
'
' SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION
PART 1 — GENERAL
t1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION
, A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of the construction
efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the
following:
� 1. The work of subcontractors.
2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers.
3. The effort of equipment manufacturers for testing, training and startup
� services.
4. The interrelated work with public and private utilities companies.
5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie-ins to existing facilities are
, required and where existing equipment must remain in operation.
6. The effort of independent testing agencies.
7. Coordination of training, final testing and certification for operation.
` PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
, PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
�
�
r
�
��
�
�
�
, Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Coordination
0992-0205 01040-1
,
'
' SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
I_�
�
i
,
,
�
L
�
'
'
�
II
U
�
'
'
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including
excavating), fitting, and patching of the Work required to:
B. Make the several parts fit properly.
C. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contact
Documents.
D. Rework existing items to provide for new construction.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements
of these Specifications and, in the event no such requirements are determined, in
conformance with the Engineer's written direction.
Codes and standards for work of this section shall be the same as for the
pertinent sections of this specification.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
�
Request for Engineer's Consent:
1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to
the Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting.
2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of
materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Engineer and
secure his written permission prior to proceeding.
Notice to the Engineer: Submit written notice to the Engineer designating time
the Work will be uncovered, to provide for the Engineer's observation.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials used in the replacement of existing work and the construction of work
in conjunction with cutting and patching shall be new unless prior approval from
the Engineer has been obtained to re-use existing materials.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cutting and Patching
0992-0205 01045-1
'
2.2 FABRICATION
A. The materials and methods used in the fabrication of items required under this
section shall comply with the individual sections of this specification that have to
do with new construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITIONS
A. Examination:
3.2
3.3
1
2
Examine existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or
damage during cutting, excavating, backfilling, and patching.
After uncovering the Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of the
new Work.
B. Discrepancies:
1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the
Engineer and secure needed directions.
2. Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have
been fully resolved.
PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A. Provide all required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring,
bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the Work.
PERFORMANCE
A. Perform all required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent
Sections of these Specifications. Perform cutting and demolition by methods
which will prevent damage to other portions of the Work and will provide proper
surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. Pertorm fitting and
adjustment of products to provide finished installation complying with the
specified tolerances and finishes.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va �
Cutting and Patching
0992-0205 01045-2
SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the
project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and grades and to
locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels
required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering
services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction
methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the
laws of the state where the project is located.
GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS
A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those
designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control
points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference
poinfs during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or
reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any
such markers. Survey monuments, benchmarks or other reference points, which
must be disturbed by construction operations, shall be witnessed, removed and
replaced by a Professional Surveyor and Mapper (PSM), registered in the State
of Florida.
LAYOUT DATA
A. The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades
shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and
measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in
notebooks and furnished to the Owner with the record drawings for the project.
EXISTING STRUCTURES
A. The locations for existing
Drawings were taken from
existing underground piping
Drawings.
underground piping and structures shown on the
the available records. The actual locations of the
and structures may differ from that shown on the
B. The Drawings may not show existing underground electrical conduits, small
piping, or other piping and structures. Prior to starting excavations for structures
or the installation of underground piping, conduits, and other facilities the
Contractor shall thoroughly examine the proposed locations and routes for
possible conflict.
C. The Contractor shall excavate and expose all existing underground piping,
conduit, or other structures which may conflict with the new facilities or other
improvements. The locations, both horizontally and vertically, of all such existing
facilities shall be shown on the record drawings.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Field Engineering
0992-0205 01050-1
1.5
D. After completion of the subsurface investigations the Contractor shall notify the
Owner of any possible conflicts between the existing and new facilities. The
Contractor, Owner, and the Engineer will then confer and resolve the potential
conflicts prior to the start of the installation of the new facilities.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall keep one set of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda,
Modifications and Shop Drawings at the site in good order, and annotated to
show all changes made during the construction process. Record drawings shall
be up-to-date as the project progresses, will be subject to review on a monthly
basis by the Owner, and, subject to the review, be a basis for monthly payments.
B. These documents shall be available at any time to the Owner and, together with
copies of all survey notes, be delivered in final form to the Owner upon
completion of the project.
C. The location, both horizontally and vertically, of all underground piping, conduit,
and other structures shall be shown on the record drawings. All fittings, valves,
and other appurtenances shall be located and shown on the record drawings in
_ accordance with Section III Article 6.11.2 "As-Built Drawings" in the General
Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Field Engineering
0992-0205 01050-2
f�
i
r
�
i
��
'
�
'
,
'
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
,
'
�
,
,
LJ
'
I1
�
,
�J
u
'
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
� 1.2
'
A. At or before the preconstruction conference, Contractor shall submit for review a
preliminary schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction
schedule shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and
completion of each part, and the installation date for each major item of
equipment, and the time for making connections to existing piping, structures, or
facilities. Within 10 days after receipt of the Owner's comments, the Contractor
shall submit an updated Construction Progress Schedule.
B. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor is required to provide a work-plan for
review by the City and the Engineer that avoids or minimizes shutdown of any
process. In the unavoidable event that a shutdown is required, the Contractor
will provide by-pass pumps, a stand-by back-up generator and fuel. Contractor
shall notify the City as to the anticipated duration of shutdown and shall
coordinate all activities with the City and the Engineer with sufficient advance
notice to allow plant staff to make necessary preparations.
C. An updated schedule shatl be submitted with each application for progress
payment, or at least every 30 days, to reflect changes in the progress of the
work.
D. If the progress of the work falls behind schedule, the Contractor shall submit a
report which includes sufficient narrative to describe current and anticipated
delaying factors, the factors' effect on the construction schedule and the
Contractor's proposed corrective actions. Any work reported complete, but which
is not readily apparent to Owner, must be substantiated with satisfactory
evidence. The Owner may require the Contractor to add to his equipment, or
construction forces, as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall
behind schedule at any time during the construction period.
PROGRESS REPORTS
A. A progress report shall be furnished to Owner with each application for progress
payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit additional
progress reports at such intervals as Owner may request.
B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and
, anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction sehedule, and
proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not
readily apparent to Owner, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence.
�
�
C. Each progress report shall also include three prints of the accepted graphic
schedule marked to indicate actual progress.
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-1
�I
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. After review of the tentative schedule at the preconstruction conference, and
before submission of the first application for pavment, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Owner a schedule of values covering each lumq sum
item. The schedule of values, showing the value of each kind of work, shall be
acceptable to Owner before any application for payment is prepared.
B. The sum of the lump sum items, plus the extended unit price items listed in the
schedule of values shall equal the contract price. Such items as Bond premium,
temporary construction facilities, may be listed separately in the schedule of
values, provided the amounts can be substantiated. Overhead and profit shall
not be listed as separate items.
C. An unbalanced schedule of values providing for overpayment to the Contractor
on items of work which would be performed first will not be accepted. The
schedule of values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner.
Final acceptance by Owner shall indicate only consent to the schedule of values
as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments and shall not
constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item.
�Y�;I_��1�I���I�J1'I ri�
A. Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall furnish to Owner a
schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be revised and
resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more than 10 percent
from the estimated payment schedule.
SURVEY DATA
A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by the Contractor in performing
surveys required as part of the work shall be available to Owner for examination
throughout the construction period. All such data shall be submitted to Owner
with the other documentation required for final acceptance of the Worfc.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA
A. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will
become a permanent part of the work under this Contract shall be submitted to
Owner, or the Owner's Project Representative, for review. These data shall
include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind,
size, arrangement, and operation of component materials and devices; the
external connections, anchorages, and supports required; performance
characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other
materials and equipment.
B. All submittals regardless of origin, shall be reviewed, dated, stamped, approved,
sealed (if required) and signed by the Contractor prior to submission. Each
submittal shall be identified with the name and number of this Contract, the
Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and/or
Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in
,
'
r
�1
�
'
�
,
,
L�I
�
'
,
�
'
r
�
r
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va ,
0992-0205 Su 01300-2
'
,
�
'
'
,
'
,
,
I_l
'
r --
li
i ..i
,
r
'
the work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly
identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all
drawings and other descriptive data.
C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to the Owner and the Engineer
that the Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all
quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar data, and that he has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with
the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each submittal
and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such submittals shall,
as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by
the Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of
the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams.
E. The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each
submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions
previously noted by the Owner and/or the Engineer have been addressed. In the
event that more than one resubmission is required because of failure of
Contractor to account for exceptions previously noted, the Contractor shall
reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Engineer for review of the additional
resubmissions.
F. Resubmittals shall be made within 30 days of the date of the letter returning the
material to be modified or corrected, unless within 14 days the Contractor
submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period,
listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time.
G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining the
Owner's and/or the Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to
extension of the Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a
change in the work authorized by a Change Order or by failure of the Engineer to
return any submittal within 21 days after its receipt in Engineer's office.
H. The Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal
letter, the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of
submission and return of any previous resubmittals. In addition, the Contractor
shall reimburse the Engineer in the amount of $200.00 for review of the second
resubmittal and each of any subsequent resubmittals.
The Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by the Contractor will
cover only general conformity to the drawings and specifications. The Engineer's
review does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and
details of the material, equipment, device or item shown. The Engineer's review
of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors,
omissions, or deviations, nor responsibility for compliance with the Contract
Documents.
Eight (8) copies of each drawing and necessary data shall be submitted to
Engineer. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-3
1.7
1.8
1.9
Submittals shall be consecufively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and
without division by subcontracts or trades. Resubmittals shall bear the number of
the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the
resubmittal.
K. When the drawings and data are returned marked AMEND AND RESUBMIT or
REJECTED, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by
the Engineer and eight (8) corrected copies resubmitted.
L.
M
When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct specific
attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made other than
those called for by Engineer on previous submissions.
When the drawings and data are returned marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN, or
MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED, no additional copies need be furnished.
MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Included in Bid shall be the cost of furnishing competent and experienced
manufacturer's representatives who shall represent the manufacturer on
products furnished, assist the Contractor to install products in conformity with the
Contract Documents, and provide owner training and maintenance instruction.
See Section 01660.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Arrange for a trained representative of the equipment manufacturer for
equipment that requires continuing maintenance or operation to meet with the
operating personnel at the project site to provide basic instruction needed for
proper operation and maintenance of the entire work. Provide two (2) copies of
any manufacturer prepared training videos used during the instruction period.
B. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and
materials, lubricants, fuefs, identification system, contro� sequences, hazards,
cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment,
demonstrate start-up, shutdown, emergency operations, noise and vibration
adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar operations.
Review maintenance and operations in relation to applicable guarantees,
warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitments.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide data for:
1. Mechanical equipment.
2. Electrical equipment.
3. Controls and instrumentation.
B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following:
Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting
conditions.
Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.
i
�
'
,
,
��
,
r
,
�
'
r
,
'
,
�
,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va '
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-4
'
'
I�
,
,
'
,
,
,I�
'
,
'
'
,
'
'
�
�
�❑
E.
F
3. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
4. Guide to "troubleshooting".
5. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions
or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which
may be required by Contractor.
Submit three (3) sets prior to finat inspection, bound in 8'/2 x 11-inch three-ring
side binders with durable plastic covers.
Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index
tabs for each volume.
Part 1: Directory: listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of:
Consultant and Contractor.
G. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system. The
systems are defined by the process and instrumentation diagrams included with
the Contract Drawings. For each system, give names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of subcontractors and suppliers including but not limited to the
following:
1. Appropriate design criteria.
2. List of equipment.
3. Parts list.
4. Operating instructions.
5. Maintenance instructions, equipment.
6. Maintenance instructions, finishes.
7. Shop drawings and product data.
8. Warranties.
9. Wiring diagrams.
10. Inspection procedures.
11. Programming logic and instructions.
H. Submit three complete sets of all the information requested above on electronic
media. The preferred form of inedia is CD's in compatible format as directed by
the Owner's Representative. Generally, text shall be Word for Windows (latest
version); drawings shall be AutoCAD (latest version or as otherwise requested by
the Owner's Representative).
1.10 MANUAL FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION
A. Use drawings and pictorial to illustrate the printed text as necessary to fully
present the information.
B. Where information covers a family of similar items of equipment, identify the
applicable portions by heavy weighted arrows, boxes or circles, or strike-out the
inapplicable information. Non-conforming data are not acceptable and will be
returned for rework and resubmittal. All information shall be original
manufacturer's literature, duplicator copies are not acceptable.
Marshalf Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-5
C. Contractor shall incorporate into books ail manufacturers' equipment manuals
including those specified in pertinent sections of the Specifications. These books
shall be organized by equipment class in the same manner and sequence as the
Specifications, i.e. Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, etc. Book size and
quantity shall be sufficient for inclusion of all data, and be of type and quality
hereinafter specified in paragraph G.
D. Within each book of manuals, provide a Table of Contents for that book. If more
than one book is necessary for a class of equipment, place a complete Table of
Contents for that class of equipment within each book of that class.
E. In addition, an overall Index of Contents shall be prepared in ten sets and
submitted separately to the Owner for his insertion in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
�
�
When a manufacturer's manual exceeds one inch in thickness and is bound as
specified in paragraph G, it need not be rebound within another book, but the
Overall Index shall refer to it by title and indicate that it is bound separately.
Manual Binding
2
3
4
Bind all books in sturdy hard covers fastened to provide full view of
contents on each page, and ease of making content additions or
replacements. No book shall be more than three (3) inches thick.
Manuals shall be bound in substantial three-ring loose leaf binders.
Permanently tabel face of cover and bound edge of each book
"MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTION MANUAL", and indicate calls of
equipment, i.e., Mechanical, Electrical Instrumentation, etc., or name
specific equipment if a single unit is contained. Where more than one
book is needed for a class of equipment or a single specific equipment
unit, number books consecutively BOOK I, BOOK II, etc.
If more than one class of equipment is contained in a book, separate
each class with a tabbed stiff divider insert page.
Prior to purchase or delivery, submit samples of each intended type of
binder.
H. Manual Submittals. Submittals shall include four (4) draft copies of each manual,
two of which will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required
corrections or approval. When review is complete and accepted, the Contractor
shall deliver two final copies to the Resident Project Representative.
Submittal Schedule. All draft equipment instruction manuals shall be submitted
at the time of equipment shipment. No equipment start-up and training shall be
permitted until 21 days after instruction manual submittal. Final instruction
manuals shall be submitted no later than two weeks prior to equipment startup
and instruction.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-6
'
'
,
'
LJ
'
,
�
'
'
'
�
�
,
,
,
L� J
�
'
,
i
� _.l
CJ
�
'
L_ J
,
'
'
'
'
'
�
,
L�
1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified
in each section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with
Owner, deliver to project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
1.12 LAYOUT DATA
A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of ineasurements and calculations
made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of such data shall
be furnished to the Owner's Project Representative for use in checking
Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data
considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner with other records
upon completion of the Work.
1.13 SUBMITTAL AND RFI LOGS
A. Contractor will be responsible for the preparation of Submittal and RFI Logs.
These logs are due no later than two (2) weeks from the Preconstruction
Conference and are to be updated and brought to each Progress Meeting. The
Submittal log should be a complete list of all proposed submittals required for the
project. The RFI log will serve to ensure timely response to all Requests for
Information.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa
Submittals
0992-0205 01300-7
r
SECTION 01380 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD
PART 1 - GENERAL
'
'
'
,
'
'
I�
'
'
'
L�
,
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Employ a competent photographer to take construction record photographs
during course of the work.
PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED
A. Provide photographs taken on cutoff date for each scheduled monthly payment.
B. Provide photographs taken at each major stage of construction:
1. Prior to demolition
2. Completion of demolition
3. Completion of excavations
4. Rebar reinforcement prior to pouring of concrete or placing shotcrete.
5. Completion of sub base and/or foundations
6. Completion of equipment, buried and exposed piping, conduit and wiring
installation.
C. Views and Quantities Required:
1. At each specified time, photograph Project from multiple different views,
as approved by the Owner.
2. Provide three prints of each view.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRINTS
A. Co{or Prints:
1. Paper: Double weight.
2. Finish: Smooth surface, glossy.
3. Size: 8 in. X 10 in.
B. Identify each print on back, listing:
1. Name of project.
2. Name of site.
3. Orientation of view.
4. Date and time of exposure.
5. Name and address of photographer.
6. Include negative in negative-envelope for each print.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
0992-0205
'
Section IVa
Construction Phofographic Record
01380-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TECHNIQUE
A. Factual presentation.
B. Correct exposure and focus.
C. High resolution and sharpness.
D. Maximum depth-of-field.
E. Minimum distortion.
3.2 VIEWS REQUIRED
A. Photograph from locations to adequately illustrate condition of construction and
state of progress.
B. Where applicable, for successive periods of photography, take at least one
photograph from the same overall view as previously taken. Consult with the
Owner at each period of photography for instructions concerning views required.
3.3 DELIVERY OF PRINTS
A. Deliver prints to Owner to accompany each Application for Payment.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Construction Photographic Record
0992-0205 01380-2
'
, SECTION 01420 - GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
� PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
' 1.3
A. Ali equipment furnished
general stipulations set
other Sections.
COORDINATION
and installed under this Contract shall conform to the
forth in this Section except as otherwise specified in
A. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of
the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment
components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and
other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in
dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract
Drawings or Specifications.
MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE
A. Unless specifically named in the Specifications, a manufacturer shall have
furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful
operation for not less than the past 5 years.
WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design,
improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage,
breakage or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions.
B. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with
� recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall
be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at
any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be
' interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to
delivery, except as required by tests.
,
'
'
�
,
C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel
used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall
be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel
which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment
shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
1.5 LUBRICATION
A. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no
more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems
shall not require attention during start-up or shutdown and shall not waste
tubricants.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Genera/ Equipment Stipulations
0992-0205 01420-1
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
B. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be
provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to repface all
consumption during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of
equipment by Owner. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the use of
synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable.
C. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill
openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform.
Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the
normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal
installed position.
SAFETY GUARDS
A. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts
shall be covered on all sides by a OSHA approved safety guard. Safety guards
shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad
sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Each guard shall be
designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and
accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories,
including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall
be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.
ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of
equipment. Anchor botts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be
delivered su�ciently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural
concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall comply with the anchor bolts section and,
unless otherwise specified shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel and
shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 inch.
B. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment
mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout
beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural
concrete.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete
with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper
maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be
furnished complete with those devices.
SHOP PAINTING
A. All steel and iron surtaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied
in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessibte after assembly shall be finished
smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform
base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-
contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with a high-
grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel.
Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
'
�
�
��
'
�
'
II
�
u
'
'
�
'
�
,
,
Section/Va '
General Equipment Stipulations
01420-2
,
'
�I
�
�
�
�
'
u
�
B. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as
recommended by paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop
painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Unless otherwise
specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall be Tnemec "77 Chem-
Prime", or Valspar "13-R-28 Chromox Primer". Machine, polished, and
nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-
preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or Rust-Oleum "R-9".
1.10 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and protect
against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated,
or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and
storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and
shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times.
I:�
C
�❑
Painted surtaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and
other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of
equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer.
Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items.
Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery
schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material
shall be included with each shipment.
t1.11 STORAGE
'
'
�
�
A. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and
protected in accordance with Section 1600 until installed in the Work.
1.12 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION
A. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of
qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper
results. When so specified, or when employees of Contractor or his
Subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of
the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed.
1.13 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer of each unit of equipment in this project shall warrant each unit
� to the Owner in writing against defects in workmanship and material covering
parts and labor for a period of 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months
from date of acceptance of the work by the Owner, whichever is less. If individual
� equipment specifications require a longer warranty period than stated above,
they shall have precedence for that specific unit of equipment.
'
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
General Equipment Stipulations
0992-0205 01420-3
�
B. In the event that a component fails to perform as specified or is proven defective
in service during the warranty period, the manufacturer shall provide and install a
replacement part without cost to the Owner.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
0992-0205
Section IVa '
General Equipment Stipulations
01420-4
,
1
'
CI
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SANITARY FACILITIES
�
'
'
1.3
A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary accommodations (to inctude
portable toitets) for employees and official site visitors, to comply with the
requirements and regulations of the State of Florida, the County Health
Department and/or other regulatory agencies.
B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout
the construction period, and obscured from pubtic view to the greatest practical
extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least one toilet will be
furnished for each 20 men. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary
facilities by all personnel at the site.
BARRICADES AND LIGHTS
A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to
traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be pfaced
acceptable warning signs. Barricades shalt be located at the nearest intersecting
public highway or street on each side of the blocked section.
B. Alf open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs,
and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as
material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and
lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction
area.
C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from
sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside
public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and
inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other
protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with app{icable
statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as
required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover.
D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends and
holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during adverse weather
conditions.
PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY
A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground
pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or
otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing,
driveways, curbs, waiks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other
surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and
shrubs in yards and parkings, shall be restored to their original condition, whether
' Marshal► Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Temporary Facilities
0992-0205 01500-1
'
within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with new
materials.
1.4 PARKING
A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all
construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in
connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal
vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or
construction activities.
1.5 DUST CONTROL
A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth
surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water. Dusty materials in
piles or in transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing.
B. Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be
adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument
panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper
ventilation shall be included with dust screens.
C. Contractor shall employ best management practices as specified in Section IV
Article 38.
1.6 SWEEPING
A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from the pavement at the end of each
workday.
1.7 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Contractor shall prevent the poflution of drains and watercourses by sanitary
wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction
activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse
other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other substance will be
permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures will be taken to
prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse.
1.8 PROJECT SIGN
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
i
�
A. Provide sign(s) for the Contract identifying the project and identifying the �
participants in the development of the project The Project Sign shall be provided
and erected in accordance with Section III Article 23. �
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Temporary Facilities
0992-0205 01500-2
�
'
,
'
'
�
�
1
�
'
�
'
,
�
�
i
�
'
SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITION AND SCOPE
A. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, compliance with the General
Conditions outlined in Section III and the following principle items:
1
2
3
4
G�
Indemnification
Preconstruction meeting
Move onto the site all Contractor's plant and equipment required for first
month operations.
Install temporary construction power, water supply, wiring, and lighting
facilities.
Establish fire protection plan and safety program.
Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified.
7. Arrange for, and erect, Contractor's work and storage yard and
employees' parking facilities.
8_ Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds.
9. Obtain all required permits.
10. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, SWFWMD,
Department of Labor, and all other required notices.
11. Have Contractor's superintendent at the job site full time.
12. Erect project sign(s) as specified in Section III Article 23.
13. Submit storm water managemenUdewatering plan, schedule of values, list
of shop drawings, and detailed construction schedule acceptable to
Owner.
14. Provide audio-video recording of existing conditions in accordance with
Section IV Article 37.
15. Construct, maintain, and restore any temporary access and haul roads.
16. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals.
17. Demobilization
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section !Va
Mobilization
0992-0205 01505-1
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
'
�
�
i
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section 1Va �
Mobilization
0992-0205 01505-2
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
'
�
�
'
�
�
SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
1.2
1.3
A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
approved in writing by the Engineer.
3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best
engineering and shop practices.
b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and
gages, to be interchangeable.
c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same
manufacturer.
d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified
shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in
writing.
4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for
which it is specified.
5. All material and equipment incorporated into the project shall be new.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to
Engineer.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation
and until completion.
� Marshall Sfreet Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Material and Equipment
0992-0205 01600-1
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
1.2
1.3
A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically
approved in writing by the Engineer.
3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:
a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best
engineering and shop practices.
b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and
gages, to be interchangeable.
c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same
manufacturer.
d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions.
e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified
shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in
writing.
4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for
which it is specified.
5. All material and equipment incorporated into the project shall be new.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
MANUFACTURER'S tNSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such
instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to
Engineer.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation
and until completion.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Materia! and Equipment
0992-0205 01600-1
�
�
�
�
��
LJ
� 1.6
�
�_ �
�
r
D. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to
protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction
operations. Remove when no longer needed.
E. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve
bearings shall be stored in weather tight structures maintained at a temperature
above 60°F. Equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against
moisture and water damage. All space heaters furnished in equipment shall be
connected and operated continuously.
F. Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other
deleterious effects of storage when installed in the Work.
MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE
A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to
assure that:
2
3
State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions.
Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis.
Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected.
a. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not
acceptable under requirements of these Contract Documents.
B. Mechanical and electrical equipment which requires servicing during long term
� storage shall have complete manufacturer's instructions for servicing
accompanying each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior
of package.
�
�
�
Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the Engineer. The
intent of this requirement is to reduce on-site storage time prior to
installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be
delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without
written authorization from the Engineer.
2. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the
Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer. These instructions shall be
carefully followed.
Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the
manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not
been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications
by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is
judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment
that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time
period. As such, the manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in
both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Material and Equipment
0992-0205 01600-3
�
i �l
judged to be defective. It shalt be removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products List: Within 30 days after contract date, submit to Owner a complete
list of major products proposed to be used.
B. Contractor's Options
1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product
meeting that standard.
2. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers
and "or equal", Contractor must submit a request for substitutions of any
product or manufacturer not specifically named. Substitutions of products
and "or equal" by the Contractor shall be submitted in a timely manner so
as not to adversely affect the construction schedule. See Section I11
Article 6.3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Material and Equipment
0992-0205 01600-4
�
r
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
I
L..
SECTION 01630 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section covers methods of ineasurement and payment for items of Work
under this Contract.
1.2 GENERAL
A. The total Bid Price shall cover all Work required by the Contract Documents. Atl
costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the Work,
including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances;
providing all construction equipment and tools; and performing all necessary
labor and supervision to fully complete the Work, shall be included in the lump
sum and unit prices bid. All Work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the
Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and all costs
in connection therewith shall be included in the prices bid.
1.3 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
A. See Section IV, Article 3— Definition of Terms
1.4 EXCAVATION
A. Except where otherwise specified, the lump sum price bid for each item of Work
which involves excavation or trenching shall include all costs for such Work. No
direct payment shall be made for excavation or trenching. All excavation is
unclassified and there shall be no separate payment for excavation of rock or for
backfill where rock is excavated below subgrade.
1.5 TAXES AND PERMITS
A. The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that the tax laws of the State of
Florida, including but not limited to Chapter 212, Florida Statutes, apply to this
bid matter and that all applicable taxes and fees shall be deemed to have been
included in Bidder's proposal.
1.6 RETAINAGE
A. Refer to Agreement.
1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Also see Section III Article 14 for other requirements.
B. Schedule of Bid Items
1. Lump Sum Bid Items
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Measurement and Payment
0992-0205 01630-1
�
r.
a.
�
The work for each Lump Sum bid item shall be constructed as ,
shown and described on the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Payment shall be made at the lump sum price stated in the Bid for
each item and shall be pro-rated for the actual work completed
based on an approved schedule of values detailing work to be
completed under the specific item.
c. Each lump sum price shall include all of the contractors' costs to
complete the construction exclusive of payment items provided for
elsewhere in the bid form.
d. Each lump sum price shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1) Demolition and removal
2) Excavation
3) Shoring and bracing
4) Dewatering
5) Backfill
6) Compaction
7) Maintaining traffic
8) Appurtenant work and materials as required for a complete
and operable system
9) Testing, balancing, and adjusting including any material
and equipment required for the tests
10) Submittals
11) Equipment Startup
12) Operation and Maintenance Training by Manufacturers'
Representative
13) Painting
14) Restoration
15) Cleanup
Unit Cost Bid Items
a.
b.
c.
The work for each Unit Cost bid item shall be constructed as
shown and described on the Drawings and Specifications.
Payment for Unit Cost bid items shall be paid for each unit
installed and accepted by the Owner.
See Section III Article 11.3.
3. The Contractor shall not make a claim for an item not identified within the �
bid item descriptions but should include this cost within the most
appropriate Bid Item. �
C. Description of Bid Items
1. Bid Item No. 1: Mobilization/Demobilization
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Measurement and Payment
0992-0205 01630-2
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
3
a.
c.
G]
This bid item describes measurement and payment for the
mobilization/demobilization related to the installation of the
generator and power distribution upgrades and related ancillaries.
The lump sum Bid Price for mobilization/demobilization shall
include the items noted in Section 01505 as required for the
proper performance and completion of the work.
Payment for mobilization/demobilization will be made on an
incremental basis in accordance with the following:
Percent of Original Allowable Percent
Contract Amount of the Lump Sum
Earned Price for the Item
5 25
10 50
25 75
50 90
100 100
Bid price for mobilization/demobilization shall not exceed
3.5% of the total amount for all the bid items.
Bid Item No. 2: Demolition
a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment and ancillaries necessary to demolish the
existing primary clarifiers and yard piping, including, but is not
limited to: bypass pumping, temporary piping, temporary supports,
temporary power, crushed concrete, material hauling, material
disposal, disposal of solids in the clarifiers, pipe removal,
equipment removal, electrical removal, instrumentation/controls
removal and all other demolition necessary to provide a complete
system and functional system whether or not specified herein or
shown on the Construction Drawings.
Bid Item No. 3: Marshall Street Improvements
a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment and ancillaries necessary to construct the
improvements at the Marshall Street APCF including, but not
limited to: all temporary piping, temporary supports, bypass
pumping, mechanical, Salsnes Filters, yard piping, above grade
piping, dewatering, backfill, compaction, fill, crushed concrete,
pipe supports, handrails, grating, stairs, walkways, pumps, filters,
precast structures, drainage pipe, drainage structures, concrete,
electricat, structural, instrumentation and controls, appurtenances
and ancillaries necessary for a complete and functional system
whether or not specified herein or shown on the Construction
Drawings. Integration of new filters into plant PLC/SCADA
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Measurement and Payment
0992-0205 01630-3
�
4
system; modification and/or expansion of existing PLC/SCADA
equipment, equipment interconnections and connection routing;
and Record Drawings.
Bid Item No. 4: Paving, Drainage and Grading
a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment and ancillaries necessary to construct the
paving, drainage and grading improvements at the Marshall Street
APCF including, but not limited to: fill, crushed concrete, backfill,
compaction, sidewalks, drainage structures, drainage pipe,
drainage appurtenances, asphalt, bollards, milling, sub-base,
base, site grading, concrete, appurtenances and ancillaries
necessary for a complete and functional system whether or not
specified herein or shown on the Construction Drawings.
Bid Item No. 5: - Owner's Contingency
a. Description: The work covered by this item consists of unforeseen
items of work not included in other bid items but necessary for
accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work as
approved by the Owner, or additional items over and above those
specified or shown on the drawings. The cost of this additional
work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the
Owner's Project Representative prior to starting this
additional work.
�
�
�
�
�
b. The lump sum bid for contingency shall equal ten percent (10%) of �
the following:
1) The subtotal of the Bid Items 1 through 2 rounded up to
the nearest cent. In case of mathematical error on the
bidder's part, the Contingency Bid Item will be adjusted up
or down to equate to 10% of this subtotal.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
MarshaU Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Measurement and Payment
0992-0205 01630-4
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SECTION 01640 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality assurance and control of installation.
B. References.
C. Field sampies.
D. Mock-up.
E. Inspection and testing laboratory services.
F. Manufacturers' fietd services and reports.
1.2
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Section 01650 - Testing Laboratory Services.
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when
more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher
standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids.
B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request
clarification from Project Representative before proceeding.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Quality Control
0992-0205 01640-1
C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered
from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference
document.
1.5 FIELD SAMPLES
A.
B.
C.
Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections
for review.
Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area
after field sample has been accepted by Project Representative.
1.6 MOCK-UP
A.
B.
C.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section.
Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage
devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after
mock-up has been accepted by Project Representative.
1.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E
Contractor will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to
perform inspection and testing.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified
in individual specification Sections and as required by the Owner.
Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, Contractor, and
the Engineer, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and
indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix,
equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested.
1
2.
Notify Owner and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring services.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples
and tests required for Contractor's use.
Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall
be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Owner. �
Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor.
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Secfion IVa �
0992-0205 Quality 01640-2
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�.
�
�
�
�
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A. Submit qualifications of observer to Project Representative 30 days in advance of
required observations. Observer subject to approval of Owner.
B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product
suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site
conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,
start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and
to initiate instructions when necessary.
C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to
applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'
written instructions.
D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Owner's Project
Representative for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECT.ION
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Quality Control
0992-0205 01640-3
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SECTION 01650 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selection and payment.
1.2
1.3
1.4
B. Laboratory responsibilities.
C. Laboratory reports.
D. Limits on testing laboratory authority.
E. Contractor responsibilities.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards
for testing.
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and
Construction.
B. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies
for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing
� laboratory to perForm specified inspection and testing.
B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation
to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
� 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
� A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740.
B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the state in which Project is located.
1 C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review
services.
� D. Submittals: A contractor shall submit name, address and qualifications of
selected laboratory for owners approval prior to application for first payment.
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Testing Laboratory Services
0992-0205 01650-1
1.6
1.7
1.8
E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy
traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted
values of natural physical constants.
LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in
performance of services.
C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance
with specified standards.
D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract
Documents.
E. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or Products.
F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Owner's Project
Representative.
LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to
Owner and to Contractor.
B. Include:
1. Date issued,
2. Project title and number,
3. Name of inspector,
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection,
5. Identification of product and Specifications Section,
6. Location in the Project,
7. Type of inspection or test,
8. Date of test,
9. Results of tests,
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
C. When requested by Owner, provide interpretation of test results.
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Secfion IVa
Testing Laboratory Services
0992-0205 01650-2
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
r�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the Contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide aceess to the Work and to
manufacturer's facilities.
B. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to
obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to
facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples.
C. Notify Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations
requiring inspection and testing services.
D. Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshalf Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Testing Laboratory Services
0992-0205 01650-3
'
r
SECTION 01660 - SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
�
�
A.
=
The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, adjusting and balancing of all
systems prior to placing them in service.
The operation, testing, adjustment and balancing shall be as required to prove
that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the
conditions specified.
TESTING PRIOR TO SHIPMENT
A. Where individual sections require certain items of equipment to be tested prior to
shipment from the manufacturer's plant, these items shall be operated to the
extent necessary to generate certified performance data over the entire operating
range of the equipment. The testing shall be conducted on the units which will be
shipped to and installed at the construction site.
SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each
company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment, as identified on the
Drawings, or in the Specifications, to perform the duties described.
B. After installation of the equipment identified to have the services of a
manufacturer's representative has been completed, and the equipment is
presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the
representative shall inspect, operate, test, adjust and balance the equipment.
The inspection shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following points as
applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts).
Completeness in all details, as specified.
Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various
parts.
Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants.
C. On completion of his work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative shall
submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete signed report of the result of his
inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed
descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative
results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be
taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate
that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for
permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the
manufacturer's warranty null and void.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
0992-0205 01660-1
D. After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's
representatives, the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the
manufacturer's representatives present when the field acceptance tests are
made.
�
'
I
�
E. The manufacturer's representative shall remain on the job to instruct the Owner's �
personnel in proper operation and maintenance and shall remain until the
equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS
K�a
A.
�
Tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and of authorities having jurisdiction over the work. No less than three
days notice shall be given prior to start of tests.
Field pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted on the following:
1. Process, instrumentation and sampling
2. Gravity pipelines
3. Valves
4. Pressure pipelines
C. Plant pressure piping, except air pressure piping, shall be hydrostatically tested
for two hours at 1'/z times operating pressure or 150 psi which ever is less. All
joints and other potential leak sources shall be painted with powdered blue chalk
and water mixture prior to testing. Leak sources shall be examined during and at
the end of the test period.
C
E.
Ductile Iron Pressure Mains shall be tested in accordance with AVWVA C600.
PVC Pressure Mains shall be testing in accordance with AVWVA C605.
F. Pressure mains shall be cleaned during flushing by using a polyurethane plug
manufactured of eight Ib/cubic foot density blown elastomer with open cell
construction. The plug shall have resilient surface that engages the inner surface
of the main with a sliding seal. The plug shall be able to reduce itself a minimum
of 35 percent of its original cross-sectional area, negotiate mitered bends, short
radius elbows, pass through tees, crosses, multiple pipe sizes and valves and
shall be abrasion resistant and capable of traveling in either direction.
G. Valves: Valves shall be tested by applying the test pressure upstream of the
closed valve with the downstream at zero pressure. The test pressure shall hold
for a period of one hour after the source of pressure has been removed.
TESTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
�
�
lJ
�
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
'
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa �
Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
0992-0205 01660-2
�
,
'
�
� 3.3
�
��
A. After completion and prior tc
tested as specified in Division
systems are complete and r
proper direction of rotation. (
currents.
TESTING PROCESS SYSTEMS
being energized, all electrical systems shall be
16 to the extent necessary to demonstrate that all
�ady for operation. Motors shall be checked for
ircuits shall be checked for proper voltages and
A. Hydraulic and Leakage Testing: Field leakage tests shall be conducted on tanks,
channels, and miscellaneous structures. They shall be leak tested by filling with
water to the operating level. The water shall remain standing in the structure for a
period of 24 hours. The structure shall be carefully examined for leaks at
three-hour intervals during the working day. Water level shall be measured at
these intervals and at the end of the test interval.
B. In sewage treatment plants, sewage effluent may be used for hydraulic testing of
� tankage and initial adjustment of process systems. Raw sewage will not be
introduced into the new facility until these tests and adjustments have been
completed. Temporary pumping facilities to direct the effluent into the facility shall
� be provided by the Contractor. The Owner shall provide reclaimed water for
hydraulic testing to the Contractor at no charge.
� 3.4
I I
�l
�
,
�
�
�
i
�_.
ENGINEER'S RIGHT TO RETESTING
A. Should the Contractor refuse or neglect to make any tests necessary to
demonstrate the integrity of the completed system, the Engineer may retain the
services of an outside consultant to make all such tests and their resulting
adjustments and balance.
B. The costs for such tests shall be deducted from amounts owing to the Contractor
and shall not be borne by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
0992-0205 01660-3
�
'
�
SECTION 01670 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
� 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission,
processing and handling of requests for substitution and product options.
See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any substitution or
� option shall be in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents, and
completely coordinated with work of other trades.
�
�
�
�
�
�J
�
C_�
0
2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary
or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or
necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General
Conditions for additional information.
Procedure.
For equipment and materials which are listed in the proposal, observe
procedures outlined in Information for Bidders.
2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or
specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe
procedures outlined in these specifications.
C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and
samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and
transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or
Engineer.
Q
��
Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure, and complete installation.
Address for submission:
City of Clearwater
� Attention: Tom Robertson, Project Manager
100 S. Mrytle Ave.
Room 220
, Clearwater, FL 33756
Phone: 727-562-4827
Fax: 727-562-4755
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design
0992-0205
Section IVa
Substitutions and Product Options
01670-1
1.2 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL:
A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified.
B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications
by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names.
Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from consideration such types
of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog numbers
and/or manufacturer's names, capable of accomplishing purpose of types of
equipment or kinds of material specifica{ly indicated, unless specifically noted as
such.
f�.
1�7
E
Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not
specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed
upon by Owner prior to letting of Contract.
Conditionat bids will not be accepted.
1.3 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION:
A. After the bid date and prior to award of the Contract, the Engineer will consider
requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other items.
Requests must be received by Engineer within ten calendar days after the date
of bid opening. All requests for substitution shall be completed as specified
below.
B.
C.
Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items
unless specifically approved otherwise.
Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request:
1
2
3
Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed by
a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for
substitution is initiated.
Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents.
For products:
a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including
manufacturer's name.
b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type,
size, and options to be considered:
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Substitutions and Product Options
0992-0205 01670-2
�
,
�
1) Product Description.
2) Performance and test data.
3) Reference standards.
4) Difference in power demand.
5) Dimensional differences for specified unit.
� c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right to
impound sample until physical units are installed on project for
comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
� samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible
for loss of or damage to samples.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
'
II
u
�
E
4.
5.
6.
7.
d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used,
date of installation, and field performance data on installation.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product, materials,
systems or other items specified.
Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product,
materials, systems or other items specified.
Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in contract
time or amount.
In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item,
Supplier/Manufacturer represents:
1
2
3
4.
He has personally investigated proposed product, materials, systems or
other items, and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects
to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended.
Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product,
materials, systems or other items specified.
Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include
but not be limited to the following:
a. Building and structure modifications as necessary;
b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change;
c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation
changes, and,
d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects
to permit incorporation of substitution into project.
Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution, which
subsequently become apparent.
Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative consideration
will be given within two weeks after request is received.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Design Section IVa
Substitutions and Product Options
0992-0205 01670-3
,
1.4
F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract price
or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order will be
issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an alternate does
not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order shall be issued.
G. Rejection of alternates:
1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or
building spaces.
2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equat to base product specified, or
will not adequately perform function for which intended.
3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this
specification section.
SUBSTITUTION AFTER CONTRACT AWARD
Q
Q
Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy,
discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are only
reasons for substitution after Contract award.
Notify Owner in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes apparent;
include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution su�ciently in
advance to avoid delays.
C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.3 C above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Substitutions and Product Options
0992-0205 01670-4
SECTION 01690 - STARTING PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PLAN SUBMITTAL
A. Prior to attaining 75 percent completion of the improvements, the Contractor shall
submit his plan for placing the facility into operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 START UP PLAN
A. The plan shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1. Procedures for inspection of systems, equipment, instrumentation and
controls to be carried out prior to their being energized;
2. Schedule for on-site inspections, supervision of installation and start-up
by manufacturer's personnel;
3. List of equipment and controls for which a manufacturer's certificate of
proper installation shall be submitted prior to energizing;
4. Schedule for training by manufacturer's personnel; and
5. Sequence of start-up of each system.
3.2 MATERIALS, SUPPLIES AND ENERGY
A. In conjunction with start-up, testing, and up to the time of acceptance of the
facility by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish all required materials, supplies
and energy.
B. The above requirement applies to all expendable items required to operate and
test the facility including: chemicals, electric power, oils and lubricants.
END OF SECTION
,
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Starting Process Systems
0992-0205 01690-1
'
'
�
,
�
'
,
�
�
�
'
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Final cleaning
B. Adjusting
C. Project record documents
D. Warranties
1.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the
site.
1.3
1.4
1.5
ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered
operation.
WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of all applicable warranties and guarantees.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable
plastic cloth cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide
updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as
start of warranty period.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record information concurrent with construction progress as indicated in
specifications. See Section I11 Article 6.11.2 for As-Built requirements.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Contract Closeout
0992-0205 01700-1
,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
,
�
��
�
,
,
�
,
��
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa �
Contract C/oseout
0992-0205 01700-2
,
L�
�
�
L_�
,
'
�
SECTION 01711 - HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES TESTING
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. The Contractor shall perform cleaning, flushing and testing for all
hydraulic structures in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
2. The Work shall include all labor and materials required to prepare a
structure for testing and to convey water to the point of use from the
source designated by Owner, and all labor and materials required to
drain, and dispose of water used for testing.
B. Related Divisions and Sections:
1. Section 03300, Cast In Place Concrete
� 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
�
1__J
�
�
�1
A. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following unless otherwise shown or specified.
1. ACI 350, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures and Commentary (ACI 350R).
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit a minimum fourteen (14) day advance written notice
of the proposed testing schedule for a given structure for review and concurrence
of the Engineer and Owner. The Contractor's proposed plans for water
conveyance, control and disposal shall also be submitted in writing.
B. Contractor shall submit all testing data collected for each structure/cell tested in
accordance with ACI 350 for approval.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary valves, bulkheads or other water control equipment and materials,
' shall be as determined by the Contractor subject to the Engineer's review. Cost
of all materials required for testing, supply and discharge of testing water shall be
included in the Base Bid.
,
�
Marsha/l Street Sa/snes Design Section lVa
Hydraulic Structures Testing
0992-0205 01711-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water for testing will be furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall make all
necessary provisions for conveying the water from the source to the points of
use.
B.
C
D
E
All hydraulic structures and appurtenant pressure piping connections shall be
tested.
Concrete coatings, paint and/or liners shall not be applied until all leak testing
operations have been completed and the structure is accepted.
Release of water from structures, after testing has been completed, shall be as
approved by the Engineer. Discharge �ocation shall be approved by Owner.
Clean structures after testing and prepare substrates for coating installation in
accordance with relevant specification sections.
3.2 LEAKAGE TESTING OF HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
A. Analysis of data from leakage tests of hydraulic structures will be performed by
the Contractor following the requirements of ACt 350-06, ACI 350R-06 and as
specified herein. The Contractor shall supply all materials and labor as needed
to assist the Engineer in obtaining data from the test.
B. Prior to the start of leakage testing, the following requirements shall be met.
1. All elements of the structure that resist any portion of the retained liquid
pressure shall be in place and at specified strength levels. All concrete
shall be fully cured.
2. Structure walls shall not be backfilled prior to leakage testing.
3. All valves, gates, blind flanges and other non-concrete items that control
the flow of, or otherwise retain the liquid contents of the structure, shall be
checked for water-tightness. If not watertight, means shall be taken to
assure water-tightness during the period of the leakage test.
4
!•�
�
The portions of the structure to be tested shall be cleaned of all
construction debris and other foreign materials.
Defective concrete shall be repaired.
Standing water, soil, construction materials and any other material that
interferes with the exposed concrete surfaces of the structure shall be
removed.
7. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Owner a minimum of
seventy-two (72) hours prior to start of filling of structure for leakage
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval. & Design Section lVa
Hydraulic Structures Testing
0992-0205 01711-2
i
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
U
'
�
l�
�
�I
�
I��
�
C
�
�
testing. Leakage testing shall not start until the structure is inspected by
the Engineer.
The structure shall be tested prior to the application of all coating systems
and the installation of masonry block veneer, if applicable.
The following special requirements apply:
1. All structures which contain basins, channels and/or chambers that are
independent or are separated by a common wall shall be tested
independently unless otherwise agreed to by Engineer. All leakage
occurring between/through common walls shall be repaired in addition to
all other repair requirements.
2. Each influent, effluent or overflow trough shall be tested independently.
Filling Structure with Water:
1. The portion of the structure to be tested shall be filled at a rate not to
exceed 2 feet per hour.
2. Structure shall be filled to the normal operating depth of the structure as
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Where no operating depth is
indicated or where operating depth is controlled by flowing over a weir,
the structure shall be filled to a depth 6 inches below the weir or top of
wall elevation, whichever is lower.
3. Water in the structure shall be maintained at the specified test elevation
for a minimum of three (3) days.
E. After water has been brought to the test elevation, the exposed elements of the
structure shall be inspected for leakage. All locations that exhibit any amount of
leakage flow or dampness shall be repaired prior to the start of leakage testing.
Dampness is defined as any visible water staining the following:
F
G.
1
2
At Exterior Walls — the exterior sides of the walls.
At Interior Walls — the opposite sides of the walls containing the water.
Leakage test duration shall be determined by the Engineer based on ACI 350.1 R
but shall not be less than three (3) days.
Leakage Allowance:
For concrete structures, the maximum alfowable leakage rate shall be
0.075 percent of the volume per twenty-four (24) hour period.
H. Test Locations:
Marshalt Street Sa/snes Filter Eval. & Design Section IVa
Hydraulic Structures Testing
0992-0205 01711-3
J
I/
1. Structure celis which are less than 1000 square feet in area shall have
measurements of water level taken at two (2) locations that are located
approximately 180 degrees apart.
2. Structure calls which are greater than 1000 square feet in area shall have
measurements of water level taken at four (4) locations that are located
approximately 90 degrees apart.
3. Each test location shall be marked and given a reference number. A
reference point shall be marked on the face of the wall above the test
water surFace in a manner that will prevent its movement or deterioration
during the period of the test.
Evaporation and Precipitation Measuring:
1. In open structures, a clear plastic calibrated open top container not less
than 18 inches in diameter and depth shall be partially filled, floated in the
tank, and held in position near each measurement location.
�
��
L�
�
�
,
�
,
2. The container shall be located so as to not be shaded by tank walls and �
away from any items passing over it such as beams or pipes.
Test Measurements:
1
�
Leakage tests shall not be started when periods of severe weather
conditions or major changes in average daily temperature are predicted.
The following measurements shalt be recorded at each test location at the
start of the test period and at twenty-four (24) hour intervals thereafter.
a) Distance from reference point to test water surface.
b) Depth of water in the floating container.
c) Temperature of the test water at 18 inches below water surface.
d) Temperature of the water in the evaporation-precipitation
container at mid-depth.
Leakage Determination:
�
�
�
�
�
1. The change in water surFace elevation at each test location shall be �
averaged and adjusted as follows:
a) The total change in test water surface elevation shall be adjusted
by the average change in water surFace elevation in the
evaporation-precipitation containers.
b) Where averaged water temperature measurements vary by more
than 3 degrees from start to completion of the test period,
adjustment in tank volume shall be determined by change of water
Marsha/l Street Salsnes Filter Eval. & Design Section 1Va
Hydraulic Structures Testing
0992-0205 01711-4
��
i
,
�
�
density resulting from the change in the average water
temperature.
L. Retesting:
1. The leakage test shall be considered as failed if the specified leakage
allowance is exceeded or if any leakage or dampness is observed.
2. If the test becomes unreliable due to excessive precipitation or other
external factors, it shall be restarted.
3. If a leakage test fails, it may be retested immediately without repairs if
approved by the Engineer. If subsequent leakage tests fail, the
Contractor shall repair all probable areas of leakage and the leakage test
shall be repeated. The structure shall be retested until it meets the
specified leakage criteria. Repairs shall be made to the probable leakage
areas before each retest.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval. & Design Section /Va
Hydraulic Structures Testing
0992-0205 01711-5
CJ
���
�
�
'
�
,
�
,
'
'
LJI
'
�
�
,
�
SECTION 01800 - OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all openings
and penetrations in construction as indicated in accord with provisions of
the Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference standards:
1. American Welding Society (AWS)
Structural Welding Code DI.I
2. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI 318-77, Chapter 6 on Embedding of Pipes
3. Nationat Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 90A, Standard for fnstallation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
4. Standard Building Code (SBC)
5. N.E.C. Article 501
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300.
B. Where an opening is required but is not shown on drawings, submit shop
drawing, showing location of opening, size, and method to be used for making
opening.
C. Submit drawings verifying coordination of openings and penetrations, sizes and
locations.
D. Submit details of required seals verifying compliance of inethods and materials.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa
Openings and Penetrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-1
'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS - GENERAL
A. Examine drawings to coordinate sizes and locations of openings and
penetrations.
B. Set sleeves with ends flush with finished surFaces, unless otherwise specified or
indicated.
C. Where pipes or ducts pass through floors in locations where floors can be
washed or wetted, set sleeves with top 4 IN above finish floors.
D. For insulated� piping or ducts, size sleeves large enough to accommodate full
thickness of insulation.
E. Set sleeves or framed openings in advance in order to avoid conflict with other
trades.
F. Contractor shall verify location of all existing rebar prior to cutting or core drilling.
Contractor shall adjust his penetration to avoid cutting rebar. At locations where
cutting rebar cannot be avoided, submit sk�tch indicating the penetration, the
rebar to remain intact and the rebar that will be compromised.
G. Comply with following for cast-in-place concrete construction unless specifically
otherwise approved:
1. Do not cut into nor core drill any beams, joists, or columns.
2. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists or columns.
3. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns or slabs.
4. Utilize one of the following installation methods:
a. Core drill with non impact type equipment (preferred).
b. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or/less holes through structure
following opening outline.
c. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces then knock out within
sawcuts using impact type equipment using extreme caution not
to chop or spall face of surface to remain intact.
5. When any opening targer than 10 IN must be made in completed
structure, secure approval before starting work.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Openings and Penetrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-2
'
'
r
'
�
H
Comply with following for precast-prestressed concrete construction unless
specifically otherwise approved:
1
2
3
Do not cut openings nor core drill vertically or horizontally through stems
of inembers.
Do not locate or install sleeves or recess sleeves vertically or horizontally
through or in stems of inembers.
Openings and sleeves to be cast into flanges of units.
4. Openings larger than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension shall
' be cast in units at time of manufacture. Openings smaller than 6 IN in
diameter or 6 IN maximum dimensions may be cast in flanges of units at
time of manufacture or may be field cut.
'
'
,
,
'
'
'
lJ
�
'
�
J.
Where alterations are necessary of where new and old work join, restore
adjacent surfaces to their condition prior to start of work.
Furnish to precast manufacturer complete information concerning location and
placement of openings and penetrations for inclusion in the calculations and
shop drawings. Show coordination with work of all other trades.
K. Hot dip galvanize all steel sleeves installed.
3.2 GENERAL SCHEDULE OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOORS, ROOFS,
FOUNDATION BASE SLABS, FOUNDATION WALLS, FOUNDATION FOOTINGS,
PARTITIONS AND WALLS FOR EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING AND CONDUIT.
A. Provide openings and penetrations in construction where shown on drawings and
as described in following listing:
1. Type A- Block out 1 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct or pipe.
Dimension to allow for insulation to pass through opening
where insulation is required.
2. Type B- Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeve with wall anchor.
3. Type C- 12 gauge sheet metal sleeve with welded seams integrally
incorporated into construction.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Type D- Commercial type casting wall sleeve.
Type E- Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve with combination anchor and
water stop plate.
Type F- Cast in place pipe or conduit.
Type G- Cast in place with (combination anchor and water stop plate)
welded to pipe or ductwork.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Openings and Penetrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-3
,
�
�
8. Type H- Core drill after structure is in place.
Provide seals of material and method described as follows unless otherwise
noted on drawings. Assure seal material and method are compatible with
location and service of seal.
1. Category 1- Link - Seal
2. Category 2- Not Used
3. Category 3- Safing material and sealant. Refer to Specification
Section 07900 for sealant types.
4. Category 4- Backer rod and sealant. Refer to specification Section
07900 for sealant types.
5. Category 5- Backer rod and sealant and escutcheons on both sides of
opening.
6. Category 6- Backer rod and sealant and flanges on both sides of
opening. Flanges constructed of same materiat as duct,
fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening.
7. Category 7- Safing material and sealant and escutcheons on both
sides of opening.
8. Category 8- Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA
specifications unless otherwise noted on drawings.
9. Category 9- Not used.
10. Category 10 - Fire rated sealant - Refer to Section 07900.
11. Category 11 - Conduit seals.
Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, furnish openings and sealing
material in full accordance with drawings and the following schedule:
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa �
Openings and Penetrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-4
'
Location
Through floor
with bottom side
a hazardous
area.
Through floors
on grade above
water table
Through slabs
on grade below
water table
Through floors
in areas with
floor drains or
hose bibs
(wet areas)
Through fire
rated walls
Through walls
where one side is
a hazardous area
I�`iC�:1f'
Duct
Pipes
Conduits
Ducts
Pipes
Conduits
Pipes
Conduits
Ducts
Pipes
21N
and smaller
Larger
than 2 IN
Conduits
Ducts
Pipe
2 IN
and smaller
Larger
than
21N
Conduits
Duct (Round)
Pipe
Conduit
Opening
Tvpe
C
E,
F
F
E
F
DorE
F
C
Sealing Material
Cateqory
4
4
11
not required
4
not required
1
not required
6
A,H or C 5 or 6 at areas
subject to wash down
E 5 or 6 at areas
subject to wash down
F not required
A 3or10
:3.1ii;l
f:l
F
DorE
DorE
F
7or10
3or10
not required
1
1
11
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section ►Va
Openings and Penetrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-5
Location
Through exterior
wall below grade
Through wall
from wet well to
dry well
Through exterior
wall above grade
Roof
penetration
Through interior
walls unless
specifically
covered above
Media
Duct
Pipe
Conduits
Pipes
Duct
Pipe
Conduits
Duct
Pipes
Conduits
Ducts
Pipes
Conduits
Opening
Type
DorE
DorE
H
F
F
DorE
F
A or F
B, D
or E
F
A
A
A
F
AorC
AorC
F
END OF SECTION
Sealing Material
Cateqory
1
1
1
not required
not required
1
not required
1 or 4
not required
8
8
8
not required
4
4
not required
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Openings and Penefrations in Construction
0992-0205 01800-6
'
'
�
SECTION 02050 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work under this section includes furnishing labor, equipment and materials for
demolition, removat and proper disposal of certain structures, piping, equipment,
all stripping, trees, steps and existing asphalt and concrete surfaces, existing
sidewalk and curb and gutter as indicated or specified. Do not begin demolition
until authorization is received from the Owner, refer to paragraph "Title to
Materials", hereinafter. Remove rubbish and debris daily, unless otherwise
directed; do not allow accumulations. Store materials that cannot be removed
daily in areas approved by the Owner. The demolition and removal of materials
containing asbestos shall be in accordance with State and Federal regulations.
:
�
Structure demolition shall include removal of existing wooden, concrete and
masonry structures, and cutting through or into existing reinforced concrete walls
and masonry walls.
Pipe demolition shall consist of cutting, plugging, and removal of piping as
required.
Pavement demolition shall consist of cutting and removing existing asphalt
pavement, concrete pavement, and concrete curb and gutter.
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Clearing and Grubbing
B. Electrical:
REQUIREMENTS
Section IV Article 56
Section 16010
A. Dust Control: Take appropriate action to check the spread of dust to occupied
portions of any nearby buildings and avoid the creation of a nuisance in the
surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution. Comply with all dust regulations
imposed by local air pollution agencies.
B. Protection: Protect existing work which is to remain in place, that is to be reused,
or which is to remain the property of Owner by temporary covers, shoring,
bracing and supports. Items which are to remain and which are damaged during
performance of the work shall be repaired to their original condition or replaced.
Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement
for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work.
C. Facilities: Protect all electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where
removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide
approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary
services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities.
D. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
E. Burninq: Burning will not be permitted.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Demolition and Removal
0992-0205 02050-1
'
F
lJ
Requlations: Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal ,
regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed demolition and removal procedures to the Engineer for
approval before work is started. Procedures shall provide for coordination with
other work in progress, a disconnection schedu�e of utility services, a detailed
description of inethods and equipment to be used for each operation of the
sequence of operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
3.2
3.3
,
'
,
�l
A. The Contractor shall review the demolition plans and the construction notes �
pertaining to the existing buildings and structures prior to submittal of the
demolition plan to the Engineer.
EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Concrete and masonry structures which are in the way of new work shall be cut off to a
point at least 12" below finished grade level and backfilled and covered with suitable fill
unless indicated to be completely removed. Compaction shall be 99% of Modified
Standard Proctor at optimum moisture content.
A. Existing concrete and masonry structures to be cut for installation of conduit and
piping shall be neatly cut using core drills. After installation of conduit or pipe the
annular space shall be filled with non-shrink grout.
B. Items such as concrete sidewalk, stairs, curb and gutter and asphalt pavements
shall be removed as necessary to complete the project as shown on the plans.
All concrete and asphalt items to be removed shall be saw cut with a neat clean
line then removed. The Contractor shall take care as to not damage adjacent
structures during removal. Any damage to adjacent facilities will be the
Contractor's responsibility.
C. The Owner has drawings available for reviewing for the structure and buildings
indicated to be abandoned. The Contractor may review these drawings in the
office of the City or inspect these structures during a site visit.
UTILITIES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED
Remove all existing utilities and related equipment uncovered by work and terminate in a
manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility.
Equipment to be removed shall be removed with as little damage to the equipment as
possible. Any anchor bolts or plates shall be removed by cutting and holes shall be
grouted over flush with surface. Remove lights and stanchion and related equipment and
deliver to a location in accordance with instruction of the Owner or his representative
without additional cost.
A. Piping shown on the plans to be removed shall be disassembled where possible
(and cut where required) and removed. All piping stub-outs indicated to remain
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Secfion IVa
Demolition and Removal
0992-0205 02050-2
�I
r
'
'
C
'
'
�
�
��
�
'
�_ J
�
�_J
,
u
,
'
�
J
shali be blind flanged, covered with a threaded cap or closed with a permanent
mechanical pfug, as appropriate.
DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
Title to Materials - Except where indicated otherwise or specifically specified otherwise in
other sections or as indicated on the plans, all materials and equipment removed, and
not reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the
property. Title to all materials resulting from demolition, and all materials and equipment
to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the demolition and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Engineer to begin demolition. The Owner will not
be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after Notice to
Proceed. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or
sold on the site.
A. Reuse of materials and equipment - Carefully remove and store materials and
equipment to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the
work progresses.
B. Salvaged materials and equipment as specified by the Owner - Carefully remove
materials that are to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the
property of the Owner, and deliver to a storage site as directed within 15 miles of
the work site.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent spillage
on streets or adjacent areas. Cleanup any spillage from streets and adjacent
areas that occur during transportation operations. The site shall have all debris
removed and shall be graded to conform to the adjacent area in such a manner
to provide proper drainage. The site shall be properly seeded and mulched after
completion of demolition operations.
END OF SECTION
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Demolition and Removal
0992-0205 02050-3
�
i
SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK
�
,
'
��
PART 1
1.1
� 1.2
�
�
�
'
�
�_1
'
�
�
1
�
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes digging of excavations for structures, piping and roadways;
backfilling around structures and piping; shaping and contouring the ground
surface to conform to established grades and elevations; compacting of earth or
rock materials to specified densities; bracing, sheeting and shoring; dewatering;
removal of surplus excavated materials; and related work as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
DEFINITIONS
�
0
C.
Excavation: Removal of earth and rock to form cavities for the construction of
foundations and structures and to form trenches for the installation of piping or
conduits.
Cavity: Formed by the removal of earth and rock.
Earth: Unconsolidated material in the crust of the earth derived by weathering
and erosion. Earth includes:
1. Materials of both inorganic and organic origin
2. Boulders less than 1/3 cubic yard in volume, gravel, sand, silt, and clay
3. Materials which can be excavated with a backhoe, trenching machine,
drag line, clam shell, bulldozer, highlift, or similar excavating equipment
without the use of explosives, rock rippers, rock hammers, or jack
hammers
D. Rock: A natural aggregate of mineral particles connected by strong and
permanent cohesive forces. Rock includes:
1. Limestone, sandstone, dolomite, granite, marble, and lava
E
F
2. Boulders 1/3 cubic yard or more in volume
3. Materials which cannot be excavated by equipment which is used to
remove earth overburden without the use of explosives, rock rippers, rock
hammers, or jack hammers.
Undercutting: Excavation of rock and unsuitable earth below the bottom of a
foundation, structure, pipe or conduit to be constructed or installed.
Subgrade: Undisturbed bottom of an excavation
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-1
G. Bedding: Earth placed in trench to support pipe and conduit.
H. Backfill and Fill: Earth placed around structures from the bottom of an
excavation to finished grade, or to the subbase of pavement. Earth placed in a
trench from the top of bedding to finished grade, or to subbase of pavement.
Structural Compact Fill: Required to establish the finished grade should consist
of clean cohesion less fill comprising the SP to SP-SM unified soil classification
or ASSHTO A-3 Classification. Each lift, which should not exceed 12 inches,
should be uniformly compacted to not less that 95% of the modified proctor
maximum density.
Topsoil: Earth confaining su�cient organic materials to support the growth of
grass.
JOB CONDITIONS
Carefully maintain bench marks, monuments and other reference points, and if
disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed.
Should the Contractor encounter unusual subsurface and/or latent conditions at
the site, he shall immediately give notice to the Owner and Engineer of such
conditions before they are disturbed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation and landfill work in compliance with
appticable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: The Owner will retain a Soils Engineer to
perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing of earthwork
operations. Tests revealing satisfactory results will be paid for by the Owner. The
cost of tests revealing unsatisfactory results will be deducted from monies due to
the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
I�
I:?
Earth for Fill and Backfill: Earth used for fill or backfill shall be of such gradation
and moisture content that it will compact to the specified density and remain
stable.
Pipe Bedding: Pipe bedding material for Type A-2 trenches shall be No. 57
crushed stone with gradation as noted in Table 1 of Section 901 of the FDOT
Standard Specifications.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-2
�
C
�
'
u
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
,
I. I
�
'
'
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
C. Pipe Cover Material: Pipe cover material shall consist of durable particles ranging
in size from fine to coarse (No. 200 to 1-inch) in size, in a substantially uniform
combination. Unwashed bank run sand and crushed bank-run gravel will be
considered generally acceptable. Bedding material may be used for cover
material.
D. Special Backfill: Special backfill shall be the following soils, classified by the
Unified Soil Classification System, ASTM D-2487:
Grouq Symbols Tvpical Name
GW Well-graded gravels and gravel-sand mixtures, little
or no fines
GP Poorly graded gravels and gravel- sand mixtures,
little
or no fines
E.
SW Well-graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no
fines
SP Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no
fines
Suitable Backfill: Suitable backfill shall be the following soils, classified by the
Unified Soil Classification System, ASTM D-2487:
Group Symbols Tvpical Name
GW Well-graded gravels and gravel- sand mixtures,
little or no fines
GP Poorly graded gravels and gravel- sand mixtures,
little or no fines
GM Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures
GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures
SW Well-graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no
fines
SP Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no
fines
SM Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures
SC Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
' Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-3
1
ML
C�1�
Inorganic silts, very fine sands, rock flour, silty or
clayey fine sands
Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly
clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays
F. Unsuitable Materials: Materials which are unsuitable for backfill include stones
greater than 6-inches in their largest dimension, pavement, rubbish, debris,
wood, metal, plastic, and the following soils, classified by the Unified Soil
Classification System, ASTM D-2487:
Group Svmbols
OL
MH
CH
OH
PT
Tvpical Name
Organic silts and organic silty clays of low plasticity
Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine
sands or silts, elastic silts
Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays
Organic clays of inedium to high plasticity
Peat, muck, and other highly organic soils
G. Structural Compact Fill: Preparation of the subgrade prior to pond backfilling will
necessitate removal and replacement of pond bottom silts as well as the very
loose silty soils on the flanks of the pond (see the Geotechnical Report for further
requirements). The entire tank footprint, plus a margin of at least 5 feet outside
the foundation perimeter should be striped down to the existing pond bottom
elevation including over-excavation of any accumulated sediments, followed by
proof-rolling with heavy vibratory compaction equipment. The contractor should
anticipate the excavation would extend to approximate EL +15 feet. Compaction
should consist of no less than ten (10) complete coverages throughout the entire
tank area plus a margin of not less than 5 feet beyond the tank perimeters. The
perimeter foundation area for the tank structures should be densified at the
bottom of footing elevation. Compaction should continue so as to develop a
uniform density of not less than 95% of the modified proctor maximum dry
density per ASTM D-1557. Compaction tests should be conducted at intervals of
no less than 1 test for each 2500 square feet and each 50 foot of foundation
perimeter at a depth of 1 foot and at the compacted subgrade elevation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
�
PROTECTION OF EXISTtNG FACILITIES
Support and protect all poles, fences, utility pipes, wire, conduits, buildings and
structures.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-4
,
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�I
'
�
'
B. Proceed with caution during excavation so the exact location of underground
� utilities and structures, both known and unknown, may be determined. Contractor
shall be responsible for the repair of utilities and structures when broken or
otherwise damaged.
�
'
�
�
'
�
C. Wherever water, or other pipes or conduits cross the excavation, the Contractor
shall support said pipes and conduits without damage to them and without
interrupting this Contract. The manner of supporting such pipes, or similar items,
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
D. When utilities that have to be removed or relocated are encountered within the
areas of operations, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in ample time for the
necessary measure to be taken to prevent interruption of the service.
E. The Contractor shall so conduct the work that no equipment, material, or debris
will be placed or allowed to fall upon private property in the vicinity of the work,
unless he shall have first obtained the property Owner's written consent to do so
and shall have shown said written consent to the Owner.
F. All excavated material shalf be piled in a manner that will not obstruct driveways.
Hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, or other
utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is
completed. Drainageways shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions
made for drainage.
� G.
� 3.2
A.
Natural watercourses shall not be obstructed, except where specifically permitted
for the construction of outfall and subaqueous crossings.
CLEARING
Before excavating, clear and remove logs, stumps, brush, vegetation, rubbish,
and other perishable matter from the project site.
B. Do not remove or damage trees that do not interFere with the finished work.
Completely remove trees required to be removed, including stumps and roots.
Replace trees removed unnecessarily. Properly treat damaged trees which can
be saved.
STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL
A. Strip topsoil and vegetation from the areas to be excavated. Clean topsoil may
be stockpiled for reuse; the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner for
location of excavated stockpiled materials.
EXCAVATING
A. Make excavations to elevations and dimensions necessary to permit bracing,
sheeting, erection of forms, inspection of foundation and installation of piping or
conduits. Excavate trenches to the required alignment, depth and width.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
' Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-5
'
Excavate trenches in advance of pipe and conduit installation only as far as
necessary to provide proper alignment and grade. Plan trenching operations to
cause a minimum of danger to adjacent property and a minimum of
inconvenience to the public.
B. The width of trenches at the top of the pipe shall be ample to permit the pipe to
be laid and joined properly and to allow the backfifl to be placed and compacted
as specified. Maximum trench width shall be such that design loadings on pipe
will not be exceeded. Trenches shall be of such extra width, when required, to
permit the placement of supports, sheeting, bracing, and appurtenances.
�
�
�
i
C. Depth of trenches shall be such as to allow installation of pipelines at the grades �
or elevations shown.
D. Trees, boulders, and other surface encumbrances, located so as to create a
hazard to anyone involved in the excavation work or who is in the vicinity of the
work at anytime during operations, shall be removed or made safe before
excavating is begun.
E. Contractor shall be responsible for the determination of the angle of repose of the
soil in which the excavating is to be done. Excavate all slopes to at least the
angle of repose except for areas where solid rock allows for line drilling or
presplitting.
F. Sides, slopes, and faces of all excavations shall meet accepted engineering
requirements by scaling, benching, barricading, rock bolting, wire meshing, or
other equally effective means. Give special attention to slopes which may be
adversely affected by weather or moisture content.
G. Flatten the excavation sides when an excavation has water conditions, silty
materials, loose boulders, and areas where erosion and slide planes appear.
H. Shore or otherwise support sides of excavations in hard or compact soil when the
excavation is more than five feet in depth. In lieu of shoring, the sides of the
excavation above the five-foot level may be sloped to preclude collapse, but shall
not be steeper than a one-foot rise to each 1/2-foot horizontal.
Use diversion ditches, dikes, or other suitable means to prevent surface water
from entering an excavation and to provide adequate drainage of the area
adjacent to the excavation. Do not allow water to accumulate in an excavation. If
possible, the grade should be away from the excavation.
Excavations shall be inspected by a competent Contractor's representative after
every rainstorm or other hazard-increasing occurrence, and the protection
against slides and cave-ins shall be increased if necessary.
K. Do not store excavated or other material nearer than four feet from the edge of
any excavation. Store and retain materials as to prevent materials from falling or
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork '
0992-0205 02200-6
�
�
'
'
3.6
sliding back into the excavation. Install substantial sfop log or barricades when
mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations.
DEWATERING
A. Keep excavations free from water until foundations, structures, and piping are
completed and will safely withstand forces generated by water. Provide sufficient
dewatering equipment and make proper arrangements for the disposal of water
from dewatering operation. Dewatering shall not damage property, create
nuisances, or interfere with other work. Do not use sanitary sewers for the
disposal of water from dewatering operations.
SHEETING
A. The Contractor has the option of sheeting excavations.
B. Supporting systems, such as piling, cribbing, shoring, and bracing shall be
designed by a qualified Contractor's representative and meet accepted
engineering requirements. When tie rods are used to restrain the top of sheeting
or other retaining systems, securely anchor the tie rods well back of the angle of
repose. When tight sheeting or sheet piling is used, assume full loading due to
groundwater table, unless prevented by weep holes or drains or other means.
Provide additional stringers, ties, and bracing to allow for any necessary
temporary removal of individual supports.
f�.
❑�
Materials used for sheeting, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring and
underpinning shall be in good, serviceable condition. Timbers shall be sound,
free from large or loose knots, and of proper dimensions.
Take special precautions in sloping or shoring the sides of excavations adjacent
to a previously backfilled excavation or a fill, particularly when the separation is
less than the depth of the excavation. Pay particular attention to joints and seams
of material comprising a face and to the slope of such seams and joints.
E. If it is necessary to place or operate power shovels, derricks, trucks, materials, or
other heavy objects on a level above or near an excavation, sheet-pile, shore,
and brace the side of the excavation as necessary to resist the extra pressure
due to such superimposed loads.
F
G
If the stability of adjoining buildings or walls is endangered by excavations,
provide shoring, bracing, or underpinning as necessary to ensure the safety of
adjoining buildings or walls. Such shoring, bracing or underpinning shall be
inspected daily or more often, as conditions warrant, by a competent Contractor's
representative and the protection effectively maintained.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the sufficiency of all sheeting and
bracing used, and for all damage to persons or property resulting from the
improper quality, strength, placing, maintaining, or removing of the same. This
includes damage to trees, sidewalks, and other property on the project site as
well as on the private grounds.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-7
�
�
�
r
�
3.6
sliding back into the excavation. tnstall substantial stop log or barricades when
mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations.
DEWATERING
A. Keep excavations free from water until foundations, structures, and piping are
completed and will safely withstand forces generated by water. Provide sufficient
dewatering equipment and make proper arrangements for the disposal of water
from dewatering operation. Dewatering shall not damage property, create
nuisances, or interfere with other work. Do not use sanitary sewers for the
disposal of water from dewatering operations.
SHEETING
A. The Contractor has the option of sheeting excavations.
B. Supporting systems, such as piling, cribbing, shoring, and bracing shall be
designed by a qualified Contractor's representative and meet accepted
engineering requirements. When tie rods are used to restrain the top of sheeting
or other retaining systems, securely anchor the tie rods well back of the angle of
repose. When tight sheeting or sheet piling is used, assume full loading due to
groundwater table, unless prevented by weep holes or drains or other means.
Provide additional stringers, ties, and bracing to allow for any necessary
temporary removal of individual supports.
C. Materials used for sheeting, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring and
underpinning shall be in good, serviceable condition. Timbers shalf be sound,
free from large or loose knots, and of proper dimensions.
D. Take special precautions in sloping or shoring the sides of excavations adjacent
to a previously backfilled excavation or a fill, particular{y when the separation is
less than the depth of the excavation. Pay particular attention to joints and seams
of material comprising a face and to the slope of such seams and joints.
E. If it is necessary to place or operate power shovels, derricks, trucks, materials, or
other heavy objects on a level above or near an excavation, sheet-pile, shore,
and brace the side of the excavation as necessary to resist the extra pressure
due to such superimposed loads.
F
G.
If the stability of adjoining buildings or walls is endangered by excavations,
provide shoring, bracing, or underpinning as necessary to ensure the safety of
adjoining buildings or walls. Such shoring, bracing or underpinning shall be
inspected daily or more often, as conditions warrant, by a competent Contractor's
representative and the protection effectively maintained.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the sufficiency of all sheeting and
bracing used, and for all damage to persons or property resulting from the
improper quality, strength, placing, maintaining, or removing of the same. This
includes damage to trees, sidewalks, and other property on the project site as
well as on the private grounds.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
� Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-7
,
LJ
�I
�
excavation of any accumulated sediments, followed by proof-rolling with heavy
vibratory compaction equipment. The contractor should anticipate the excavation
would extend to approximate EL +15 feet. Compaction should consist of no less
than ten (10) complete coverages throughout the entire tank area plus a margin
of not less than 5 feet beyond the tank perimeters. The perimeter foundation
area for the tank structures shoutd be densified at the bottom of footing elevation.
Compaction should continue so as to develop a uniform density of not less than
95% of the modified proctor maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557.
Compaction tests should be conducted at intervals of no less than 1 test for each
2500 square feet and each 50 foot of foundation perimeter at a depth of 1 foot
and at the compacted subgrade elevation.
D. Any fill required to achieve finished grade in structural areas or used as structural
compact fill shall be inorganic, non-plastic granular soil containing less than 10%
material passing a No. 200 sieve. Fill shall be placed in level lifts not to exceed
12-inches loose thickness and compacted to a minimum of 95% of the modified
Proctor maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Specification D-1557.
In-place density tests will be performed on each lift to verify that the specified
degree of compacting has been achieved.
BACKFILLING FOUNDATION AND STRUCTURE EXCAVATIONS
A. Remove debris and other unstable or unsuitable materials from excavations
before backfilling is started.
B. Backfill excavations in areas to be paved with Special Backfill. Place Special
Backfill in 12-inch lifts. Compact each lift of backfill to not less than 100% of the
maximum dry density as determined in accordance with AASHTO T99, Method
A. Compaction shall be by hand tamping or approved mechanical tamping
devices, or in larger excavations by approved rollers. Do not compact backfill by
puddling, unless permitted by the Engineer.
C. Backfill excavations not requiring Special Backfill with Suitable Material. Place
backfill and fill materials in lifts no greater than 12-inches in loose depth. Place
backfill and fill materials in lifts no greater than four inches in loose depth where
hand tampers are used. Backfill and fill shall be within 2% of optimum moisture
content. For soils containing less than 5% material passing a No. 200 sieve,
moisture content may be increased to within 3% of optimum. Compact backfill
and fill to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density. Compact backfill and fill
for restoration of dirt driveways shall be not less than 100% of the maximum dry
density for last lift. Tests for determination of maximum dry density shall meet
the requirements of ASTM D698 Method C. Use compaction equipment which is
suited to the soil being compacted.
I�.
E.
If suitable, use stored excavated material for backfill and fill. Provide additional
material, if required, to complete backfill and fill. Additional backfill and fill
material shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
Do not use the following materials for backfill:
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
, 0992-0205
�
Section IVa
Earthwork
02200-9
'
�
1
2
Unsuitable materials
Materials which are too wet or too dry to be compacted to the densities
specified in this Section.
F. Place the backfill and fill in a manner which will not overload foundations or
structures. Place backfill and fill evenly on all sides of foundations and structures.
Do not use equipment that will overload foundations or structures during filling or
backfilling.
G. Do all cutting, filling, and grading necessary to bring the entire area around
foundations and outside of structures to the following subgrade levels:
1. To the underside of the respective surfacing for walks and pavement
2. To finished grade for lawns and planted areas within the project site.
BACKFILLING PIPING TRENCHES
A. Do not backfill trenches and excavations until al{ utilities have been inspected by
the Owner's representative and until all underground utilities and piping systems
are installed in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and the
drawings.
B. Remove debris and other unsuitable materials from excavations before
backfilling is started.
C. Place and tamp bedding and backfilling in a manner which will not damage pipe
coating, wrapping, or encasement.
D. Bedding procedures shall be as specified in the particular Section for the
applicable pipe material.
E. If bedding does not cover the pipe, place pipe cover material from the top of
bedding to 12-inches over the pipe. Compact pipe cover material to the density
required to allow backfill over the pipe cover material to be compacted to the
density specified.
F. Do not use the following materials for backfilling:
1. Unsuitable Materials
2. Materials which are too wet or too dry to be compacted to the densities
specified in this Section.
G. If suitable, use stored excavated material for backfill and fill. Provide additional
material, if required, to complete backfill and fill. Additional backfill and fill
material shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Backfill
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-10
�
�
excavations in areas to be paved with Special Backfill. Place Special Backfill in
� 12-inch lifts. Compact each lift of backfill to not less than 100% of the maximum
dry density as determined in accordance with AASHTO T99, Method A.
Compaction shall be by hand tamping or approved mechanical tamping devices,
� or in larger excavations by approved rollers. Backfill and fill materials shall be
within 2% of optimum moisture content. Do not compact backfill by puddling,
unless permitted by the Engineer.
H. Backfill trenches not requiring Special Backfill with Suitable Material. Place
backfill and fill materials in lifts no greater than 12-inches in loose depth and
compact to produce an adequate foundation for seeding. The top 4-inches of
backfill shall not contain stones or other objects larger than 1-inch in maximum
dimension. Mound backfill above finish grade to allow for settlement. Fill and
restore any setttement of the backfill. Grade area to be restored to finish grade
after settlement of backfill and immediately before restoration of vegetated areas.
/_�
�
�
�
�
'
3.14
SHELL BASE
Construction of a base course composed of shell shall be as specified in Section
250 of the FDOT Standard Specifications.
FINISH GRADING
Shape the surface of all earthwork to conform to the lines, grades, contours and
cross-sections shown on the drawings. Hand dressing may be required in certain
areas or in confined areas where equipment operation is restricted.
In final shaping of the surFace of the earthwork a toferance of 0.1 foot above or
below the plan elevation will be allowed with the following exceptions:
1.
2.
3.
Earthwork shall be shaped to slope away from all buildings and
structures.
Earthwork shall be shaped to match adjacent pavement, curb, sidewalks,
and similar appurtenances.
Ditch bottoms and swales shall be shaped so that no water will be
impounded except in areas designated for impoundment.
CLEANUP AND MAINTENANCE
A. Cleanup the job site as grading is completed. Remove excess earth, rock,
bedding, materials, and backfill materials. Remove unused piping materials,
structure components, and appurtenances. Restore items moved, damaged, or
destroyed during construction.
B. Maintain the job site until the work has been completed and accepted. Fill
excavations which settle when settlement is visible. Restore items damaged by
construction or improper restorations. Keep dust conditions to a minimum.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-91
3.15
3.16
STORAGE AND REMOVAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Suitable excavated material required for filling and backfilling operations may be
stockpileci on the job site.
B. Remove unsuitable materials from the job site as unsuitable materials are
excavated. Remove surplus suitable materials from the job site as excavations
are backfilled.
C. Excavated suitable surplus materials shall remain the Owner's property and shall
be stockpiled at the location(s) designated by the Owner.
DUST CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall take all steps possible to prevent and reduce dust arising
from the construction activity. The Contractor shall have adequate water trucks
on the site at all times and water, as necessary, the areas where dust may arise.
He shall cooperate fully with the Owner's Representative and water immediately
when instructed to do so.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa
Earthwork
0992-0205 02200-12
,
�
�J
�
��
�
�
,
�
�
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix
design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Cast-in-place concrete includes the following:
a
b
c
d
Foundations and footings.
Slabs-on-grade.
Equipment pads and bases.
Liquid Containment Structures (LCS) walls and base slabs.
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement
and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops,
joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if
requested by Engineer.
2. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and
placing concrete reinforcement. Shop drawings to show proposed
location of all construction joints. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of
Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing
bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of
concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings
through concrete structures. Engineer's review is for general compliance
only. The Contractor will be responsible for size, number and lengths of
reinforcing.
3. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms
for specific finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction incfuding
jointing, special form joints or reveals, tocation and pattern of form tie
placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually.
Engineer's review is for general applications and features only.
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-1
4
�
�:�
Designing formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's
responsibility.
The testing laboratory shall submit three copies of results of concrete
cylinder tests to Engineer together with one copy each to Owner,
Contractor, and Concrete Supplier.
Ready-mixed concrete delivered shall be accompanied by delivery tickets
showing the following:
a. Date and time leaving the plant
b. Type of cement and weight
c. Quanity of water and time added
d. Aggregate moisture correction factor
e. Admixtures and weight
f. Site arrival time
g. Site leaving time
h. Type of fly ash and weight
i. Mix Number
Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.
Contractor shall submit three (3) copies.
7. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when
permitted by Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by
manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies
with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from
admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification
requirements.
8. Hot weather and cold weather concreting plan shall include curing
method and specific curing plan, ready mixed supplier plan, contingency
plans, and materials list as a minimum. All hot weather plans shall meet
requirements of ACI 305. All cold weather plans shall meet requirements
of AC I 306.
�
�
�
�
�
�
9. A pouring plan will be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for �
approval showing the location of all construction joints and sawed
contraction joints.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest revision of the
following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent �
requirements are shown or specified:
1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 211 "Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete."
2. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
3. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
4. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa ,
Cast-/n-P/ace Concrete
0992-0205 03300-2
u
�
r
�
�
�
:
C.
5. ACI 350 "Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures."
6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSf) "Manual of Standard
Practice."
7. ASTM C 94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete.
8. Florida Building Code.
9. ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting" and 306 "Cold Weather Concreting."
Concrete Testing Service: Contractor will engage a testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests.
Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during
progress of Work. Any retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be
done at Contractor's expense.
D. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability
of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for
materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Contractor's superintendent.
2. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes.
3. Agency responsible for field quality control.
4. Ready-mix concrete producer.
5. Concrete subcontractor.
6. Primary admixture manufacturers.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, mefal, metal-framed plywood
faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight,
smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form)
Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each
piece bearing legible inspection trademark.
C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another
acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side
for tight fit.
D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic, or paper or fiber tubes that will produce smooth surfaces without joint
indications. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete
loads without deformation.
E. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a
maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with,
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-ln-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-3
'
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal
form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete
upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to
the plane of the exposed concrete surface.
G. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch and no
smaller than 'h inch in diameter in the concrete surface. Form ties for exposed
concrete shall be of the cone-washer type. The cones shatl be made of
approved wood or plastic. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an
integral waterstop that is tightly welded to the tie. Common wire will not be
allowed for form ties.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
�
0
C
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for �
spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in
place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
E. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where �
base material will not support chair legs.
F. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with �
forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or
stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2).
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
Q
0
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F
1. Use one brand of cement and fly ash throughout Project unless otherwise
acceptable to Engineer.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates
from a single source for exposed concrete.
2.4 WATER
A. Mixing water shall meet specified requirements of ASTM C 94, Section 5.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-4
�
, 2.5
U
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
r
�
�
ADMtXTURES, GENERAL
I_1
0
C.
Q
Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride
ions.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other required admixtures.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Conair, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
c. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co.
d. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
f. Sika AER, Sika Corp.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A or D.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9�
Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
Cormix Construction Chemicals.
Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co.
WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Super P, Anti-Hydro Company, Inc.
b. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Company.
c. Daracem, W.R. Grace and Company.
d. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
e. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries.
f. Sikament 300, Sika Corp.
2.6 CALCIUM CHLORIDE
A. The use of calcium chloride will not be permitted.
2.7 RELATED MATERIALS
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-5
I�
:
Regtets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in
reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217- inch-thick galvanized sheet steel.
Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch
thick with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to
prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
C. Waterstops: Provide ribbed or dumbbell-type waterstops at construction joints
exposed to water pressure, including groundwater pressure, and other joints as
indicated. Provide ribbed or dumbbell type with centerbulb waterstops at
expansion joints. In general waterstops shall be 9" wide. Install 6" wide
waterstops at intersections with reinforced sections with 3" of clear cover. All
waterstops shall be a minimum of 3/8" thick. All waterstops shall be provided
with either metal grommets or intergat tie wires located along the top and bottom
of the waterstop spaced at 12". Other styles or sizes of waterstops may be
considered based on their specific application.
I�]
�
F
G.
H
Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. The Burke Co.
c. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co.
d. Meadows, Inc.
e. Progress Unlimited.
f. Vinylex Corp.
Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand.
Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when
tested according to ASTM E 154, as follows:
Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick.
Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy kraft papers lamin�ted together with
glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side.
Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately
9 oz./sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.
1. Waterproof paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.
'
�
II
U
�
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
�
�
r
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section 1Va �
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-6
�
�
�
2.9
_
Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry
or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project
requirements.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
b. Spec-Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
c. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co.
e. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
g. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
h. Metco Hi-Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries.
i. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp.
j. Series, Symons Corp.
K. Monofilament Concrete Fibers: Manufactured from 100% homopolymer,
polypropylene resin, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, and in
compliance with ASTM C-1116 "Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced
Concrete and Shotcrete." Monofilament concrete fibers shall be added to all
concrete slabs-on-grade as called for on project drawings, at a rate of one pound
of fibers per cubic yard of concrete (1.0 Ib/cy).
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES:
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory
trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, ACI 211, and ACI
350. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable
to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
B. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
C. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of the total cementitious content by
weight. Fly ash shall be used either as an admixture or as a partial cement
replacement. Fly ash may be used in all structural concrete.
D. Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of
concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete
production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engineer.
E. Monofilament concrete fibers shall be added to all concrete slabs at a rate of one
pound of fibers per cubic yard of concrete (1.0 Ib/cy). Fibers shall also be added
to concrete as called for on project drawings.
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-/n-P/ace Concrete
0992-0205 03300-7
�
Design mixes to provide concrete with the following properties as indicated on
schedules:
MAXIMUM WATER MINIMUM
CLASS 7 DAY 28 DAY - CEMENTITIOUS CEMENTITIOUS
RATIO MATERIAL (LBS/CY)
Structural 2670 4000 0.44 564
Non-Structural 2000 3000 0.50 470
Structural, High Density 3000 4500 0.40 650
2.10 STRUCTURAL HIGH DENSITY CONCRETE
Structural, High Density Concrete shall be used in all structures where concrete is
intended to be watertight in service.
2.11 SLUMP LIMITS
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
A. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.
B. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3
inches.
C. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not
more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2- 3 inch slump
concrete.
2.12 CONCRETE MIX ADJUSTMENTS
A. Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of
materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant,
as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and
strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in
Work.
2.13 ADMIXTURES
A. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for
heavy-use industrial slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with
water-cement ratios below 0.50.
B. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to
result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 5% with a
tolerance of plus or minus 1.0 percent.
2.14 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Cast-ln-Place Concrefe
0992-0205 03300-8
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
1. When air temperature is befinreen 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air
temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
2.15 WATERPROOFING
A. Provide below-grade surface applied waterproofing.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Sonneborn HLM 5000.
b. Thoroseal/Acry160.
2.16 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS
A. Hydrophilic Resin:
1. Hydrophilic resin shall be an acrylic-ester based resin with a maximum
viscosity of 50 cps. It shall cure into a flexible rubber-like material that
has the potential for unrestrained increase in volume in excess of 100
percent in the presence of water.
2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
� 3.1 GENERAL
�
'
'
r
Duroseal Inject, as manufactured by BBZ USA, Inc.
Sika Injection 29, by Sika Corporation.
Or an approved equal.
Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other
related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
FORMS
1. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until
concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and
surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
a. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surtaces exposed to view.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300.9
�
3.2
b. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain
accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished
structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses,
moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads,
anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected
materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at
joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage
cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is
too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.
E. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace
temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar.
Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
F. Chamfer all exposed corners and edges, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber
chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
Chamfer edges to be 3/4" unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to
accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings,
recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and
securely support items built into forms.
H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to
receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before
placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as
required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A.
B.
C.
D.
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended
practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports and as specified.
Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement
placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials
that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and
hangers, as approved by Engineer.
�
�
�
����
�
�
,
�
�
�
�I
�
'
'
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa �
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-10
�
,
E. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete
protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so
ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths
to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
� 3.3 JOINTS
�
�
,
,
��
'
�
'
�
'
L�
�
�
1:3
C
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair
strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Engineer.
Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue
reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh
concrete.
D. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install
waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect
exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops
according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
E.
F
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at
points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
Joint fillers and sealants shall be as follows:
1. Joint Fillers
2
a. Self-expanding Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying
with ASTM D 1752 for Type III.
L^,
c.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752
for Type II.
Sponge Rubber Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with
ASTM D 1752 for Type I.
d. Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Performed strips complying with
ASTM D 1751: Granulated cork with asphalt binder encased
between 2 layers of saturated felt of glass-fiber felt of width and
thickness indicated.
Joint Sealers shall be appropriate for their intended use and installations.
Follow manufactures instruction for use and installation. All joint sealants
shall be in accordance with ACI 504R.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-11
i
3.4 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and buiid into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded
items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place
concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided
by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for
slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide
and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or
compacting-type screeds.
3.5 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
/�
:
C
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, non-residual, low-
VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement.
Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into
contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be
placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions.
Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained
steel formwork is not acceptable.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
;�
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation,
reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to
permit installation of their work.
General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and
Placing Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause
seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at
its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no
deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding
layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
0
F
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible
'
�
'
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
'
�
�
'
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va �
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-12
,
LJ
�
'
�
�
�
�1
�
�
'
�
�
'
'
,
iJ
�
�
G
H.
K.
M
�
Q
effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower
layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of
vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of
reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. A
spare vibrator will be on-site for emergency use at all times.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consotidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints or expansion joints, until completing
placement of a panel or section.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull
floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows.
Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to falt below 40 deg F,
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F) at point of
placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Calcium chloride will not
be allowed.
Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as
specified.
P. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of
placement to be in accordance with ACI. Mixing water may be chilled or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Ice can not be used to replace
more than half of the design total water content. Using liquid nitrogen to cool
concrete is Contractor's option.
Q. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that
steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-ln-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-13
,
1:7
�
Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Engineer.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete
surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other
construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing
material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins
and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
Finish shall be a Class C in accordance with ACI 347.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete
surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly
to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as
waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system.
This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely
removed and smoothed. Finish shall be a Class A in accordance with ACI 347.
C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete
surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment.
Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by
volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based
bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint.
Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts
determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match
adjacent surFaces.
2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill
small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean
burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar
unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with
a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surFaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish
and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or
elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and
where indicated.
After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work
surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-ln-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-14
�J
�
�
L�
�
�
�
�
,
,
�
'
�
�l
�
�
�
��
,
,
�
��
'
�
l_1
�
'
�
'
,
'
�l
u
F
shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has
stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both.
Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F)
25 (floor flatness) and F(L) 20 (floor levelness) measured according to
ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Cut down high spots and filf low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat
surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Class of surface shall be
a class C surFace in accordance with 347 R.
Non-slip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip light broom finish to exterior concrete
platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surFace by
brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application.
G. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of
work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other
trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-
place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or
required to complete Work. All grout shall be non-shrinking.
,1
�1J
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while
concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surFaces to a hard, dense finish with
corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and
equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or
templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steef pan stair treads, landings, and
associated items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings.
Screed, tamp, and non-slip broom concrete surfaces.
K. Below Grade Concrete: Waterproof the exterior (grade) side of tank and building
walls. Prepare surface based upon manufacturer's recommendations. Material
may be spray, brush or roller applied. Conform to manufacturers
recommendations for chosen application.
3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
� A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from
rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-
� control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding
and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
�
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-15
,
B. Start initiai curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface
after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 14 days as
required due to weather.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover
curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
1. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuousty wet by covering with water.
b. Use continuous water-fog spray.
c. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover,
thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet.
Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces
and edges, with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing
concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends
lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist
curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are
removed. As soon as initial set has occurred, place a soil soaker hose
along the tops of all walls to keep concrete forms wet during the curing
period. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified
above, as applicable, for the remainder of the curing period. If forms are
removed before the end of the curing period, then the concrete shall be
continuously moist for the remainder of the curing period by fog spraying
or covering with moist burlap.
4.
4�
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including stabs,
floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing
method.
Finaf cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-
retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.
3.9 SHORES AND SUPPORTS
Q
Q
General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory
construction, and as specified.
Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures four stories or less, unless
otherwise permitted.
'
'
�
�
��_J
�
�
�
l�
�
,
,
u
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va ,
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-16
'
�
'
�
'
�
'
'
�
,
'
�
,
,
�
�
�
,
��
i�
L
�❑
Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially
cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without
excessive stress or deflection.
Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, or longer,
if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy
loads due to construction operations have been removed.
3.10 REMOVING FORMS
A. Formwork, such as beam soffits, joists, walls, and other structural elements, may
not be removed until concrete has attained at least seventy percent (70%) of
design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. No earth loads or live loads
will be structurally placed against or on any poured structurally reinforced
concrete until the concrete has reached its 28 day compressive strength or
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Determine potential compressive strength
of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete
location or members.
B. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and
other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing
material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.11 REUSING FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable
for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new
formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and
secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces except as acceptable to Engineer.
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar
immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Engineer.
B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective
surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface
defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains
and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-17
C. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect
the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic
slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface
and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having
the required slope.
E. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced
sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and
other objectionable conditions.
,
'
�_�
�
�
'
F. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at '
least 14 days.
G. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing
surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Engineer.
H. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1
inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least
3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place,
compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
manner as adjacent concrete.
Additional repair of concrete cracks in formed and unformed surfaces: All
concrete for liquid retaining structures, elevated slabs subject to rainfall and
washdown, betow grade members and all concrete in contact with earth, water or
exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight. All leaks through concrete
that exhibit any dampness or flowing water and any cracks, holes or other
defective concrete in areas of potential leakage, shall be repaired and made
watertight by CONTRACTOR. Where it is not possible to verify that a crack is not
leaking, it shall be repaired. Determination of leakage and / or dampness shall be
made by Engineer. Repair, removal, and replacement of defective concrete as
directed by ENGINEER shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Method of Repair: Cracks shall be pressure grouted using hydrophilic
resin. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and
recommendations.
3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
r
L_ 1
'
�
r
�
'
��
�
�
Section IVa ,
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-18
�
,
'
�
'
'
'
�l
'
,
'
'
'
'
,
�
'
,
,
A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to
submit test reports. The cost of initial testing is included in the contract as an
allowance. See Section 01021 — Allowances. The testing agency shall be
approved by the Engineer. Any retesting due to non-acceptable work or materials
shall be at the Contractors expense.
1:3
�
I�7
E
F
Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include
the following, as directed by Engineer.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each compressive
strength test; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed
or as directed by the Engineer.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight
concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for
each compressive strength test.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below, when 90 deg F and above, and one test for each set of
compressive-strength specimens.
G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store
cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test
specimens are required.
H. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour
exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25
cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7
days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for
later testing if required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given
class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or
from each batch if fewer than five are used.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.
K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of
three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individuat strength test result falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi.
L. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, ready-mix producer, and
Owner within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall
contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Cast-In-Place Concrete
0992-0205 03300-19
M
N
name of concrete testing service, concrete type and ciass, location of concrete
batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance
or rejection.
Additional Tests: The testing agency witl make additional tests of in-place
concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other
characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer.
Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. These
additional tests shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3.14 TEST FOR WATERTIGHTNESS (HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES)
A. All concrete tanks designed to contain liquid shall be tested for water tightness in
accordance with Section 01711 — Hydraulic Structures Testing
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
Section IVa ,
Cast-In-Place Concrete
03300-20
'
,
,
�
'
�
�
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Metal fabrications include items made from iron, steel or aluminum shapes, plates,
bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not specified elsewhere.
B. Extent of inetal fabrications is indicated on the drawings or as required to complete
the work.
'
�
'
,
,
'
I�
,
WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Reinforcing steel bars and welded wire fabric are specified in Section 03300 — Cast-
in-Place Concrete.
TYPES OF WORK
A. Types of work in this section include metal fabrication for:
1. Miscellaneous framing and supports
2. Miscellaneous castings
3. Fasteners
SHOP ASSEMBLY
A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and for shipping and
handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation
instructions for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint
products and grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous
metal fabrications including but not limited to rain diverters and prefabricated steel
tank cradles. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt
installation by others.
C. Welder Certificates: Certificates to be provided by Contractor certifying the welders
comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" article.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
, Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-1
,
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar
to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance,
and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the
Work.
'
'
u
u
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS '
D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the latest revision of the following
codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified.
1. Florida Building Code.
2. A�SC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings".
3. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
commentary.
4. Aluminum Association, Inc. "Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated, or if not indicated, as
required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended.
Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various
components of work.
�
C
L�7
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At
exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend
with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, Phi{lips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supported structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended
use.
E. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-2
'
,
i
'
�
�
�
i�
�J
Ci
'
,
'
'
'
�
,
�
,
,
,
,
'
�
F
G
H.
Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications, unless otherwise
specified.
1. Exterior (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning".
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural
steel framework, as required to complete work.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be
exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes
including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled names and roughness.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. (Hot Dipped Galvanized - 2 Oz. Per
SF).
C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786, and ASTM A572 for Wide Flange sections.
' D. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars (and Bar si2e shapes): ASTM 575 grade as selected
by fabricator.
' E. Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A568 and ASTM A569, pickled
and oiled.
F. Cotd-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A366.
' G. Galvanized Carbon Stee� Sheets: ASTM A526 with 1.25 oz. "commercial"
galvanizing per ASTM A525.
' H. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
,
'
'
�
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with
hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated,
or another weight required by structural loads.
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish where indicated.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
� Miscellaneous Mefa/ items
0992-0205 05500-3
,
J
K.
Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510
L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated be►ow, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load
imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Stainless steel anchors shall conform to ASTM A276 or ASTM A493 with a
chemical composition of either AISI 304 or AISI 306 stainless steel. Nuts
shafl conform to ASTM F594 with a chemical composition meeting that of the
anchors. Washers shall be AISI 304 or AISI 316 stainless steel conforming
to ASTM A240.
2. Carbon steel anchors shall conform to ASTM A307. Nuts shall conform to
ASTM 563. Washer shall conform to ASTM F436. All anchorage material
shall be galvanized in accordance with A153.
M. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields as follows: Lead expansion
shields for machine screws and bolts 1/4" and smaller, head-out embedded nut
type, single unit class. Lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts larger
than 1/4" in size; head-out embedded nut type, muttiple unit class.
N. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the
metal alloy to be welded.
2.3 ALUMINUM FABRICATIONS
A. Structural aluminum members shall be fabricated of 6061-T6 aluminum as shown
2.4 ALUMINUM METALS
A. Miscellaneous Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
Plate And Sheet ASTM 6209 6061-T6 T6510 Alloy
Extruded Shapes ASTM B221 6061-T6 T6510 Alloy
Castings ASTM B108 214 Alloy
2.5 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Stainless Shapes ASTM A276 Type 316
B. Stainless Plate ASTM A240 Type 316
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for all exterior and interior work unless '
otherwise shown or specified.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-4
'
�
'
:
2.7 PAINT
Bolting:
Either
Bolts - ASTM A193 Grade B8
Nuts - ASTM A194 Grade 8
Or
Bolts - ASTM 276 Type 316 Stainless Steel
Nuts - ASTM 276 Type 316 Stainless Steel
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by
weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12,
except containing no asbestos fibers.
2.8 GALVANIZING
A. Galvanizing
Shapes ASTM A 123 2.0 OZ/SF
Hardware ASTM A 153 2.0 OZ/SF
Assemblies ASTM A 386 2.0 OZ/SF
2.9 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch
minimum steel plate.
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1!4-inch thick steel
plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to
applying and designing finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
3.2
3.3
A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication,
where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where
taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work.
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to project site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect
sleeves from water and concrete entry.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place
construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle
bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.
Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation or
anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and
free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
CI
,
'
�
�l
I. I
,
,
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into �
concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended
for bolted or screwed fietd connections. Use only materials which are smooth and
free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, and roughness.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Marshal! Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-6
'
'
�
�
'
'
'
'
'
u
'
3.5
F
3. Remove weiding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surtaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded
surface matches those adjacent.
5. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping
and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
6. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angfes and surfaces
and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately
1/32" unless otherwise shown. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
7. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to match and
blend with adjoining surfaces.
8. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type
shown, or, if not shown, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
9. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as required to receive
finish hardware and similar items.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surFaces of aluminum that will come into
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat
of bituminous paint.
SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveiing and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After
the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts.
Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the
bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use non-shrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to
moisture; use non-shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no
voids remain.
INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Anchor botlards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete.
After bollards have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between bollard
and sleeve solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply
with grout manufacturer's directions.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Miscellaneous Metal items
0992-0205 05500-7
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING.
A. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, boited connections, and abraded areas, and
apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
B. All aluminum surfaces to come in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals shall be
coated with two coasts of aluminum pigmented bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION
MarshaU Street Salsnes Filter Design Section 1Va
Miscellaneous Meta/ items
0992-0205 05500-8
'
I SECTION 05532 - ALUMINUM GRATING
� PART1 GENERAL
� 1.1
A.
�
1.2
'
'
�
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The extent of aluminum grating shall include all necessary fasteners and
accessory items to make a compiete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Provide the aluminum grating to conform to the
following codes and standards per current edition:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes.
ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531: Metal Bar Grating Manual
ASTM E-448: Test Method for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements
AWS D1.2: Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01300 —
Submittals. Provide product data for each type of grating required.
Product data to include fasteners and accessories.
B. Submit manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimensions, diagrams,
anchor details and installation instructions.
C. On request, furnish reports of load versus deflection tests conducted on
assembled grating panels. Such tests shall be certified by an independent,
nationally recognized testing laboratory.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of
all assemblies of work which are not completely shown by the
manufacturer's data sheets. Include plans, elevations, and details of
sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Include setting drawings and templates for location and installation
of items anchorage devices. Coordinate installation of anchorages
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Aluminum Grating
0992-0205 05532-1
1.4
1.5
for gratings and supports and deliver items to project site in time for
installation.
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of
the work. However, don't delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting
wherever the taking of fietd measurements before fabrication might delay
the work.
B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent
possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units as the
project site Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping
and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: The grating sections shall be free of
defects in material and workmanship for 3 years from substantial
completion. If the materials are defective, the manufacturer shall repair or
replace them at no additionaf cost to Owner and Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
�
ALUMINUM GRATING
The Aluminum Grating shall be manufactured with alloy 6063-T6 and size
as noted on the drawings.
B. Loading and Deflection Requirements: The grating designed to support a
100 psf uniform live load with a theoretical design deflection of 0.25 inch
or less, or as noted on the drawings if requirements are more stringent.
C
C
Walking Surface Finish: The grating surface shall have a plain fluted
pattern surface.
Color: The grating color shall be natural aluminum.
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products
by one of the following:
1. American Grating, LLC.
2. IKG Borden, a Division of Harsco.
3. McNichols, Co.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Aluminum Grating
0992-0205 05532-2
' 2.3
'
4. Ohio Gratings, Inc.
ACCESSORIES
A. Fastener: Provide Type 50 aluminum fasteners with hold down clips for
sectional and frame attachment with stainless steel Allen wrench screw
type by the manufacturer.
B. Frame: Provide extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6 frame by the grating
manufacturer. The frame finish shall match that of the specified grating.
Corners shall be mitered, joints shall be welded and frame depth and
thickness as noted on drawings to match grating, and ensure flush with
adjacent walking surfaces.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by
the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
L_ �
� 3.2
Ii
1
�
A. Verify that the grating installation will not disrupt other trades and verify
that the substrate is clean and free of foreign matter. Correct all defects
prior to installation.
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install the grating in accordance with the project drawings,
specifications, approved shop drawings, and manufacturer's installation
standards.
B. Grating panels shall be fabricated to be square within manufacturer's
tolerances and free from warping and any defect that may affect
serviceability and reliability.
C. Install the grating with a min. 1-1/2 inch bearing surFace at the frame or
' support ends. The grating shall be fastened to the frame or support
substrate using fasteners and clips supplied by the grating manufacturer.
Fastening shall be consistent with the manufacturer's instructions.
,
�
'
D. Tolerances between sections shall not exceed the dimensional spacing of
the grating style type. One quarter inch (1/4") maximum clearance
between ends of cross bars on adjacent sections intersecting vertical
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Aluminum Grating
0992-0205 05532-3
'
,
planes and ends of bearing surfaces. Adjacent sections shall line up to
form an uninterrupted straight line, where possible. Grating shall be '
placed such that cross bars align.
E. Grating sections shall be installed to be removable unless indicated �
otherwise.
F. Openings shall be field cut by the installer where indicated to permit field �
installation of wiring, equipment, piping, etc. All rectangular cutouts shall
be made to the next bearing section past the obstruction. The cutout
clearance to obstruction from the edge of the grating shall be no larger '
than 2 inches. Cutouts shall be done in the field (unless otherwise
requested).
G. Where aluminum surfaces will contact with dissimilar metals and/or '
dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry or lime mortar, coat with
one coat of bituminous paint or other approved insulating material.
�
END OF SECTION
�1
i
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Aluminum Grating '
0992-0205 05532-4
�
��
�
'
�
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
'
�
1.2
' 1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing.
REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
B. ANSI/ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and
Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
C. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
D. ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
E. FS TT-S-01657 - Sealing Compound: Butyl Type.
F. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide
Specification.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance
criteria, limitations, color availability and intended use.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this Section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with
minimum five years documented experience.
C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and
installation.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer
during and after installation.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Joint Sealers
0992-0205 07900-1
'
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
1.7 WARRANTY
A.
'�
Provide five year warranty.
Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to
achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do
not cure.
C. In addition, the warranty shall state that all exposed sealants will be guaranteed
against any crazing developing on the surface of the material for five years of
outdoor exposure, any staining of the adjacent surfaces, by sealant or by primer
(yeflowing, etc.) caulking, or color change on surface of cured sealant.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
A. Regardless of the terminology used on the drawings the following definitions
shall be used to identify and clarify the use of materiafs specified.
1
2
"Caulking" may apply only to oil based and other organic materials and
work in connection with them. Use in the filling or closing of interior joints
where expansion or contraction are of no consideration, and where filling
and closing of these interior joints is primarily for appearance, or painting.
"SealanY' shall apply to all other conditions, interior and exterior, where
expansion, contraction, resiliency, and waterproof or weather tight
construction are a consideration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
'
A. Sealant for Exterior Work including perimeter of exterior doors and glazing
(except as specified otherwise) Single component polyurethane, ASTM C-920 '
type W, grade NS, class 25, use NT, M, A:
1. Sonneborn: "Sonolastic" NP1
2. Tremco: "Dymonic"
3. Pecora: "Dynatro!" I
B. Polyurethane Sealant for use in concrete control joints and expansion joints:
ASTM C920, Class A, single component, chemical curing, non-staining,
non-bleeding, self-leveling type; limestone color; manufactured by:
1. Sonneborn: "Sonolastic" SL1.
2. Pecora: "Urexpan" NR-200
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Joint Sea/ers
0992-0205 07900-2
�
I�
�
��
i
�
LJ
�J
�
�
i
1
�
�
C. Butyl Sealant for threshold setting bed: Single component, solvent release, non-
skinning, non-sagging, TT-S-01657 type I, manufactured by:
1. Tremco: "Butyl SealanY'.
2. Pecora: "BC158"
D. Color: Match adjacent surfaces where not painted, or as otherwise selected by
the Owner's Project Representative from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
C.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
to suit application.
2.3 JOINT BACKING
A. Closed cell polyethylene rod, circular or rectangular dimension as indicated or
required; or bond-breaking type coated open cell polyurethane rod similar to
"Polytite B" by Sandell Manufacturing. Materials shall be free of oil or other
staining elements. Oakum and other types of absorptive materials shall not be
used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
� 3.2
A. Verify that surfaces, and joint openings are ready to receive work and field
measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the
manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces & substrate.
PREPARATION
A.
0
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of
sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release, C790
for latex base sealants.
� E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or
disfiguration.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Joint Sea/ers
0992-0205 07900-3
�
3.3
3.4
3.5
INSTALLATION
A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth
ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint
width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F. Instalf sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Tool joints as detailed.
CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of the Supplemental General
Conditions.
B. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Joint Sea/ers
0992-0205 07900-4
L_ 1
�
LJ
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
C
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND COATINGS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work includes furnishing all paint, labor, materials and equipment required to
complete the painting and coatings as indicated on the Drawings and in these
specifications.
B. Surface preparation, paint and coatings materials, and their application shall be
as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall take all health and safety precautions necessary to prevent
accidents during the storage, handling, application, and drying of any of the
coatings described.
C. Paints and coatings used to finish the surfaces of structures or vessels which
come into contact with potable water shall meet the applicable requirements of
the County Health Department and the State Department of Environmental
Protection or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 09902 — Pipe Painting
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor is responsible for a satisfactory paint application, which will adhere
without peeling, flaking, blistering or discoloration. Before apptication of any painting
materials, the Contractor shall submit a letter of Certification from the manufacturer
of the materials selected for the application proposed.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited
to the following:
� 1. Ameron — Corrosion Control Division
2. Carboline Company
3. Indurall Coatings
� 4. Rust-Oleum Corporation
5. Tnemec Company, Inc.
6. Or Approved Equal
�
�
'
'
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Data Sheets and Color Charts:
1. The full name of each product and descriptive literature shall be
submitted along with a list of water and wastewater plants in Florida
where the product has been used.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 -1
0992-0205 IVa-4
1.4
1.5
2. Within a minimum of 30 days prior to application of paints and
coatings, the Contractor shall submit six sets of color charts and data
sheets for selection by the Owner. Before work is commenced, the
Contractor shall prepare samples as required until the color and
textures are satisfactory to the Owner
3. Resubmit samples as requested until required sheen, color and
texture is achieved
4. If applicable, on 12-inch x 12-inch hardboard, provide two samples of
each color and material, with texture to simulate finish conditions. On
actual wood surfaces, provide two 4-inch x 8-inch square samples for
stained wood finish. On concrete masonry, provide two 4-inch square
samples of masonry for each type of finish ad color, defining filler,
prime and finish coats. On actual wall surfaces and other building
components, duplicate painted finish of acceptable samples, as
directed by the Engineer.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer's name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where directed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All paint materials used on the job
shall be kept in a singte place which shall be kept neat and clean. All oily rags,
waste or debris shall be removed every night and all precautions taken to avoid the
danger of fire.
B. Extra Stock: At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner
with a minimum of one quart from each 50 gallons or fraction thereof for each paint
system used on the project. The paint or coating container shall indicate the
applicable paint system as indicated in these specifications.
JOB CONDITIONS
A. Painting or coating and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Paint all new construction and portions of existing facilities disturbed by new
construction.
2. Paint all exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not
colors are designated. If not, designated colors will be selected by the
Engineer from standard colors available for the coatings required.
3. Includes field painting of bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal
surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work.
4_ Painting shall be done at such times as the Contractor and Engineer may
agree upon in order that dust-free and neat work is obtained. Painting shall
be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shalf
be pertormed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 2 ,
0992-0205 IVa-4
n
iJ
�
,
'
�
�
�
�
�
,
'
L_ J
�
'
�
,
5. "Shop" painting as referred to defines the paint coat which shall be applied in
the shop or plant immediately after manufacture, fabrication or assembly and
prior to shipment to the site of installation. "Field" painting defines the paint
coats to be applied at the project site where the structure or equipment is
completed, erected, or installed in place as specified.
B. Materials and Application:
Obtain painting materials from one manufacturer. Painting materials not
obtainable from the prime manufacturer shall be obtained from a second
source recommended by the prime manufacturer.
2. There shall be a perceptible difference in shades of successive coats of paint
so that the application of successive coats of paint can be properly and
uniformly spread and inspected. Pipes, sheet metal ducts and other metal
items which are to be installed in inaccessible locations shall be painted prior
to installation.
3. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the period of time recommended by the
manufacturer before the next coat is applied.
C. Equipment, Machinery, and Shop Fabricated Items:
Pumps, motors, machinery, equipment and other manufactured items shall
have surfaces prepared, primed and finish-coated in accordance with the
standard practice of the manufacturer. Finish coat colors shall be as
approved by the Engineer.
2. Shop-fabricated items and components for field assembly shall have surfaces
prepared and shop-primed. Finish coat colors shall be as approved by the
Engineer. Items for submerged service shall be field sandblasted and primed
per Paint System J-1 or J-3.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS — ALL SYSTEMS
A
B
C
D
The film thickness designated and/or the number of coats to be applied shall not
be decreased and shall be increased where required to meet other
manufacturer's recommendations.
There shall not be a change from the generic type of coating specified.
Manufacturer's recommendations as to which finish coat should be used with a
particular primer shall be complied with. In all cases, the prime coat and finish
coat shall be from the same manufacturer. All paint shall be mildew resistant.
Tnemec products are given as examples of painting and coating systems
identified in the following paragraphs. The products of other manufacturers
(listed in Paragraph 1.2 B) may be used as long as they are of the same quality.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painfing and Coatings
09900 - 3
0992-0205 !Va-4
�
'u
2.2 GROUP A— CONCRETE AND MASONRY
A. System A-1. For use on above grade interior walls and ceilings and architectural
surFaces not subject to high moisture, corrosion, splashing or fumes.
1. Surface Preparation: Level profrusions and remove mortar splatter from
all surfaces. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.
2. First Coat:
A. Concrete and dense block — Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3
mils of Tnemec 6 Tneme — Cryl or Equal.
B. Lightweight or porous concrete block surFaces — acrylic latex block
filler of sufficient thickness to fill pores and voids, 130-140 S.F./Gal.,
Tnemec 1254 EpoxoBlock WB porous concrete and masonry block
filler or Equal.
3
4
Second Coat:
A. Concrete and dense block — Acrylic polymer coating, semi-gloss type,
minimum 2 mils dry thickness of Tnemec Series 1029 Enduratone or
Equal.
B. Lightweight or porous concrete bfock surfaces — acrylic latex coating,
matte finish, 2-3 mils DFT, Tnemec 6 Tneme — Cryl or Equal.
Third Coat:
A. Concrete and dense block — None
B. Lightweight or porous concrete block surfaces — acrylic polymer
coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3 mils DFT Tnemec Series 1029
Enduratone or Equal.
B. System A-2. For use on above and below grade — interior walls, inside surfaces
of tanks, ceilings and non-traffic slabs, and subject to high moisture, corrosion,
splashing or fumes. Use for immersion and non-immersion exposures.
1. Surface Preparation:
A. Concrete — Brush off blast (if the exposure is severe). Allow new
concrete to cure 28 days
B. Concrete Block Surfaces — Clean and dry, level protrusions and
remove mortar splatter from all surfaces
2. First Coat
A. Concrete — Two-component, polyamidoamine epoxy, semi-gloss 4-6
mils DFT — Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
B. Concrete Block Surfaces — two component, polyamide cured epoxy
masonry filler, 130-140 S.F./Gal — Tnemec 1254 Epoxo Block WB
porous concrete and masonry block filler or Equal.
3. Second Coat:
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 4
0992-0205 IVa-4
t
�
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
�I
,
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
,
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
�
i
'
C
�`
:
4.
A. Concrete - Two-component, modified polyamine, epoxy filler and
surfacer used to fill the voids created by brush-off blasting as
required - Tnemec Series 215 Surfacing Epoxy or Equal.
B. Concrete Block Surfaces - High performance two component
polyamidoamine epoxy coating, 4-6 mils DFT - Tnemec Series N69
Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
Third Coat: Concrete and Concrete Block Surfaces - high performance
two component polyamidoamine epoxy coating, 4-6 mils DFT - Tnemec
Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
System A-3. For use on exterior walls above grade to a point six inches below
finish grade.
1. Surface Preparation. Fill voids with grout; remove loose protrusions and
mortar splatter. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.
2. First Coat:
A. Concrete: Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils dry
thickness of Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equat.
B. Concrete Block: Acrylic latex block filler of su�cient thickness to
fill pores and voids, 130-140 S.F./Gal., Tnemec 1254 Epoxo Block
WB porous concrete and masonry block filler or Equal.
3. Second Coat:
A. Concrete: Acrylic polymer coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3 mils DFT
of Tnemec Series 1029 Enduratone or Equa�.
B. Concrete Block: Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils DFT -
Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal.
4. Third Coat:
A. Concrete: None.
B. Concrete Block: Acrylic polymer coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3
mils DFT-Tnemec Series 1029 Enduratone or Equal.
System A-4: For use on exterior walls below a point six inches below finish
grade.
5
6
7
Surface Preparation: Brush-off blast.
First Coat: Asphalt base high build coal tar epoxy foundation coating, 8-
10 mils DFT Tnemec 46H-413 hi-Build Tneme - Tar or Equal.
Second Coat: Asphalt base high build coal tar epoxy foundation coating
applied at right angles to First Coat, 8-10 mils DFT Tnemec 46H-413 hi-
Build Tneme — Tar or Equal.
B. System A-5. For use on interior concrete block walls.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry, level protrusions and remove mortar
splatter from all surfaces.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painting and Coafings
09900 - 5
0992-0205 IVa-4
2.3
2. First Coat: High performance polyamide cured epoxy block fiiler used
with acrylic epoxy systems, 130-140 S.F./Gal - Tnemec 1254 Epoxo
Block WB porous concrete and masonry block filler or Equal.
3. Second Coat: High performance acrylic epoxy, 4-6 mils DFT - Tnemec
Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat, or Equal.
GROUP B—STRUCTURAL STEEL; CONCRETE AND STEEL TANKS; EQUIPMENT
AND PIPING
A. System B-1. For use on exposed structural and miscellaneous steel, both
interior and exterior - not exposed to corrosion, splash, fumes, or immersion
conditions.
GQ
C
1
2
3.
4.
Surface Preparation: Commercial blast clean per SSPC SP-6.
First Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-Tnemec
Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-
prime base areas in field, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or
Equal.
Second Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 4.0-6.0 mils DFT-
Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
Third Coat: Interior: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils
DFT-Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal. Exterior
Exposure: One coat of semi-gloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 2.0-4.0
mils DFT-Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield II or Equal.
System B-2 (1). For use on piping, equipment and tanks - non-submerged, not
exposed to splash, spray or corrosive atmosphere.
1. Surtace Preparation: Commercial blast bare metal per SSPC SP-6.
2. First Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-Tnemec
Series N69 Ho-Build Epoxoline II or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-
prime base areas in field, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or
Equal.
3. Second Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-
Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
4. Third Coat: Interior: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils
DFT-Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal. Exterior
Exposure: One coat of semi-gloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 2.0-4.0
mils DFT-Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield or Equal.
System B-2 (2). For use on bituminous coated cast iron or steel pipe.
1. Surface Preparation: Hand or power tool clean, scarify or wire brush per
SSPC SP-2 and SP-3.
2. First Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 3-5 mils DFT - Tnemec
N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
3. Second Coat: Same as first coat.
4. Third Coat (exterior exposure only): One coat of semi-gloss aliphatic
acrylic polyurethane finish, 2-3 mils DFT - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura —
Shiefd II or Equal.
D. System B-3. (1) For use on interior walls of steel tanks, piping and equipment,
submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 6
0992-0205 /Va-4
i�
u
I
'
�
,
�
�
�
'
�
�
i
i
�
�
�
L.J
�
0
F
G
atmosphere, excluding chains and sprockets and similar items. This system
shall be used for all materials submerged or in contact with wastewater.
rtj
4
Surface Preparation. FIELD sandblast to a near white metal blast
cleaning according to SSPC-SP10.
First Coat: One coat of modified aromatic polyurethane primer, 2.5 - 3.5
mils DFT - Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane or Equal.
Second Coat: One coat of hydrophobic aromatic polyurethane, 6.0 — 8.0
mils DFT - Tnemec Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU or Equal.
Third Coat: Same as second coat.
System B-3. (2) For use on interior walls of concrete tanks, submerged or non-
submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive atmosphere, and/or in contact
with wastewater.
1. Surface Preparation. Brush-off blast. Provide profile equal to 1 CR 1-
CSP5
2. Fill voids & bugholes and resurface concrete with 1/16-inch of epoxy
modified cementitious mortar, Tnemec Series 218 Mortarclad or Equal.
3. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 4-6 mils DFT - Tnemec 66 HB
Epoxoline or Equal.
4. Second and Third Coats: Two coats of high solids coal-tar epoxy coating,
8-10 mils DFT each coat - Tnemec 46H-413, Hi-Build Tneme-Tar or
Equal.
System B-3. (3) For all other submerged metals.
2.
3.
4.
Surface Preparation. Field sandblast to a near white metal blast cleaning
according to SSPC-SP10.
First Coat: One coat of modified aromatic polyurethane primer 2.5 - 3.5
mils DFT — Series 1 Omnithane or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-
prime bare areas in field.
Second Coat: One coat of hydrophobic aromatic polyurethane 6.0 — 8.0
mils DFT - Tnemec Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU or Equal.
Third Coat: Same as second coat.
System B-4. For use on structural steel, tanks, equipment and piping subject to
severe abrasion, corrosive atmosphere, splash or spray, not in contact with
wastewater or where a color finish is desired.
2
3.
�
Surface Preparation: Submerged surtaces, near white metal blast
according to SSPC-SP 10. Non-submerged surfaces, commercial blast
according to SSPC-SP 6.
First Coat: One coat of modified aromatic polyurethane primer, 2.5 — 3.5
mils DFT Tnemec Series 1 Omnitrane or Equal. If shop coat is damaged,
re-prime bare areas in field. .
Second Coat: One coat of high performance polyamidoamine epoxy
coating, 4.0 — 6.0 mils DFT — Tnemec Series N 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or
Equal.
Third Coat: Interior - Same as second coat. Exterior Exposure - One coat
of semi-gloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish, 2-4 mifs DFT - Tnemec
Series 1025 Endra-Shield II or Equal.
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 7
0992-0205 IVa-4
,
H
'
System B-5: For use on hollow metal (steel) doors and frames, steel �
embedments, and steel lintels:
2.
3.
4.
Surface Preparation: Pre-primed with alkyd primer.
First Coat (touch-up only): Modified aromatic polyurethane primer 2.5 —
3.5 mils DFT Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane or Equal.
Second Coat: One coat high performance polyamidoamine epoxy
coating, 2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT - Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or
Equal.
Third Coat: One coat of polyfunctional hybrid urethane, 2-3 mils DFT —
Tnemec Series 750 UVX or Equal.
System B-6: For use on interior walls and ceiling of concrete wetwells,
submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive
atmosphere, and in contact with wastewater.
1. Surface Preparation. Brush-off blast
2. Fill voids & bugholes and resurface concrete with 1/16-inch of epoxy
modified cementitious mortar, Tnemec Series 218 Mortarclad or Equal.
3. First Coat: One coat of modified aliphatic epoxy mortar liner, 1/8-inch
minimum thickness, trowel applied Tnemec Series 434 Perma-Shield
H2S or Equal. Application shall be by manufacturer's certified applicator
(letter of certification from the manufacturer shall be required).
4. Testing: Coating shall be spark tested.
2.4 GROUP C— GALVANIZED AND NON-FERROUS METALS
A. System C-1: For use in interior corrosive areas, submerged or non-submerged
surfaces, non-potable water applications, galvanized steel and aluminum,
including ductwork.
1. Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning followed by brush-off blast to
provide a 1 to 2 mil profile suitable for mechanical adhesion per SSPC-
SP1.
2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two component
polyamidoamine epoxy, 2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II or Equal.
3. Second Coat: Same as first coat.
B. System C-2: For use in interior dry galvanized steel and aluminum, including
ductwork.
1. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC-SP1.
2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two compartment
polyamidoamine epoxy, 2.0 — 3.0 mils DFT, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build
Epoxoline II or Equal.
3. Second Coat: Same as first coat.
�l
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
C. System C-3: For use in exterior non-corrosive areas, galvanized steel and �
aluminum materials, including ductwork.
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Design Painting and Coatings �
09900 - 8
0992-0205 IVa-4
L—I
,
'
�
�
'
C�
��
�
,
�
�
1
��
3.
Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning followed by brush-off blast to
provide a 1 to 2 mil profile suitable for mechanical adhesion per SSPC-
SP7.
First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT, Tnemec
N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
Second Coat: One coat of semi-gloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane
finish, 2.5 - 3.5 mils DFT -Tnemec 1075 Endura-Shield II or Equal.
2.5 GROUP D- INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. System D-1. For use on interior surfaces not exposed to moisture or corrosive
conditions.
1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, clean, and dry.
Primer: Tnemec Series 151 Elasto-Grip FC, 1.0 - 2.0 mils DFT or Equal.
2. Second Coat: Tnemec Series 113 or 114 H.B., Tneme-Tufcoat, 2.0 - 3.0
mils DFT or Equal.
3. Third Coat: Same as second coat.
2.6 GROUP E - WOOD
A.
Q
C.
System E-2. For use on interior surfaces not exposed to moisture or corrosive
conditions.
1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white shellac (fill
holes with vinyl putty after prime).
2. First Coat: One coat of white pigmented, non-penetrating modified alkyd
primer, 2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT - Tnemec Series 10-99W or Equal.
3. Second Coat: One coat of matte finished acrylic coating, 2.0 - 3.0 mils
DFT - Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal.
4. Third Coat: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic polymer, 2.0 - 3.0 mils DFT,
Tnemec Series 1029 Enduratone or Equal.
System E-3: For use on interior surfaces exposed to moisture or corrosive
conditions, exterior wood, and exterior wood surfaces.
1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white shellac (fill
holes with vinyl putty after prime).
2. First Coat: One coat of high performance polyamidoamine epoxy 2.5
3.5 mils DFT, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
3. Second Coat: Same as first coat.
System E-5: For use on interior wood paneling and trim.
1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white sheltac (fill
holes with vinyl putty after prime).
2. First Coat: One coat of white pigmented non-penetrating modified alky
primer, 2-3 mils DFT, Tnemec Series 10-99W, or Equal.
3. Second Coat: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic polymer finish, 1.5-2.5 mil
DFT Tnemec Series 1029 Enduratone or Equal.
4. Third Coat: Same as second coat.
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 9
0992-0205 IVa-4
'
2.7 GROUP J— WATER TANKS AND SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH POTABLE
WATER
A. The interior tank paint system shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF
Standard 61, and shall meet USDA, FDA and Florida Department of
Environmental Protection health standards for use in potable water service. A
letter of acceptance by the FDEP shall be furnished to the Engineer for the
system selected prior to paint application.
r
�
B. System J-1 For use on steel, cast iron and ductile iron (interior and exterior
exposed, immersion service, below ground) in contact with potable water. �
1. Surface Preparation:
P.�
3
4.
5.
A. Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron Surtaces: SSPC-SP10 near white �
metal blast cleaning.
First Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): One coat polyamidoamine epoxy
primer, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness, Tnemec Pota Pox Plus Series N 140
(ANSI/NSF Std. 61 certified by UL), or Equal.
Second Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): One coat polyamide epoxy, 3
to 5 mils dry film thickness, Tnemec Pota-Pox N140 (NSF International
certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Std. 61), or Equal.
Third Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): Same as Second Coat.
Total Dry Film Thickness: 9 to 15 mils.
C. System J-2: For use on exterior walls and domes of concrete tank.
1. Surface Preparation: Per manufacturer's recommendations.
2. First Coat: One coat of modified waterborne acrylic from 4.0 - 6.0 mils
DFT, Tnemec Enviro-Crete Series 156 or equal
3. Second Coat: One coat of modified waterborne acrylic from 4.0 - 6.0 mils
DFT, Tnemec Enviro-Crete Series 156 or equal
,
'
�
�
��
D. System J-3 for use on interior walls of concrete tanks for potable water storage. ,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Surface preparation: Brush-off blast per SSPC —SP13/NACE 6, ICRI
CSP 3-5.
First Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy primer, 3 to 5 mils DFT,
Tnemec Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus or Equal
Second Coat: One coat of polyamidoamine epoxy, 4 to 6 mils DFT,
Tnemec Series N140 Pota-Pox Plus or Equal
Third Coat: Same as second coat
Total Dry Film Thickness: 11 to 17 mils.
2.8 GROUP K— METAL EXPOSED TO CORROSiVE ATMOSPHERE (EXTERIOR OF
NEW STEEL TANKS); EXPOSED INTERIOR OF OPEN TOP STEEL TANKS;
STRUCTURAL STEEL, EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
D. System K-1. For use on the exterior of new steel tanks and support structures;
interior of open top steel tank surfaces - above a point six inches below the water
line; and other exposed structural steel, equipment and piping subject to a
corrosive atmosphere.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 10
0992-0205 IVa-4
�
�
�
��
�
�
j�
,�
,
'
,
'
l_i
'
�
�
�
�l
�
�
�
�
,
,
1. Surface Preparation: Commercial blast according to SSPC-SP-6 and
clean.
2. First Coat: High perFormance two component polyamidoamine epoxy, 3.0
— 5.0 mils DFT, Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II or Equal.
3. Second Coat: Same as first coat, except 4-6 mils DFT.
4. Third Coat: One coat of aliphatic acrylic polyurethane finish, 2.5-3.5 mits
DFT - Tnemec Series 1074 Endura — Shield II.
2.9 GROUP L— WALLS OF CONCRETE TANKS
A. System L-1. For use on exterior of concrete tank walls below a point 6 inches
below finish grade.
1. Surface Preparation: Fill voids with grout; remove loose protrusions and
mortar splatter, brush-off blast.
2. One coat of high build coal tar epoxy, 14-20 mils DFT, Tnemec 46 H-413
Hi-Build Tneme-Tar, or Equal.
B. System L-2. For use on the interior of open top concrete tanks to a point 6-
inches below liquid level and similarly exposed concrete or masonry surfaces in a
corrosive atmosphere.
1. Surface Preparation. Brush-off blast — Provide profile equal to ICRI
CSP5.
2. Fill voids & bugholes and resurface concrete with 1/16-inch of epoxy
modified cementitious mortar, Tnemec Series 218 mortarclad or Equal.
3. First Coat: High performance two component hydrophobic aromatic
polyurethane 6-8 mils DFT, Tnemec Series 446 Perma-Shield MCU or
Equal.
4. Second Coat: Same as first coat.
2.10 GROUP M— SPECIAL COATINGS
A. System M-1. For use as barrier between dissimilar materials and metals.
L�
C.
1. Prime: None
2. Finish: Asphaltic varnish applied at a rate of at least 2.0 mils dry film
thickness
System M-2. For use as a primer - sealer for coloring asphaltic and tar surfaces.
1. Prime: None.
2. Finish: Tnemec Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II for the prevention of
discoloring of the finish coat. Apply at a rate of 3.0 - 5.0 mils dry film
thickness.
System M-3. For sealing concrete floors where concrete is shown as natural in
the Finish Schedules and on all exposed concrete floors where no finish has
been shown.
1. Surface Preparation: Mechanically abrade floor to achieve a surface
profile equal to ICRI CSP-3.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 -11
0992-0205 /Va-4
2.
,
First Coat: One coat of ciear epoxy floor seater, 8-10 mils DFT, Tnemec ,
201 Epoxoprime or Equal.
2.11 GROUP S— SECONDARY CONTAINMENT COATINGS
A. System S-1: For use on interior concrete floors and walls and miscellaneous
steel items in secondary containment areas in contact with 15% sodium
hypochlorite, submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash, or
corrosive atmosphere, suitable for continuous contact with 15% sodium
hypochlorite for up to 72 hours.
Concrete Surfaces
a. Surface Preparation
(1) Brush off blast. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days.
b. First Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 12 mils
DFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal.
c. Second Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 12
mils DFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal.
d. Total Thickness: 16 to 24 mils DFT.
2. Steel Surfaces
e. Surface Preparation
(1) Field sandblast to a near white metal blast
according to SSPC-SP10.
f. First Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 t
DFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal.
g. Second Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy,
mils DFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal.
h. Total Thickness: 16 to 20 mils DFT
2.12 FINISH COAT OVER EXISTING FINISH
,
'
�
C'
�
r
cleaning �
0 1 Q mils
8 to 10 �
�
A. The required painting shall consist of one coat of the system "Finish CoaY' to
provide continuity of texture and color over previously painted surfaces. Clean
existing surfaces thoroughly prior to painting in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Brushing loose material and flaked paint prior to applying new
coatings.
2.13 THINNING
A. Where thinning is necessary, only the products for the particular purpose and by
the manufacturer furnishing the paint shall be allowed. All thinning shall be done
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with the full
knowledge and approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP PAINTING
A. All ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces shall be solvent cleaned before priming.
Primer shall be applied in the shop to protect surtaces from rust during shipment
and storage.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 - 12
0992-0205 /Va-4
�
�
,
��
'
�
'
'
t_�
_i
B. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or
erection.
FIELD PREPARATION
A.
�
C
Atl surfaces to be painted shall be prepared in a workmanlike manner with the
objective of obtaining a smooth, clean and dry surface. No painting shalt be
done before the prepared surfaces are approved by the Engineer.
Surface preparation for miscellaneous surfaces to be painted, not specifically
covered in these specifications, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the paint selected for use and as approved by the Engineer.
Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition.
D. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, ptates, lighting fixtures
and similar items in pface and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied
protection. Reinstall removed items after painting is completed. Measure
moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes to masonry walls unless moisture content of surfaces are below 12
percent.
APPLICATION
I1
1:3
Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material and
surfaces to which applied. Spraying shall not be permitted.
C. Workmanship for applying paint shall be of professional quality. The painter shall
apply each coat at the rate recommended by the manufacturer smoothly without
runs, sags, or holidays. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the
application of additional coat or coats of paint. On masonry, application of rates
will vary according to the surface texture; however, in no case shall the
manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall
be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either
by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. Before
succeeding coats are applied to a surface, the preceding coat shall have been
approved by the Engineer.
D. Drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions". Where
conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting
must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times will be necessary.
Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall units be placed in service,
until paints are thoroughly dry.
Marshall Sireet Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings
09900 -13
0992-0205 IVa-4
TABLE 09900-1
PAINTING SCHEDULE
Area Description System
/ No.
A Salsnes Filter � RAS Piping Modifications
1 Interior Mixing Chamber B-3
2 Exterior Mixing Chamber M-3
3 Exposed Ductile Iron Pipe 8� Fittings B-2 / B-3 / B-4
4 Equipment Piping & Fittings B-2 / B-3 / B-4
5 Exterior Concrete Slabs M-3
6 Concrete Equipment Pads 8� Piers M-3
7 Galvanized Steel & Aluminum Materials C-3
8 Equipment B-2 / B-3 / B-4
9 Structural & Miscellaneous Steels B-1
10 Stainless Steel Equipment and Materials N/A
END OF SECTION
S
'
�_�
�
�
'
'
,
�
'
,
'
�
,
,
,
,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Painting and Coatings �
09900 - 94
0992-0205 IVa-4
'
SECTION 09902 - PIPE PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes pipe painting and identification as required for this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Exposed piping (except stainless steel) shall be painted. Metal pipe shall be
painted System B-2 (1) and (2); B-3 (1) and (3); B-4; and C-1,2,3; depending on
location. Seal coats shall be used over bitumen coated surfaces as applicable.
Plastic pipe shall be painted in accordance with pipe manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. The finish coat color shall be as shown on the Pipe Identification Schedule.
C. Label and provide flow indication arrows on all exposed piping.
2.2 PIPE PAINT COLORS
A. Reclaimed Water: Purple (Pantone 522C)
B. Sanitary / Raw Waste Water: Green
C. Sludge / Waste Backwash / Scum: Brown
D. Potable Water: Blue
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filfer Design Section IVa
Pipe Painting
0992-0205 09902-1
'
I SECTION 11175 - PRETREATMENT FILTER SYSTEM
, PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
u
'
,
'
�
'
�
'
,
�
�1
�
' 1.2
'
A. Work required under this specification consists of furnishing a complete filter system
for use with primary treatment of domestic wastewater. This system will consist of a
compact self-cleaning fine mesh screen for mechanical separation of particulate
materials from incoming wastewater. All system appurtenances, including but not
limited to, a factory assembled filter system containing an endless mesh screen (filter
belt), a pneumatic belt cleaning device, fresh water flush system, hot water spray
system, and a discharge screw conveyor, as well as a rotary lobe air blower(s) and
system control panels will be supplied by Blue Water Technologies.
B. Furnish a filter system to meet the following initial minimum criteria:
Parameter:
Solids Load Capacity (TSS)
TSS removal
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BODS)
BODS removal
Operating Capacity
Hydraulic Capacity (peak, clean water)
Filter Floor Space (each unit)
Value Units
285 mg/L (average)
20% to 35%
210 mg/L (average)
30% to 50%
2.7 MGD each
3.2 MGD each
9.16x7.08 LxW(ft)
C. All components of the filter will be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to
which they will be subjected during normal operation of the system. Compounds with
which the materials must be compatible with , but are not limited to:
• Sewer Gases
• Domestic Wastewater
D. The system will be capable of simultaneously filtering the wastewater and
transporting the solids for ease of handling and disposal.
E. The equipment manufacturer will be responsible for license fees that apply to this
system.
F. The filter will be equipped with internal systems for self-cleaning of the filter belt.
G. The system will be the Salsnes Filter Model SF-6000 with 350 mesh belt, licensed by
Blue Water Technologies, Inc. Hayden, ID, (888) 710-BLUE.
REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. A►I motors and/or electrical equipment will be designed and constructed in
accordance with the latest edition and revision of applicable codes and regulations,
including the following:
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Pretreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-1
,
1.3
1.4
1.5
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
2. National Efectrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
3. National Electrical Code (NEC)
4. See also Specification 13130 — ICS Control Enctosures
and related sections
B. All mechanical components will be designed and constructed in accordance with the
latest edition and revision of applicable codes and regulations, including the
following:
1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
5. American Welding Society (AWS)
SUBMITTALS
A. The Manufacturer will submit copies of all materials required to establish compliance
with the specifications to the Owner or Engineer. Submittals shall include the
following:
1. Drawings showing plan and elevation views of the Filter System and
requirements for any external piping and utilities;
2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and catalog cuts of the major system components;
3. Statement of warranty;
4. Reference list of at least fifteen (15) similar installations.
B. The Manufacturer will submit, upon system delivery, three (3) complete Operations
and Maintenance manuals to the Owner_ The manuals shall include, at a minimum:
1. Information on any known hazards associated with the system and appropriate
safety precautions;
2. Equipment installation instructions;
3. Equipment start-up instructions;
4. Troubleshooting guide;
5. Operation and maintenance information on major system components.
C. The above requirements are in addition to the requirements outlined in Section
01300.
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver, store and handle all equipment and materials in a manner to ensure installation
in a sound and undamaged condition. Sensitive equipment will be stored in a manner
that will prevent exposure to the elements.
PROCESS DESCRIPTION
The system will be capable of removing TSS by use of a filter belt. The Filter System will
consist of two (2) Salsnes SF-6000 filter compartments, two (2) rotary lobe air blowers,
�
'
'
,
'
'
'
,
'
,
'
'
'I�
,
�
,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa �
Pretreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-2
�
one (1) hot water heater and two (2) system control panels. Each filter compartment will
come supplied with: compartment access covers, filter belt, hot water spray system to
inhibit screen fouling, fresh water flush system to maintain filtered water compartment
cleanliness, combined take away screw system running confinuous through both units
for solids handling, and level transmitter for belt speed control. The filter compartment
will be of modular 316-L SS construction.
The wastewater to be treated flows through the filter compartment inlet tube and passes
through an inclined rotating filter belt, which filters TSS from the wastewater. From the
back of the filter belt, the filtered water flows out via an outlet pipe. The rotating belt
transports the solids to an air cleaning device where compressed air blows the solids
into a sludge compartment. The solids slurry is then conveyed by shaftless screw to the
sludge well.
The system will be sized to allow for continuous, 24-hour/day, 365 day/year operation.
SUBSTITUTtONS
No substitutions are allowed.
WARRANTY
A. Equipment:
All equipment supplied under this Specification shall be warranted to perform as
specified for a period of eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment or one
(1) year from when placed in continuous operation in, whichever comes first.
2. If any part of the equipment supplied under this Specification should fail during
the warranty period, it shall be covered by the terms of the Manufacturer's
standard warranty.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
' 2.1 FILTER COMPARTMENT
� The filter compartment will be freestanding. The filter compartment will contain one (1)
rotating filter belt, pneumatic screen cleaning device, hot water spray system, fresh
water flush system, level transmitter, and dewatering screw press. The filter
' compartment shall include one (1) 16" inlet nozzle, one (1) 16" outlet nozzle, one (1) 16"
overflow nozzle, one (1) 3/4" cold water connection, one (1) 3/4" hot water connection,
one (1) 2" blower connection and one (1) 4" flanged filter compartment drain connection.
'
' 2.2
'
The filter compartment shall be constructed of ASTM A-316L stainless steel. No other
materials of construction shall be acceptable.
FILTER COMPARTMENT INTERNALS
A. The filter belt will be contained in the filter compartment. The mesh screen will be
constructed of polyethylene with a Kevlar-reinforced drive ends. Wire mesh screen
porosity (opening size} will be 100 - 500 micron.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pretreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-3
'
B. A screw for removal of the solids from the air knife hopper will be provided. Screw
components will be fabricated of ASTM A-316L stainless steel.
C. Level transmitter capable of monitoring the water level within the filter compartment
will be provided. The level transmitter will be specifically designed for use in
wastewater and pump/lift applications. Level transmitter will utilize a ceramic
sensing element resistant to sludge build up, ASTM A-316L stainless steel housing,
and a vented polyurethane insulated cable. Level transmitter will be VersaLine
VL2000 as manufactured by Process Measurement. Inc.
D. Pneumatic air cleaning device capable of continuous operation for removal of solids
from surface of filter belt will be provided. The air cleaning device will be fabricated
from ASTM A-316L stainless steel. This device will be piped to the exterior of the
filter compartment for supply air connection.
E. Hot water spray nozzles will be provided for automated cleaning of filter belt and
dewatering screw. Spray nozzles and manifolds will be constructed of stainless
steel. A 2-way solenoid valve will be provided for automated control. Manifolds will
join together and terminate on the exterior of the filter compartment at a strainer for
hot water supply connection.
F. Fresh water flush manifold will be provided for automated cleaning of filtered water
eompartment. A 2-way sofenoid valve will be provided for automated flush control.
Manifold will terminate on the exterior of the filter compartment at a strainer for fresh
water supply connection. Additionally, drainage of filtered water compartment will
occur via coincident operation of a 3-way solenoid valve. Energizing of the 3-way
solenoid valve witl vent a hydraulic actuator on a gate valve allowing draining of
filtered water compartment during fresh water flush.
G. All components will be installed by the Manufacturer prior to the filter compartment
being shipped to the job site.
2.3 FILTER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS
A. For all flange connectors, the flange drilling and bolting will be in accordance with
ANSI/ASME B-16.5 class 150 straddling the horizontal and vertical centerlines
B. For all threaded connectors to the Salsnes unit will be American National Taper Pipe
Thread.
C. For all plain end pipe terminations, "Fernco" style flexible connectors will be
provided.
2.4 MANUFACTURER SUPPLIED SYSTEM PIPING AND DUCTING
A. Manufacturer supplied system piping shall be ASTM A-316L stainless steel or
chemical resistant hose where applicable.
2.5 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
A. General. The operation of the Pretreatment Filter System will be controlled from
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pretreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-4
,
�
'
'
u
�
u
'
,
'
'
,
,
,
,
'
�
�
,
,
,
�'�
,
'
'
'
Manufacturer supplied control panels. All equipment controtlers, motor starters,
drives, etc. will be housed in these panels.
B. Enclosure. The control panel enclosures will be in accordance with Section 13130.
C. Sun Shield: Contractor will provide sun shield to prevent direct sun exposure on the
Enclosure
D. System Control Panels will each include the folfowing:
1. Operator Interface Panel (OIT): AB Panel View Plus shall be supplied or equal.
2. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): Allen Bradley Compact Logix
3. Belt Filter and Dewatering Screw Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): Yaskawa
V1000, or equal
4. Blower Motor Starter: 460 VAC, 3-phase, Allen Bradley or equal
, E. Controls Layout. Operator interface terminal (OIT) will be located at the front
enclosure door and protected by a hinged tinted cover. The panels will have an un-
fused main disconnect operated from a flange mount disconnect switch. Each control
, panel will include a fiber optic Ethernet switch for communications to the plant
SCADA system. The control panels will be shipped pre-assembled and pre-tested for
field wire connections.
'
�
F. System Operation
1. The Filter System controls will be completely self-contained and capable of
autonomous operation. All system control parameters will be accessible at the
OIT.
2. The filter belt speed will be regulated by a level transmitter located in the filter
' compartment. The PLC will automatically control the filter belt speed directly
proportional to water level in the filter compartment.
�
'
,
'
'
1
'
3. The dewatering screw speed is manually controlled at the OIT.
4. Hot water spray will be controlled via operator adjustable frequency and duration
timers at the OIT.
5. Fresh water flush will be controlled via operator adjustable frequency and
duration timers at the OIT.
6. Blower control will be in the OIT.
7. Blower will have a pressure transducer and the PLC will monitor for high
pressure.
G. Conveyor Motor Starter: 460 VAC, 3-phase, Allen Bradley or equal.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Prefreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-5
2.6 ROTARY LOBE BLOWER ASSEMBLY
A. General: Provide a positive displacement rotary lobe blower with sound attenuation
enclosure as designed and manufactured by Tuthill Corporation, Burr Ridge, IL or
equal.
B. Performance: Blower speed and motor size will be selected to meet the required
conditions of airflow and pressure to the filter.
D. Construction: Blower housing will be of high strength cast iron construction. Outlet
connection will utilize flexible connection for vibration isolation.
E. Paint: Sound enclosure will be painted with powder coat spray system suitable for
outdoor exposure.
F. Blower Motor: Blower motor will be a 460-volt, three (3) phase, TEFC, standard
efficiency motor.
2.7 HOT WATER SUPPLY
A. A water supply line (with backflow protection, if required) will be provided and
installed by the Contractor. The supply must be capable of providing a minimum flow
of 8.0 gpm each unit at a continuous pressure of at least 60 psi and not exceeding
90 psi. The filter system manufacturer will be responsible for providing a booster
pump if pressure is not available. Water scaling tendencies will be quantified using
the Ryznar Stability Index. Ryznar Stability Index values will be between 6.0 and
7.0. Temperature of water at the filter system will be at least 160°F and not
exceeding 195°F.
B. Supply one Commercial Electric storage type water heater with immersion type
thermostat for accurate temperature control from positive off up to 180°F.
1. 480 VAC 3 Phase 24 KW input
2. 40 gallon tank capacity
3. Temperature gauge
4. Bradford white model 40A-KW-3 or equal
2.8 INTEGRAL SCREW CONVEYOR
A. The Manufacturer shall supply a single 8" shaftless screw conveyor and integral to
both filter units. The conveyor shall be sized to provide adequate movement of
solids from both units to the sludge well. The conveyor shall be fabricated from
ASTM A-316L stainless steel.
B. Motor: Conveyor motor witl be a 460-volt, three (3) phase, TEFC, standard e�ciency
motor.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Pretreatment Filfer System
0992-0205 11175-6
r
'
'
,
�J
u
Cl
�
'
'
�
,
'
,
�l
r
,
�
J
�
�
,
�
�
'
,
'
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 SITE AND UTILITIES
The filter system will be located as shown in the drawings. Site preparation, utility
service and installation are not the responsibility of the filter system manufacturer and
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
A. Electric: 460-volt, 3-phase electrical service will be supplied and installed by the
Contractor.
B. Fresh Water Supply: A water supply line (with backflow protection, if required) will be
provided and installed by the Contractor. The supply must be capable of providing a
minimum flow of 8.5 gpm at a continuous pressure of at least 60 psi and not
exceeding 90 psi. The filter system manufacturer will be responsibte for providing a
booster pump if pressure is not available. Water scaling tendencies shall be
quantified using the Ryznar Stability Index. Ryznar Stability Index values shall be
between 6.0 and 7.0.
C. Inlet, outlet, overflow, vent, drain, and reject water piping to the filter compartment
will be required and supplied by the Contractor.
D. Pneumatic piping from rotary lobe air btower discharge to filter compartment will be
required and supplied by the Contractor. The piping size will be of sufficient size to
allow no greater than 0.5 psi loss.
' E. Water piping will be required and supplied by the Contractor. Water piping will be of
sufficient size to allow no greater than 3 psi drop from the supply line to the
connections on the Salsnes filter and/or the hot water heater. Piping from the water
' heater to the Salsnes will be of sufficient size to allow no greater than 3 psi drop and
insulated if necessary to provide a minimum temperature at the Salsnes of 160°F
F. Drain piping from flush outlet gate valve will be provided and installed by the
contractor. Drain piping shall be capable of handling 250 gpm per unit.
G. The sizing of the electrical service, and filter system interconnecting piping will be in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
INSTALLATION
A. The filter system will be installed in accordance with the instructions supplied by the
Manufacturer. Installation personnel will be qualified in the areas of plumbing,
electrical work, and instrumentation as required to complete the installation.
B. The Contractor will provide protection for all equipment so that no damage or
deterioration will occur from the time of delivery until installation is completed and the
units and equipment are ready for operation.
C. Finished surfaces of all exposed equipment openings will be protected. Finished iron
' or steet surfaces not painted or coated shall be properly protected to prevent rust
and corrosion.
, Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Prefreatment Filter Sysfem
0992-0205 11175-7
�
D. Proper care will be taken to protect mechanical and electrical components from the
entrance of water during shipment, storage and handling.
E. Contractor will be responsible for connecting any plumbing, ducting or electrical
interconnection to the filter system.
3.3 FIELD TESTS, INSPECTION AND START-UP
A. A representative from the Manufacturer will be present to inspect the final installation
and supervise the start-up and training of operations personnel. This witl consist of
one trip with two (2) eight- (8) hour days allocated. Training shall be made available
to all three shifts of plant staff by the manufacturer with a session in the morning and
in the evening. Training shall be 8 hours of the manufacturer's estimated time. If
start up should exceed the remaining 8 hours of time estimated by the manufacturer,
the manufacturer shall provided the additional time required for start up at no
additional cost to the Owner. �
B. The performance of the filter system will reduce total suspended solids as set forth in
section 1.1 B of this Specification.
C. After initial system start-up, a perFormance test (delineated below) to demonstrate
the ability of the system to meet the design performance criteria stated in Section
1.1 B will be performed by the Contractor and the Manufacturer's Representative. If
actual field inlet concentrations are lower than stated in Section 1.1 B, the
performance test will be conducted at the actual conditions.
D. Performance Test Procedure:
1. The performance test will last for a minimum of 8 hours and a maximum of 12
hours.
2. During and prior to the performance test, the system must be operated in
accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
3. The following parameters, at a minimum, will be measured and recorded at 1-
hour intervals during the test:
(a) Inlet water flow rate
(b) Inlet water TSS
(c) Outlet water TSS
4. The testing equipment used must be capable of ineasuring the parameters at the
design values specified in Section 1.1 B.
5. The performance of the system will be based on the arithmetic average value
recorded for "Discharge TSS Concentration."
6. The system will be considered to have passed the pertormance test if the
average percent reduction outlet TSS concentration is equal to or less than that
specified in Section 1.1.6.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section ►Va
Pretreatment Filter System
0992-0205 11175-8
,
'
�
'
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
u
'
'
�
,
LJ
'
,
,
C�
1
�
7. The system wiil be considered to have failed the perFormance test if all inlet
parameters are within the ranges specified in Section 1.1 B and the average
percent reduction outfet TSS concentration exceeds that specified in Section
1.1.B.
8. If the inlet parameters are not within the typical ranges for the facility and the
' average percent reduction outlet TSS concentration exceeds that specified in
Section 1.1.B, this shall not constitute failure. Additional tesfing with the inlet
parameters within the specified ranges may be conducted at the Owner's
� expense and discretion.
9. If the system fails the performance test, the Manufacturer, at the Owner's
' request, will correct any system deficiencies and re-test at the Manufacturer's
expense. No additional payment will be made for adjustments, modifications and
re-testing.
�
�
'
'
�l
'
,
�
�
'
u
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
fl
END OF SECTION
Section /Va
Pretreatment Filter System
11175-9
i
1
SECTION 011308 - SUBMERSIBLE WASTEWATER PUMP
� PART1 GENERAL
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
1.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes furnishing and installing one (1) non-clog submersible
wastewater pump (in a dry pit arrangement) for the Salsnes Filters and operating
characteristics shall conform to the requirements shown on the attached data
sheets.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSWHERE
A. Section 13100 - Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements
B. Section 15052 — Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
C. Division 16 - Electrical
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pump shall be the product of a manufacturer with a minimum of five years of
experience in the design and building of such pumping equipment. All
workmanship and materials throughout shall be of the highest quality.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work are
limited to the following:
1. Flygt Corporation, Model CT-3201.180 LT — 320 mm Impeller
2. or approved equal
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01300 - Submittals
:
C
Obtain shop drawings showing dimensions. Incorporate in piping drawings. Verify
dimensions and make necessary adjustments in installations.
Submit manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance certifying compliance with the
referenced specifications and standards.
Submit certified copies of reports of factory tests specified in this section and
required by referenced standards. Include performance data and physicat
characteristics.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-1
E
Submit dimension data, manufacturer's parts list, operation and maintenance
literature and instructions as part of Record information.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
After hydrostatic or other factory tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior
to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of
water during shipment, storage and handling.
Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition
to its contents.
Finished iron or steet surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent
rust and corrosion.
Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden
blanks, strongly built and securely bolted.
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide certified field performance test curves for specified conditions based
upon most recent tests of a similar pump.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranties and guarantees by the suppliers of various components in lieu of a
single source responsibility by the manufacturer will not be accepted. The
manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the warranty of the submersible
pumps and all components.
�
The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units to the Owner in writing against
defects in workmanship and material covering parts and labor for a period of
five(5) years from date of substantial completion.
In the event a component fails to perform as specified or is proven defective in
service during the warrantee period, the manufacturer shall provide and install a
replacement part without cost to the Owner.
1. Motor thermal protection shall be provided using thermal sensors
imbedded in the windings. These shall be interfaced to the Motor
Controls as described herein. NO OTHER protective devices shall be
allowed. Pumps which require additional protective measures shall not be
considered.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
i
ul
�
LJ
A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as outlined in �
Specification 01300 — Submittals.
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section tVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-2
�
�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
� 2.1 NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
� 2.3
�
'
A. The pumps shall be capable of handling raw, unscreened sewage and activated
sludge containing a total solids concentration of up to 5% dry solids. The design
shall be such that the pump will be directly connected to the inlet piping of
Salsnes feed system.
PUMP DESIGN CONFIGURATION — DRY PIT INSTALLATION
A. Pump shall be capable of operating in a continuous non submerged condition in
vertical (CT) position in a dry pit installation and permanently connected to inlet
and outlet pipes. Pump shall be of submersible construction and will continue to
operate satisfactorily should the dry pit be subjected to flooding.
PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A. Major pump components shall be of grey cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, with
smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. All exposed nuts or
bolts shall be AISI type 304 stainless steel construction. All metal surfaces
coming into contact with the pumpage, other than stainless steel or brass, shall
be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc
phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump.
B. Sealing design shall incorporate metal-to-metal contact between machined
surfaces. Critical mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be
machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fittings will be the result
of controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact of
four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit.
C. Rectangular cross sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve
compression shall not be considered as adequate or equaf. No secondary
sealing compounds, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall be used.
COOLING SYSTEM
A. Each unit shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system. The
water jacket shall encircle the stator housing; thus, providing heat dissipation for
the motor regardless of the type of installation. Impeller back vanes shall provide
the necessary circulation of the cooling liquid through the water jacket. The
cooling media channels and ports shall be non-clogging by virtue of their
dimensions. Provisions for external cooling and seal flushing shall also be
provided. The cooling system sha�l provide for continuous pump operation in
liquid temperature of up to 104°F. Restrictions below this temperature are not
acceptable.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-3
2.5
2.6
CABLE ENTRY SEAL
A. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure
a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of a single
cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance
fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and
compressed by the body containing a strain relief function, separate from the
function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the
cable when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction
chamber and motor shall be separated by terminal board, which shall isolate the
interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies,
silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered
acceptable.
MOTOR
A. The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage
rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator
windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for
180°C (356°F). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method
using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at
least 95%. The motor shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA
MG1, Pa�t 31.The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator
housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is
not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring
penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be designed
for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40°C (104°F) and capable of no
less than 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings
shall be made of cast aluminum. Thermal switches set to open at 125°C (260°F)
shall be embedded in the stator end coils to monitor the temperature of each
phase winding. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and
supplemental to external motor overload protection and shall be connected to the
control panel. The junction chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing
and shall contain a terminal board for connection of power and pilot sensor
cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire nuts or
crimp-type connectors is not acceptable. The motor and the pump shall be
produced by the same manufacturer.
B. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific
gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of
plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40°C (104°F)
ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80°C. A performance chart
shall be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor,
input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting
current and torque.
C. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and
shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any
splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chlorinated
�
�
�
�
�
�
,�
'
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps �
0992-0205 011308-4
�
�
�
L�
'
,
�
�
�
�
�
,
2.8
�
polyethylene rubber. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous
submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet
or greater.
The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading
throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run-out.
BEARINGS
A. The pump shaft shall rotate on two bearings. Motor bearings shall be
permanently grease lubricated. The upper bearing shall be a single roller
bearing. The lower bearing shalt be a two row angular contact bearing to
compensate for axial thrust and radial forces. Single row lower bearings are not
acceptable.
MECHANICAL SEAL
A. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system
consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies. The seals shall operate in
a lubricant reservoir that hydrodynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces at a
constant rate. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and the
lubricant chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating,
corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located
between the lubricant chamber and the motor housing, shall contain one
stationary and one positively driven rotating, corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide
seal ring. Each seal interface shall be hetd in contact by its own spring system.
The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment nor depend on
direction of rotation for sealing. For special applications, other seal face materials
shall be available.
B. The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable nor equal to the dual
independent seal specified: shaft seals without positively driven rotating
members, or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common
single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces. No
system requiring a pressure differential to offset pressure and to effect sealing
shall be used.
C. Each pump shall be provided with an lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing
system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent ove�lling and to
provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive
anti-leak seal shall be easily accessible from the outside. The seal system shall
not rety upon the pumped media for lubrication. The motor shall be able to
operate dry without damage while pumping under load.
D. Seal lubricant shall be FDA Approved, nontoxic.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-5
2.9 PUMP SHAFT
A. Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft is an extension of
the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft shall be of
carbon steel ASTM A 572 and shall be completely isolated from the pumped
liquid.
2.10 IMPELLER
A. The impeller(s) shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35B, dynamically balanced,
double shrouded non-clogging design having a long throughlet without acute
turns. The impeller(s) shall be capable of handling sotids, fibrous materials,
heavy sludge and other matter found in wastewater. Whenever possible, a full
vaned, not vortex, impeller shall be used for maximum hydraulic efficiency; thus,
reducing operating costs. Impeller(s) shall be keyed to the shaft, retained with an
Allen head bolt and shall be capable of passing a minimum 4 inch diameter solid.
2.11 WEAR RINGS
A.
B.
A wear ring system shall be used to provide efficient sealing between the volute
and suction inlet of the impeller. Each pump shall be equipped with a brass, or
nitrile rubber coated steel ring insert that is drive fitted to the valute inlet.
This pump shall also have a stainless steel impeller wear ring heat-shrink fitted
onto the suction inlet of the impeller.
2.12 VOLUTE
i
�
�
�
'
�
A. Pump volute(s) shall be single-piece grey cast iron, Class 35B, non-concentric '
design with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the
impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified.
2.13 PROTECTION
�
A. All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature
of each phase winding. The thermal switches shall open at 125°C (260°F), stop �
the motor and activate an alarm.
B. A leakage sensor shall be available as an option to detect water in the stator
chamber. The Float Leakage Sensor (FLS) is a small float switch used to detect
the presence of water in the stator chamber. When activated, the FLS will stop
the motor and send an alarm both local and/or remote. USE OF VOLTAGE
SENSITIVE SOLID STATE SENSORS AND TRIP TEMPERATURE ABOVE
125°C (260°F) SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.
�
�
C. The thermal switches and FLS shall be connected to a Mini CAS (Control and �
Status) monitoring unit. The Mini CAS shall be designed to be mounted in any
control panel.
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-6
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
2.14 ACCESSORIES
A. Suction Base Elbow: A suction base elbow, designed to mount directly to the
bottom of the pump, shall be supplied for the pump. It shall have a standard 125
pound flange faced 16-inch diameter inlet side and a standard 125 pound flange
faced 12-inch diameter outlet side.
B. Power Cable: The power cable shall be sized according to N.E.C. and ICEA
standards, and meet with P-MSHA approval.
2.15 PUMP CONTROLS
A. See electrical and instrumentation specifications and drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the pump to be sure all passages are clean and clear of obstruction and
that the impeller rotates freely. Examine the pump mounting surface, and make
certain that bolts are properly located. Correct any irregularities prior to
installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations in the locations shown on the drawings. Installation shall
include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. See Section
01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. The Contractor shall submit a certification from the equipment manufacturer
� stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is
ready for operation and that the operating personnel have been suitably
instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of each unit.
�
�
��
�
�
�
3.3 TESTING
A. Pump: After the pump has been completely instatled and working under the
direction of the manufacturer, conduct in the presence of the Engineer tests
necessary to indicate that pump operation conforms to these specifications. Field
tests shall include the pump under this section. Supply all water or wastewater,
labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete the field tests.
B. If the pump performance does not meet these specifications, corrective
measures shall be taken or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps
which satisfy the conditions specified.
Marshal! Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-7
3.4
3.5
C. Motor: The Contractor shall megger each motor winding before energizing the
motor and, if insulation resistance is found to be low, shall notify the Engineer
and shall not energize the motor.
D. The Contractor shall check all motors for correct clearances and alignment and
for correct lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
Contractor shall check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections
if necessary.
MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's service representative for 2
days to inspect equipment and installation, perform required field tests, and
provide operation and maintenance instructions to the plant operators.
TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
A. One set of all special tools for each pump station required for normal operation
and maintenance shall be provided. All such tools shall be furnished in a
suitable steel tool chest complete with lock and duplicate keys. See Section
01700 - Contract Closeout.
3.6 OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. Provide pumps which will operate under the following conditions when installed
as shown in the pump chart:
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section !Va
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-8
PUMP CHART
LOCATION: MSAPCF - Salsnes Filter Feed
MANUFACTURER: Flygt (Basis of Design)
MODEL: C-3201.180, Type LT, Curve No. 63-823-00-8320
TYPE: Non-Clog, Submersible
QUANTITY: 1
PUMP CHARACTERISTICS
ITEM UNIT
Total Dynamic Head Ft.
Capacity GPM
Shut Off Head Ft.
Minimum Size Solid Sphere Passed Inch
Motor Size Hp
Maximum Speed RPM
Minimum Pump Efficiency at Design Point %
Electric Power Volts / Phase / Hertz
Pump Inlet Diameter Inches
Pump Outlet Diameter Inches
END OF SECTION
DESIGN POINT
17.3
3820
5
4
30
860
65
460/3/60
16
12
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Submersible Wastewater Pumps
0992-0205 011308-9
��
�
�
�
LJ
SECTION 13100 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL, GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide, through the services of a single Control Systems
Integrator (CSI), all components, system installation services, as well as all required
and specified ancillary services, in connection with the Instrumentation and Control
System (ICS}.
B. The system shall include all materials, labor, tools, fees, and documentation
required to furnish, install, test, and place into operation, a complete and operable
ICS as shown and/or specified within this section, related ICS specification sections,
and subsections within equipment specifications.
� C. The system shall include all measuring elements, signal converters, transmitters,
specialty cables, control panels, digitat hardware and software, remote telemetry
units (RTU), signal and data transmission systems, interconnecting wiring and such
� accessories as shown, specified, and/or required to provide the functions indicated,
whether specifically mentioned or not.
'I
�J
�
�
D. The specifications provided within this section shall be applied to all of the
Instrumentation and Control specifications, Sections 13100 through 13199, as
well as additional specifications sections as referenced. The ICS shall be
provided as a single and complete system as specified herein and as specified
within the following ICS specifications:
1. Section 13120 - Instrumentation and Controls, Field Equipment
2. Section 13130 - Instrumentation and Control, Control Enclosures
3. Section 13140 - Instrumentation and Control, SCADA Hardware
E. For the purposes of these specifications the Control Systems Integrator shall be
referred to as the CSI. Where references are made to the SCADA System
Programmer or the SSP, it shall be understood that all application software services
will be provided by others outside the scope of this Contract. Although the SSP will
provide programming services outside of this Contract, that in no way relieves the
CSI from providing all materials, labor, documentation, etc., including coordination,
programming, startup, and testing services, as necessary to ensure the complete
system is fully capable of providing all specified functions, whether provided by the
CSI or programmed by the SSP. Additional clarifications of responsibilities are
provided herein and within related ICS specifications, as it pertains to the
refationship befinreen the CSI and the SSP.
F. The Contractor shall be ultimately responsible for installation of the ICS. However,
the CSI will include installation within the scope of his subcontract to provide for
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-1
��
installation of the complete system as specified. The CSI shali also coordinate this
work with the Contractor to ensure that the proper type, size, and number of wires
with their conduits are provided and installed. This coordination will also ensure that
proper electrical power circuits are provided for all components and systems.
G. The Contractor's responsibilities, in addition to the CSI's responsibilities, shall be to
provide all additional materials and work necessary to supplement the materials and
work provided by the CSI; thereby satisfying all requirements that are within ICS
specification sections.
H. The Contractor shall coordinate structural work, penetrations, painting, etc., as
required for installation of a complete ICS. In-line or integrally mounted items (such
as flow elements, level sensors, etc.) shall be installed under the supervision of the
CSI.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating interfaces between ICS
equipment provided under the ICS specification sections and the equipment
provided under other sections of the specifications. The Contractor shall verify and
coordinate space requirements, process equipment power supply and voltage,
process equipment control power supply and voltage, compatibility of control
signals, details of equipment installation and interconnection. Coordination shall
include distribution of approved shop drawings to all vendors, subcontractors, etc.,
involved in the control interface. Likewise, the Contractor shall ensure that
instrumentation and control devices provided under other sections of the
specifications are compatible and of the same quality and characteristics as similar
devices specified under the ICS specification sections.
SCOPE
A. The scope listed within this subsection pertains to major items of supply. Refer to
the complete Contract Documents for all requirements.
B. The City of Clearwater is replacing the existing primary clarifiers at the Marshall
Street Advanced Pollution Control Facility (APCF) with a screening (Salsnes)
filtration system. In addition to the Salsnes filters, this system will include a new
influent flow configuration with an adjustable filter bypass system, a waste
conveyor with a primary sludge wetwell and pump station and revised tie-ins for
the Return Activated Sludge (RAS) and Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) flows.
This project will also provide for a complete monitoring and control capability for
the Salsnes system.
C. AII instrumentation and equipment noted in the contract drawings will be provided
as part of this project.
D. The existing Primary Sludge Pump PLC panel will be decommissioned and
replaced by a new PLC control panel to be located in the MCC 9 Electrical
Building. Equipment currently monitored by the Primary Sludge Pump PLC pane!
that will continue in operation will be transferred to the new MCC 9 control panel
or the existing Digester area PLC panel. All signals to the existing PLC related to
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100.2
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�l
the existing primary clarifiers will be decommissioned as part of the demolition of
the clarifiers.
E. The new MCC 9 control panel will be connected to the plant SCADA system by
rerouting of the existing fiber optic cable that connects the plant control room to
the existing Primary Sludge Pump PLC panel to the new MCC 9 control panel.
This network will carry Ethernet and Data Highway Plus traffic over separate fiber
strands.
F. Each Salsnes filter will include a local control panel provided by the equipment
manufacturer for monitoring and control of the Salsnes filter and the waste
conveyor. Various instrumentation and monitoring signals will be connected to
these panels to provide complete monitoring and control of the new system.
G. The Salsnes filters will operate automatically based on conditions local to the
filters. Status monitoring of the Salsnes filter from the p�ant SCADA system shall
occur through a fiber optic network fink between each control panel and the new
MCC 9 control panel. A fiber optic modular network switch will be provided in the
MCC 9 panel for interFacing the Salsnes filters and MCC 9 control panel to the
SCADA network.
H. A new magnetic flow meter will be provided for monitoring of plant influent flow.
The flow will be monitored at the MCC 9 control panel and transmitted to the
SCADA system over the data highway. Additional equipment will utilize this flow
signal for pacing control or other operations. Signals will be transmitted through
a series of signal isolators and the SCADA network which will prevent the failure
of any device from impacting the operation of any other device. Equipment
which will receive the flow signal includes the following:
2
3
4
5
Influent flow sampler at the Influent Building
Pre-aeration sampler Iocated near the new Salsnes Filter control panels.
The Micro-C metering pump located near the RAS pump station.
The control room influent flow chart recorder.
The Grit Removal System PLC at the Influent Building.
In addition to the plant control system modifications related to the Salsnes filters,
the control system platform for the plant Influent Pump Station will be replaced to
upgrade the existing controls. A new control panel subpanel with pre-mounted
and pre-wired equipment will replace the existing subpanel with all signals
related to the Influent Pump Station transferred to the new controls.
J. A new six-strand fiber optic cable will be installed between the MCC 9 PLC panel
and the Influent Pump Station control panel to connect the new Influent Pump
Station controls to the existing plant control system. In addition to providing an
Ethernet connection for the Influent Pump Station, this cable will also maintain
the Data Highway Plus connectivity that extends to the balance of the plant.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumenfation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-3
�
K. New Category 6 cables wilf be provided from the Influent Pump Station control
panel to the existing Bar Screen and Grit Removal System control panels to
provide monitoring of these systems from the ptant SCADA system. The cables
shall be connected to a new network switch to be provided in the Influent Pump
Station control panel. Signals for equipment from the Bar Screen and Grit
Removal systems currently monitored by the Influent Pump Station control
panels will be removed and the conduits utilized for the new data cables.
Provide a new 8-point analog input module in the Bar Screen control panel PLC
for monitoring of the upstream and downstream bar screen channel levels
complete with surge arrestors and control panel equipment.
M. Modify the Grit Removal control panet to provide an indication of the conveyor
mode switch Auto position to the PLC. �
N. Existing measurement of influent pH and conductivity will be removed from the
existing Parshall flume and relocated to the influent flow sampler area at the
Influent Building. The sensors and SC-200 transmitter will be mounted on a flow
through piping assembly with the analyzer signals transmitted to the MCC 9
control panel. The sample will be provided by a new submersible sample pump
to be located in the local manhole.
O. Sequencing of the construction activities will be critical to the ability to maintain
plant operations and system monitoring. All activities shall be scheduled at the
convenience of and coordinated with the Owner and SSP to minimize any plant
or SCADA outages. Several items of primary importance are listed below for
consideration:
In order to maintain the Data Highway Plus network connection to the
Reclaimed Water Pump Station and Sludge Dewatering area, it will be
necessary to install, power and place into operation the new PLC control
panel in the MCC 9 Electrical Building prior to decommissioning of the
existing control panel equipment in the clarifier area.
2. Maintaining the Data Highway Plus network will also require the rerouting
of the fiber optic cable from the control room into the new MCC 9 control
panel and the installation of the new fiber optic cable between the MCC 9
control panel and the Influent Pump Station. This includes connection of
the new control panel to the SCADA network and operation of the Influent
Pump Station on the new fiber optic cable.
3. To maintain continuous monitoring of the equipment currently connected
to the Primary Sludge Pump Station will require transfer, testing and
programming of signa►s to the MCC 9 and the Digester PLC prior to
decommissioning of the Primary Sludge Pump Station control panel.
4. Relocation of the influent pH and conductivity transmitter, including
programming activities, shall occur prior to the decommissioning of the
existing Primary Sludge Pump Station control panel and the Parshall
flume.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Contro/ - Genera/ Requirements
0992-0205 13100-4
�
�
��
J
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
5. Transfer to monitoring of the new influent flow meter shall require all
additionaf operations from the flow signal as detailed in Item H above.
P. The Contractor, working in conjunction with the CSI, shall be responsible to
provide a complete and operational system in full compliance with the
specifications and contract drawings. The CSI shall be responsible for the
detai►ed design, field verification, installation, technical oversight, testing, quality
assurance and documentation of all technical details involving instrumentation
and control for this project. The CSI shall furnish trained personnel on site during
any activities requiring installation, calibration, testing or startup of any controls or
communications.
Q. The following items will be provided outside of this contract. This in no way relieves
the Contractor or CSI from incorporating these items and providing a complete and
functional ICS.
� 1. PLC programming of control logic functions. This includes control
applications for the monitoring and control of the new equipment and
removal of the existing clarifier monitoring and control software. This does
� not include initial PLC configuration or any test programs to be provided by
the CSI as part of the system installation and startup to satisfy testing
requirements.
�
�
�
2. SCADA and Historian Server application programming
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
�
C.
�
Division 11 - Equipment
Refer to individual product specifications within specification sections for
additional requirements specific to those devices. Instrumentation and
control equipment supplied as part of packaged systems shall be integrated
into fhe ICS as specified.
Division 12 - Furnishings
Coordinate all ICS equipment installations within furnishings, to ensure
proper fit, clearance, accessibility, environmental conditions, etc., are
provided satisfactory to the equipment manufacturer and Owner.
Division 13 — Special Construction
Refer to individual product specifications within specification sections for
additional requirements specific to those devices. Instrumentation and
control equipment supplied as part of packaged systems shall be integrated
into the ICS as specified.
Division 15 - Mechanical
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-5
1.4
E
Refer to individual product specifications within specification sections for
additional requirements specific to those devices. Instrumentation and
control equipment supplied as part of packaged systems shall be integrated
into the ICS as specified.
Division 16 - Electrical
Where electrical subcomponents are to be provided as part of ICS
equipment, but for which there is no specification, provide in accordance
with Division 16 - Electrical. These subcomponents shall be compatible and
of the same quality and characteristics as similar devices specified under
Division 16 - Electrical. If possible the same make and/or model supplied
under Division 16 shall be provided.
2. The following work shatl be provided under Division 16 — Electrical:
a. Conduit, raceways, and installation of wire and cable for all
instrumentation and control system signal wiring, grounding systems,
special cables and network cables except as noted.
�
c.
Instrumentation and control system signal field wire.
Grounding systems for all ICS equipment.
d. Mounting of ICS electrical enclosures (i.e. control panels, TVSS
boxes, electronic instrumentation, etc.) with exclusion of final
measuring elements of instrumentation (i.e. flow tubes, sensors in
process piping, efc.) which shall be as coordinated by the Contractor.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The ICS shall comply with the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code,
OSHA, and with all applicable federal, state, county, municipal, and electrical utility
codes and regulations, as well as the Contract Documents. In the event of any
conflict between these codes, regulations, and Contract Documents, the most
restrictive shall apply.
B. The Instrumentation and Control System shall comply with the following codes and
standards as well as any others within the specifications and drawings. In the event
of any conflict between these codes, regulations, standards, and Contract
Documents, the most restrictive shall apply.
Applicable state, county, and municipal code requirements.
2. Applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. National Electrical Code (NEC).
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-6
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
l�'
�
�
�
�
�
3
4
5.
�
;.
Applicable standards of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.)
a. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
b. UL 508A Industrial Control Panels
Applicable standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE)
Applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA)
a. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum)
b. NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements
c. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
Applicable standards of the Instrument Society of America (ISA)
a. S5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
b. S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams
c. S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves
d. TR20.00.01 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements set forth in the
General Conditions, Section 1300 — Submittals, and as specified herein.
B. Every submittal shall have a separate section entitled "Requested Deviations from
ICS Specifications" which shall clearly define and clearly explain all requested
deviations and exceptions of the Instrumentation and Control System to this
Specification. Only those deviations requests listed in this section will be reviewed.
C. After all changes or corrections resulting from the review of the system supplier's
drawings have been made, panels may be built and instrumentation devices may be
supplied in accordance with the approved drawings. One set of "as shipped" prints
shall be included in the panels when shipped from the system supplier's wiring and
assembly shop.
D. The following major list of submittals shall be provided as a minimum. Major
submittals are generally listed in the order they are to be provided. Refer to related
Marshall Sfreet Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section ►Va
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-7
LJ
ICS specification sections and equipment subsections for additional submittals and �
submittal requirements.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Process Instrumentation Submittal
PLC Control Panel and Modifications Submittal
Preliminary Operation and Maintenance Manuats
Training Submittal
Testing Submittal
Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts Lists Submittal
Site Installation Submittal
Installation Progress Report Submittal
Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals
E. Process Instrumentation Submittal
This submittal shall provide complete documentation of all field devices
and other instrument and control equipment not specified to be submitted
elsewhere.
a. Provide data sheets for each component listing all model
numbers, optional, and ancillary devices that are being provided.
The data sheets shall be provided with an index and proper
identification and cross referencing. They shall include but not be
limited to the following information.
1) Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Loop
Diagrams.
2) Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract
Drawings.
3) Manufacturers complete model number.
4) Location of the device.
5) Input - output characteristics.
6) Range, size, and graduations.
7) Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification
and mounting details.
8) Materials of construction of all components.
9) Instrument or control device sizing calculations where
applicable.
10} Certified calibration data on all flow metering devices.
b. Provide equipment specification sheets which shall fully describe
the device, the intended function, how it operates and its physical
environmental and performance characteristics. Each data sheet
shall have appropriate cross references to loop or equipment
identification tags. As a minimum the specification sheets shall
include the following:
1) Dimension, rigid-clearances.
2) Mounting or installation details.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
►nstrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-8
rl
LI
J
�
�
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
c.
3) Connection.
4) Electrical power or air requirements.
5) Materials of construction.
6) Environmental characteristics.
7) Performance characteristics.
The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site
preparation instructions, grounding and bonding procedures,
cabling diagrams, plug identifications, safety precautions or
guards, and equipment layouts in order to enable the Contractor
to proceed with the detailed site preparation for all equipment.
F. PLC Control Panel and Modification Submittal
1. The PLC Control Panel and Modification submittal shall contain a
complete system InpuUOutput (I/O) and termination list for the local
control PLC panel. The list shall be sorted first by ISA tag name and
second by I/O type (i.e. AI, AO, D1, DO, PI, PO. etc.}. The list shall
contain as a minimum the following for each active point and spare point:
a. Full ISA instrument tag (or "SPARE").
b. Type of I/O (i.e., DI, DO, AI or AO).
c. I/O terminal point physical location (panel name, rack, slot, point,
etc.).
d. I/O point address.
e. Point name.
f. Terminal Strip and Number
2. Provide detailed Drawings covering control panels consoles and/or
enclosures which shall include:
a. Cabinet assembly and layout Drawings to scale. These shall
include both front and interior layouts.
b. Material, fabrication, and painting specifications.
c. Color selection samples for selection by the Engineer.
d. Panel wiring diagrams showing all power connections to
equipment within and on the panel, combined panel power draw
requirements (volts, amps), breaker sizes, fuse sizes, and
grounding. This wiring diagram shall be in ladder logic format and
shall reference the appropriate loop drawing for continuations or
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section 1Va
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-9
details where required. Show all wire numbers, and terminal block
designations
3. Provide detailed loop diagrams on a single 11-in x 17-in or 8.5-In x 11-in
sheet for each monitoring or control loop. The loop diagram shall show
all components of the loop both analog, digital, and discrete including all
relays, switches, dropping resistors, etc. which are being provided for
proper operation. Loop numbers used shall correspond to the loop
numbers indicated in the Contract Documents. The format shall be the
Instrument Society of America, Standard for Instrument Loop Diagrams,
ISA-S5.4 ptus the following requirements:
a. On each diagram, present a tabular summary of (1) the output
capability of the transmitting instrument, (2) the input impedance
of each receiving instrument, (3) an estimate of the loop wiring
impedance based on wire sizes and approximate length used, (4)
the total loop impedance, (5) reserve output capacity.
b. Show atl interconnecting wiring between equipment, panels,
terminal junction boxes and field mounted components. The
diagrams shall show all components and panel terminal board
identification numbers and all wire numbers. This diagram shall
include atl intermediate terminations between field elements and
panels (e.g. terminal junction boxes). The diagrams shall be
coordinated with the electrical contractor and shall bear his mark
showing this has been done.
c. Show tocation of all devices.
d. Show instrument description showing type, manufacturer, model
number, range, set points, and operation (e.g. fail open, open on
energize, normally closed, etc.) as applicable.
e. Show all instrument loop power or instrument air requirements
back to termination on terminal block or bulkhead, fuse block
(including fuse size), etc., as applicable.
4. This submittal shall provide complete documentation of the proposed
hardware (PLCs, communications equipment, peripherals, etc.) including:
a. A system block diagram(s) showing in schematic form, the
interconnections between major hardware components such as:
control centers, panels, consoles, computer and peripheral
devices, telemetry equipment, local digital processors and like
equipment. The block diagram shall reflect the total integration of
all digital devices in the system and shall reflect any man/machine
interface locations. All components shall be clearly identified with
appropriate cross references to the location of each.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section /Va
Instrumentation & Control — Genera/ Requirements �
0992-0205 13100-10
�
C�
�
LJ
�
��
0
The diagram shall reference all interconnecting cabling
requirements for digital components of the system including any
data communication links.
Data sheet for each hardware component, listing all model
numbers, optional, auxiliary, and ancillary devices that are being
provided.
The data sheets shall be provided with an index and proper
identification and cross referencing. They shall include but not be
limited to the following information.
1) Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Loop
Diagrams (as applicable).
2) Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract
Drawings.
3) Manufacturers complete model number.
4) Location of the device.
5) Input - output characteristics.
6) Range, size, and graduations.
7) Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification
and mounting details.
8) Materials of construction of all components.
9) Power supply device sizing calculations where applicable.
c. Equipment specification sheets which shall fully describe the
device, the intended function, how it operates and its physical
environmental and performance characteristics. Each data sheet
shall have appropriate cross references to loop or equipment
identification tags. As a minimum the specification sheets shall
include the following:
1) Dimensions and working clearances.
2) Mounting or installation details.
3) Connection diagrams.
4) Electrical power requirements (volts, amps).
5) Materials of construction.
6) Environmental characteristics.
7) Performance characteristics.
d. The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site
preparation instructions, grounding and bonding procedures,
cabling diagrams, plug identifications, safety precautions or
guards, and equipment layouts in order to enable the Contractor
to proceed with the detailed site preparation for all equipment.
G. Training Submittals
1. Training Plan Submittal: The training plan shall include:
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eva18 Design Section IVa
� Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-11
�
0
a. Definitions of each course.
b. Specific course attendance.
c. Schedule of training courses including dates, duration, and
locations of each class.
d. Resumes of the instructors who will actualfy conduct the training.
Testing Submittals
1
�a
3
5
The test plan shall be submitted after all equipment submittals have been
approved by the Owner and/or Engineer.
The test plan shall demonstrate that the CSI has designed and configured
a system that meets the design specifications. The documents for the
test plan shall be structured so that it is easily understood what the inputs
are, what the predicted outputs should be, and what the actual outputs
are. The test plan should have sign-off and date block for the CSI, the
Contractor, and the Owner.
The complete test plan should include but not be limited to the following
a. Test assumptions and methods
L•
c.
Test Equipment List
Test Personnel Staffing and Qualifications
d. Test Schedule with time allotted for each task
e. System hardware and software summary.
f. Communications test to the various PLCs for Discrete and Analog
I!O data transfer.
g. 100 percent 1/O point test including all spare points based upon
the previously submitted System 1/O list.
h. Functional and Control strategy tests.
Test Procedures: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed during
the test. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and checklists
to be used to control and document the required tests. Testing may not
be started until all Testing Submittals have been approved.
Test Documentation: Submit a copy of the signed off test procedures
upon completion of each required test.
w
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control - General Requirements �
0992-0205 13100.12
�
��
�
�
�
C�
�
L.1
�
`I
�_�
�
�
�
�
Tools, Supplies and Spare Parts Lists Submittal
This submittal shall include a list of all required and recommended
spares. The following information shall be provided in table format:
a. Specification Section
b. Tagname
c. Description
d. Quantity
e. Manufacturer
f. Model, part, order number
g. Local distributor and manufacturer contact information. Contact
information shall include address, phone number, and website.
Operational and Maintenance Manuals
Prior to installation of any equipment onsite, preliminary O&M manuals shall
have been submitted and approved. No installation of equipment shall be
permitted without the Contractor maintaining an updated version of these
preliminary 08�M manuals onsite for the Owne�'s and Engineer's use.
After all field changes or corrections made during installation and field check
out have been completed, then all system supplier documentation, including
drawings, shall be revised to reflect the "as installed, corrected and
accepted" condition of the system and final record copies of O&M manuals
for the system shall be provided to the Owner and Engineer for approval.
3. Final system documentation shall be provided in 3-hole type binders of
archival quality (e.g. slant D or elliptical binding, vinyl with metal hinge or
extra heavy weight vinyl, etc.) with a binding no larger than three (3) inches.
Materials shall be printed on 8.5" x 11" or 11" x 17" tear resistant paper or
ring reinforced paper where tear resistant is not available. Drawings shall be
either folded to fit within an 8.5" x 11" binder or in an 11" x 17" 3-hole binder.
Each binder shall include fifteen percent (15%) spare space for the addition
of future material. Tear resistant paper shall be Xerox Never Tear or equal.
4. Final documentation shall also be provided in an electronic format.
Electronic documentation shall be organized and provided on CD which
shall include all CAD drawings, manuals and word processing documents.
Electronic documentation format shall be primarily Adobe .pdf with additional
documents provided in AutoCAD, Microsoft Office, HTML or as approved by
the Engineer or Owner. Organization of the electronic documentation shall
be such as to allow point and click navigation from a table of contents to the
particular documents with the ability to return to the table of contents from
any location with one mouse click.
5. AutoCAD drawings files shall include all supporting files, symbol libraries
and print configurations needed to support future modifications and properly
print additional drawing copies.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section lVa
Instrumentation 8 Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-13
6. All electronic media (i.e. software, electronic documentation, configuration
files/reports, device backups, etc.) shall be provided with two (2) backup
copies, each organized into a separate binder. Media storage binders shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d
Table of contents
Archival media holders (e.g. CD, DVD, floppy, tape disk, etc.)
Support contacts (i.e. company, phone, internet link, etc.)
Software system requirements and installation instructions
�
'
�
�
��
7. Laminated or water/tear resistant copies of all applicable instrumentation
and control system drawings shall be supplied in drawing pocket of each �
control enclosure after "as installed, corrected, and accepted" revisions
have been made to the enclosure.
8. Operation and Maintenance manuals shatl include but not be limited to the
following:
a. Manufacturer standard O&M manuals for all equipment and software
furnished.
b. Custom O&M information describing the specific configuration of
equipment and software, and the operation and maintenance
requirements for this particular project.
c. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring
diagrams and instructions necessary for installing, operating and
maintaining the equipment.
d. All modifications to manufacturer standard equipment and/or
components shall be clearly identified and shown on the drawings
and schematics. All information contained therein shall apply
specifically to the equipment fumished and shall only include
instructions that are applicable.
e. A functional description of the entire system, with references to
drawings and instructions.
f. A complete "as built" set of all approved shop drawings, which shall
reflect all work required to achieve final system acceptance.
g. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers,
ranges, configuration parameters and other pertinent data.
h. Full specifications on each item.
i. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each
item supplied.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — Genera/ Requirements
0992-0205 13100-14
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
� 1.6 MEETINGS
�
��
�
�1
�1
�
�
�
�
�
j. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be
clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures.
k. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address and
telephone number of the local supplier.
I. References to manufacturers' standard literature where applicable.
m. Warning notes shall be located throughout the manual where such
notes are required to prevent accidents or inadvertent misuse of
equipment.
n. The operating instructions shall clearly describe the step by step
procedures that must be followed to implement all phases of all
operating modes. The instructions shall be in terms understandable
and usable by operating personnel and maintenance crews and shall
be useful in the training of such personnel.
o. The maintenance instructions shall describe the detailed preventive
and corrective procedures required, including environmental
requirements during equipment storage and system operation, to
keep the System in good operating condition. All hardware
maintenance documentation shall make reference to appropriate
diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary wiring diagrams,
component drawings and PCB schematic drawings shall be
included.
A. The Contractor shatl be required to give the Owner and their representatives, at
least finro weeks notice prior to any scheduled meetings. The notice may be
shortened by consent.
B. Preliminary Site Testing Meeting: A prefiminary site testing meeting shall be
conducted by the Contractor for the Owner and Engineer, to insure site
readiness, testing strategies and proper coordination between parties related or
involved in testing the ICS. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging the
on-site meeting after the Site Testing Plan has been approved and no earlier
than 3 weeks prior to testing. The Engineer must be satisfied that the site is
ready and that the testing will be performed to their satisfaction prior to any
documented ICS testing being performed. The Contractor shall arrange for
detailed meeting minutes to be recorded, approved, and distributed to meeting
attendees. Additional meetings may be required at the discretion of the Owner
and Engineer to resolve specific action items not addressed in the preliminary
site testing meeting. Two weeks prior to the meeting the Contractor shall submit
the following for approval.
1. A proposed list of ineeting attendees including organization and phone
number.
2. A proposed meeting agenda.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-15
C.
3. A list of personnel to be involved in the testing including their
responsibilities, qualifications, and phone numbers.
4. A list of tasks requiring Owner, Engineer or outside party involvement in
testing.
5. A testing schedule that coordinates the ICS testing with the operability of
the specific equipment being tested.
Additional meetings may be required at the discretion of the Owner and
Engineer, to resolve specific action items not addressed in the preliminary design
review or preliminary site testing meeting.
1.7 CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATOR
A. The Control System Integrator shall be regularly engaged in the detailed design,
fabrication, installation and startup of instrumentation and control systems for water
and wastewater treatment facilities in the state of Florida. Any CSI that has been
subject to litigation or the assessment of liquidated damages for nonperformance on
any project within the last five calendar years shall not be acceptable.
B. Where specific manufacturers and/or models of major hardware or software
products (PLC, software, Network Equipment, Wireless Equipment, etc.) are
specified to be used on this project, the CSI shall have completed at least one
project using that specified hardware or software. As used herein, the term
"completed" shall mean that a project has been brought to final completion and final
payment has been made.
C. Control System Integrators shall meeting the following minimum qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A minimum of l years experience with at least 5 years in water / wastewater
projects
References for 3 completed projects of like size and application to the
project specified herein
Project bonding capacity of $2 million
UL 508 certified panel shop
Electrical contractors license in the project site's state.
On staff ticensed professional engineer capable of being registered in the
state of the project and registered in that state, if required to perform
engineering services as specified to implement this project.
D. The listing of acceptable Control System Integrators in this specification in no way
relieves the Control System Integrator from meeting the qualifications specified
herein. Acceptable Control System Integrators shall be as follows:
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section ►Va
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-16
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
ul
�
�
�
�
�
i
1
�
2.
3.
4.
Curry Controls Company: 4245 S Pipkin Road, Lakeland, Ff 33811; (863)
646-5781; www.currvcontrois.com
Revere Control Systems: 2240 Rocky Ridge Road, Birmingham, AL, 35216;
(205) 824-0004; www.reverecontrol.com
Rocha Controls: 5025 W. Rio Vista Ave., Tampa, FL 33634; (813)-628-
5584; www.rochacontrols.com
DCR Engineering Services: PO Box 935/502 CR 640 E, Mulberry, FL
33860; (863)428-8080; www.dcrengr.com
� E. The Owner shall have the right of access to the CSI's facilities and the facilities of
their equipment suppliers to inspect materials and parts, witness inspections, tests
and work in progress, and examine applicable design documents, records and
� certifications during any stage of design, fabrication and tests. The CSI and their
equipment suppliers shall furnish office space, supplies and services required for
these surveillance activities.
� 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�
�
'
r_�
0
C.
The listing of specific products in this specification in no way relieves the Contractor
of furnishing equipment which shalt meet the performance and qualiry criteria
specified herein.
All equipment and materials shalt be new and the products of reputable recognized
suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items.
For uniformiry, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.
D. All equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged
construction, of ample strength for all stresses that may occur during fabrication,
transportation, and erection as well as during continuous or intermittent operation.
They shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a
neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be
given consideration in the design of details.
E. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade,
unless otherwise noted, which shall be of sturdy and durable construction and be
suitable for long, trouble free service.
F. Electronic equipment shall be suitable for the specified environmental conditions.
G. Optional or substituted equipment or both requiring changes in details or dimensions
required to maintain all structural, mechanical, electrical, control, operating,
maintenance or design features incorporated in these spec�cations and drawings,
shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event that the changes are
necessary, calculations and drawings showing the proposed revisions shall be
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-17
submitted for approval. The Contractor shall coordinate all changes with other
affected trades and contracts and pay all additional charges incurred.
1.9 DEFINITIONS AND ABREVIATIONS
A. The following definitions and abbreviations are used throughout the specifications
and drawings when referring to instrumentation and control equipment, functions,
and service. Definitions and abbreviations are not listed for those used in common
industry practice except where to provide explicit meaning. Refer to ISA, IEEE, and
other industry standard references for those not listed herein.
CSI .....................
ICS.....................
OIT .....................
OWS...................
PID.....................
SCADA ...............
SSP....................
11/SS ..................
RTU ....................
PLC ....................
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.............Control System Integrator
.............Instrumentation and Control System
.............Operator Interface Terminal
.............Operator WorkStation
.............Proportional-Integral-Derivative Control
.............Supervisor Control and Data Acquisition
.............SCADA System Programmer
.............Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
.............Remote Telemetry Unit
.............Programmable Logic Controller
A. All materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of
UL, where UL Standards are established for those items, and the requirements of
NFPA-70. All control panels shall comply with the requirements of UL 508A for
Industrial Control Panels. All items shalt be new and unused unless specified or
indicated otherwise.
B. Properly store, adequately protect, and carefully handle equipment and materials to
prevent damage before and during installation. Handle, store, and protect
equipment and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Replace damaged or defective items.
C. All equipment shall be the latest and proven design. Specifications and drawings
call attention to certain features, but do not purport to cover all details entering into
design of the instrumentation system. The completed system shall be compatible
with functions required and the equipment furnished by the Contractor.
D. All electrical components of the system shall operate on 120 volt, single phase, 60
Hz power source, except as otherwise noted in the Specifications. Drawings and
specifications indicate the energy sources that will be provided. Any other devices
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Contro/ - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-18
�J
�
��
r
�
�
�
J
�
r
�
�
�J
,---;
II
U
�
�
� 2.2
�
�
�
E
necessary to obtain proper operation of the instrumentation and control system from
these energy sources shall be furnished with the system.
All necessary fuses or switches required by the instrumentation manufacturer for
equipment shall be provided with the equipment. All instruments requiring intemal
power supply shall have internal on-off switches.
F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations
of field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field mounted
equipment provided by others. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the
mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations
of process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls
furnished under this Contract. The CSI shall inspect all equipment, panels,
instrumentation, controls and appurtenances either existing or furnished under other
Divisions of the Specifications to determine all requirements to interface same with
the ICS. The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of any required
modifications with the associated supplier of the item furnished.
G. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions
specified. Alt system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone
lines, power lines, and electrical equipment.
H. Inside control rooms and climate-controlled electrical rooms, the temperature will
normally be 20 to 25 degrees C; relative humidity 40 to 80 percent without
condensation and the air will be essentially free of corrosive contaminants and
moisture. Appropriate air filtering shall be provided to meet environmental
conditions (i.e., for dust).
Other indoor areas may not be air conditionedlheated; temperatures may range
between 0 and 40 degrees C with relative humidify between 40 and 95 percent.
Field equipment, including instrumentation and panels, may be subjected to wind,
rain, lightning, and corrosives in the environment, with ambient temperatures from -
20 to 40 degrees C and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports,
brackets and interconnecting hardware shall be aluminum, 316 stainless steel, or as
shown on the installation detail drawings.
TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS
A. Provide special tools, other than those normally found in an electronic technician's
tool box, required to test, diagnose, calibrate, install, wire, connect, disconnect,
assemble and disassemble any digital equipment, instrument, panel, rack, cabinet
or console mounted equipment for service and maintenance (i.e., connector pin
insertion and removal tools, wire crimping tool, special wrenches, special instrument
calibrators, indicator lamp insertion and removal tools, etc.).
B. Provide tools and test equipment together with items such as instruction manuals,
carrying/storage cases, unit battery charger where applicable, special tools,
calibration fixtures, cord extenders, patch cords and test leads, which are not
� _Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-19
�
specified but are necessary for checking field operation of equipment supplied under
this Section.
C. The CSI shall provide supplies as needed or as required by the Owner during the
specified warranty period. All fuses consumed during installation, testing, start-up,
the system availability demonstration, and the warranty period shall be replaced by
the Contractor.
f�7
E.
F
Provide spare parts for items of ICS equipment as recommended by the
manufacturer and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Furnish all spares in moisture-proof boxes designed to provide ample protection for
their contents. Label all boxes to clearly identify contents and purpose.
Refer to individual product specifications for additional requirements specific to
those devices.
2.3 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free
from electrical interterence that would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the
ICS equipment.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating signal types and transmission
requirements between the various parties providing equipment under this Contract.
This shall include, but not be limited to, distribution of appropriate shop drawings
among the equipment suppliers and subcontractors.
C. The CSI shall provide 24 VDC power supplies for signals and instruments where
applicable and as required inside panels, controls, etc. Where two-wire instruments
transmit directly to the instrumentation and control system, the CSI shall provide
power supplies at the PLGequipped control panels for those instruments. Where
four-wire instruments with on-board loop power supplies transmit directly to the
instrumentation and control system, the CSI shall provide necessary signal isolators
or shall otherwise isolate the input from the ICS loop power supply. Similar
provisions shatl be made when a third element such as a recorder, indicator or
single loop controller with integral loop power supply is included in the loop.
D. Analog signal transmission befinreen efectric or electronic instruments, controllers,
and all equipment and control devices shall be individually isolated, linear 4-20 mA
and shall operate at 24 VDC. Signal output from a{I transmitters and controllers
shall be current regulated and shall not be affected by changes in load resistance
within the uniYs rating. All cable shields shall be grounded at one end only, at the
control panel, with terminals bonded to the panel ground bus. Analog signal
isolation and/or conversion shall be provided where necessary to interFace with
instrumentation, equipment controls, panels and appurtenances.
�
��
�
�
��
�
r
�
�
��J
�
�
�
u
�
�
E. Non-standard analog transmission systems such as pulse duration, pulse rate, and �
voltage regulated shall not be permitted except where specifically noted in the
_Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa �
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-20
�
��
Contract Documents. Where transmitters with nonstandard outputs do occur, their
outputs shall be converted to an isolated, linear, 4-20 mA signal.
F. All discrete inputs to equipment and PLC's, from field devices, starters, panels, etc.,
� shall be dry contacts in the field device or equipment, powered from the PLCs,
unless specified otherwise. Sensing power (wetting voltage) supplied by the PLC
shall be 24 VDC.
�
l_1
,
�
�
� 2.4
,
r
�
�
�.1
�
�
�
,
G. All discrete outputs from local control panels and Control and Information System
PLCs, to field devices, starters, panels, etc., shall be 120 VAC / 28 VDC 5A dry
contacts. Output contacts may be powered from the field equipment, or powered
from 24 VDC / 120 VAC sourced from PLCs cabinet power system, as required to
interface with field equipment. Outputs to solenoid valves, horns, and strobe lights
shall be 120 VAC, powered from the PLC or control panel unless specified or shown
otherwise.
H. Discrete signals between starters, panels, etc. where 120 VAC is utilized shall be
clearly identified in the starter, panel, etc. as being powered from a different power
supply, than other starter/panel components. Where applicable, warning signs shall
be affixed inside the starter, panel, etc., stating that the panel is energized from
multiple sources. Output contacts in the starter, panel, etc. which are powered from
other locations shall be provided with special tags and/or color coding.
Disconnecting terminal strips shall be provided for such contacts. The above
requirements shall apply to all starters and panels, regardless of supplier.
NAMEPLATES
A. All items of equipment listed in the instrument schedule, control panels, and all items
of digital hardware shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be
located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly
associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned
so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the
nameplate. Nameplates shall include the equipment identification number and
description. Abbreviations of the description shafl be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16 inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic
plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16 inch high on a black
background.
Nameplates shall be attached to metal equipment by stainless steel screws and to other
surfaces by an epoxy based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where
the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drilled and attached to the
associated device by means of stainless steel wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
_Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-21
A.
'
�
The CSI shall provide the Contractor a periodic written report detailing progress
of start-up. This report shall include specific tabulations of devices on which �
start-up has been completed.
B. Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and
maintenance. The CSI shall examine the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings
for various items of equipment in order to determine the best arrangement for the
work as a whole, and shall supervise the installation of ICS equipment.
C. Instrumentation and Control System equipment shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters,
alarms and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact
locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the
field, all information relevant to the placing of process control work and in case of
any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and
furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved
manner.
D. The CSI shall investigate each space in the building through which equipment
must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the CSI shall be required to
ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in
the building. The CSI shall also investigate, and make any field modifications to
the allocated space for each cabinet, enclosure and panel, to assure proper
space and access (front, rear, side).
E. Two complete sets of approved shop drawings shall be kept at the job site during
all on-site construction. Both sets shall be identically marked up to reflect any
modifications made during field installation or start-up. All markings shall be
verified and initialed by the Engineer or his designated representative. Following
completion of installation and the operational readiness test, one set of the
marked up drawings shall be provided to the Engineer, the other retained by the
CSI for incorporation of the mark-ups into final as-built documentation.
F. All work shall be in strict accordance with codes and local rulings, should any
work be performed contrary to said rulings, ordinances and regulations, the
Contractor shall bear full responsibility for such violations and assume all costs
arising there from.
G. Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided.
They shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and not interfere with any other
equipment.
H. The Contractor shall take steps to keep electrical and control enclosures clean and
free of contaminants throughout installation. Cleaning after installation is not
acceptable. Under no circumstances are electricat and control enclosures to be
cleaned using compressed air to blow out dust, causing contaminants to be forced
into sensitive electronics.
_Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - Genera/ Requirements
0992-0205 13100-22
�
�i
'
�
�'
�i'
�
�
�
��
�
�1
L�
�
�
i
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
' 3.2
�
,
,
Provisions shall be made to completely capture filings (metal, etc.) when drilling into
enclosures, to prevent contamination of electrical equipment.
Upon completion of the instrumentation and control work, the Contractor shall
thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials and
remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that has accumulated during the
construction work. The entire area shall be left neat, clean, and acceptable to the
Owner.
WIRING AND GROUNDING
C. The following wiring practice guidelines shall be used in order to minimize ground
loops, to minimize electromagnetic interference/radio frequency interference
(EMI/RFI) to this equipment, and to provide maximum practical immunity from
damage resulting from lightning-induced transients.
D. Common wires or conductors shall not be utilized (either within panels or external to
panels or for grounding of field devices) for both signal shield or signal grounding
and for safety grounds.
E. Exposed wire lengths extending from within shielded signal cables shall be
' minimized to reduce pick-up of EMI/RFI by signal circuits. Exposed lengths of less
than one inch are preferred, and a maximum exposed length of two inches may be
permitted where necessary. No splicing of signal wires is permitted.
�
'
'
�
[�
LJ
� 3.3
�
F. All signal wiring shall be shielded, both within panels and external to panels. Unless
othenrvise specified, all signal wiring shall be No. 16 AWG stranded tinned two-
conductor finristed pair, with 100 percent coverage aluminized Mylar or aluminized
polyester shield and tinned copper drain wire.
G. Signal wiring within outdoor or indoor field device enclosures shall conform to the
same requirements as panel wiring.
H. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source
to destination, and grounded at one end only. In general, grounding of signal cable
shields shall be done at the control panel end. The signal cable for no signal shall
share a common cable shield grounding wire with the signal cable shield for any
other signal, and shall not share a common grounding wire with any other circuit.
The length of no signal cable shield grounding wire shall not exceed two inches, with
less than one-inch maximum length preferred.
All outdoor instruments and all outdoor enclosures shall be grounded using the
practice defined in Section 800.40 of the National Electric Code.
TESTING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The CSI shall test all equipment hardware and software at the factory prior to
shipment. As a minimum, testing shall include the following:
� _Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section ►Va
Instrumentation 8 Control — General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-23
�
�
1. Operational Readiness Testing (ORT).
2. System Acceptance Testing (SAT).
Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test
shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing
the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied.
C. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer approved
procedures, forms, and check lists. Each specific test to be performed shall be
described and a space provided after it for sign off by the appropriate party after
its satisfactory completion.
D. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms, and check tists will constitute the
required test dacumentation.
E. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform
tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not
practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data; provide
suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test
procedures.
F.
G
H
The Contractor shall require the CSI to coordinate all of his testing with him, all
affected Subcontractors, and the Owner.
The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or
not explicitly stated in the prior approved test procedures.
The Engineer's decision shall be finat regarding the acceptability and
completeness of all testing.
The CSI shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test
equipment, and labor to perform the field tests.
3.4 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTING (ORT)
A. The entire system shall be certified (inspected, calibrated, tested, and
documented) that it is ready for operation. Each specified function shall be
verified on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop and site-by-site basis.
B. The Owner and/or Engineer reserves the right to witness any test, inspection,
calibration, or start-up activity. Acceptance by the Engineer of any plan, report,
or documentation relating to any testing or commissioning activity specified
herein, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for meeting all
specified requirements.
C. The CSI shall provide the services of factory trained technicians, tools and
equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect and adjust each instrument to its
specified performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any contract
��
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�i
�
�
�
�
_Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section /Va �
Instrumentation & Control - Genera/ Requirements
0992-0205 13100-24
�
'
�
requirements, or any published manufacturer performance specification for
� functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the
discretion of the Engineer, at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear all
costs and provide all personnel, equipment and materials necessary to
� implement all installation fests and inspection activities for equipment specified
herein.
,
�
�
'
�
n
��
�
�
�
,
D. Each instrument shall be calibrated at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span
using test instruments to simulate inputs and read outputs. Test instruments
shall be rated to an accuracy of at least five (5) times greater than the specified
accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Where applicable, such test
instruments shall have accuracies as set forth by the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST).
E. The CSI shall provide a written calibration sheet to the Engineer for each
instrument, certifying that it has been calibrated to its published specified
accuracy. The Contractor shall submit proposed calibration sheets for various
rypes of instruments for Engineer approval prior to the start of calibration. This
sheet shall include but not be limited to date, instrument tag numbers, calibration
data for the various procedures described herein, name of person performing the
calibration, a listing of the published specified accuracy, permissible tolerance at
each point of calibration, calibration reading as finally adjusted within tolerance,
defect noted, corrective action required and corrections made.
F. If doubt exists as to the correct method for calibrating or checking the calibration
of an instrument, the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be used as
an acceptable standard, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
G. Upon completion of calibration, devices calibrated hereunder shall not be
subjected to sudden movements, accelerations, or shocks, and shall be installed
in permanent protected positions not subject to moisture, dirt, and excessive
temperature variations. Caution shall be exercised to prevent such devices from
being subjected to over-voltage, incorrect voltages, overpressure or incorrect air.
Damaged equipment shall be replaced and recalibrated at no cost to the Owner.
H. After completion of instrumentation installation and calibration, the CSI shall
perform a loop check. The Contractor shall submit final loop test results with all
instruments listed in the loop. Loop test results shall be signed by all
representatives involved for each loop test.
I. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for
� proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and
component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related
submittals and the Contract Documents.
�
�
�
�
1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using
Engineer approved forms and check lists.
_Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-25
3.5
2. The Contractor shall require the CSI to maintain the Loop Status Reports
and Components Calibration sheets at the job-site and make them
available to the Engineer/Owner at any time.
3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the
Engineer will review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component
Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon
completion of the Operationaf Readiness Tests. Any deficiencies found
shall be corrected.
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)
A. Successful completion of the operational readiness test, as determined by the
Owner and/or Engineer, shall be the basis for starting the witnessed system
acceptance test. The Engineer shall approve the ORT test results and the
Engineer and Owner shall be given two weeks notice prior to the start of the
System Acceptance Test.
B. The system acceptance test shall repeat loop and functional testing done during
the operational readiness test in order to demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer
that the system has been started up, is operating, and is in compliance with
these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a
paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop and site-by-site basis.
�
'
,
n
�i
,
�
�
�
�
C. The following documentation shall be made available to the Engineer during the �
test:
�
2
3.
All Contract Drawings and Specifications, addenda, and change orders.
Master copy of the test procedure.
One copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Engineer at
the job-site both before and during testing.
�
r
D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed, and corrections made by the �
CSI. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions
are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test.
E. After all functions have been tested and all corrections made, the system shall '
operate continuously for 15 days without failure before this test will be considered
successful.
F. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent during this
test period. Availability shall be defined as "Avail. _(Total Time-Down Time,) /
Total Time x 100%". Down times due to power outages or other factors outside
the normal protection devices or back-up power supplies provided, shall not
contribute to the availability test times above.
3.6 TRAINING
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eva18 Design Section /Va
Instrumentation & Control — Genera/ Requirements
0992-0205 13100-26
�
�
�
�
'
'
,
A. The CSI shall provide project specific classroom training at the Owners site or
, designated location. Training shall be provided for the operation and maintenance
of all equipment provided, as well as site specific installation configuration training
for the system as a whole.
,
�
L�
,
�
�
�
�
,
�u
u
� 3.7
,
�
B. Each student shall be provided with training materials. All training materials shall be
provided in hardcopy as well as on a training CD, with all materials in Microsoft
Office or Adobe pdf file format. All training CD's shall be updated with final
configuration information and resubmitted for approval. Finaf CD media shall be
archival quality.
C. The owner reserves the right to video tape any and all training sessions for the
purposes of future or refresher training.
D. To facilitate the Owner's operations staff scheduling, training shall be conducted in
finro (2) four-hour sessions, a morning session and an afternoon session. Moming
and afternoon sessions will cover the same material on a given day. The training
shall consist of one (1) day minimum with (2) sessions per day.
E. Maintenance training shall be provided to designated maintenance personnel, so
that each component may be maintained without the assistance of outside
organizations. The training shall be e�ensive so that after training, personnel shall
be able to identify component malfunctions and repair components to the
board/module replacement level. Training shall cover the entire system including
controls and field equipment.
F. Maintenance training shall be conducted in one (1) session, with a minimum of 8
hours of instruction.
G. Under the scope of this project, the System Integrator will not be responsible for
providing PLC and HMI control programming and logic. Specific training should
therefore include, but not be limited to: system architecture and interconnection,
wiring, field instrumentation and PLC hardware including maintenance and
trouble-shooting.
H. Refer to related specification sections for additional training requirements.
Training sessions shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Owner before final
acceptance will be provided.
WARRANTY
A. The warranty for the ICS shall be provided as specified in Section 1740 —
Warranties, and as specified herein. The warranty period for this system shall be
for one year and shall begin upon acceptance of the complete system by the
Owner. During this warranty period, the CSI sha{I provide, at no additional cost
to the Owner, the services of a trained, competent, field service engineer who
shall arrive on site within 36 hours of notification by the Owner or Engineer, to
� _Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Conbol — General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-27
,
0
repair and/or replace any faulty device or equipment supplied by the system
supplier as part of this Instrumentation and Control System. All preventive and
corrective activities shall be documented with service reports, which shall identify
the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe all
work performed, and list materials used. A copy of all service reports shall be
delivered to the Owner on or before the next business day.
The CSI shall be capable of providing, after the warranty period for this system
expires, a 1-year renewable service contract whereby a trained, competent field
service engineer shall arrive on site within 36 hours of notification by the Owner.
Information relative to charges for such service and availability of such service
shall be submitted to the Owner and the Engineer.
C. Components shall be furnished to the manufacturer's standard for service
intended, unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications or on the Contract
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
_Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section lVa
Instrumentation 8 Contro/ - General Requirements
0992-0205 13100-28
� � � � � � � i � � � � � � � � � � �
Marshall Street Salsnes Filters
City of Clearwater, Florida
Instrumentation Schedule
'
,
,
,
SECTION 13120 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL, FIELD
EQUIPMENT
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
' 1.3
A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and piace in satisfactory operation all
equipment required to provide a complete and operable Instrumentation and Control
System (ICS) as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings, even if
each needed item is not specifically specified or shown.
B. The Control System Integrator (CSI) shall provide full onsite supervision of aIl
equipment provided under this section, where installation is provided by others.
C. Field equipment (i.e. primary elements, measuring devices, transmitters, field
controllers, chart recorders, indicators, and other instrumentation and accessories)
shall be provided with all components necessary for a fully functional device whether
specifically mentioned in these specifications or not. This shall include, as applicabfe
or recommended by the manufacturer: sample conditioning, sensors, sensor holder
and mounting brackets, transmitter, all required cables, calibration equipment,
chemicals, reagents and spare parts.
D. Specialty cables between sensors/probes and their electronics/transmitters shall be
furnished with each instrument. Cables shall be coordinated with the conduit
installation and be of sufficient length to not require any splicing. Special cables
include any type of cable not specified in Division 16 — Electrical.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 13100 - Instrumentation and Controls, General
Requirements, and the sections referenced therein shall be apptied.
SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01340 — Shop Drawings,
� Project Data and Samples and as specified in Section 13100 - Instrumentation and
Controts, General Requirements. In addition, the following specific submittals items
shall be provided:
�
'
'
,
,
An ISA specification sheet for each instrument furnished and/or calibrated
shall be submitted with the field equipment submittals. The ISA data sheet
shalf be in accordance with ISA Standards ISA S20 "Specification Forms for
Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and
Control Valves" and ISA TR20.00.01 "Specification Forms for Process
Measurement and Control Instruments".
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
lnstrumentation 8 Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-1
2. The CSI and the field equipment manufacturer shall review the proposed
installation and configuration of all field equipment, prior to submittal for
approval, and shall identify any condition which shall require corrective
measures. The following as a minimum shall be reviewed for the installation
configuration of each instrument:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
�
Listed features
Material of construction
Consideration of process fluid
Environmental conditions
Installation location
Process connections
Ability to perform maintenance
�J
�
'
'
�
'
J
3. Submit in writing in the field equipment submittal, that each piece of
equipment is suitable for the proposed installation. Any proposed deviations ,
shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to execution.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise specified, instruments shall be provided with enclosures to suit the
specified environmental conditions. Field-mounted devices shall be rugged and
mounted on walls, equipment racks, or pipe stanchions. Where the field
equipment's integral enclosure for a specified instrument is not available with the
specified environmental rating, the field equipment shall be provided in a control
enclosure as specified in Specification Section 13130 - Instrumentation and
Controls, Control Enclosures.
B. Where separate elements and transmitters are required, they shall be fully matched,
and unless otherwise noted or shown on the Contract Drawings, installed adjacent
or near to the sensor, in a readily accessible location. Special cables that are
required for interconnection between sensors or probes and transmitters shall be
furnished with the instrumentation devices by the associated equipment
manufacturer. Special cables shall be of the required length for the equipment
locations and conduit routing paths shown on the Contract Drawings. No splicing of
cables will be accepted.
C. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry and shall be coated (tropicalized)
to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Ambient conditions shall be
-15 to 50° C and twenty to ninety-five percent (20% - 95%) relative humidity, unless
otherwise specified. Field mounted equipment and system components shall be
designed for installation in dusty, humid and corrosive service conditions.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Secfion IVa
►nstrumentation & Control Field Equipmenf
0992-0205 13120-2
,
�
�
r
'
�
,
,
,
'
,
,
I�
,
'
'
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
i
�
2.2
D. Ail non-loop-powered instruments and equipment shall be designed to operate on a
60 Hz alternating current power source at a nominal 120 VAC, except where
specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with
the above shall be provided. Where equipment requires voltage regulation,
constant voltage transformers shall be supplied.
E. AI� analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be isolated, 4-20 mA into a load of
0-750 ohms minimum, unless specifically noted otherwise.
F. Process taps for primary sensors shall be sized to suit each individual installation
and the requirements of the instrument served. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure that the location, supports, orientation and dimensions of the connections
and taps for instrumentation furnished under this Division are such as to provide the
proper bracing, the required accuracy of ineasurement, protection of the sensor
from accidental damage, and accessibility for maintenance while the plant is in
operation. Isolation valves shall be provided at all process taps.
G. All instrumentation exposed to sunlight shall be provided with sunshields
constructed from 316 stainless steel or epoxy coated aluminum. Sunshields shall
be designed to withstand regional wind and ice loads. Sunshield design shall be
submitted for approval.
H. All outdoor external sample/process piping, including valves and appurtenances,
shall be insulated with weather-proof insulation, and heat-taped to prevent freezing.
Heat taping shall be thermostatically controlled and self-regulating, and shall adjust
its heat output to the temperature of the lines.
TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS
A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 13100 -
Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements, and as specified for each
equipment item. In addition, the following items shall be provided:
All instruments shall be
including chemicals and
maintenance of the device
2.3 ACCESSORIES
supplied with one (1) year's worth of supplies,
reagents, for the calibration, operation and
A. Instrument tubing shall be 1/4 x 0.065-inch seamless, annealed, ASTM A-269 Type
316L stainless steel with Type 316 - 37° stainless steel flared fittings, or Swagelock
or Parker-CPI flareless fittings.
B. Diaphragm seals shall be provided to systems as shown on the Contract Drawings,
as specified herein and/or for isolation of pressure gauges, switches and
transmitters attached to systems containing chemical solutions or corrosive fluids.
Marshal► Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section !Va
Instrumentation & Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-3
2.4
2.5
As a minimum, seals shall be of all 316 stainless steel construction. Diaphragms
shall be 316L stainless steel for operating pressures at or above 15 psi, and
elastomers for operating pressures below 15 psi. Diaphragm material shall be non-
reactive with the process fluid. Refer to the Instrument Schedules for specific
materials requirements. Seal shall have fill connection, 1/4-inch NPT valve flush
port and capable of disassembly without loss of filler fluid. Where specified,
diaphragm seals shall comply with the above requirements, and shall be provided
with 316 stainless steet factory filled capillaries. Seals shall be Helicoid Type 100
HA, Mansfield & Green, Ashcroft, or equat.
C. Isolating ring seals shall be provided for sensing elements measuring pressure in
solids bearing fluids. For heavy solids/slurry applications, wherever the associated
pressure instrument is used for control purposes, or where shown on the Contract
Drawings, the sensor body shall be full line size wafer design, with 316 stainless
steel housing and assembly flanges, and Buna N flexible cylinder lining for in-line
mounting. The wafer shall have through bolt holes or centerline gauge for positive
alignment with the associated flanged piping. The captive liquid chamber and
associated instrument(s) shall be furnished with threaded drain tap and plug.
Isolating ring seals shall be RED Valve Series 40, Ronningen-Petter Iso-Ring,
Moyno RKL Series W, or equal.
D. For all other solids bearing fluids, pressure shall be sensed via a 1/2" diameter
spool-type isolating ring seal, mounted on a 1/2" pipe nipple at 90 degrees from the
process piping. An isolation ball valve shall be provided between the process piping
and the ring seal, and a cleanout ball valve shall be provided between the ring seal
and the atmosphere. The pressure instrument shall be back or side mounted to the
ring seal such that the gauge or readout may be viewed normally. Isolating ring
seals for normal solids service shall be Red Valve Series 42, Ronningen-Petter Isa
Spool, or equal.
E. Isolation valves shall be 1/2-inch diameter ball valves with 316 stainless steel body,
316 stainless steel ball.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (NSS)
'
�
�
��
�
'
C_l
'
LJ
�
�
C�
'
A. NSS shall be supplied for all field equipment power, signal, and communications �
wires that have any portion extending outside of a building. Refer to Specification
Section 13130 - Instrumentation and Controls, Control Enclosures for requirements.
LEVEL SWITCH (SUSPENDED FLOAT TYPE)
A.
f:�
Float switches shall be of the non-mercury displacement type, encapsulated in
polyurethane or vinyl floats.
Units shalt be waterproof, shockproof, explosion-proof and equipped with sufficient
submersible cable to extend to the control panel or junction box without splicing.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-4
�
�
�
�
r.
r�
,
'
�-,
'� _�
C.
I��
Any required weights shall be provided. Switches shall be suspended in the wetwell
on a suitabfe rack or rail of stainless steel construction.
Suspended type float switches shall be Flygt ENM-10, Anchor Scientific Eco-Float
or approved equal.
� 2.6 LEVEL/FLOW TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC TYPE
A. Ultrasonic transmitters shall be provided for measurement of tank and wetwell
� levels or for flow measurement based on level over a weir or flume. Equipment
shall be provided with features and accessories as described herein and suitable
for the application.
'
'
�
,
B. Ultrasonic levef/flow transmitters shall meet the following specifications as a
minimum:
2
3
5
6
7
NEMA 4X enclosure
120VAC, 60Hz input power
Process display with keypad for menu driven configuration
One (1) isolated 4-20 mA output
One (1) alarm relay output
Non-volatite memory
Accuracy: 0.25 %
C. The CSI shall provide all mounting hardware and coordinate the details of the
, installation so that the instruments are installed in keeping with the best standard
and recommended practices of the manufacturer and conforming to the
requirements set forth by the Engineer.
�
'
�
,
'
'
,
�
�
D. Level/flow transmitters shall be fully programmable and configurabte using a
computer and keypad. The final `As-BuilY documentation shall be provided with a
tabulation of the Programming Parameters used in each level/flow transmitter so
that the initial calibration can be reproduced if a spare transmitter is instalfed.
E. Level/flow transmitters shall be provided with optional integral analog signal
isolators, as part of the transmitter assembfy. All conduit connections shall be
sealed to prevent damage or corrosion due to vapors or wetness.
F. Ultrasonic Level/Flow Transmitters shall be Siemens Hydroranger 200 with
Echomax XPS-15 sensors. Refer to the Instrumentation Schedule Attachment
for flange mounting requirements. Transmitters shall be installed using the
appropriate transducer, suitable for the range of the installation. The cable
provided with the transducer shall be ordered with sufficient length to provide
installation without splicing the cable at any point.
G. The CSI shall provide mounting hardware components and appropriate mounting
assistance to install and secure the transducers in a manner in keeping with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment and in keeping with the
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-5
general details provided in the drawings. All hardware shall be fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials and shall utilize stainless steel hardware. The
mounting system shall be secure and permanent and shall allow easy access to
the sensor for servicing. All cables shall be installed in suitable rigid conduit with
only short lengths of flexible conduit allowed to complete the installation.
H. In cases where the transducer is used to monitor a covered wetwell, the
transducer shall be installed using a hinged protective enclosure. The enclosure
shall be a special corrosion resistant instrument enclosure made of polyurethane,
and stainless steel hardware. Enclosures shall be model C-6, as provided by
O'Brien Corp, St. Louis, Missouri. The case shall be secured to the slab using
heavy anchors over an appropriately sized hole cored through the slab. The
enclosure shall also have a hole in the bottom to match the hole in the slab so
that the transducer can be easily installed from above. The transducer shall be
installed on a heavy aluminum plate which would lie in the bottom of the
enclosure and allow the transducer to extend into the cored hole.
In cases where the transducer is used to monitor a water storage tank or other
type of location, the CSI shall provide a mounting design and mounting hardware
to provide an installation which is appropriate for the operation of the device and
easily maintained. For storage tanks, the transducer shall be mounted above the
tank or a suitable bracket extending out far enough from the tank sides to receive
a strong signal over the entire level range without reflections off the tank sides.
The transmitter shall be mounted outside of the wall at a convenient ground-level
working height.
In cases where the transducer is used on a chemical storage tank, the CSI shall
provide a flange mounted arrangement to match the connection point on the
storage tank. Flange sizes and type will be coordinated with that equipment
supplier.
K. In cases where the transducer is used in a highly turbulent area, the sensor shall
be flange mounted to a stilling well to minimize incorrect responses to wave
action in the liquid. The stilling well shalf be a six (6) inch PVC pipe which shall
extend the entire depth of the measured range and to below the normal low liquid
level. The stilting well shall have holes drilled periodically along the length
sufficient to allow adequate response to changes in liquid fevel. The stilling well
shall be supported in a manner which produces a rigid installation minimizing the
movement due to the turbulent liquid.
L. Spare parts: Provide one (1) spare Ultrasonic Level/Flow Transmitter of each
type used, and one (1) spare transducer of each rype used (supplied with the
longest cable utilized in the project).
2.7 MAGNETIC FLOW TRANSMITTER
A. Magnetic Flowmeters shall consist of a flowtube with remote signal
converter/transmitter that is capable of converting and transmitting a signal from
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-6
�
�
'J �
�
,�
�
'
LJ
�
�
,
�
'
�J
'
�
'
,
,
�
'
'
,
1
�
�
'
�
,
�I
�
�I
�
'
'
�
C
�❑
the flow tube. The flow tube shall utilize the characterized principle of
electromagnetic induction and shall produce DC signals directly proportional to
the flow rate
The flowmeter accuracy shall be <_±0.5% of reading from 2-100% meter capacity.
The flowmeter shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. NEMA 6P / IP68 accidental submersion enclosure
2. Meter body shall be powder coated aluminum or carbon steel with an
epoxy finish
3. Electrical Housing shall be epoxy painted aluminum
4. ANSI Class 150 flanges (minimum)
5. Tefzel or polyurethane liner to suit process requirements
6. Flush type or bullet type (slurry applications) electrodes compatible with
process fluid
7. Empty pipe detection
8. SST bolts/nuts, centering device, Teflon gaskets
9. Grounding rings when installed in non-metallic piping. Grounding rings
shall be chemically resistant to process, 316SST minimum.
10. The cables for interconnecting the flow tube to the transmitter shall be
furnished by the manufacturer and of sufficient length as to not require
splicing.
The transmitter shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
NEMA 4X enclosure
120VAC, 60Hz input power
Process display with keypad for menu driven configuration
One (1) 4-20ma output
One (1) Ethernet IP communications port
HART protocol
One (1) alarm relay output
Empty pipe detection
Lo-flow cutoff
Damping
Flow Totalizer
Non-volatile memory
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design
' 0992-0205
'
Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control Field Equipment
13120•7
E. Magnetic Flowmeters shall be Promag 53W flow tube with remote signal
converter/transmitter as provided by Endress & Hauser.
2.8 ULTRASONIC FLOW TRANSMITTER (TRANSIT TIME)
A. Ultrasonic Flow transmitters shall consist of a dual strap-on flowmeter sensor
assembly with remote signal converter/transmitter that is capable of converting
and transmitting the signal from the sensors.
B. The transmitter shall utilize the characterized principles of acoustical wave travel
in a water pipeline with measurements being the difference in time for signals
transmitted both upstream and downstream into the flow.
C
�
E
The flowmeter accuracy shall be <_±0.5% of reading from 2-100% meter capacity.
Flow range sensitivity shall be up to 0.01 feeUsec.
The flow system shall include but not be limited to the following:
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submersible, non-intrusive encapsulated clamp-on dual-sensors with
manufacturer supplied sensor cable of sufficient length as to not require
splicing.
SST clamps and mounting hardware
NEMA 4X / IP65 transmitter enclosure
120VAC, 60Hz input power
Backlit 2-line, 40 character alphanumeric process LCD display with tactile
keypad for menu driven configuration
6. One (1) 4-20 mA output
7. Up to four (4) alarm relay outputs
8. Provide with configuration and operational tuning software
Ultrasonic Transit Time Flowmeter shall be Thermo Scientific DCT 6088 or
approved equal.
2.9 PRESSURE GAUGES
A
fe7
General: Unless otherwise noted or specified, pressure and vacuum gauges shall
conform to the following:
Mounting Type: Gauges shall be of the stem-mount type unless noted otherwise.
C. Construction: Gauges shall be of the bourdon tube or bellows rype with 270
degrees clockwise pointer travel. Dials shall be white face with black numerals.
Dial size shall be 4-1/2 inches. Connections for all gauges shall be male 1/2
NPT with square wrench flats. Wetted parts shall be corrosion-resistant to the
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-8
,
�
�
�
�
'
,
�
�
�
,
�
,
'
'
�
,
'
'
,
�
,
,
,
,
'�J
�
.-,
J
'
process fluid shown and unless otherwise specified shall be the manufacturer's
best quality standard. The case shall be filled with glycerin and shall be black
phenolic. Accuracy shall be ±0.5 percent of span.
D. Chemical Seal: Where specified or shown in the drawings, the gauge, with
optional locking device, shall be furnished with a diaphragm seal. The
diaphragm seal shall have a 316 stainless steel (minimum) top and bottom
housing and a 316 stainless steel diaphragm welded to the top housing. When
the process fluid or pressure is not compatible with 316 stainless steel, the
manufacturer shall provide a diaphragm seal compatible with the process fluid.
The process connection shall be a 3/4-inch threaded connection with a flushing
connection. The fill fluid shall be glycerin. A locking device shall be included
from the factory on all fluid-filled instruments to prevent inadvertent loosening or
removal from the seal.
E. Where no seal is specified the gauge will be supplied with a pressure limiting
snubber to protect against surges and pulsations.
F. Manufacturers: The gauges shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, McDaniels,
U.S. Gauge or equal. The diaphragm seals shall be field serviceable for oil filling
and as manufactured by Ashcroft, Mansfield and Green, FIT, Ametek or equal.
2.10 CHECK VALVE LIMIT SWITCHES
A. Limit switches shall sense the position of a pump discharge check valve to
determine pump flow and operate a SPDT switch to actuate alarms or control
circuits. The switch contacts shall be rated for up to 10-ampere maximum toad at
120 VAC, 60 Hz. The limit switch shall consist of a lever sensor and operating
head. The lever sensor shall be 316 stainless steel or other material suitable for
the application.
B. Limit switches shall sense the position of a pump discharge check valve to
determine pump flow and operate a SPDT switch to actuate alarms or control
circuits. The switch contacts shall be rated for up to 10-ampere maximum load at
120 VAC, 60 Hz. The limit switch shall consist of a lever sensor and operating
head. The lever sensor shall be 316 stainless steel or other material suitable for
the application.
C. The lever sensor shall be a roller type or pushpin arm to allow reaction to the
, movement of the check valve arm and as required based on the specific
requirements of the installation. The operating head shall be housed in a NEMA
4 enclosure with an electrical conduit connection.
�
'
'
�
'
Q
E
The switch shalf be field adjusted for correct operation. Repeatabiliry of sensing
shall be within 1.0 percent (± 1.0%) of full switch range.
Lever type limit switches shall be model 802T type as manufactured by Allen
Bradley or approved equal.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section lVa
Instrumentation 8 Contro► Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-9
2.11 SUNSHIELDS:
A. All outdoor mounted transmitters shall be provided with a 316 stainless steel
sunshield. Sunshields are to be sized so that the sunshield will extend a
minimum of three (3) inches beyond the transmitter enclosure on all sides.
B. The sunshield shall be sized to include protection for the transmitter and the
surge arresting device.
C. All sunshield and instrument mounting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS:
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, refer to Section 13100 -
Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Contro/ Field Equipment
0992-0205 13120-10
�
�
�
�
�.I
�
�
�
'
1
'
,
'
'I
__�
�
L�'
'
�
TAGNAME
REM PRIM_SLDG PUMP1 MS
RUN_PRIM_SLDG_PUMP1_MS
FAIL_PRIM_SLDG_PU MP1_MS
CALL PRIM SLDG_PUMP1_MS
REM_PRIM_SLDG_PUMP2_MS
RUN_PRIM_SLDG_PUMP2_MS
FAIL PRIM SLDG PUMP2 MS
CALL_PRIM_SLDG_PUMP2_MS
RUN_FERM_MIXERI_MS
RUN FERM MIXER2 MS
RUN_FERM_MIXER3_MS
RUN_FERM_MIXER4_MS
RUN FERM MIXERS MS
RUN_FERM_MIXER6_MS
RU N_1ST_ANOX_M IXER_1_MS
RUN 1ST_ANOX_MIXER_2_MS
R U N_1ST_ANOX_M IXE R_3_MS
RU N_1ST_AN OX_M IXE R_4_M S
RUN 1ST_ANOX MIXER 5 MS
RUN_1ST ANOX_MIXER_6_MS
RU N_1ST_ANOX_M IXER_7_MS
RUN 1ST ANOX MIXER 8 MS
RU N_1ST_ANOX_M IXER_9_MS
RU N_2ND_ANOX_MIXER_1_MS
RUN 2ND ANOX MIXER 2 MS
RU N_2 N D_ANOX_M IXE R_3_MS
RUN_2ND_ANOX_MIXER_4_MS
RU N_2ND_ANOX_MIXER_5_MS
R U N_2 N D_AN OX_M IX ER_6_M S
RU N_2 N D_ANOX_M IXE R_7_MS
RUN 2ND ANOX MIXER_8_MS
RU N_2ND_ANOX_MIXER_9_MS
RU N_2 N D_ANOX_M IXER_10_MS
RUN 2ND ANOX MIXER_11_MS
R U N_2 N D_A N OX_M IX E R_12_MS
NH3_INFL_MS
COD_INFL_MS
NO3_PRE_MS
OPO4_PRE_2ND_ANOX
NH3 EFFLUENT_MS
COD_EFFL_MS
NO3_EFFLUENT
SALSNES FIITER DEStGN PLC INPUT/OUTPUT
MARSHALL ST. APCF
CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
DESCRIPTION
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 1 IN REMOTE
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 1 FAIL
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 1 CALL TO RUN
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 2 IN REMOTE
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 2 FAIL
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 2 CALLTO RUN
FERMENTATION MIXER N0. 1 RUN STATUS
FERMENTATION MIXER NO. 2 RUN STATUS
FERMENTATION MIXER NO. 3 RUN STATUS
FERMENTATION MIXER NO. 4 RUN STATUS
FERMENTATION MIXER NO. 5 RUN STATUS
FERMENTATION MIXER NO. 6 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 1 RUN STATUS
FIRSTANOXIC MIXER NO. 2 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 3 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 4 RUN STATUS
FIRSTANOXIC MIXER NO. 5 RUN STATUS
FIRSTANOXIC MIXER NO. 6 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 7 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 8 RUN STATUS
FIRST ANOXIC MIXER NO. 9 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 1 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 2 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC M�XER NO. 3 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 4 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 5 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 6 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 7 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 8 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 9 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 10 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 11 RUN STATUS
SECOND ANOXIC MIXER NO. 12 RUN STATUS
PLANT INFIUENTAMMONIA
PLANT INFLUENT CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
PLANT INFLUENT PRE-2ND ANOXIC NITRATE
PLANT INFLUENT PRE-2ND ANOXIC PHOSPHATE
PLANT EFFLUENT ANOXIC AMMONIA
PLANT EFFLUENT CHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND
PLANT EFFLUENT NITRATE
OPO4_EFFLUENT
FLOW_INF_MS
FLOW_RAS_MS
FLOW_WAS_MS
FLOW_PRI_SLU DGE_MS
LEV_PRIM_SLDG_MS
LEV_HI_PRIM_SLDG_MS
LEV_LO_PRIM_SLDG_MS
FLOW_PRIM SLD6 PUMP1 MS
FLOW_PRIM_SLDG_PUMP2_MS
FAIL_MCC9_POWER
REM SALSNES FEED MS
RUN_SALSNES_FEED_MS
FAIL SALSNES_FEED_MS
SPD_SALSNES_FEED_MS
CALL SALSNES_FEED_MS
CMD_SALSNES_FEED_MS
FLOW SALSNES FEED_MS
LEV_INFLWW_MS
PH_INFL_MS
COND_INFL MS
FLOW_INF_RETR_MS
LEV_LO_I N F L_PS_MS
LEV MID INFL PS MS
LEV_HI_INFL_PS_MS
REM_INFL_PUMP1_MS
RUN_INFL_PUMP1_VFD MS
RUN_INFL_PUMPl_CONST_MS
FAIL_INFL_PUMP1 VFD_MS
FAII INFL PUMP1 CUR_MS
SPD_INFL_PUMP1_MS
CALL_INFL PUMP1_MS
CMD_INFL_PUMP1 MS
1 N D_I N F L_PU M P 1_STATUS_MS
IND_INFL_PUMP1_FLT MS
REM INFL_PUMP2 MS
RUN_INFL_PUMP2_VFD_MS
RUN_INFL_PUMP2_CONST_MS
FAIL INFL PUMP2_VFD MS
FAIL_INFL_PUMP2_CUR_MS
SPD_INFL_PUMP2_MS
CALL INFL PUMP2 MS
CMD_INFL_PUMP2_MS
1 N D_I N F L_PU M P2_STATUS_MS
IND_INFL_PUMP2_FLT_MS
REM_INFL_PUMP3_MS
RUN_INFL_PUMP3_VFD_MS
PLANT EFFLEUNT PHOSPHATE
PLANT INFLUENT FLOW METER
RAS FLOW METER
WAS FLOW METER
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMPS DISCHARGE FLOW
PRIMARY SLUDGE WETWELL LEVEL
PRIMARY SLUDGE WETWELL HIGH LEVEL
PRIMARY SLUDGE WERWELL LOWLEVEL
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 1 CHECK VALVE LIMIT SWITCH
PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP NO. 2 CHECK VALVE IIMIT SWITCH
MCC 9 CONTROL PANEL POWER FAIL
SALSNES FILTERS FEED PUMP IN REMOTE
SALSNES FILTERS FEED PUMP RUN STATUS
SALSNES FILTERS FEED PUMP FAIL
SALSNES FILTERS FEED PUMP SPEED FEEDBACK
SALSNES FIITERS FEED PUMP CALLTO RUN
SALSNES FIITERS FEED PUMP SPEED COMMAND
SALSNES FILTERS FEED FLOW
INFLUENT PUMP STATION WETWELL LEVEL
PLANT INFLUENT PH
PLANT INFLUENT CONDUCTIVITY
PLANT INFLUENT FLOW RETRANSMISSION TO SAMPLER
INFLUENT PUMP STATION WETWELL LOW LEVEL
INFLUENT PUMP STATION WETWELL MIDDLE LEVEL
INFLUENT PUMP STATION WETWELL HIGH LEVEL
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 IN REMOTE
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS IN VARIABLE SPEED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS INCONSTANT SPEED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 VFD FAULTED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 CURRENT SENSOR ALARM
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 SPEED FEEDBACK
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 CALL TO RUN
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 SPEED COMMAND
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 1 FAULT INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 IN REMOTE
INFLUENT PUMP IVO. 2 RUN STATUS IN VARIABLE SPEED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS INCONSTANT SPEED
iNFIUENT PUMP NO. 2 VFD FAULTED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 CURRENT SENSOR ALARM
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 SPEED FEEDBACK
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 CALLTO RUN
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 SPEED COMMAND
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 2 FAULT INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 IN REMOTE
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 RUN STATUS IN VARIABLE SPEED
'�
�
�
�
�
'
0
'
L _1
'
,
'
�
�
�
i
�
�
�
,
'
,
I�
��
'
�
�
'
RUN INFL PUMP3 CONST MS
FAIL INFL PUMP3 VFD MS
FAIL INFL PUMP3 CUR MS
SPD INFL PUMP3 MS
CALL INFL PUMP3 MS
CMD INFL PUMP3 MS
I N D_I N F L_P U M P3_STATU S_MS
IND INFL PUMP3 FLT MS
IND IFPS_POWER MS
FAIL_IFPS_POWER_MS
FAI L_I F PS_G E N_ALM_MS
FAIL IFPS CNTRL SYS
RUN_THICKHOP_DISC_PUMP1_MS
RUN THICKHOP DISC PUMP2 MS
RUN THICKHOP DISC PUMP3 MS
RUN_THiCKHOP_DISC_PUMP4_MS
RUN_SLDGFEED_PUMP1_MS
RUN SLDGFEED PUMP2_MS
RUN_SLDG_THICKI_MS
RUN_SLDG_THICK2_MS
RUN POLY PUMP1 MS
RUN_POLY_PUMP2_MS
INFLUENT PUMP N0. 3 RUN STATUS INCONSTANT SPEED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 VFD FAULTED
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 CURRENT SENSOR ALARM
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 SPEED FEEDBACK
INFLUENT PUMP N0. 3 CALL TO RUN
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 SPEED COMMAND
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 RUN STATUS INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP NO. 3 FAULT INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP STATION POWER FAIL INDICATION
INFLUENT PUMP STATION CONTROL PANEL POWER FAIL
INFLUENT PUMP STATION GENERAL ALARM
INFIUENT PUMP STATION CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
THICKENER HOPPER DISCHARGE PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS
THICKENER HOPPER DISCHARGE PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS
THICKENER HOPPER DISCHARGE PUMP NO. 3 RUN STATUS
THICKENER HOPPER DISCHARGE PUMP NO. 4 RUN STATUS
SLUDGE FEED PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS
SLUDGE FEED PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS
SLUDGE THICKENER NO. 1 RUN STATUS
SLUDGE THICKENER NO. 2 RUN STATUS
POLYMER PUMP NO. 1 RUN STATUS
POLYMER PUMP NO. 2 RUN STATUS
NOTE 1: RE-ROUTE SIGNALS IN MCC ROOM FROM MCC TO AREA TERMINATION CABINET TO THE NEW MCC 9 f
NOTE 2: RE-ROUTE SIGNALS FROM CHEM SCAN IN MCC ROOM TO NEW MCC 9 PLC CABINET
NOTE 3: RELOCATED pH AND CONDUCTIVITY ANALYZERS ROUTED TO NEW INFLUENT PUMP STATION PLC CABI
NOTE 4: RE-ROUTE SIGNALS IN REACTOR AREA FROM AREA TERMINATION CABfNETTO EXISTING PLC IN DIGES�
SCHEDULE
TYPE INACTIVE ACTIVE
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
DO STOP START
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
DO STOP START
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
AI 0 20
AI 0 50
A1 0 15
AI 0 5
AI 0 5
AI 0 50
AI 0 15
UNITS
PPM
PPM
PPM
PPM
PPM
PPM
PPM
LOCATI ON
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
�
'
'
Ai 0 5
AI 0 20
AI 0 12.5
AI 0 1000
AI 0 200
AI 0 XXX
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
A► 0 100
DO STOP START
AO 0 100
AI 0 7.5
AI 0 10
AI 0 14
AI 0 XXX
AO 0 XXX
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI NORMAL ALARM
AI 0 100
DO OFF ON
AO 0 100
DO OFF ON
DO NORMAL ALARM
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
DI OFF ON
DI NORMAL ALARM
DI NORMAL ALARM
AI 0 100
DO OFF ON
AO 0 100
DO OFF ON
DO NORMAL ALARM
DI OFF REMOTE
DI OFF ON
PPM
MGD
MGD
GPM
GPM
INCHES
%
%
MGD
FEET
pH
MICROSIEMENS
GPM
%
%
%
%
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
MCC 9
IPS
IPS
IPS
I PS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
I PS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
I PS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
NOTE 2
DATA LINK
DATA LINK
DATA LINK
DATA LINK
DATA LINK
DATA LINK
NOTE 3
NOTE 3
FIT-201
FIT-241
FIT-242
FIT-254
LIT-250
LSH-250
LSL-250
ZSC-251
ZSC-252
DI OFF
DI NORMAL
DI NORMAL
AI 0
DO OFF
AO 0
DO OFF
DO NORMAL
DO NORMAL
DI NORMAL
DO NORMAL
DO NORMAL
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
DI OFF
'lC CABINET
ON
ALARM
ALARM
100
ON
100
ON
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INET
TER ELECTRICAL ROOM
%
%
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
IPS
i PS
IPS
IPS
iPS
IPS
IPS
DIG ESTER
DIGESTER
DiGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
DIGESTER
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
NOTE 4
�
�
�l
�
�
SECTION 13130 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL, CONTROL
ENCLOSURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, modify, test, install and place into satisfactory operation
all control enclosures (i.e. field panels, control panels, cabinets, consoles, boxes,
etc.) required to provide a complete and operable Instrumentation and Control
System (ICS) as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings, even if
each needed item is not specifically specified or shown.
B. The Contractor shall also be responsible to provide modifications to existing control
, panels as described herein or as indicated in the PLC InpuUOutput Schedule
Attachment. Modifications to existing control panels shall also conform to the
requirements of these specifications.
�
'
�
�
1.3
C. New control enclosures and/or subpanels shall be assembled, wired and tested in
the CSI's own facilities, unless specified otherwise.
D. All components and all necessary accessories (e.g. mounting hardware,
conditioning equipment, NSS, fuses, circuit breakers, terminals, ground bars,
relays, contactors, starters, indicators, control operators, power supplies, signal
conditioning, connectors, digital hardware, etc.) that may be required to complete
the system, shall be provided.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 13100 - Instrumentation and Control, General
Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied.
B. Instrumentation and Controls Schedules. Refer to Instrumentation Schedule and
PLC InpuUOutput Schedule Attachments for a listing of major equipment, enclosure
construction and signal monitoring requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01340 - Shop Drawings,
Project Data and Samples and as specified in Section 13100 - Instrumentation and
Control, General Requirements. In addition, the following specific submittal items
shall be provided.
1. Cabinet sizing in relation to heat dissipation and cooling/heating system
sizing calculations shall be submitted for all cabinets containing PLCs,
UPSs, VFDs, SCRs and, at the request of the Engineer, for alf cabinets
containing sensitive electronic equipment or chemicals.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All enclosures shall fit within the allocated space shown on the Drawings. The
Contractor shall examine plans and/or field inspect new and existing structures as
required to determine instalfation requirements and shall coordinate the installation
of all enclosures with the Owner and all affected contractors. The Contractor shall
be responsible for all costs associated with installation of enclosures, including repair
of damage to structures (incidental, accidental or unavoidable).
B. A minimum estimated size is shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish
enclosures of the size and quantity required to house the manufacturers' equipment
supplied and all other electrical components installed in the enclosure. In addition,
provide useful space and power supply capacity as spare for future expandability to
a minimum of one (1) item per item type installed or twenty percent (20%) of quantity
of each type item installed, whichever yields the greater spare space.
C. Enclosures (cabinets, panels, boxes, etc.) shall be formed or welded construction,
reinforced with Unistrut, Powerstrut or equal to facilitate mounting of internal
components or equipment. Sufficient access plates and doors shall be provided to
facilitate maintenance and testing of the supplier's equipment. Doors shall be
removable. Enclosures with any dimension thirty-six (36) inches or greater shall be
provided with removable lifting lugs designed to facilitate safe moving and lifting of
the panel during installation. No screws or bolts shall protrude through from the
interior enclosure.
D. All steel enclosures shall be free from dirt, grease and burrs, and shall be treated
with a phosphatizing metal conditioner (phosphate conversion coating) before
painting. All surfaces shall be filled, sanded, and finish coated by spraying a 1-2 mil
epoxy prime coat and smooth, level, high grade textured finish between flat and
semi-gloss shine. The colors shall be selected by the Owner from a minimum of six
(6) color samples provided. All stainless steel enclosures shall be polished to a No.
4 finish.
E. Enclosures shall be prefabricated cabinets and panels by Hoffman, Rittal or
Vynckier. The Contractor may optionally provide enclosures custom fabricated by a
reputable panel fabrication shop acceptable to the Engineer.
F. Each panel shall incorporate a removable back panel on which control components
shall be mounted. Back panels shall be secured to the enclosures with collar studs.
All components shall be of the highest industrial quality and securely mounted to the
removable back panels with screw and lock washers. Back panels shall be tapped
to accept all mounting screws. Self-tapping screws shall not be used to mount any
component.
G. All enclosures with any dimension twenty-four (24) inches or larger shall be provided
with drawing pockets for as-built panel drawings. One (1) laminated copy of the
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — Conbol Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-2
��
i
�
L_ I
'
appropriate panel as-built drawings shall be furnished and left in the pocket of each
panel.
H. All metallic enclosures with door mounted equipment shall have the door grounded
by means of flexible ground strap.
� I. The enclosure and all interior and exterior equipment shall be identified with
nameplates. The equipment shall be mounted such that service can occur without
removal of other equipment. Panet mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush
� mounted with flat black escutcheons. All equipment shall be accessible such that
adjustments can be made while the equipment is in service and operating. All
enclosures shall fit within the allocated space as shown on the Contract Drawings.
�
�
�
�
�
,
Enclosures shall provide mounting for UPS, power supplies, control equipment, input
/ output subsystems, panel mounted equipment and appurtenances. Ample space
shall be provided between equipment to facilitate servicing and cooling. Enclosures
shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted inside
the panel. Louvered openings fitted with dust filters near the bottom and top of the
cabinet shall be provided for NEMA 12 enclosures. If required, cabinets shall be
provided with filtered fans, heat exchangers or air conditioners. Only closed loop
cooling systems shall be provided for NEMA 4X cabinets. Cooling systems shall be
by the cabinet fabricator, McLean Midwest, Noren Products, or approved equaf.
K. Enclosures shall be provided with a main circuit breaker and a circuit breaker on
each individual branch circuit distributed from the panel. Main breaker and branch
breaker sizes shall be coordinated such that an overload in a branch circuit will trip
only the branch breaker but not the main breaker. Circuit breakers shall be provided
for the following internal branch circuits distributed within the panel:
1. Receptacles and power strips
2. Lighting
3. UPS
4. HVAC equipment
L. Enclosures shall be provided with 120 volt duplex receptacles for service equipment
� and fluorescent service lights. Loads not requiring transient voltage surge
suppression (i.e. receptacles, lighting, HVAC, branch circuits to remote equipment,
etc.) shall be connected ahead of the enclosure TVSS device.
�
�
'
�
M. Locate equipment, devices, hardware, power supplies, instrumentation and controls,
electrical equipment and wiring to be installed inside the enclosures and/or as facial
features on the enclosures, so that connections can be easily made and so that
there is ample room for servicing each item. Every component in and on the
enclosures shall be able to be removed individually without affecting the other
components and without the need to move other components. Support and restrain
all internally, as well as panel mounted components to prevent any movement.
Marshall Streef Salsnes Filter Eval & Design
, 0992-0205
�
Section IVa
lnstrumentation & Contro/ - Control Enclosures
13130-3
2.2
N. All cabinets and/or enclosures shall be NEMA rated for the environment in which it is
to be installed and as noted in the Drawings.
O. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever such approved
equipment and materials are available.
P. Control panels shall be built in accordance with UL508A Industrial Control Panels
and NEC Article 409 Industrial Control Panels. Control panels for areas classified as
Hazardous shall be built in accordance with UL698 Industrial Control Equipment for
Use in Hazardous Locations. Control panels shall be UL508A and/or UL698 labeled
and marked as defined in NEC 409.110 with the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and contact information (i.e. address, phone, website,
email, etc.).
2. Supply voltage, phase, frequency and full-load current.
3. Short-circuit current rating of the industrial panel based on one of the
following:
4. Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly
5. Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method
6. Electrical wiring diagram numbers or the index sheet to the electrical wiring
diagrams.
7. The enclosure type number (i.e. NEMA 1A, 3R, 12, 4X, 7, 9, etc.)
8. If the industrial control panel is intended as service equipment, it shall be
marked to identify it as being suitable for use as service equipment.
Q. All work shall be performed in a professional manner and in consideration of
allowing ease of future troubleshooting and maintenance. All equipment should
be mounted so as to minimize crowding within the panel. All devices shall be
mounted and wired in a neat and workmanlike manner. Each component shall
be prominently identified with the use of permanent engraved legend plates.
R. Grounding: All suppressors shall be grounded per the suppressor manufacturer's
recommendations. Furnish control panels with an integral copper grounding bus
for connection of suppressors and other required instrumentation. Provide
single-point connection of all grounds to grounding bus using the shortest
possible path. Each grounded object shall have a separate connection to the
ground bus. Do not connect cable shields to suppressor ground terminal or
daisy-chain ground connections. Provide 1-inch wide by 1/8-inch thick copper
ground bus as a minimum.
TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS
�
��
�
�
�
A. Tools, supplies, and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 13100 - �
Instrumentation and Control, General Requirements and as specified for each
equipment item. In addition, the following items shall be provided.
1. One (1) of each type of panel mounted equipment (i.e., indicators, signal
converters, etc.) provided under this Contract.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
►nstrumentation & Contro! — Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-4
�
2
3
4
Three (3) of each type of interposing relay provided under this Contract.
One (1) of each type of power TVSS device used
Five (5) of each type of signal NSS device used
5. Two (2) of each type of communication NSS device used.
B. OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES
All outdoor enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X, constructed of 316 stainless
steel with a white powder epoxy coating finish unless specified otherwise.
Outdoor enclosures shalt have a hinged and gasketed door. Door latches
shall be all stainless steel, fast operating clamp assemblies (quick release),
which do not require bolts or screws to secure. Gaskets shall be
polyurethane.
Outdoor panels shall be fitted with pad-lockable latch kits.
3. Outdoor enclosures with internal digital electronics, exterior indicators, or
� exterior indicator lights shall have external sun shields or sun shades,
constructed of the same materials as the associated enclosure, unless
otherwise specified.
� 4. Outdoor enclosures shall be designed for ambient conditions of -15 to 50°C
and twenty to ninety-five percent (20% - 95%) relative humidity, unless
otherwise specified. Outdoor enclosures shall be provided with
1 thermostatically controlled space heaters to provide condensation
protection.
�
�
r
C. INDOOR ENCLOSURES
Indoor enclosures located in the same area (i.e. room, etc.) as open process
tanks, open process channels, closed process piping or process equipment
containing wet liquids or possible airborne powders, shall be rated NEMA
4X, constructed of 316 stainless steel, fiberglass, fiberglass reinforced
polyester, or polycarbonate, unless specified otherwise. Enclosures shall
have a hinged and gasketed door. Door latches shall be all stainless steel,
fast operating clamp assemblies (quick release) which do not require bolts
or screws to secure. Gaskets shall be polyurethane.
� 2. Indoor enclosures located in a dry or environmentally controlled area (i.e.
electrical room, etc.) shall be NEMA 12 steel, unless specified otherwise.
Enclosures shall have a hinged and gasketed door. Door latches shall be 3
point door latch with handle for all enclosures with a dimension of 24 inches
� or larger, or otherwise shall be fast operating clamp assemblies which do not
require bolts or screws to secure. Gaskets shall be polyurethane.
�
�
,
3. Indoor enclosures in a non-air conditioned space shall be designed for
ambient conditions of 0 to 40°C and twenty to ninety-five percent (20% -
95%) relative humidity, unless otherwise specified. Indoor enclosures in an
air conditioned space shall be designed for ambient conditions of 20 to 30°C
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-5
I�a
E.
and twenty to eighty-five percent (20% - 85%) relative humidity, unless
otherwise specified.
TERMINALS
Terminal blocks shall be assembled on non-current carrying galvanized steel
DIN mounting rails, securely bolted to the cabinet sub-panel. Terminals
shatl be of the screw down pressure plate type as manufactured by Allen
Bradley, Phoenix Contact, Wieland, Square D, or equal. Power terminal
blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts, 30 amps.
Signal terminal blocks shall be single tier with a minimum rating of 600 volts,
20 amps.
2. Fused terminal blocks or miniature thermal circuit breaker terminal blocks
shall be supplied for protection and isolation of enclosed equipment, or as
specified in the Contract documents. Blown fuse indicators shall be
provided and/or tripped breaker status shall be clearly visible. Fused or
miniature thermal circuit breaker terminal blocks shall be provided for, but
not limited to each of the following:
a.
L:�
Each P�C module requiring external power
Each piece of equipment provided with a power supply (integral,
internal or external) with the exception of devices with internal fusing
plugged into a receptacle.
c. Terminals shall be marked with a black waterproof, permanent,
continuous marking strip. One side of each terminal shall be
reserved exclusively for field incoming conductors. Common
connections and jumpers required for internat wiring shall not be
made on the field side of the terminal.
WIRING
All wiring shall be bundled and run open or enclosed in vented plastic
wireway, as required. All conductors run open shall be bundled and bound
with nylon cable ties, at regular intervals, with intervals not to exceed 12
inches. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or
other movement. Care shall be taken to separate communication, network,
electronic signal, AC discrete signal, DC discrete signal and power wiring.
Wiring to equipment mounted on doors or where movement of the
equipment will take place, shall be installed in nylon spiral wrapping sheaths.
2. Wires shall be color coded as fotlows:
a. Equipment Ground - GREEN
b. 120 VAC Power Distribution - BLACK
c. 120 VAC Power Neutral - WHITE
d_ 120 VAC Control (Internally Powered) - RED
e. 120 VAC Control (Externally Powered) - YELLOW
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Eval & Design Section lVa
Instrumentation & Control - Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-6
'
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�_ �
�
�
L� J
�
��
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
Il
�l
�
F
f. 24 VAC Control - ORANGE
g. DC Power (+) - BLUE
h. DC Power (-) — BLUE/WHITE
i. DC Control - BLUE
j. Analog Signal (+) - BLACK
k. Analog Signal (-) - WHITE
3. All wiring shall comply with accepted standard instrumentation and electrical
practices. Field wiring for power, control and signal wires shall comply with
Division 16 of the specifications. For each pair of parallel terminal blocks,
the field wiring shall be between the blocks.
4. Internal panel wiring shall be as follows:
a. AC power wiring: 14 AWG minimum, stranded copper conductors,
THHN/THHW wire rated for 600 volts and 90 °C. For wiring carrying
more than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC.
b. AC control and dc power and control wiring: 16 AWG minimum,
stranded copper conductors, THHNlTHHW wire rated for 600 volts
and 90 °C.
c. Instrument signal wiring: 18 AWG stranded conductors, tinned
copper, twisted pair or triad, overall one hundred percent (100%)
aluminum foil shield with 20 AWG stranded drain wire, p�enum rated
300V 60°C FEP insulated wire with FEP jacket, equal to Belden
88760.
d. All stranded wire shall have a minimum of sixteen (16) strands,
except for drain wires.
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Provide a laminated black nameplate with beveled edges and 'h inch white
letters to identify each console, panel or cabinet on the front of the
enclosure.
2. Provide laminated, beveled edge, plastic legend plates and nameplates, with
1/4 inch letters, for each front panel mounted device as shown on the
Drawings. Legend plates and nameplates shall be the size as shown on the
Drawings. Color shall be black lettering on white background except
caution/waming nameplates which shall be white lettering on a red
background. Attach front panel nameplates with both a permanent adhesive
and stainless steel machine screws into tapped holes.
3. Tag all interior instruments and other components with engraved, laminated
plastic nameplates with 1/8 inch, minimum, lettering. Legends shall be
consistent with wiring and layout drawings. Nameplates shall be attached
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-7
�
with permanent adhesive to the panel, near the device or on the device itself
or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
4. Number and label each wire in the systems. Every unique wiring node shall
have its own individual unique number. Numbers shall be shown on all
submitted drawings. All wires shall be labeled at each termination and
junction of the wire and at 30 inch intervals along the wire. All multi-
conductor cables sf�all be labeled at each end and at 30-inch intervals with
CBL-XXX and also label each conductor at both ends. Labeling shall be self
laminating white/transparent self extinguishing vinyl strips (Brady DAT 7 292
or equal) with clear heat shrink tubing over the markers. Length shall be
sufficient to provide at least two and one-half (2 'h) wraps. All labels shall be
machine-printed with wire and/or cable numbers.
ACCESSORIES
Control operators such as pushbuttons (PB), selector switches (SS), and
pilot lights (PL) shall be Allen Bradley 800H, Square D Company Type SK or
equal. Control operators shall be 30.5 mm, round, heavy-duty, oil tight
NEMA 4X corrosion resistant.
2. Pushbuttons and selector switches shall be non-illuminated, spring release
type. Pushbuttons shall include a full guard. Panic stop/alarm pushbuttons
shall be red mushroom type with manual-putl release. Pilot lights shall be of
the proper control voltage, LED type (indoor) and lamp type (outdoor).
3. Control operators shall have legend plates as specified herein, indicated on
the Contract Drawings, or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Legend
plates shall be plastic, white field (background) with black lettering.
Engraved nameplates sha{I be securely fastened above each control
operator. If adequate space is not available, the nameplate shall be
mounted below the operator.
4. Control operators for all equipment shall be as specified herein and of the
same type and manufacturer unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Contract Drawings. Modifications to existing panels using control operators
and indicators of the same type and manufacturer shall be allowed with
Engineer's approval.
5. Where required to intertace befinreen motor control centers, equipment
controls, and control panels, interposing relays and associated control wiring
circuitry shall be furnished and installed to provide the monitoring and/or
control functions specified herein. Interposing relays shall be miniature type
with DPDT contacts rated a minimum 10 amp @ 120 VAC, push-tatest
button, and status indicator. Relay coils shall be 120/240 VAC or 24 VDC as
required. Relays shall be as manufactured by Idec, Square D, Omron,
Allen-Bradley or approved equal.
6. Digital Indicators shall be provided to indicate rates and readings in digital
format and true engineering units. Indicators shall accept a 4-20 mA input
signal and shall be programmable through the front panel to provide scaling,
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - Contro/ Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-8
'
�
�
�
i
�_
�
�
�
jl
�I
�
�
�
�
��
�
LJ
�
,
1
1
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�1
'
�
H
calibration, options and accessories.
red LED indication, 120 VAC power
Digital, Red Lion or approved equal.
POWER SUPPLIES
Units shall be 4 digit minimum with
Digital Indicators shall be Precision
1. Each control panel shall be provided with a minimum of one 24 VDC power
supply. Power supplies shall be enclosed and sized per the guidelines of
UL508 and UL508A. Power supplies shall be Phoenix Contact, Model
Quint-PS-X, or approved equal.
2. External PLC power supplies provided for loop and/or PLC power shall be
redundant and alarm to the PLC upon failure.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
1. Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be provided at the following
minimum locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
At any connections between AC power and electricat and electronic
equipment, including panels, assemblies and field mounted
instruments.
At both ends of all analog signal circuits that have any portion of the
circuit extending outside of a protecting building.
At both ends of all copper-based communications cables that extend
outside of a building.
At all specified spare analog inputs and outputs in PLCs and RTUs.
2. These protective devices shall be external to and installed in addition to
any protective devices built into the equipment. Power and signal
protection shall be installed in either in a NEMA 4X enclosure or in the
enclosure that houses the equipment to be protected.
3. All surge arrestors shall be mounted and wired per the manufacturer's
recommendations including local grounding for surge energy dissipation.
For surge suppressors use No. 8 cable for ground connection or install
suppressor directly on ground bus using grounding screw. Provide 1-inch
wide by 1/8-inch thick copper ground bus as a minimum.
4. Panel-mounted power circuit protectors shall be provided in all enclosures
powered by 120 VAC. The protector shall be a 3-stage hybrid, solid-state
power line protector with noise filtering, common mode and normal mode
suppression and nanosecond reaction time. The unit shall include a
replaceable fuse to remove the load (protected equipment) from the line if
the unit is either overloaded or the internal protection faits. TVSS devices
shall be DEHN 952 210 (DG M TN 150).
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design
� 0992-0205
�
Section IVa
lnstrumentation & Control - Control Enclosures
13130-9
5. Panel-mounted signal circuit protectors shall be made for mounting on a
terminal block rail. Each NSS shall include a moveable grounding link to
allow each signal cable shield to be individually grounded to the panel via
the mounting rail through the TVSS for that cable without the use of any
additional grounding wire or to be isolated from ground at the NSS. Each
mounting rail shall be grounded to the panel by the use of rail mounting
screws at approximately one-foot intervals_ Protection shall be from line to
line and from each line to ground. Protection shall also be from shield to
ground where the shield is not grounded at the protector. Each NSS shall
have the ability to protect against surge currents greater than 10,000
amperes. Each TVSS shall add no more than 22 ohms per signal wire to
the total signal loop resistance of the analog signal loop in which it is
installed. TVSSs shall not introduce error-producing ground loop currents
into the instrumentation signal circuits. NSS devices shall be 919 921
(DCO RK ME 24).
6. Signal circuit NSS for 2-wire field instruments shall be a conduit
connected/pipe nipple type and shall have characteristics equal to the panel
mounted devices. Units shall be mounted to a transmitter conduit entry point
where available. When not available or practical, then these devices shall
be mounted in NEMA 4X enclosures located at the field devices. TVSS
devices shall be 929 921(DPI ME 24 N A2G)
7. Signal circuit TVSS for 4-wire field instruments shall be a separate enclosure
unit capable of providing protection on both the power and signal side. The
unit shall contain the characteristics of the line power protector and signal
circuit protectors discussed above. Units shall be enclosed in a
manufacturer assembled NEMA 4X polycarbonate enclosure with a clear
polycarbonate cover. TVSS devices shall be EDCO SLAC-12036, Phoenix
Contact or approved equal.
8. TVSS devices antenna cable signal protection shall be an in-line panel
mount type unit rated for 50 Ohms and with dc blocking. Unit shall be rated
for the appropriate frequency range and have an insertion loss of 0.1 dB.
TVSS device shall be a DEHN 929 045 (DGA AG N).
9. TVSS device specifications and ratings for signal or communications types
not defined herein shall be as specified elsewhere or of a type
recommended by the manufacturer of the device being protected. TVSS
devices shall be DEHN, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REQUIREMENTS:
I�
�
�
�
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
��
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, refer to Section 13100 - �
Instrumentation and Control, General Requirements.
B. Floor mounted enclosures shall be installed on 1/4 inch thick rubber type pads.
These pads shall completely cover the area of the base that is against the floor.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval 8 Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Contro/ - Contro/ Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-10
�
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
' 3.2
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
��
�
C. Keep enclosures clean at all times. Keep enclosures doors closed except when
actually working in the enclosure. Protect all equipment during installation,
including hole punching for conduit connection. Remove all filings and thread
cuttings from enclosures. Careful attention must be paid to provide installations
which are both functional and esthetically acceptable.
D. All conduits used in conjunction with control panels or instrumentation of any kind
shall be sealed using a suitabte duct-sealing compound to minimize the possible
damage caused by vapors or wetness. It shall be the responsibility of the CSI to
verify that this is accomplished early in the project, so that corrosion damage
does not occur during the time of construction.
E. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a periodic written report detaiting
construction progress. This report shall include specific tabulations of equipment
on which construction/installation has been completed.
F. Equipment shall be located so that it is accessible for operation and
maintenance. The CSI shalt examine the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings
for various items of equipment in order to determine the best arrangement for the
work as a whole and shall supervise the installation of all equipment.
WIRING AND GROUNDING
A. The following wiring practice guidelines shall be used in order to minimize ground
loops, minimize the effects of electromagnetic interFerence/radio frequency
interference (EMI/RFI) and to provide maximum practical immunity from damage
resulting from lightning-induced transients.
B. Common wires or conductors shall not be utilized (either within panels or external to
panels, or for grounding of field devices) for signal shielding, signal grounding, or
safety grounds.
C. Exposed wire lengths extending from within shielded signal cables shall be
minimized to reduce pick-up of EMI/RFI by signal circuits. Exposed lengths of less
than one inch is preferred with a maximum exposed length of finro inches only
permitted where necessary. No splicing of signal wires shall be permitted.
D. All signal wiring shall be shielded, both within panels and external to panels. Unless
otherwise specified, all signal wiring shall be No. 16 AWG stranded tinned two-
conductor finristed pair with 100 percent coverage of aluminized Mylar or aluminized
polyester shield and tinned copper drain wire.
E. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source
to destination, and grounded at one end only. In general, grounding of signal cable
shields shall be done at the control panel end. No signa! cable shall share a
common cable shield grounding wire with any other signal cable or other circuit.
The exposed length of cable shield grounding wires shall not exceed two inches
prior to termination with less than one-inch maximum length preferred.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design
0992-0205
Section IVa
Instrumentation & Confro/ - Contro/ Enclosures
13130-11
F. All outdoor instruments and all outdoor enclosures shall be grounded using the
practice defined in Section 800.40 of the National Electric Code.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — Control Enclosures
0992-0205 13130-12
r�
�
�
�
�
�
,
'
�
�
LJ
SECTION 13140 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL, SCADA
HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all
equipment required to provide a complete and operable Supervisory Control and
Data Acquisition (SCADA) system, as specified herein and as shown on the
Contract Drawings, even if each needed item is not specifically specifled or shown.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 13100 - Instrumentation and Control, General
Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01340 - Shop Drawings,
Project Data and Samples and as specified in Section 13100 - Instrumentation and
Control, General Requirements. In addition, the following specific submittals items
shall be provided.
1
PART2-PRODUCTS
Battery Backup and UPS sizing calculations
� 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The SCADA hardware configuration as specified herein, as specified in related
� sections and as shown on the contract drawings depicts overall system
configuration requirements. Unless otherwise specified, designs which vary from
this concept will be rejected.
�
,
�
�i
�:�
C.
All discrete and analog data acquisition, pre-processing, storage and process
control functions shall be performed at the PLC level.
PLC-to-PLC communication protocols shall be Ethernet based.
2.2 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS
A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 13100 -
Instrumentation and Control, General Requirements, and as specified for each
equipment item. In addition, the following items shall be provided.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
� 0992-0205
,
Instrumentation & Control - SCADA Hardware
13140-1
1
2
3
4
One (1) of each type of CPU module for PLC equipment furnished under this
Contract.
One (1) of each type of communication module for PLC equipment furnished
under this Contract.
Two (2) of each type of inpuUoutput module for PLC equipmenf furnished
under this Contract.
Two (2) of each type and size of PLC and equipment power supply furnished
under this Contract.
2.3 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
A. Refer to specification section 13130 — Instrumentation and Control, Control
Enclosures for TVSS requirements.
B. Provide NSS protection for all specified spare analog inputs and autputs.
2.4 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES (UPS)
A. UPS units shall be provided for new PLC control panels as specified herein or
shown elsewhere within the Contract Documents. �
B. UPS units for locations without Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) and generators
shall be sized to provide a minimum of two (2) hours backup time. At sites with ATS
and generators, UPS units shall be sized for a minimum of fifteen (15) minutes.
Each UPS shall consist of a free standing UPS module and battery modules as
required to meet backup run time requirements.
�
I�:
UPS units provided for PLCs shall be provided with a dry contact output to alarm on
UPS trouble or failure. This fail output shall be wired into the PLC I/O to represent
UPS status:
Where tocated in a control or PLC enclosure, the UPS shall be located at the bottom
of the enclosure but mounted on a raised shelf or platform.
,
r
LJ
r
E. Each UPS shall be sized to match the maximum power requirements of the
associated digita� equipment, control panel power supplies and accessories plus �
twenty (20) percent spare capacity. Upon loss of the AC supply, the inverter shall
continue to supply normal power to the device, drawing DC from the batteries.
F. Each UPS shall meet the following requirements:
1. Input voltage shall be 117 VAC, single phase, 60 Hz.
2. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus five percent (+/-5%) for line and
load changes.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control — SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-2
�
�
�
�
LJ
�
�
' 2.5
'
'
'
,
r
,
�
�
u
'
�
,
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The output frequency shall be phase-locked to the input AC line on AC
operation and shall be 60 hertz (+/-0.5%) when on battery operation.
The batteries shall be of the sealed, lead acid or lead calcium gelled
electrolyte type, suitable for high temperatures.
Sound absorbing enclosure.
EMI/RF noise filtering.
Surge protection shall be provided on the AC input circuit, which shall have a
UL TVSS clamping voltage rating of 400 V with a<5 ns response time.
Adjustment allowed to prevent UPS from going offline when on a standby
generator supplied power source.
G. UPS systems shal� be APC, Powerware Ferrups, SOLA, Allen Bradley or approved
equal.
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC), GENERAL
A. The CSI shall furnish programmable controllers (PLCs) equipment as specified
herein and as shown on the Drawings. PLCs shall be provided complete with rack,
power supply, InpuUOutput (I/O) modules, special function cards, instructions,
memory, inpuUoutput capacity and appurtenances to provide all features and
functions as described herein. PLC I/O cards may be supplied by third party
vendors if approved by the PLC manufacturer and the Owner. No substitutions will
be permitted.
B. All components of the PLC system shall be of the same manufacturer; who shall
have fully tested units similar to those being furnished, in an industrial environment
with associated electrical noise. The PLC system shall have been tested to meet
the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2-230 (Arc Test) and IEEE C37.90.1
(SWC). The processing unit shall perform the operations functionally described
herein, based on the program stored in memory and the status of the inputs and
outputs.
C. The programmable controller shall be designed to operate in an industrial
environment. The PLC shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°-60°C
and a relative humidity of five to ninety-five percent (5% - 95%), non-condensing.
The PLC shall operate on supply voltages of 90-132 VAC at 47-63 Hz, or 24 VDC if
provided with a battery backup system. Overcurrent and undervoltage protection
shall be provided on the power supply.
D. System configuration shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. PLC types and
modules shall be designated on the system block diagram and correspond to the
specifications herein. Only a single type of processor shall be supplied for all PLCs
of a designated type. Memory, processor and PLC type shall be adequate for all
control functions specified. Memory backup shall be provided during loss of power
for the configuration, logic program and current operating parameters/addresses.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-3
E. The processor and its associated memory shall be enclosed in a modular enclosure.
A multiple-position selector switch or equivalent shalf be used to select processor
operating mode. LED-type indicating lights shall be provided to indicate processor,
memory and battery status. Errors in memory shall be recognized, and shall
activate the memory error indicating lights. The PLC processor shall monitor the
internal operation of the PLC for failure, and provide an alarm. Memory shall consist
of battery-backed RAM or EEPROM, which shall retain the control program for at
least one (1) year, in the event of power loss. Visual indication shall be provided if
battery charge is insufficient to maintain the program in RAM memory for at least
two (2) weeks.
F. The instruction set for the PLC shall include the following, as a minimum.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Relay type instructions
Counter and timer instructions
Comparison instructions (equal, greater than, limit tests, etc.)
Integer, long integer and floating point mathematical instructions
Advanced math and trigonometric functions
Matrix and array instructions
Logical instructions (and, not, or, etc.)
Bit modification, moving and shift instructions
Diagnostic instructions
Sequencer instructions
Program control instructions (jump, goto, subroutine, etc.)
PID control loops
Block read and write capability
Master and slave communications capabilities
Immediate I/O and communications update instructions
Real-time clock and date
G. In addition to a port for communications as shown on the Contract Documents,
additional communication ports shall be provided for any other devices as required
(i.e., operator interface unit, connection to a notebook computer for programming
and configuration.)
,
'
,
u
�
,
,
��
�
,
,
r
,
�
H. New PLCs as specified or shown in the Contract Documents shall meet but not be '
limited to the following requirements:
1. One (1) 10/100 Mbps Ethernet IP Port, one (1) RS-232 seriaf port
2. I/O Module Expansion Capacity: Up to thirty (30) 1769 modules, not to
include processor or power supply
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Contro/- SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13?40-4
�
,
�
'
�
r
,
3.
4
5
One power supply per eight (8) I/O modules with up to four modules to left
and right of the power supply.
I/O modules shall be of a dedicated type, i.e. AI, AO, DI, DO. No mixed I/O
modules shall be acceptable.
1.5 MB Memory with compact flash card for memory backup.
PLCs shall be Allen Bradley CompactLogix (1769-L35E). In order to match existing
installations and spare parts requirements, no consideration will be provided for `Or
Equal' equipment.
PLC INPUT/OUTPUTS
A. CompactLogix PLC input/output hardware shall be modular DIN-rail mounted units
mechanically locked together with a tongue and groove design. Modules hall
include an integral communications bus that is connected from module to module
with a moveable bus connector. Modules shall be placed to ensure adequate power
supply voltage to all modules with a maximum of four (4) modules on each side of
the power supply.
B. Modifications for existing Allen Bradley SLC 500 PLCs: A. InpuUoutput hardware
shall be plug-in modules in associated I/O rack assemblies. The PLC power supply
shalf be evaluated to verify adequate supply for the existing configuration plus
addition of modules.
C. Each PLC within an enclosure shall handle the required number of process inputs
and outputs, plus a minimum of ten percent (10%) pre-wired spares for each I/O
type furnished except discrete inputs which shall have a minimum of fin►enty percent
(20°/o) pre-wired spares, plus a minimum of finrenty percent (20%) spare I/O
expansion space for the addition of future circuit cards or modules.
f�7
E
PLC inpuUoutput systems and processing modules shall be of the same model
series.
Discrete inputs (DI) shall be 120 VAC (integral to PLC), developed from dry field
contacts. CompactLogix —1769-IA16, SLC 500 —1746-IA16
F. Discrete outputs (DO) shall be 120 VAC / 28 VDC 5A dry contacts. Output contacts
may be powered from the field equipment or powered from 24 VDC / 120 VAC
sourced from PLC control panel's power system, as required to interface with field
equipment. Outputs to solenoid valves shall be 120 VAC, powered from the PLC or
control panel unless specified or shown otherwise. Provide interposing relays as
specified in Section 13130 as required to meet dry contact rating. CompactLogix —
1769-OW16, SLC-500 —1746-OW16
G. Analog input (AI) circuits shall be isolated, 15-bit (minimum) resolution type. Analog
input hardware shalt be provided as required for all types of analog inputs being
transmitted to the PLC. In general, analog input modules shall be capable of
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-5
receiving 4-20 mA signals. Each input circuit shall have optical isolation to protect
the equipment against high voltage transients. CompactLogix —1769-IF4, SLC-500
—1746-N18
H. Analog outputs (AO) shall be coordinated with the receivers but shall generally be
isolated 24 VDC, 4-20mA outputs powered from the PLC. Each output circuit shall
have optical isofation to protect the equipment against high voltage transients.
CompactLogix —1769-OF4C1, SLC-500 —1746-N081
InpuUoutput modules shall be configured for ease of wiring and maintenance. The
modules shall be connected to wiring arms which can be disconnected to permit
removal of a module without disturbing field wiring. Covers shall be provided to
prevent operator personnel from inadvertently touching the terminals. The process
intertace modules shall be provided with screw-type terminal blocks with barriers
between adjacent terminals for connection of field inputs. Terminals shall be
suitable for accepting up to and including No. #22...#12 AWG (0.2...4 mm2) wire.
J. Output failure mode shall be selecfable so that upon station or communication
system failure, all outputs shall be placed in the non-conducting mode or remain as
they were prior to failure. Light-emitting diodes shall be provided for status
indication for each input and output point.
K. Signal and control circuitry to individual inpuUoutput boards shall be arranged such
that board failure shall not disable more than one half ('/z) of the control toops within
any group of controlled equipment (e.g., one pump out of a group of three pumps,
finro pumps out of four, etc.). Where possible, individual control loops and
equipment shall be assigned to individual boards such that failure of the board will
disable only one (1) loop or piece of equipment.
L. External power supplies shall be provided with the PLC as required to meet
specified installed I/O power requirements, plus spares. Power supplies shall be
modular units, shall be fulty redundant and shall alarm to the PLC upon failure.
Power supplies shall have a line regulation of 0.05% and meet the environmental
and power requirements specified herein.
'
�� 1
,
�
�
II
u
�
'
'
i
'
M. Control circuits and signals entering hazardous areas shall be provided with �
intrinsically safe barriers meeting the requirements of the NEC and UL698.
2.7 FIBER OPTIC MEDIA CONVERTER:
A.
B.
C.
Industrial fiber optic media converter for converting between fiber optic and copper
cable. Refer to the design drawings for specific instances of utilization.
The converter shall include one (1) twisted pair RJ-45 port 10/100 Mbps and one
1300 nm SC type connector to match with unmanaged Ethernet switches.
Unit shall be 24 VDC powered and DIN rail mounted.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
lnstrumentation & Control — SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-6
'
lJ
�
�
C�
'
l�
'
r
'
,
,
��
'
,
'
'
�
,
D. Unit shall be: Phoenix Contact, FL MC 10/100BASE-T/FO G1300 (27 08 16 4).
2.8 STANDARD UNMANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH
A. Industrial fiber optic Ethernet switches for use within control panels for
communications on the facility SCADA network. Refer to the design drawings for
specific instances of utilization.
B. The switch shall be a combination fiber optic/copper Ethernet network unit.
C. The switch shall include six (6) twisted pair RJ-45 ports with 10/100 MBps
autonegotiation capability.
D. The unit shall include iwo (2) 1300 nm multimode SC fiber optic ports.
E. Switches shall use 24 VDC power with redundant power terminals available.
F. Unit shall be: Phoenix Contact, FL SWITCH SF 6TX/2FX (28 32 93 3).
2.9 MODULAR ETHERNET SWITCH
A. Industrial fiber optic Ethernet switches for use within control panels for
communications on the facility SCADA network. Refer to the design drawings for
specific instances of utilization.
B. The switch shall be a combination fiber optic/copper Ethernet network unit.
C. The switch shall include a base unit with power supply and support expansion
modules for finristed pair RJ-45 ports or 1300 nm multimode fiber optic ports.
D. Expansion modules shall be provided to support the communications requirements
as noted on the system drawings.
E. Twisted pair RJ-45 ports shall support 10/100 MBps communications with
autonegotiation capability.
D. Switches shall use 24 VDC power.
F. Unit shall be: Allen Bradley Stratix 8000 series switch with associated expansion
modules.
2.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
� A. Fiber Optic Cables
' 1. Fiber optic cables shall be heavy-duty, multi-fiber breakout style cable,
designed for high tensile strength and durability, and suitable for installation
'
'
'
Marshall Sfreet Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Contro/- SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-7
in aerial runs and for long pulls through conduit. Cables shall be specially
designed for outdoor environments.
2. Cables shall be suitable for installation with a rated pull strength capability in
excess of 340 Ibs. The CSI shall use procedures, measurements and
precautions so that no more than 50% of the maximum rated pull strength
capability of the cable is ever applied during any point in the installation
procedure.
3. Cables shall be suitable for installation with a minimum bend radius of three
(3) inches or less. The CSI shall use procedures, measurements and
precautions so that the cable is never exposed to a bend radius of less than
six (6) inches during any point in the installation procedure.
4. Jacketing shall be polyethylene, with high abrasion and cut-through
resistance. Outer jacket shall be UV stabilized for outdoor use and overall
ruggedness. Jackets shall have low friction resistance and high strength so
that long pulls in conduit will not cause damage.
5.
�
7
0
�']
Fibers shall have a 62.5-micron eore. Multimode fiber core shall utilize low
loss fiber, with a typical maximum attenuation of 3.0 dB/km.
Each sub-channel shall be tight buffered with a 2.5 mm PVC jacket, and
internal strength fibers. Subchannels shall be breakout style, for ease of
handling.
Fibers shall be hard silica clad, with a thin hard polymer optical cladding,
over a pure fused silica core. Cables shall have Kevlar ripcord and all
subchannels shall be color-coded.
Cables shall have a minimum of six (6) fibers or additional fibers as shown in
the contract drawings.
Fiber-optic cables shall be manufactured by Corning, Belden, 3-Com or
approved equal.
B. Fiber Optic Patch Panels
'
�
,
'
'
�
'
'
,
'
�
1. Fiber Optic cables shall always be terminated at protected fiber optic patch '
panels, which shall be designed to protect the terminated cables and provide
a fiber-termination terminal strip for connections to local equipment.
2. Each control panel or termination area which connects to fiber optic cables
shall be provided with one or more fiber optic patch panels, with sufficient
termination points for every fiber in every cable. The installer shall
terminate, test and secure every fiber within every cable, even if the
additional fibers are designated as "spare" or "future by others".
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Eval & Design Section IVa
Instrumentation & Control - SCADA Hardware
0992-0205 13140-8
��
,
�
,
,
�
'
�
3
4
5
Patch panel termination connectors shall be SC or ST-style. Connectors are
to remain individually booted until used.
Where fibers are to be connected to local equipment, a pre-terminated fiber
jumper of suitable length shall be provided to make the connection between
the patch panel and the equipment.
Patch panels shall be Corning WIC wall mount interconnect panels with
CCH housing panel adapters or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 REQUIREMENTS:
,
'
'
'
1. Fiber optic cables shall be installed in one section without splicing from one
designated termination point to the next.
2. The installed cable shall be terminated on all fibers. Fibers shall be tested
individually with all strands providing full light transmission. If any fiber within
the cable fails the testing criteria, the entire cable shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3. Cables shall be tested under actual loading conditions using a light source
and calibrated digital power meter. The Power Budget of the fiber with
connectors shall be calculated and compared to actual measurements. Any
significant visual defect or power loss in excess of 2 dB shall be cause for a
failed test.
, 4. A written report shall be prepared for each fiber test, troubleshooting or
maintenance event. The report shall identify the fiber serviced or tested,
define the procedure, describe the results of the testing inctuding
, comparison to the calculated Power Budget and provide conclusions. The
report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
�
�
�
�
'
5. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, refer to Section
13100 - Instrumentation and Controls, General Requirements.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Eval & Design
� 0992-0205
,
Section IVa
Instrumentation 8 Control - SCADA Hardware
13140-9
,
'
'
� _I
,
'
��
�
,
,
�
,
�
��
'
'
'
,
�
SECTION 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS - GENERAL STATEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all pipe and
pipe fittings as indicated in accordance with provisions of Contract
Documents.
Q
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation.
4. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
Related specification sections include but are not limited:
1. 15062 — Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
2. 15064 — Plastic Pipe
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Verify on shop drawings dimensions, schedule of pipe, linings, coatings, fittings,
hangers, supports, and miscellaneous appurtenances. When special fittings are
necessary, verify locations of items and include complete details.
C. Yard piping drawings. Submit scaled drawings showing locations and dimensions
to and from fittings, valves, structures, gates, and related appurtenances. Provide
scaled drawings to a minimum scale of 1/8-inch equals 1-foot. Provide details to
minimum scale of 1/8-inch equals 1-foot. Information shall include but not
necessarily be limited to:
1. Dimensions of piping lengths.
2. Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings.
3. Acknowledgment of bury depth requirements.
4. Details of fittings, tapping locations, thrust blocks, restrained joint
segments, harnessed joint segments, hydrants, and related
appurtenances.
5. Line slopes and vents.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-1
D. Building piping diagrams. Submit sealed drawings showing locations and
dimensions of all piping inside structures. Show all pipeline-mounted devices,
connections to equipment, hangers and supports, anchors, and related
appurtenances. Information shall include but not be limited to the following:
E
F
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Dimensions of piping and end connections.
Invert of centerline dimensions.
Location and type of pipe supports and anchors.
Locations of valves and valve operator type.
Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible
expansion joints, connections to equipment, and related appurtenances.
Acknowledge valve and equipment tag numbers and instrument tag
numbers.
Show provisions for expansion and contraction.
Show line slopes and air release vents.
Include on fabrication drawings location of jointed sections to permit maintenance
of connected equipment and to permit removal of connected equipment without
disturbance of main piping system.
Copies of any manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling,
delivery, storage and installation.
G. As work progresses and again when work is complete, submit "As-Recorded"
drawings of piping systems in project including project items and pre-existing
items. Identify complete location, elevations, description of piping systems.
Relate piping systems to identified structures and appurtenances. Submit four (4)
copies.
H. Submit written verification of required pressure testing.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PIPING SYSTEMS
'
'
�
'
L J�
�
'
�
'
,
'
'
�
'
A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or drawing schedule, piping system '
materials, fittings, and appurtenances are subject to requirements of specific
technical specifications and shall be as shown on the following piping schedule.
u
'
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa �
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - Ceneral Statement
0992-0205 15060-2
C�'
GENERAL PIPING SCHEDULE
Size Range Above or
Service Category Inches Below round Piping System
Above ground — AWWA C115 and
Influent Raw VWV, C151 Class 53 ductile iron, Protecto
Sludge, Dewatering, 401 ceramic epoxy lining, flanged,
Overflow, Filter Feed, 4 to 30 Above AVWVA C110 and C111 flanged
Backwash and Scum ductile iron fittings, Protecto 401
ceramic epoxy lining
Below ground — AVWVA C150 and
Influent Raw V1Ml, C151 ductile iron pipe, push on or
Sludge, Dewatering, 4 to 12 Below mechanical joints, Protecto 401
Overflow, Backwash and ceramic epoxy lined, 350 psi
Scum pressure class
Influent Raw VWV, Below ground — AVWVA C153
Sludge, Dewatering, Below compact ductile iron fittings,
Overflow, Filter Feed, 4 to 12 Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined,
Backwash and Scum mechanical joints, 350 psi working
ressure
Betow ground — A1NWA C150 and
C151 ductile iron pipe, Protecto 401
ceramic epoxy lined, push-on joints,
Influent Raw VWV 30 Below 150 psi pressure class, AVWVA
C110 and C111 ductile iron fittings,
Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined,
mechanical joint, 250 psi working
ressure.
Potable Water, EFW, �/2 to 2 Above Schedule 80 PVC
Chemical
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY, INSPECTION AND STORAGE
A. Inspect materials thoroughly upon arrival. Remove damaged or rejected
materials from site.
B. Observe manufacturer's directions for delivery and storage of materials and
accessories.
C. Store materials on-site in enclosures or under protective coverings above ground
to keep clean and dry.
3.2 HANDLING OF PIPE
A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by
manufacturer. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids in
contact with coated pipe is not permitted.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-3
B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes. If
repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material
immediately.
C. Erect piping to accurate lines and grades and support as required on drawings or
described in specifications. When temporary supports are used, ensure that
sufficient rigidity is provided to prevent shifting or distortion of pipe. Install
expansion devices as necessary to ailow expansion and contraction movements.
3.3 PIPING - GENERAL
A. Minimum bury. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, provide a minimum of
two (2) feet, six (6) inches earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and
appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing.
3.4 PIPING WITHIN BUILDINGS, STRUCTURES AND UNITS
A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on drawings.
Alignment of piping smaller than 4-inches may not be shown. However, install
according to drawing intent and with ample clearance and allowance for:
1
2
3
4
Expansion and contraction.
Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving
equipment.
Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles.
Install vertical piping plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with
structure walls.
B. Use methods of piping support as shown on the drawings. Where pipes run
parallel and as same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and supported
from common trapeze-type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size
as specified for total supported weight. The pipe in the group requiring the least
maximum distance between supports shall set the distance between trapeze
hangers.
C. Locate and size sleeves required for piping system. Arrange for chases,
recesses, inserts, or anchors at proper elevation and location.
D. Install service piping to provide every plumbing fixture and equipment requiring
potable water with suitable supply and soil or waste and vent connection as
required by code. Consult manufacturer's data and large scale details of rooms
containing plumbing fixtures before roughing in piping. Plug or cap piping
immediately after installation.
E
F
Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be allowed
unless specifically approved.
Provide drain pans and piping from items of equipment where condensation may
occur. Run drain piping to nearest floor drain or rainwater downspout.
C�
�
I'
��
'
�
'
'
,
�
'
r
r
,
�
�
�
'
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa '
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - Generat Statement
0992-0205 ?5060-4
,
LJ
,
�
'
'
'
��
,
'
'
,
�
�
�
'
,
'
G
H
Condensate drain piping shall generally be 1-inch except where otherwise
indicated.
Soil, waste, vent and rainwater piping installation:
Install horizontal soil or waste lines with fall to produce flow rate of 2
ft./sec or 1/8-inch/foot. Hold as close to construction as possible to
maintain maximum headroom. Make changes of direction with 1/8 bends
and junctions with wye fittings. Use short wye fittings in vertical pipe only.
Install handhold test tee at base of each stack. Install cleanouts at dead
ends, at changes of direction, and at 50-foot intervals on horizontal runs.
Where cleanouts occur in concealed spaces, provide with extensions to
floors above or to wall as required.
2. Run vent stack parallel to each soil or waste stack to receive branch
vents from fixtures. Each vent stack shall originate from soil or waste pipe
at its base. Where possible, combine soil, waste, or vent stacks before
passing through roof so as to minimize roof openings. Offset pipes
running close to exterior walls away from such walls before passing
through roof to permit proper flashing. Provide pipes passing through
roofs with cast iron increases minimum of 12-inches below roof one size
larger than pipe but in no case less than 4-inches. Terminate each vent
with approved frostproof jacket.
3. Provide each vent pipe passing through roof with 4-Ib sheet lead flashing
consisting of 18 x 18-inch base with tubular vertical sleeve surrounding
pipe with 1-inch minimum spacing and turning in 2-inches at top. Provide
gasket seal between top and lead sleeve.
4
5
Carry vent stacks 4-inches and larger full size through roof. Extend vent
stacks at least 12-inches above roofing.
Provide each roof drain with 4-Ib sheet lead flashing 36 x 36-inch square
clamped under flashing ring of drain.
Potable or service water piping installation:
Install drain tees with capped nipples of PIS brass 3-inches long at low
points. If low points occur in concealed piping, provide approved flush
access panel. These drains are not shown on drawings.
2. Slope water lines down to drain points not less than 1-inch in 60-feet.
3. Wherever threaded piping is installed, provide clean-cut tapered threads
with ends thoroughly reamed after cutting to remove burrs. Pipe joint
cement permitted only on external threads. For screwed nipples for
connections to flush valves, lavatory supplies, and other equipment with
threaded connections use iron, copper, or brass pipe.
4. Install ball, butterfly, gate, check, and plug valves where indicated or
required to adequately service all parts of system and equipment. Unless
otherwise indicated, install valves on each branch serving restroom.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Design Secfion IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-5
'
Install valve on inlet and outlet connections of heat exchangers and on
other equipment connected to water lines.
5. Install union between valves and connections to each piece of equipment
and install sufficient number of unions throughout piping system to
facilitate installation and servicing. On copper pipe line, install wrought
copper solder-joint copper to copper unions for fines 2-inches and
smaller; for lines 2-1/2-inches and over, install brass flange unions.
6. Construct and equip plumbing fixtures and equipment with anti-siphon
devices as to entirely eliminate any danger of siphoning waste material
into potable water supply system.
'
�
�
'
,
7. Where exposed pipes 6-inches in size and smaller pass through floors,
finished walls, or finished ceilings, fit with nickel or chrome-plated plates '
large enough to close hole completely around pipes. Secure plates to
pipe by set screw in approved manner.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Size supply branches to individual fixtures as scheduled or indicated on
drawings.
Install piping so as to be free to expand with proper loops, anchors, and
joints with injury to system or structure.
Provide branches to wall hydrants or hose bibbs in exterior location with
interior shutoff and drain valves.
Provide approved type vacuum breaker installations indicated or as
required by Code.
3.5 PIPING OUTSIDE BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES
I_1
L:3
Install piping as shown on drawings with ample clearance and allowance for
expansion or contraction.
Install flexible joint within two (2) feet of point where pipe enters or leaves
structure. Provide balance of piping with standard laying lengths and in
accordance with drawings.
3.6 PIPE INTERSECTIONS WITH STRUCTURES AND UNITS
�J
r
�
��I
__J
'
r
�
A. Enter and exit through structure walls by using wall seals specified or as shown �
on drawings.
3.7 EQUIPMENT PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the opposite
end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform gasket pressure at connection
or would cause unnecessary stresses to be transmitted to equipment flanges.
Where push-on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, final positioning
of push-on joints shall not be made until flange joints have been tightened
without strain.
Marshall Sfreet Salsnes FilterDesign Section IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-6
L�
��
u
,
,
r
'
:?
C
Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform gasket
compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening torque in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
Support and match flange face to uniform contact over their entire face area prior
to installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment connecting
flange.
D. Permit piping connecting to equipment to move freely in directions parallel to
longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened.
Align, levef, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of
connecting piping. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but
not before initial fitting and alignment. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of
alignment, assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of
four (4) bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange
bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment
connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install flange bolts, and make
equipment connection.
E.
F
Provide utility connections to equipment shown on drawings, scheduled or
specified.
Obtain rough-in data from approved shop drawings on equipment. Obtain rough-
in data for relocating existing equipment and coordinate with Owner.
G. Unless otherwise specified, make piping connections to equipment, including but
not limited to installation of brass and fittings, strainers, pressure-reducing
valves, flow control valves, and relief valves provided with or as an integral part
of equipment.
H. Furnish and install sinks, brass, fittings, strainers, pressure-reducing valves, flow
control valves, pressure relief valves, and shock absorbers which are not
specified to be provided with or an integral part of equipment.
For each potable or service water supply piping connection to equipment, furnish
and instafl union and gate or angle valve. Minimum size to be 1/2-inch.
Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to equipment if
waste is connected directly to building sewer system. Size trap as required by
Plumbing Code.
' K. Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain fittings, key stops,
"P" traps, miscellaneous traps, and miscellaneous brass through wall or floor and
cap and protect until such time when tater instaltation is performed. Run piping
' mains and branches in laboratory benches, built-in counters, and cabinet work if
acceptable to Construction Manager.
' 3.8
,
ANCHORAGE AND BLOCKING
A. Block, anchor, or harness exposed piping subjected to internal pressure, in which
mechanical, push-on, flexible, or similar joints are installed to prevent separation
ofjoints.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-7
�_I
B. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other acceptable means
for preventing movement of piping caused by internal pressure in buried piping
tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends.
C. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earth
wall. Concrete btocks shall not cover pipe joints. Provide bearing area of
concrete in accordance with drawing detail. In event that adequate support
cannot be achieved against undisturbed soil, install restrained piping joints.
'
��
�
�
D. Provide reaction blocking, anchorages, or other supports for fittings as shown on
drawings for piping installed in fills, unstable ground, above grade, or exposed �
within structures.
3.9 CLEANING
A. General:
Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. Maintain pipe
in clean condition during installation.
2. Before jointing pipe, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and
then properly dress and make joint.
Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal
cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the
system.
4. At completion of work and prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean work
installed under these specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe,
valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have
accumulated by operation of system, from testing or from other causes.
Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building,
its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system,
without cost to Owner.
3.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. General:
Upon completion of piping, but prior to application of insulation on
exposed piping, test all piping systems. Utilize pressures, media and
pressure test duration at specified on piping specification sheets. Isolate
equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test
conditions. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and
calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates.
Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper
half of the gage's range. Notify the Engineer 24 hours prior to each test.
2. Unless otherwise specified, completely assembie and test new piping
systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems.
MarshaU Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-8
�
�
'
�
'
,
'
�
,
,
�
'
�
'
'
�
I_I
�
�
�
3.
4.
5
Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing
to Engineer prior to final acceptance.
Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in
connection with the tests and inspections.
Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of
leaks and any necessary retesting and re-examination.
3.11 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES
A. Furnish exact location of buried utilities encountered and any below grade
structures. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found
property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants,
and related fixed structures. Include such information as location, elevation,
coverage, supports, and additional pertinent information which will be required by
future contractors for replacement servicing, or adjacent construction around any
buried facility.
B. tncorporate information to "As-Recorded" drawings.
, 3.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
�
l. J
,
'
'
'
�
�
J
'
A. Insulating joints. Provide insulating joints where dissimilar metals are joined
together and where specifically indicated on drawings. Type of joint shall be as
detailed and in accordance with the following requirements:
0
1
�
Insulating flanges. Provide each unit to consist of flat-faced rubber
gaskets.
Insulating unions. Provide "dielectric" union by Epco or equal.
3. Insulating couplings. When joining larger diameter dissimilar metal pipe,
use insulating coupling equal to Rockwell No. 416, Dresser Style 39, or
equal. When pipes have different outside diameters, use insulating
reducing couplings equal to Rockwell No. 417, Dresser Style 39-62, or
equal.
Dirt strainers:
1. Provide Y-type strainers to locations shown on drawings and/or
scheduled.
2. Furnish composition bronze strainers rated for 150 psi working pressure
at 450°F. Provide a 20-mesh monel screen. Install a threaded bronze
plug in the blowoff outlet. Furnish threaded NPT end connections.
3. Subject to compliance with these specifications, furnish Mueller No. 351
strainers or equal.
C. Welding:
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-9
'
]
�
1. Have each welding operator affix an assigned symbol to ali his welds. '
Mark each longitudinal joint at the extent of each operator's welding. Mark
each circumferential joint, nozzle, or other weld in two places 180°F apart.
2. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined �
in Section 9 of the ASME other codes and requirements per local building
and utility requirements.
3. Have all welds conform to highest industrial practice in accordance with
ANSI 631.3 and ANSI B31.1 or other codes and requirements per local
building and utility requirements.
Protective coatings and linings:
1. Where coatings, linings, paint, tests and other items qualified in
applications of service are stated, pipe and fittings shall be included in
referenced conditions.
2. Where specified, galvanize surface in accordance with hot-dip method
using any grade of zinc acceptable to ASTM B6.
3. Where specified, field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09900.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa '
Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General Statement
0992-0205 15060-10
'
'
SECTION 15062 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
1
'
�
r
�
A. Install within the project site all materials and incidentals including flanged joint,
mechanical joint, push-on joint, and restrained joint ductile iron pipe and/or
ductile iron restrained, flanged, or mechanical joint fittings for wastewater and
water mains, complete, as shown on the project drawings.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate all deliveries with the related Vendor(s) in a
manner not to impede construction on individual projects.
SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall transmit (from the related Vendor) for submittal to the
Engineer, within ten days after receipt of individual Notice to Proceed, a list of
materials to be furnished, the names of the suppliers and the appropriate shop
drawings for all ductile iron pipe and fittings.
B. All ductile iron pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract shall be
inspected and tested at the foundry as required by the standard specifications to
which the material is manufactured. Furnish in dupticate to the Engineer sworn
certificates of such tests and their results. In addition, all ductile iron pipe and
fittings to be furnished under this Contract may be inspected at the foundry for
compliance with these Specifications by an independent testing laboratory
selected by the Owner. The manufacturer's cooperation shall be required in
these inspections. The cost of foundry inspection of all pipe approved for this
Contract, plus the cost of inspection of a reasonable amount of the disapproved
pipe, will be borne by the Vendor.
C
D
E
Shop Drawings including layout drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval and shall include dimensioning, methods and locations of supports and
all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished.
The Contractor shall transmit from the Vendor to the Engineer, the pipe
manufacturer's certification of compliance with the applicable sections of the
Specifications.
The Contractor shall coordinate all submittals with the related Vendor in a
manner not to impede construction on individual projects.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pipe shall be supplied in lengths not in excess of 21-feet. Buried pipe 4 to 12
inches in diameter shall have mechanical joint fittings. Pipe 14-inches and
greater in diameter shall be mechanical joint or rubber-ring type push-on joint as
manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe Company, U.S. Pipe and Foundry
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
0992-0205 15062-1
'
Company, Ciow-McWane-Tyton, Griffin or approved equal. Push-on and
mechanical joints shall be restrained to the lengths of straight pipe as shown in
the piping details on the drawings for all bends, tees, and dead ends. Restraints
shall be Megalug by EBAA tron, Romac, American Ductile Iron Pipe's Fast Grip
Gasket, U.S. Pipe's Field Lok Gasket, or equal
B. Fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi, shall be ductile iron, and shall
meet the requirements of AWWA C110. Gaskets shall be EPDM (Ethylene-
Propylene Dine Monomer) such as the "Fastite Gasket" of American Ductile Iron
Pipe Co., Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) conforming to the
requirements of ANSI/AVWVA C111/A21.11., or approved equal.
C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for raw water, potable water and reclaimed water
shall be lined with cement lining and a 1 mil thick bituminous seal coat.
D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for wastewater and activated sludge shall be lined
with 40 mils DFT of Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy or 60 mils DFT of American
Cast Iron Pipe Company's Polybond Plus.
E. Flanged ductile-iron pipe for above ground piping shall conform to current ANSI
A21.15/AVWVA C115 with factory applied screwed long hub flanges except as
otherwise specified hereinafter. Flanges shall be faced and drilted after being
screwed on the pipe with flanges true to 90 degrees with the pipe axis and shall
be flush with end of pipe conforming to ANSI B16.1, 125 pounds standard.
F. Mechanical joint fittings may be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. The working pressure rating for the fittings shall be
350 PSI. The fittings shatl be lined on the inside and coated on the outside with
a fusion bonded epoxy in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.
G. Flanged fittings shall be ductile as specified herein. Flanges and flanged fittings
shall be flat face and shall conform to ANSI A21.10 for 250 psi pressure rating.
Full face type 1/16-inch thick rubber ring gaskets shall conform to AVWVA C111.
H. Buried pipe shall be Pressure Class 350 for 4 to 12 inches diameter, Pressure
Class 250 for 14 to 20 inches diameter, Pressure Class 200 for 24 inches
diameter and Pressure Class 150 for 30 to 64 inches diameter. Flanged or other
unburied pipe shall be minimum thickness Class 53.
Except as otherwise shown on the Drawings, either push-on, mechanical,
restrained, or flanged joints shall be used. Prior to commencing work, jointing
systems for pipe shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work to be painted shall not
receive the standard tar or asphalt coat on the outside surfaces but shall be shop
primed on the outside with one coat of Koppers No. 621 Rust inhibitive Primer or
approved equal. All other pipe and fittings shall be shop coated on the outside
with a 1.0 mils thick bituminous coat in accordance with ANSI A21.51.
Should portions of the pipe inadvertently be given the outside coating of
coal tar enamel instead of the rust inhibitive primer as required for
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section ►Va
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
0992-0205 15062-2
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
�
C
�
�
�
��
�
,
u
�
,
�
��
'
�
�
K.
exposed piping the surfaces shall be sealed with a non-bleeding sealer
coat such as Inertol Tar Strop, or Mobil Anti-Bleeding Aluminum Sealer.
Sealing shall be a part of the work of this Section.
Bolts and nuts on flanged fittings shall be Grade B, ASTM A-307, cadmium
plated and conform to ANSI B16.1 for Class 125.
All buried ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be provided with a 4-mil thick cross
laminated high density polyethylene encasement or an 8-mil thick polyethylene
encasement per ANSI A21.5/AVWVA C105. Color of encasement shall be in
accordance with requirements based on the service type of the pipe as listed in
Section 09902.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS
� 3.2
u
��
�
�
'
�
A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to
the pipe or coatings. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. All pipe or fittings shall
be examined before installation, and no piece shall be installed which is found to
be defective. Any damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired as directed by
the Engineer.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection and hammer test
just prior to being installed.
C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid, it shall be removed and
replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no additional expense to
the Owner.
UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Alignment and Grade: The pipelines shall be laid and maintained to lines and
grades established by the Drawings and Specifications, with fittings, valves and
hydrants at the required locations unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Valve-operating stems shall be oriented to allow proper operation. Hydrants
shall be installed plumb.
B. Underground Conflicts: Prior to excavation, investigation shall be made to the
extent necessary to determine the location of existing underground structures
and conflicts. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to existing structures.
When obstructions that are not shown on the drawings are encountered during
the progress of the work and interfere so that an alteration of the Drawings is
required, the Engineer will alter the Drawings or order a deviation in line and
grade or arrange for removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions.
When crossing existing pipelines or other structures, alignment and grade shall
be adjusted as necessary, with the approval of the Engineer, to provide
clearance as required by federal, state, or local regulations or as deemed
necessary by the Engineer to prevent future damage or contamination of either
structure.
C. Trench Construction:
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
Section IVa
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
15062-3
3.3
2.
Trench preparation shall proceed in advance of pipe installation for only
as far as necessary to allow proper pipe installation. The width of the
trench at the top of the pipe shall be ample to permit the pipe to be laid
and joined properly and al�ow the backfill to be placed as specified.
Bedding shall be provided and compacted in accordance with the Trench
Details on the Drawings.
3. Holes for the bells shall be provided at each joint but shall not be larger
than necessary for joint assembfy and assurance that the pipe barrel will
lie flat on the trench bottom. Other than noted previously, the trench
bottom shall be true and even in order to provide support for the full
length of the pipe barrel, except that slight depression may be provided to
allow withdrawal of pipe slings or other lifting-tackle.
4. When excavation of rock is encountered, all rock shall be removed to
provide a clearance of at least 6-inches below and on each side of all
pipe, valves, and fittings for pipe sizes 24-inches or smaller, and 9-inches
for pipe 30- inches and larger. When excavation is completed, a bed of
sand, crushed stone or earth that is free from stones, large clods, or
frozen earth shall be placed on the bottom of the trench to the previously
mentioned depths, leveled, and tamped. These clearances and bedding
procedures shall also be observed for pieces of concrete or masonry and
other debris or subterranean structures, such as masonry walls, piers, or
foundations that may be encountered during excavation.
5. This installation procedure shall be followed when gravel formations
containing loose boulders greater than 8 inches in diameter are
encountered. In all cases, the specified clearances shall be maintained
between the bottom of all pipe and appurtenances and any part,
projection, or point of rock, boulder, or stones of sufficient size and
placement which, in the opinion of the Engineer could cause fulcrum
point.
6. Should the trench pass over a sewer or other previous excavation, the
trench bottom shall be sufficientfy compacted to provide support equal to
that of the native soil or conform to other regulatory requirements in a
manner that will prevent damage to the existing installation.
7. When the subgrade is found to be unstable or to include ashes, cinders,
refuse, organic material, or other unsuitable material, such material shall
be removed, to a minimum of at least 3-inches, or to the depth ordered by
the Engineer and replaced under the directions of the Engineer with
clean, stable backfill material. The bedding sha�l be consolidated and
leveled in order that the pipe may be installed as specified.
8. When the bottom of the trench or the subgrade is found to consist of
material that is unstable to such a degree that, in the judgment of the
Engineer it cannot be removed, a foundation for the pipe and/or
appurtenance shall be constructed using piling, timber, concrete, or other
materials at the direction of the Engineer.
PIPE INSTALLATION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
��I
'
�
�
LJ
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
Section /Va '
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
15062-4
_I
'
�
�
�
I�
��
'
�
�
'
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
A. Proper implements, tools, and facilities shall be provided and used for the safe
and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants
shall be lowered carefully into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, or other
suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipeline
material and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall
pipeline materials be dropped off or dumped into the trench. The trench should
be dewatered prior to installation of the pipe.
B. All pipe fittings, valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances shall be examined
carefully for damage and other defects immediately before installation. Defective
materials shall be marked and held for inspection by the engineer who may
prescribe corrective repairs or reject the materials.
C. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the socket and
plain ends of each pipe, and the outside of the plain end and the inside of the bell
shall be wiped clean and dry and be free from dirt, sand, grit, or any foreign
material before the pipe is laid.
�
E.
Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe while it is being placed
in the trench. During laying operations, no debris, tools, clothing, or other
materials shall be placed in the pipe.
As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and
the pipe brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place
with approved backfill material.
F. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be
closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. When
practical, the plug shall remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry.
Care shall be taken to prevent pipe flotation should the trench fill with water.
G
.1
I:�
Trench width at the top of pipe, bedding conditions, and backfilf placement and
compaction shall be such that design loadings on the pipe will not be exceeded.
Joint Assembly: Pipe joints shall be assembled in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of ANSI/AVWVA C600.
Pipe Deflection: When it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line in either
the vertical or horizontal plane, or where long radius curves are permitted, the
amount of deflection shall not exceed that shown in ANSI/AVWVA C600.
Pipe Cutting: Cutting pipe for the insertion of valves, fittings, or closure pieces
shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe
or lining. Ductile cast iron may be cut using an abrasive pipe saw, rotary wheel
cutter, guillotine pipe saw, milling wheel saw, or oxyacetylene torch. Cut ends
and rough edges shall be ground smooth and for push-on joint connections, the
cut end shall be beveled.
Thrust Restraint:
All pipe joints, plugs, caps, tees, and bends shall be suitably restrained by
attaching metal tie rods or providing restrained joints as specified.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Ducfile Iron Pipe and Fittings
0992-0205 15062-5
�'
3.4
3.5
2. Thrust-restraint design pressure shall be equal to the test pressure of the
line.
3. Restrained mechanical joints utilizing gaskets with stainless steel
restraining elements, welded-on retainer rings, split retainer rings,
setscrew retainer glands, or metal harness and tie rods shall be used in
place of concrete. Tie rods or other components of dissimilar metal shall
be protected against corrosion by hand application of a bituminous
coating or by encasement of the entire assembly with 8-mil thick, loose
polyethylene film in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA C105.
ABOVE GROUND PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe in horizontal or vertical planes, paratlel or perpendicular to building
surfaces unless otherwise shown. Support pipe and fittings to prevent strain on
joints, valves and equipment. Install flanged joints so that contact faces bear
uniformly on the gasket. Tighten bolts with relatively uniform stress.
PRESSURE TESTING
A. All pressure testing will be completed by the Contractor under the supervision of
the Clearwater Public Utilities Inspector. All pressure tests shall be scheduled
with the Clearwater Public Utifities Inspector with 24 hours minimum notice and
ONLY AFTER THE CONTRACTOR ACHIEVES A SUCCESSFUL SYSTEM
LEAK CHECK.
B. Hydrostatic pressure and leakage test shall conform with Section 4 of AVWVA
C600 Specification with the exception that the Contractor shall furnish all gauges,
meters, pressure pumps and other equipment needed to test the line.
C. The pressure required for the field hydrostatic pressure test shall be 150 psi.
The Contractor shall provide temporary plugs and blocking necessary to maintain
the required test pressure of 150 psi. Corporation cocks at least 3/4-inches in
diameter, pipe riser and angle globe valves shall be provided at each pipe dead-
end in order to bleed air from the line. Duration of pressure test shall be at least
two hour. The cost of these items shall be included as a part of testing.
D. The leakage test may be conducted at the same time as the pressure test, and
shall be of not less than one hour duration. All leaks evident at the surface shall
be repaired and leakage eliminated regardless of total leakage as shown by test.
Lines which fail to meet tests shall be repaired and retested as necessary until
test requirements are complied with. Defective materials, pipes, valves and
accessories shall be removed and replaced. The pipe lines shall be tested in
such sections as may be required. The line shall be filled with water and all air
removed and the test pressure shall be maintained in the pipe for the entire test
period by means of a force pump to be furnished by the Contractor. Accurate
means shall be provided for measuring the water required to maintain this
pressure. The amount of water required is a measure of the leakage.
E. The amount of leakage which will be permitted shall be in accordance with
AWWA C600 Standards for all pressure tests. No pipe installation shall be
accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula:
L = SD(P)1/2
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa '
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
0992-0205 15062-6
�
3.6
3.7
133,200*
L= Leakage in gallons per hour
S= Length of pipe in feet
D= Nominal diameter in inches
P = Pressure in psi
* Note: If 20-foot pipe lengths are used, factor to be 148,000
DISINFECTION OF WATER MAINS
A. See Section 15120 — Flushing, Pigging, Pressure Testing and Chlorination.
SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING
A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be
painted with a prime coat as specified in Paragraph 2.1.J. Surface preparation
and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. It shall be part of the work
of this Section to assist as required by the Engineer in identifying pipe contents,
direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe.
END OF SECTION
Marshal► Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
0992-0205 15062-7
SECTION 15064 - PLASTIC PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes furnishing and installing small diameter (2 inch and tess)
plastic pipe and fittings for interior use in pressure or process streams as shown
on the Drawings and as specified.
i1.2 SUBMITTALS
�''
�
��
'
�
�
�
��
A.
B.
Submit shop drawings shown fabrication of piping to fit equipment, valves and
fittings to be used. Indicate gasket and joint allowances, working clearance
necessary and supports required.
Submit certificate from manufacturer showing compliance with specified
standards. Inspect for defects and damage at delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PVC Plastic Pipe. ASTM D1784, Type 1, Grade 1, Cell Classification 12454-B,
Schedule 80, for working pressures to 300 psi, threaded, solvent weld, flanged.
CPVC Plastic Pipe. ASTM F 441, Schedule 80 CPVC pipe, threaded and socket
weld. Pipe shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal for potable water
pipe and shall be marked with SDR and/or Schedule number.
Fittings for CPVC Plastic Pipe. ASTM F-437 threaded fittings and ASTM F-439
socket fittings for Schedule 80 CPVC pipe with ASTM F-493 solvent cement.
PVDF Plastic Pipe. ASTM D-3035, Schedule 80 PVDF pipe, threaded and
socket weld. Pipe shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation seal for potable
water pipe and shall be marked with SDR and/or Schedule number.
Fittings for PVDF Plastic Pipe. ASTM D-2657 threaded and socket fittings for
Schedule 80 PVDF pipe.
F. High Density Polyethylene Tubing. PE-3408, for potable water. Plastic tubing
shall be manufactured from N.S.F. approved prime virgin PE-3408 high density
polyethylene resin compound and meet the applicable standards of ASTM
D2737, NSF-14 and AWWA C901. All tubing supplied shall be DR-9, C.T.S.,
with a 200 psi operating pressure at 73.4°F.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Design Section ►Va
Plastic Pipe
0992-0205 15064-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A. Pipe shall be examined for defects, damage, dirt and debris in pipe. Clean if
necessary. Discard and remove defective materials. Reject materials found
unsatisfactory.
INSTALLATION
A. Install PVC, CPVC, PVDF, and HDPE pipe in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Allow solvent weld joints to cure at least 24-
hours at temperatures above 40° F before placing in use. Install insulation per
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Pipe shall be installed in horizontal or vertical planes, parallel or perpendicular to
building surtaces unless otherwise shown. Support pipe and fittings to prevent
strain on joints, valves and equipment. Install flanged joints so that contact faces
bear uniformty on the gasket. Tighten bolts with relatively uniform stress.
TESTING
A. Test completed piping system in accordance with the requirements of Section
01660 - Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Design
0992-0205
Section 1Va �
Plastic Pipe
15064-2
���
L�
�
�
SECTION 15066 - TRACER WIRE AND ALARMING TAPE
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 TRACER WIRE
� 1.2
i
�
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Each length of mainline pipe installed by open cut shall have two (2) 12-gauge
minimum solid or stranded copper locator wire wound around the pipe forming
one complete spiral per joint of pipe.
Any length of mainline pipe installed by directional bore shall have two (2) 10-
gauge minimum solid or stranded copper locator wires duct taped to top center of
pipe.
The locator wires shall have colored insulation matching the type of service
provided in the main and be acceptable for direct burial.
The wire is to be tied to all valves, tees and elbows.
The locator wires shall be brought up into all valve boxes through a separate
PVC pipe with enough slack provided to extend 12-inches out of each box.
The wires shall each be continuous throughout the project, with splices made
only by methods approved by the Owner's Project Representative.
All splices of the wires shall be made with watertight connections, utiiizing Direct
Bury Splice Kits as manufactured by 3M or approved equal. Bury Splice Kits shall
be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Contractor shall perform a 12 volt DC electrical continuity test on the wires. No
more than one volt of loss per 1000 feet of mainline pipe wilf be acceptable. At
least one wire of the locator wire system shall pass the 12 volt DC electrical
continuity test prior to final acceptance of the pipeline. Any cuts or breaks in the
wire shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense.
The locator wire shall be tested by the Owner at the time of pressure testing. If
this test fails, the Contractor is responsible for repairing the Iocator wire and the
pressure test will be reschedule when the wire will pass.
Contractor shall install tracer wire on all services to be installed from a main
under the roadway within a cul-de-sac. The tracer wire should be tied into the
wire on the main as per the specs and looped into the RCW meter box.
ALARMING TAPE
A. Provide underground warning tape constructed of heavy gage 0.004-inch
polyethylene film to identify all buried utilities except 3-inch and smaller irrigation
pipe. Provide 6-inch wide tape as follows:
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Tracer Wire and Alarming Tape
0992-0205 15066-1
,
1
Film Leqend Film Color
Electric line below Red
Telephone line below Orange
Water line below Blue
Sewer line below Green
Nonpotable water below Brown
Reclaimed water below Purpfe (Pantone 522C)
Install tape directly above each buried utility at a depth of 18-inches below
final grade.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section 1Va
Tracer Wire and Alarming Tape
0992-0205 15066-2
�
�
�
�
C�
SECTION 15100 - VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
�
1.4
/_�
;�
0
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install
complete and ready for operation all valves and appurtenances as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein.
All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the Drawings and to
the extent possible, all equipment of the same type shall be from one
manufacturer.
All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the maker and the working
pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some
appropriate part of the body.
The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Resilient Seated Gate Valves
Small Gate Valves
Ball Valves
Combination Air Release Valves
Service Saddle and Corporation Stop
Manual Valve Actuators
Valve Boxes
Flange Adapter Couplings
Solid Sleeve Couplings
Restraining Clamps
Mechanical Sleeve Seals
Tapping Sleeves and Valves
Plug Valve
Check Valves
Flexible Couplings
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard
for use in controlling the flow of wastewater and reclaimed water.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well established
reputable firms who are futly experienced, reputable and qualified in the
manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be
designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices and
methods and shall comply with these Specifications as applicable.
SUBMITTALS
1 Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-1
,
A.
;,
Submit to the Engineer within 30 days after execution of the contract a tist of
materials to be furnished, the names of the suppliers and the date of delivery of
materials to the site.
Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 01300
and the General Conditions.
1.5 TOOLS
'
�
�
A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance shall be supplied �
with the equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES
A. See Section IV Article 41.2.3.
2.2 SMALL GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves 2-1/2-in in diameter and smaller in size, shall have flanged or
threaded ends as required; and shall be brass conforming to Federat
Specification VWV-V-54, Type I or II, solid wedge, rising-stem-type gate valves as
manufactured by Jenkins Bros. or equal products as manufactured by Crane,
Fairbanks, or Kennedy Valve Mfg. Co. or equal.
2.3 PVC BALL VALVES
A. PVC ball valves shall be of PVC Type 1 with union, socket, threaded or flanged
ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic construction,
150 psi rated with teflon seat seals and T-handles. PVC ball valves shall be as
manufactured by Celanese Piping Systems, Inc., Wallace and Tiernan, Inc.,
Plastiline, Inc., or equal.
2.4 COMBINATION AIR RELEASE VALVES
I1
0
Provide and install air release valves as shown on the drawings. General
locations of air release valves are as follows:
1. Combination Air Release Valves for Above Ground Piping
Combination Air Re{ease Valves for Above Ground Piping
1. The combination air release valve shall be of the simple lever type or float
operated, capable of automatically releasing accumulated air from a fluid
system while that system is in operation and under pressure. The valve
shall be capable of admitting air into the system at high flow rates during
drainage of the pipe.
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa �
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-2
,
�
,
�
�
�
I
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�_�
�
�
��
2
3
4
�
The valve body shall be threaded with National Pipe Thread (NPT) inlet
and outlet. Alf operating parts shall be made of corrosion resistant
materials.
The body and base shall be of reinforced nylon construction with all
internal components of reinforced nylon, polypropylene, stainless steel,
BUNA-N, or E.P.D.M., consistent with the following specifications:
a) Body & Base Reinforced Nylon
b) Drainage Elbow Polypropylene
c) Float Foamed Polypropylene
d) Rolling Seal E.P.D.M.
e) O-Ring BUNA-N
fl Internal Screws Stainless Steel
The air release valves shall be manufactured by A.R.I., or approved
equal.
Valve Schedule
a) Air Release Valves for above and below ground wastewater
piping.
Max, Pressure, PSI 230
Max. Flow, GPM 750
Inlet Size, Inch 2
Outlet Size, Inch 1-'/2
A.R.I. Model No. D-040-P
2.5 SERVICE SADDLE AND CORPORATION STOP
A. See Section IV Article 412.6 and City standard detail.
2.6 MANUAL VALVE ACTUATORS
A. General
1. All valve actuators that are manual shall conform to Section 3.8 of the
AWWA Standard Specification.
2. Actuators shalf be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the
full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry
system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve.
Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body.
B. Manual actuators shatl have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed gearing with
handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of actual line pressure and
velocities. Actuators shali be equipped with handwheel, position indicator, and
mechanical stop-limiting locking devices to prevent over travel of the disc in the
open and closed positions. They shall turn counter-clockwise to open valves.
Manual actuators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be
designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-3
2.8
2.9
fu{ly closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shali be fully enclosed and
designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on
the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall withstand an input of
450 foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 foot pounds for larger than 30" size
valves at extreme actuator positions without damage. Valves located above
grade shall have handwheel and position indicator. Valves located below grade
shall be equipped with a two inch (2") square AVWVA operating nut located at
ground level and cast iron extension type valve box.
VALVE BOXES
A. All buried valves shall have cast-iron three piece valve boxes. Valve boxes shall
be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation at or
slightly above the finished grade surface as directed by the Engineer. The barrel
shall be two-piece, sliding type, having 5 1/4-inch shaft. The upper section shall
have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling and
shall be complete with cast iron covers. Covers shall have "WATER", "SEWER",
or `RECLAIM', as applicable, cast into the top. All valves shalt have actuating
nuts extended to top of valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with
concrete base.
FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS
A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the size and pressure rating required for
each installation and shall be suitable for use on either cast iron or ductile iron
pipe. They shall be similar or equal to Dresser Company, Style 128. All
couplings shall have a sufficient number of factory installed anchor studs to meet
or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi minimum.
SOLID SLEEVES
A. Solid sleeve couplings shall be used in locations as shown on the Drawings.
Solid sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The
couplings shall be of ductile iron meeting the requirements of
ANSI/AW1NA C110lA21.10 as manufactured by U.S. Pipe, American Cast
Iron Pipe, McWane, or Equal. Solid sleeves shall be furnished with
mechanical joint fittings. The solid sleeve coupling shall be provided with
316 stainless steel bolts and nuts unless indicated otherwise.
Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for
exposure to the liquid within the pipe.
2.10 RESTRAINING CLAMPS
A. Restraining clamp assemblies as detailed in the drawings for use at hydrant
connections to water mains, or at fittings where shown on the drawings, shall be
as manufactured by EBAA Iron Sales, Inc., Eastland, TX, or Equal.
2.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-4
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
L__ 1
�
�
�
�
��
��
�
L�
�J
'
�
�
�
A. Sleeve seals shall be the modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing and
elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical
insulation. Bolts shall be stainless steel. Sleeve seals shall be Link-Seal as
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, or approved equal.
2.12 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
A. Tapping Sleeves
Steel body tapping sleeves, Model JCM 412, JCM Industries, Inc.; Model
3460, Clow Corporation, or equal.
� 2. Main body diameter, 6 to 30 inches; outlet diameter, 3 to 12 inches;
ASTM A283, Grade C steel or ASTM A285, Grade C steel body; 3/4-inch
NPT SS test plug; 18-8 304 SS nuts and bolts; flat-faced flange on outlet
� per AWWA C207, Class D, ANSI B16.5, 150-pound flange, recessed for
tapping valve per MSS-SP60; 175 psi rating; Buna-N gasket for water;
interior and exterior coated with minimum 9 mils of fusion bonded epoxy.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�i
�
B. Tapping Valves
Resilient wedge gate valves 2 to 12 inches, same as in Paragraph 2.1 of
this section, except for the following:
a)
2.13 PLUG VALVES
The gate valves for tapping shall have one mechanical joint end
connection on one side and one flanged end connection with a
raised face per MSS SP-60 on the other side.
A. Eccentric Plug Valves 3"-36" shall meet or exceed the latest revision of AVWVA
Standard C517, and shall meet or exceed the requirements of this specification.
B. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and
shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanges shall be
per the ANSI 616.1 125 Ib. standard. End-to-end length of flanged valves shall
be per AVWVA C517, Table 1. Mechanical joint ends shall be to the AW1NA
Standard C111-64.
C. Bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Port area shall be 100% of
standard pipe area. Published and/or calculated Cv flow data will not be
accepted in lieu of 100% port area requirement. The body shall have minimal
pooling, and provide complete flushing of the valve every time it cycles. Port of
valve shall be rectangular. Round ported valves will not be accepted. Only VE
option that will be considered is rectangular seated non 100% port valves. VE
option of round port valves will not be accepted. The term "full port" shall
represent 100% port.
D. Seats shall be rectangular ported, 1/8" thick welded overlay of not less than 95%
, pure nicket. Seat area shall at least 1/2" wide and raised, with the raised surFace
completely covered with weld to insure that the plug face contacts only nickel.
� Marshal► Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-5
�
E. Plugs shall be solid one-piece castings of ASTM A536 ductile iron. The plug shall
have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offset from the center of the plug
shaft. The plug shall not contact the seat prior to 90% closed. The interference
between the plug face and body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall
be externally adjustable in the field with the valve in the line under pressure. Plug
shall be Chloroprene (CR), or other resilient facing suitable for the application.
F
G
Bearings shall have sleeve type metal bearings and shall be of sintered, oil
impregnated permanently lubricated type 316 ASTM A743 Grade CF8M. Non-
metallic bearings shall not be acceptable.
Grit Excluders in the form of PTFE washers at the upper and lower journals shall
be provided to prevent the entry of grit and foreign solids into the bearing areas.
H. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type with a packing gland follower.
Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable under pressure without
removing the actuator or bonnet from the valve. An air gap shall exist befinreen
shaft packing and bottom of actuator for visual inspection, adjustment or
complete replacement of packing without disturbing any portion of the valve or
actuator except the packing gland follower. Valves utilizing O-ring seals or non-
adjustable packing shall not be acceptable.
J
Pressure ratings shall be
150 psi (1,034 kPa) for
hydrostatic and seat test,
specifications.
175 psi (1,207 kPa) on
14"-36" (350-900mm).
with test results being
�
�
�
sizes 3"-12" (80-300mm) and
Every valve shall be given a �
certified when required by the
Manual valves shall have lever or gear actuators and tee wrenches, extension �
stems, floorstands, etc., as specified. Valves 6" and larger shall be equipped with
worm gear actuators. Non-buried actuators shall clearly indicate valve position.
K. Worm Gears shall be constructed in accordance AWWA C517. Actuators shall i
be enclosed in a cast iron housing with outboard seals to protect the bearings
and other internal components. The actuator shaft and the quadrant shall be �
supported on permanentty lubricated bronze bearings. Input shaft and fasteners
shall be made of stainless steel.
L. Externally adjustable open and closed position stops shall be provided. The �
adjustable closed position stop shall be used to set closing torque and provide
adjustment to compensate for change in pressure differential or flow direction.
M. Valves and gear actuators for buried or submerged service shall have seals on
all shafts and gaskets on the valve and actuator covers to prevent the entry of
water. Actuators shall be 90% grease filled. Actuator mounting brackets for
buried or submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasket
seals.
C
Eccentric plug valves shall have a two year warranty from date of shipment.
Manufacturers name shall be casted in body of valve and a metal tag containing
a serial number shall be riveted to the valve for future parts identification.
Valves and actuators shall be DeZurik PEF, Val-matic 5600R, or Clow F5400.
�
�
�
,
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-6
�
�
�
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
n
�
u
�
�
�
�
�
2.14 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Check valves shall be swing-type, flanged with an external hinge arm with
outside lever and adjustable weight meeting the requirements of AVWVA C508.
Double door, torsional-spring, and internal spring type check valves are not
acceptable. Check valves shall be flanged and have a design working pressure
of no less than 150 psi.
B. The outside lever and weight assembly shall be capable of being relocated to the
opposite side without requiring modifications to the valve body.
C. Arms with discs attached shall be hinged at the top of the body and attached to
the shaft. Features or devices to limit arm-travel shall be incorporated into the
valve body. Utilization of adjacent pipeline flanges to restrict arm travel will not be
allowed. For sizes 6" and larger, the ratio of bolt diameter to arm width shall not
exceed 0.3 and the ratio of bolt diameter thickness shall not exceed 0.9.
C
Q
F
G
�
The disc shall clear the inside of the pipe by 1.125" minimum throughout its entire
travel.
Valve materials shall be as follows:
1
2
3.
4.
6.
7.
9.
10
Body, cover, disc, weight- cast iron, ASTM A126 c1.B.
Rubber disc facing, body O-ring, stuffing box O-ring, cover gasket, hinge
pin O-rings- ASTM D-2000 rubber.
Stuffing box- bronze, ASTM 138
Seat ring, clapper arm, retaining washer- bronze, ASTM B584.
Stud nut- bronze, ASTM B62
Disc stud- bronze, ASTM B21
Stuffing Box Hinge P9n- 303 Stainless Steel, ASTM A276
Set screw, jam nut- stainless steel, ASTM A194
Cover, volt, nut, test plug- steel, ASTM B18.2.1
Weight lever- A36 steel
Valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller, Clow, American, Kennedy, M&H, or
approved equal.
When there is no flow, the check valve disc shall hang lightly against its seat in
an almost vertical position. When there is flow, the disc shall swing clear of the
waterway.
Valves shall be air cushioned to reduce vafve slam, except for Effluent Pump
Vatves, which shall have oil dashpots.
I. Valves shall be constructed so that the disc and body seat may be removed and
replaced without removing the valve from the line.
2.15 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible couplings shall be leak-proof, of appropriate size, UV resistant and
clearly marked with part number, size and pipe material to be connected. The
coupling shall be supplied with 304 stainless steel hardware and shall be as
manufactured by Fernco Inc. or approved equal.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the location shown, true to
alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed.
B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least two hours
at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different test
pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of
operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry
floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon as
forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these items, the
Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct bearing on their
location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of these valves and
appurtenances during the construction of the structures.
D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the
respective pipe sections in Division 15.
E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts and
washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant alloy
steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as the
pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats of
bituminous paint comparable to Inertol No. 66 Special Heavy.
F. Prior to the installation of sleeve-type couplings, the pipe ends shall be cleaned
thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a gasket
lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over each pipe to
a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring shall be placed on
the substantial completion date untess otherwise requested by the Owner.
G. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the Drawings.
Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard manner. Valve stems shall be
vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over each stem with base bearing on
compacted fill and top flush with final grade. Boxes shall have sufficient bracing
to maintain alignment during backfilling. Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe.
Remove any sand or undesirable fill from valve box.
3.2 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
I1
Excavate around the existing pipe and remove as much soil from the pipe as
possible. Excavate a trench with dimensions suitable for the installation of the
tapping sleeve, flanged outlet, tapping valve and tapping machine.
Thoroughly clean the existing pipe surface and the new tapping sleeve. Check
the actual outside diameter of the existing pipe and the inside diameter of the
tapping sleeve to verify that the sleeve will fit.
'
'
�
�
i
�
�
i
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va �
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100.8
�
l�
�
I�
'
�
�
'
i
�
C.
Q
Check the existing pipe surface to make certain that the pipe is free of flaws,
gouges and extreme irregularities where the gasket will seat.
Lubricate the pipe and face of the gasket with soap and water or gasket
lubricating solution. Pipe lubricant and/or grease shall not be used.
E. Position the outlet portion of the sleeve and gasket on the body of the pipe,
making sure that the outlet is aligned with the branch line to be connected. The
sleeve shall not be located in a position that requires its rotation to align the
outlet.
F. The back half of the sleeve shall be installed and the bolts installed. The bolts
shall be tightened evenly, working towards the center, and alternating from one
side of the sleeve to the other. The bolts shafl be tightened to the following
torque levels:
�l
1. Existing pipe sizes 6 to 12 inches 100 Ft-Lbs of torque
2. Existing pipe sizes 14 inches and larger 125 Ft-Lbs of torque
Check inside of the sleeve to make sure that the gasket is properly seated and
cannot be damaged by the tapping cutter.
Install the tapping valve using procedures recommended in the AVWVA M-44
manual for installation, support and trenching.
Test the sleeve and valve seals with water in accordance with AW1NA C223
using the test plug on the sleeve or the test connection on the tapping machine to
a maximum test pressure of 150 psi.
J. If the test is successful, the Contractor shall wait for 15 minutes, and then re-
� check the torques of all of the bolts. If there are no problems, the Contractor may
then proceed with the tapping operation, following the procedures recommended
by the tapping machine manufacturers.
�
�
U
�
1I
u
3.3 RESTRAINING CLAMPS AND TIE RODS ON PIPE RUN
A. Restraining clamps and tie rods shall be used on all pipe runs, as directed by the
Engineer and/or shown on the Drawings. Restraining devices shall be JCM
Industries, Inc. - Sur-Grip, Ebba Iron, Inc. - Megalug, Romac, or approved equal.
Other types shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3.4 SHOP PAINTING
A. Ferrous surfaces of valves and appurtenances shall receive a coating of
rust-inhibitive primer. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to prevent the
entry of foreign matter prior to installation.
, 3.5 FIELD PAINTING
�
A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view will be
painted a color appropriate to its usage in accordance with the color code.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-9
�
3.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Compieted pipe shaii be subjected to hydrostatic pressure test for one hour at full
working pressure. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested as approved by
the Engineer. Prior to testing, the gravity pipelines shall be supported in an
approved manner to prevent movement during tests.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Valves and Appurtenances
0992-0205 15100-10
'
�
�
i
�
�
r
�
U
,�
,
u
�
�
�
�
J
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
r_�
0
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for a complete electrical
installation for the Work associated with the Contract Documents, as hereinafter
specified and shown on the Contract Drawings.
Provide functioning systems in compliance with manufacturer's instructions,
performance requirements specified or shown on the Contract Drawings and
modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawings and field coordinated drawings.
C. The work, apparatus and materials which shall be fumished under these Specifications
and accompanying Contract Drawings shall include all items listed hereinafter and/or
shown on the Contract Drawings. Certain equipment will be furnished as specified in
other sections of these Specifications which will require wiring thereto and/or complete
installation as indicated. All materials necessary for the complete installation shall be
furnished and installed by the Contractor to provide complete power, lighting,
communication systems, instrumentation, wiring, and control systems as indicated on
the Contract Drawings and/or as specified herein.
D. Provide complete grounding systems for all equipment as specified herein, shown on
the contract documents, and as required for specific pieces of equipment per
manufacturer.
E. The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary cables, transformers, motor
control centers, protective devices, conductors, exteriorelectrical system, etc., to serve
motor loads, lighting loads and miscellaneous electrical loads as indicated on the
Contract Drawings and/or as specified hereinafter.
F. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of
the work and making any connection changes or adjustments necessary for the proper
functioning of the system and equipment.
G. Mount and wire control panels and process instruments furnished under other Divisions
of these Specifications unless specifically stated otherwise. Mount and make all field
connections to process instrument panels and other control panels furnished under
other Divisions of these Specifications. For process instrumentation, furnish and install
all conduit, wire and interconnections between primary elements, transmitters, local
indicators, surge protection devices and receivers.
H. Mount and wire isolation transformers, operator's stations, and power conversion
equipment for all variable speed drive systems furnished under other Divisions of these
specifications.
Install and wire all thermostats, aqua-stats and other devices furnished under other
Divisions of this Specification directly controlling HVAC equipment or fan motors.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-1
�
1.2
J. Mount and wire electric heaters, and heat tracing furnished under other Divisions of this
Specification.
K. All power interruptions to existing equipment shall be at the Owner's convenience.
Each interruption shall have prior approval.
L. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every
way for the service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied
as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no extra cost.
M. Provide all temporary power as required to facilitate the Contract phased construction
plan.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 0- Bidding, Contract and Conditions
2. Division 1- General Requirements
3. Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete
4. Section 13100 — Controls and Instrumentation
1.3 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
A. Outdoor locations may contain wet, corrosive and hazardous areas:
1. Corrosive and hazardous areas are identified on the Contract Drawings.
Areas not identified as such shall be considered wet.
B. Indoor locations may contain unclassified, damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous
areas:
1. Damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous areas are identified on the Contract
Drawings. Areas not identified as such, but provided with heating shall be
considered uncfassified. Areas not identified as such, but provided without
heating shall be considered damp.
C. Hazardous Locations:
1. Hazardous locations shall be as defined in NFPA 70 NEC, NFPA 820
Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection
Facilities, and other applicable standards or codes governing the
classification of a particular type of facility or location. In addition, areas are
classified as shown on Contract Drawings and as follows:
a. Class 1 Division 1
b. Class 1 Division 2
c. Class 11 Division 1
Marshall Street Salsnes Filfer Design
0992-0205
SectionlVa '
Electrical and Basic Requirements
16010-2
,
�
'
�
�
'
'
'
�
'
�
�
�
'
r
1.4
1.5
d. Class II Division 2
DEFINITIONS
A. Outdoor Areas:
1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally
exposed to wind, dust, rain, snow, etc. Outdoor areas include areas
protected by a roof or rain/sun shields but not enclosed within a structure.
B. Indoor Areas:
1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally
protected from wind, dust, rain, snow, etc.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI):
a. Steel Products Manual - Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel.
b. A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
c. D698, The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 5.5LB
Rammer and a 121N Drop.
4. Factory Mutual System (FM):
a. A Guide to Equipment, Materials and Services.
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 141, Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants.
b. 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
6. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):
a. NECA 1, Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
b. NECA 200, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining
Temporary Electrical Power at Construction Sites.
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-3
'
C.
7
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum)
b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
b. 70E, Standard for Electric Safety in the Workplace
c. 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
d. 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities
9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):
a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment
b. 508A, Industrial Control
c. 698, Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous Locations.
When a specific code or standard has not been cited, the applicable codes and
standards of the following code-making authorities and standards organizations
shall apply:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO).
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL).
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA).
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES).
Instrument Society of America (ISA).
Lightning Protection Institute (LPI).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Occupational, Health and Safety Administration (OSHA).
Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL).
In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, standards, laws, ordinances,
rules, regulations, drawings and specifications, or within either document itself, the �
more stringent condition shall govern.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
Shop drawings shall be arranged and labeled according to specification
section and Contract Drawing.
L�
L�J
�
Marsha/l Street Salsnes Filter Design SectionlVa ,
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-4
�
'
'
l�'
�
LJ
�
U
1
�
,
�'
u
�
�
u
�
,
2. Submit shop drawings prior to purchase or fabrication of equipment. See
individual Division 16 sections for additional specific requirements.
3. Prior to submittals of shop drawings, coordinate electrical equipment,
particularly motor control equipment, control panels, and instrumentation,
with al! applicable equipment and systems interfacing with that equipment.
4. Submittals shall be made in the following combinations:
a
:
�
Conduits, raceways, cable trays, ductbank details, wire and cable
600V and below, medium voltage cable, boxes and fittings.
Medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage motor starters,
distribution transformers and secondary substations.
c. Motor control centers and control equipment, low voltage
switchboards, safety switches, dry-type (specialty) transformers,
panelboards, power factor correction capacitors, grounding.
d. Lamps, interior lighting, exterior building lighting, site tighting.
e. Wiring devices.
f. Alarm systems, communication systems and telephone systems.
g. Provide a wire or cable identification schedule for all power, control,
signal, process and protective circuits. The schedule shall be
submitted in an electronic spreadsheet type Excel compatible file
format and include the following information:
1) Wire or Cable tag number.
2) Number of conductors.
3) Conductor size and type.
4) Wire or Cable usage description.
5) Conduit tag number
6) Conduit routing (to and from).
7) Conduit size and type.
8) Additional notes
5. For each product, clearly identify manufacturer by name. When general
data sheets are provided as part of the submittal, specifically identify the
products to be used on this Project. Provide manufacturer's technical
information on products to be used, including:
��
i�
c.
Product descriptive bulletin.
Electrical data pertinent to the Project and necessary to assure
compliance with Specifications and Contract Drawings.
Equipment dimensions, where applicable.
' Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design SectionlVa
Elecfrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-5
r
:
6
7
0
Evidence that the products submitted meet the requirements of the
standards referenced.
e. Specify part number with explanation of options selected.
Ensure that all submittals clearly indicate the equipment is UL or ETL listed.
For alf equipment, provide manufacturer's installation instructions.
'
,
,
�
When a quality standard has been established by identification of a specific �
manufacturer or catalog number, submittals for proposed alternates and
substitutions shall include:
1. Alternate and substitute equipment cross-referenced to the equipment it is '
replacing. Submittal shall be marked to show how differences will be
accommodated.
2. Calculations and other detail data to allow determination of alternate and
substitute equipment equivalency to the equipment it is replacing. Data
supplied shall allow detailed comparison of all significant characteristics
upon which the design equipment is based.
3. Dimensioned drawings, of the same or larger scale as the Contract
Drawings, for all alternate and substitute equipment, which differs in size,
configuration, service accessibility or in any significant way from the
equipment it is replacing.
.�
Complete system layout, except that portion which is identical to the
Contract Drawings.
Redesign and modifications to all work required by the alternate or
substitute equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall unload and handle materials using methods, rigging, and
equipment that will prevent damage to the materials. Care shall be used to prevent
damage to painted and galvanized surfaces.
1. Bare wire rope slings shall not be used for unloading and handling materials
and equipment, except with the specific written permission of the Engineer.
�
,
�
���
�
�
�
r
B. Equipment and materials, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, '
shall be stored, supported and protected to prevent damage.
1. Stored materials and equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground. I
,
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements ,
0992-0205 16010-6
�
�
�
�J
�
�
'
�
,
�
�J
�
,
'
,
�
�
��
C.
D.
E.
F.
2. Equipment and materials which incorporate electrical equipment or which
have finished painted surfaces, and other items which would be damaged by
outdoor exposure, shall be stored indoors.
3
4
a. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment to protect from
damage.
b. When such storage would present an unreasonable buitding space
or volume requirement, the equipment or materials may, when
acceptable to the Engineer, be stored under weatherproof coverings
on shoring or platforms.
All small loose items that could be easily lost, stolen, broken, or misused
shall not be stored on open platforms or shoring.
All storage methods and schedules shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for
storage-either inside or on top of enclosures.
Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing.
Repair, restore or replace damaged, corroded and rejected items at no additional
cost to the Owner.
Record Drawings:
1. The Contractor shall maintain a marked up set of Document Drawings
showing actual installed circuit numbers, conduit sizes, cable tray routing,
number of conductors, conductor sizes (other than #12AWG) and all other
deviations from the design drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All underground conduit and concealed items shall be dimensioned on the
Document Drawings from permanent, visible, building features.
Provide actual motor size, starter size, and heater size, along with all other
protective equipment for all motor circuits as part of the one-line record
drawings.
Revise all wire/cabte identification schedules to indicate as installed
conditions.
Revise all panelboard schedules to indicate as installed conditions.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to retated Division 16 sections. All equipment of a similar type shall be by one
manufacturer unless otherwise noted in the Specifications.
' Marshal! Street Salsnes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-7
'
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Contract Drawings or
Specifications to establish quality standards and basics of design.
1. Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal
equipment may be acceptable.
2. {f no other manufacturer is listed then any manufacturer of equal equipment
may be acceptable.
B. Listed: Where UL test procedures have been established for the product type,
electrical equipment shall be approved by UL or ETL and shall be provided with the
UL or ETL label.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. When equipment is shop fabricated for the Project, the electrical devices and
enclosures utilized shall be UL or ET� listed and labeled or shall be UL recognized.
B. Shop or Factory Finishes: Interiors of other painted equipment shall be white.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
B. Enclosures for Use with Electrical Equipment unless specifically shown or specified
elsewhere in the Contract Documents:
1. NEMA 1/12:
a. Acceptable in unclassified indoor locations.
2. NEMA 3/3R:
a. Acceptable in damp or wet indoor/outdoor non-corrosive locations.
3. NEMA 4X:
a. Use in wet indoor/outdoor corrosive locations.
b. Enclosures shall be 304-Stainless-Steel minimum. Enclosures
constructed of 316-Stainless Steel may be required in extremely
corrosive areas as shown on the Contract Drawings.
c. Nonmetallic enclosures shall not be used in areas subject to physical
damage or sunlight. Nonmetallic enclosures may be used in interior
locations.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-8
C.
1�7
E
F
G.
4
NEMA 6P:
a. Use in "Accidental Submergence" locations.
5. NEMA 7:
7
a. Use in all Class I, Division 1, 2, Group A, B, C, D locations.
b. Unless other enclosures are approved and UL listed for the
application.
NEMA 9:
a. Use in all Class II, Division 1, 2, Group E, F, G and Class III, Division
1, 2 locations.
b. Unless other enclosures are approved and UL listed for the
application.
Exceptions:
a. As modified in other Division 16 sections.
b. As otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades.
1. Arrange for the building in of equipment during structure construction.
2. Where equipment cannot be built-in during construction, arrange for sleeves,
box-outs, openings, etc., as required to allow installation of equipment after
structure construction is complete.
Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.
Equipment Dimensions and Clearances:
1. Equipment shall fit in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. Do not use equipment or arrangements of equipment that reduce required
clearances or exceed the space allocation.
Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Equipment Access:
1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance.
2. Equipment shall not be blocked or concealed.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Sect�onlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-9
,
H
J
I.�
�
3
�
_J
Do not install electrical equipment such that if interferes with normal '
maintenance requirements of other equipment.
Equipment shall be installed plumbed, square and true with the building construction
and shall be securely fastened.
Outdoor wall-mounted equipment and indoor equipment mounted on earth or water
bearing walls shall be provided with corrosion-resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN
separation between the equipment and the wall.
Screen or seal all openings into outdoor equipment to prevent the entrance of
rodents and insects.
Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth
or concrete.
Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.
1. Use supports as detailed on the Drawings and as specified. Where not
detailed on the Drawings or specified, use supports and anchoring devices
rated for the equipment load and as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Supports and anchoring devices shall be rated and sized based on
dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals.
Hardware shall be malleable type, corrosion resistant and shall be supported
by heavily plated machine screws or brass, bronze or stainless steel bolts.
Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members without written approval
by the Engineer.
Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment
enclosures, unless enclosure-mounting surface is properly braced to accept
mounting of external equipment.
M. Contractor shall verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to
electrical items to be installed under this Contract.
1. Shop drawings shall be secured from those furnishing the equipment.
2. Proceeding without proper information may require the Contractor to remove
and replace work that does not meet the conditions imposed by the
equipment supplied.
i
4
Provide sleeves wherever openings are required through new concrete or
masonry members. Place sleeves accurately and coordinate locations with
the Engineer.
Should any cutting and patching be required on account of failure of the
Contractor to coordinate penetrations, such cutting and patching shall be
done at the expense of the Contractor.
'
�
�
'
�
'
,
'
,
L_ I
�
�
,
�
'
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design SectionlVa '
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-10
r
'
,
'
,
,
,
�
'
'
'
,
,
,
,
'
�
,
a. Contractor shall not endanger the stability of any structural member
by cutting, digging, chasing, or drilling and shall not, at any time, cut
or alter the work without the Engineer's written consent.
1) Provide additional reinforcing if required.
2) Cutting shalt be done neatly using propertools and methods.
b. Subsequent patching to restore walls, ceilings, or floors to their
original condition shall be done by workmen skilled in their particular
field.
N. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment as indicated
or specified.
O
P
Q
R
S
1. Floor-mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 41N high concrete
housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab.
Material that may cause rusting or streaking on a building surface shall not be used.
Perform excavation and backfill in accordance with Section 02210.
Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the conduit and wire associated with
the HVAC equipment supplied under this Contract.
Enclosed electronic equipment located outdoors shall be provided with sun/rain
shields and oriented to minimize sun exposure.
Device Mounting:
1. Dimensions are to top of item unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting heights as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on the
Contract Drawings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
h.
i.
1�
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
Light switch: 481N.
Receptacle in offices and other finished areas: 161N.
Receptacle in all other locations: 481N.
Telephone outlet for desk-mounted phone: 161N.
Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone: 641N.
Bracket light above lavatory: 801N to bottom of fixture.
Disconnect / Safety-Switch: 641N to top of enclosure.
Panelboard: 721N to top of enclosure.
Motor starter: 641N to top of enclosure.
Pushbutton motor control station: 481N to top of enclosure.
A. Identify all major items of equipment including controls, panels, switches, contactors,
motor starters/controllers, junction boxes and metering by permanent nameplates,
with wording approved by the Engineer. Secure nameplates to equipment with
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-11
u
stainiess-steel screws or rivets
mechanical fasteners.
Adhesives may be used in conjunction with
,
'
B. Nameplates after installation shall be easily visible and shall bear notations ,
corresponding to those shown on the Record Drawings.
C. All conduits shall be identified with a stamped stainless-steel tag system. Conduit
tags shall be permanently attached to each exposed end of conduit runs such as in
man-holes, pull-boxes, panels, motor control centers, junction boxes, etc., and at
each point of entry into a structure or building. Each tag shall be stamped with the
appropriate conduit number per the conduit and cable schedules.
'
��
D. Each instrument shall be identified with a stamped stainless-steel tag system.
Instrument tags shall be permanently attached to each individual instrument and '
stamped with the appropriate tag number per the instrument specification section.
E. Each cable shall be identified with a heat-shrinkable polyolefin label printing system.
Instrumentation cables shall be labeled with the appropriate instrument tag
(Example: FIT-200-1). Multiplex cables, power and control cables shall be labeled
with the appropriate cable tag number per the equipment tag number (Example:
PP1-CKT-9).
F
C�'
�
All motor control centers, power panels, lighting panels, control panels, control
cabinets, etc., shall be identified with permanently mounted nameplates.
All power and lighting panels shall have typed schedules mounted on panel doors.
Identification Types:
1. Equipment Nameplates:
►i
3
a. Phenolic Resin or Thermoplastic Elastomer
1) Thickness: 3/32tN minimum.
2) Size: As required by text.
3) Letters: White letters on Black background.
4) Mount with stainless-steel screws.
Wre and Cable Labels:
a. Heat shrinkable Polyolefin
1) Size: As required by wire or cable.
2) Letters: Black letters on White background.
3) Heat-shrink after termination.
4) Replace damaged or illegible labels.
Raceway Tags:
a. Material: Stainless-Steel
b_ Size: As required by text.
c. Attach with stainless-steel wire and permanent crimp sleeve.
'
'
,
'
'
,
'
�
�
��
u
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design SectionlVa �
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-12
u
'
�l
'
3.3
,
,
,
'
'
'
�
'
�
r
�l
,
'
,
4. Instrument Tags:
a. Material: Stainless-Steel
b. Size: As required by text.
c. Attach with stainless-steel wire and permanent crimp sleeve.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.
1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of
fireproofing.
2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or damaged.
B. Make all penetrations through roofs prior to installation of roofing.
C. All penetrations required after installation of roofing, shall be completed by an
authorized roofer to maintain the roof warranty.
D. Make all penetrations of electrical work through walls water and weather-tight.
E. Equipment furnished under this Contract for use on future work and all concealed
equipment, including conduits, shall be dimensioned, on the Record Drawings, from
visible and permanent building features.
F. After installation, all equipment shall be tested as recommended by the
manufacturer.
G. Verify all components are operational.
H. Perform ground-fault performance testing as required by NEC Article 230-95(c).
I. Test Equipment Interface:
1. Verify systems coordination and operation.
J. Set all adjustable trip protective devices as required for system protection and
coordination.
K. Verify all system and equipment ground continuity.
L. Adjust installed equipment for proper operation of all electrical and mechanical
components.
M. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test.
1. If equipment or system fails re-test, replace it with products that conform to
Contract Documents.
2. Continue remedial measures and re-tests until satisfactory results are
obtained.
3. Remedial measures and re-tests will be done at no cost to the Owner.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design SectionlVa
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-13
�
3.4
3.5
N. The Engineer shall be notified of tests and Engineer may witness individual tests.
O. Required certifieates of testing and test reports shall be presented to the Engineer
upon completion of the tests.
P. At Completion of Installation:
1. Test to ensure all equipment is free of short circuits and improper grounds.
2. Test to ensure all equipment is operationaf.
CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from all interior and exterior surfaces.
B. Apply touch-up paint as required to repair scratches, etc.
C. Replace nameplates or wire and cable markers damaged during installation.
D. Thoroughly vacuum the interior of all enclosures to remove dirt and debris. Do NOT
use pressurized air systems to blow out dirt and debris.
DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Contract Requirements.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section/Va
Electrical and Basic Requirements
0992-0205 16010-14
r
�
,
�
�
,
'
'
'
�
,
LI�
,
��
SECTION 16050 - MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections
referenced therein shall be applied.
B. Specification Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Contract
requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and
submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable
Specification Section.
B. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying alt materials
used and methods of fabrication.
2. Complete assembly, layout, installation, and foundation drawings with clearly
marked dimensions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products for electrical
related work of sizes, types, ratings, and materials required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect property from any and all damage that might result from excavating and
backfilling.
B. Protect persons from injury at excavations, by barricades, warnings and illumination.
C. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions, to minimize possibility of washouts,
settlements and other damages and hazards.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
'
Marshal Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVaMate�ialsand
� Methods
0992-0205 16050-1
�-
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
,
'
r-,
A. General: Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed
without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling �
will be minimized.
B. Excavate with vertical-sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where
otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to
sustain sides of excavations. Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling
wherever such remova! would not endanger the work or other property. Where not
removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere
with other work.
C.
❑�
�
F.
Depth for sub-base Support: Unless otherwise noted, provide installation of sub-
base material(s). Excavate for installation of sub-base material in depth indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated, 6 IN below bottom of work to be supported.
Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet
piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local
codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period
excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation
progresses.
Excavate trenches to the uniform dimensions required for the particular item(s) to be
installed and provide sufficient working clearances. Dig trenches to approximate
depth and hand grade bottom to accurate elevation as required.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 61N below required elevation and
backfill with a 6 IN layer of sand prior to installation of conduit.
G. Where soil conditions at bottom of indicated excavation are unsatisfactory, excavate
additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with
sub-base material compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth.
H. Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings, store excavated material
(temporarily) near excavation, in manner that will not interfere with or damage
excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip-line).
Retain excavated material that complies with requirements for backfill material.
'
�
�
'
�
�
,
u
��
,
'
J. Dispose of excess or unsatisfactory excavated material(s) as directed by the t
Contract requirements and site conditions.
�J
Marshal Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVaMaferi�sand �
Methods
0992-0205 16050-2
'
'
'
�J
'
K. Refer to the Contract requirements and site conditions for removal of large
subsurface materials.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations
and from flooding project site and surrounding area.
B. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
C. Maintain dry excavations for electrical work, by removing water. Protect excavations
from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations;
protect excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary
sheeting and waterproofing. Provide adequate barriers that will protect other
excavations and below-grade property from being damaged by water, sediment or
erosion from or through electrical work excavations.
BASE PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Install subbase material to receive electrical work, and compact by tamping to form
a firm base for the work.
Provide finely-graded subbase material for equipment to be buried.
Tamp fill to uniform compacted density.
Where conduit crosses over areas which have been previously excavated to depths
greater than required for conduit installation, provide suitable support that comply
with details shown and Contract requirements.
BACKFILLING
A. Backfill with approved backfill matenals.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6 IN above equipment to be buried.
Backfill materials shall be soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 3/41N,
debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
Condition backfitl material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever
extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not
backfitl with frozen soil materials.
Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of electrical work, and compact
simultaneously; do not dislocate the work from installed positions.
Backfill excavations in 121N high courses of backfill material uniformly compacted
using power-driven hand-operated compaction equipment.
When backfilling excavations for electrical work, backfill to elevations matching
' Marshal Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /VaMaterialsar►d
Methods
0992-0205 16050-3
,
3.5
3.6
G.
�
finished grades.
Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 181N of column
or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass
under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing.
Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling
authorized by the Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or
displacement of conduit systems.
INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK
A. Refer to Specification Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete
Q
�
Miscellaneous Concrete Work
Fa
Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated on the
Contract Drawings and around all electrical work and other work that
penetrates or adjoins all concrete work. Provide formwork where required,
and tamp, screed and trowel surfaces. Cure grout as specified for concrete
work.
'
n
�
'
C'
�
�
�
,
Refer to Specification Sections for grouting of equipment base plates on '
foundations (with high-strength, non-shrinking grout), and similar grouting
requirements not defined herein.
Clean-Up: Upon completion of work, clean excess concrete and grout from adjacent
areas and surfaces. Remove excess concrete and grout by proper methods of
removal, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
SUPPORT AND FASTENERS
I
�
�
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install structural supports and fasteners for �
mounting and installing all electrical, lighting, alarm systems, instrumentation,
communications and other equipment furnished under this Contract.
B. Where the weight of equipment exceeds 75LBS and is supported from walls,
ceilings, columns and/or beams, such structural supports, methods, and locations
shall be approved in writing by a professional engineer currently registered in the
State of the projects location.
C. Concrete or Masonry Inserts
The Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all
conduit sleeves, anchor bolts, masonry inserts, and similar devices required
for installation of equipment furnished under this Contract.
2. The Contractor shall furnish leveling channels for all switchgear,
switchboards, motor control centers, and similar equipment. The leveling
channels shall be provided for installation in the equipment supporting pads.
�
,
'
'
u
Marshal Street Sa/snes Filfer Design Section /VaA�rialsand '
Methods
0992-0205 16050-4
�
�
�
,
r
Coordination of the installation of these channets with the concrete pad is
essential and required. Pad height shall be as required to maintain
coverage of the reinforcement bars while not exceeding the maximum
mounting heights requirements of the NEC.
D. Support Fastening and Locations
� 1. All equipment fastened to structural steel; columns, beams, and trusses shall
be made by approved clamps or welded. No holes shall be drilled in
structural steel.
�
�
�
I��
2. Where supports or hangers are required for heavy electrical equipment units
exceeding 75LBS, a registered professional engineer shall eheck the
structural members. Where required, additional sections shall be provided
for a safe installation.
3. All holes in hung ceilings for support rods, conduits, and other equipment
shall be made adjacent to ceiling supports where possible, to facilitate
removal of ceiling panels.
4. For interior dry areas, a bracket and channel type support of galvanized
steel construction shall be provided wherever required for the support of
starters, switches, panels, and miscellaneous equipment.
� 5. For outdoor service or in indoor damp/wet process areas, the support
system shall be made of either stainless steel, PVC coated rigid galvanized
steel, aluminum or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
'
6. All fastening hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) shall be approved
stainless steel materials or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
' 7. Atl supports shall be rigidly bolted together and braced to make a substantial
supporting framework. Where possibie, control equipment shall be grouped
together and mounted on a single framework. Wherever this occurs, a
� provision shall be made for ready access to the wiring for connections to the
equipment by means of boxes with screw covers.
�
�I
'
�
'
'
�
Q
Aluminum support members shall not be installed in direct contact with
concrete. Stainless steel or non-metallic "spacers" shall be used to prevent
contact of aluminum with concrete.
The Contractor is responsible for the design of supporting structures and
shall submit design details to the Engineer for acceptance before proceeding
with the fabrication and installation.
10. Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate
these metals as required with nylon washers, 9MIL polyethylene tape, or
gaskets.
END OF SECTION
, Marshal Street Salsnes Filfer Design Section /VaMateri�sand
Methods
0992-0205 16050-5
�
1
,
�
I�
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT AND RACEWAY
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, toois and equipment necessary for
furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into service all raceway to
include all conduits, conduit fittings, wireway, supports, etc. as required for a
complete electric installation as specified herein and indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
B. Conduit home runs for lighting, receptacle and other misc. circuits are not
necessarily indicated on the Contract Drawings; however, the circuit numbers are
shown. Conduit shall be furnished and installed for these circuits.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
I1
:
In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements, and the sections
referenced therein shall be applied.
Additional raceway from what is shown on the Contract Drawings may be required.
Coordinate with the requirements of equipment provided under other Divisions of the
specifications.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Raceway shall comply with the following applicable codes and standards as well as any
others within the specifications and drawings. In the event of any conflict between
these codes, regulations, standards, and Contract Documents, the most restrictive shall
apply.
American National Standards Institute (ANSf):
a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated.
b. C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc-Coated.
c. C80.4 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing.
d. C80.5 Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
e. C80.6 Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
b. A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
c. A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
d. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Nuts.
e. A569, Steel Carbon, Hot-Roiled Sheet and Strip, Commercial
Quality.
f. A570, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.
g. A575, Merchant Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars.
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-1
,
1.4
J�
k.
A635, Standard Specification for Steei, Sheet and Strip,
Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled.
D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride} (CPVC)
Compounds.
D1788, Standard Specification for Rigid
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastics.
D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and
Fittings.
F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground installation.
3. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL).
4. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. RN-1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
b. TC-2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and
EPC-80).
c. TC-6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation.
5
L
National Electric Contractors Association:
a. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical
Construction.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electric Code (NEC).
b. 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL):
a. 1, Flexible Metal Conduit.
b. 6, Rigid Metal Conduit.
c. 6A, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit — Aluminum.
d. 209, Cellular Metal Floor Raceways and Fittings.
e. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
f. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
g. 514, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.
h. 514B, Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings.
i. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
j. 797, Electrical Metallic Tubing.
k. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.
I. 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
m. 1242, Intermediate Metaf Conduit.
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
Ij
J
�
�
'
'
�
'
�
'
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-2
�
,
,
��
�
'
�l
�
'
�
'
�
�!
�
�
1. See Section 01300-Submittals and 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
2. Proposed routing of all site conduits including direct buried, concrete
encased, and long run above ground conduits.
3. Proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs.
4. Proposed routing and details of construction, including conduit and rebar, of
conduits embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuafs.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The material covered by this Specification is intended to be standard material of proven
performance as manufactured by reputable firms. Raceways and appurtenances shall
be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the
trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled for its intended service.
C. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the listed manufacturers are
acceptable.
2.2 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT (RAC)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation
2. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
3. Wheatland Tube Company.
B. RAC and associated fittings shall be manufactured from 6063 aluminum alloy in
temper designation T-1.
C. Standards
1. ANSI C80.5
2.3 PVC-COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT (PVC-RGS)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Thomas & Betts.
2. Perma-Cote.
3. Rob-Roy Ind.
B. PVC-RGS shall have a minimum 40MIL polyvinyl chloride exterior coating. The
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 161 ? 1-3
,
2.4
2.5
C.
coating shall be bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to
ANSI C80.1. The bond between the polyvinyl chloride coating and the conduit
surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the coating. PVC-RGS shall
have a nominal 2MIL, minimum, urethane interior coating and a urethane coating on
threads. The RGS conduit: shall have an epoxy prime coating prior to application of
polyvinyl chloride and urethane coatings.
Female ends shall have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or
21N, whichever is less beyond the opening. TF�e inside diameter of the sleeve shall
be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it.
D. Standards:
1. ANSI C80.1.
2. NEMA RN-1.
RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation
2. Carlon
3. Cantex
B. PVC shall be either Schedule 40 or Schedule-80. The polyvinyl-chloride plastic
compound shall meet, as a minimum, ASTM D1784 cell classification PVC 12233-A,
B, or C. PVC shall be rated for direct sunlight exposure, 90°C wire, and fire
retardant with low smoke emission.
C. Standards:
1. ANSI C33.91.
2. NEMA TC-2.
3. UL 651.
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Anamet, Inc.
2. Electri-Flex Company.
3. International Metal Hose Company.
B. LFMC shall have a core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized
steel strip with successive convolutions securety interlocked, contain an interwoven
copper strip suitable as a grounding means, and have an extruded vapor and liquid
tight polyvinyl chloride outer jacket positively locked to the steel core.
C. Standard:
'
_�
�
�
L�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa '
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-4
'
1. U L 360.
� 2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
�
'
u
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
0
��
.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Appleton.
Carlon.
Crouse-Hinds.
Killark.
OZ Gedney Company.
Perma-Cote.
RACO.
Rob-Roy Ind.
Steel City.
Thomas and Betts.
Western Plastics Company.
Fittings for Use with RAC:
1. Materials: Following minimum requirements unless otherwise noted.
2
3
4
5
6
7
a. Body: Copper-free aluminum with aluminum lacquer or aluminum
enamel finish.
b. Covers: Copper-free aluminum and gasketed.
c. Gaskets: Neoprene or PVC.
d. Insulators-phenolic, thermosetting: minimum 105 Deg C UL rating.
e. Grounding saddles tin-plated copper or bronze suitable for use with
copper and aluminum conductors.
f. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible braid.
g. Locknuts: Malleable iron, zinc plated.
All fittings: Threaded unless otherwise noted.
Conduit Hubs shall be cast aluminum with insulated throat.
Straight couplings: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they
are used.
Mogul pulling elbows and tees:
a. Die cast copper free aluminum.
b. Rain tight.
Conduit seals:
a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel or brass.
b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with tf�e sealing fitting.
Standards:
a. UL 467.
b. UL 514B.
Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC:
1. Materials: Following minimum requirements unless otherwise noted.
a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc- or cadmium-plated; steel, hot-dipped
galvanized; or steel zinc plated with aluminum lacquer or aluminum
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-5
I�
�
E
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
enamel finish.
b. Covers: Maileable iron, zinc plated and gasketed.
c. Gaskets: Neoprene or PVC.
d. Insulators-phenolic, thermosetting: minimum 105 Deg C UL rating.
e. Grounding saddles tin-plated copper or bronze suitable for use with
copper and aluminum conductors.
f. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible braid.
g. Locknuts: Malleable iron, zinc plated.
All fittings: Threaded unless otherwise noted.
Conduit Hubs shafl be cast aluminum with insulated throat.
Straight couplings: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they
are used.
Expansion and/or Deflection couplings:
a. 2 or 41N nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction.
b. 30-degree nominal deflection from the normal in all directions.
c. Watertight.
d. Insulating bushing.
e. End couplings/hubs - bronze; or steel zinc-plated with aluminum
cellulose lacquer finish.
f. Outer jacket-neoprene.
g. Jacket clamps-stainless steel.
h. Inner sleeve (when used) - molded plastic.
Service entrance heads:
a. Weather resistant.
b. Body: Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or copper-free
aluminum.
Mogul pulling elbows and tees.
a. Die cast copper free aluminum.
b. Rain tight.
Conduit seals:
a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel or brass.
b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting.
Standards:
a. UL 6.
b. UL 467.
c. UL 514B.
d. UL 1242.
Fittings for Use with PVC-RGS:
The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph
"Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC"; and coated as defined under
paragraph "PVC-RGS."
Fittings for Use with PVC:
Fittings shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the
eonduits with which they are used.
a. Standards:
�
�
�
�
�
lJ
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa ,
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-6
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
F.
1) UL 651.
2) NEMA TC-2-1978.
2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer as the conduit and fittings.
a. Shall not be more than 1 year past date of manufacture.
b. Standard: ASTM D2564.
Fittings for Use with LFMC:
1. Fittings shall meet the following minimum requirements unless otherwise
noted:
a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc-plated.
b. Ferrule: Steel, zinc-plated.
c. Locknuts and compression nuts: Malleable iron, zinc-plated.
d. Sealing ring: Neoprene.
2. Standard: UL 514.
2.7 STRUT CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Allied Power-Strut Products
b. B-Line Systems
c. Rob-Roy Industries
d. Thomas & Betts
e. Unistrut Building Systems
B. All strut channel, clamps, fittings and fastener materials shall conform to those as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1
�
r
�
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All conduit, raceway, wireway and associated fittings shall be stored in accordance
with the manufacturer recommendations and shall not be stored exposed to sunlight
or other UV rays.
INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall plan the layout of conduit and raceway systems so that when
the work is complete it will exhibit good workmanship practices in accordance with
NECA-1.
B. Routing of Conduits and Raceways:
1. Conduit and Raceway runs, where shown, indicate the preferred location.
Site conditions may affect actual routing. Contractor shall coordinate routing
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design
0992-0205
Section IVa
Conduit and Raceway
16111-7
C.
�7
and measurement with other trades and with equipment suppliers.
2. Shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or
other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair.
��
�
�
3. Wherever possible avoid routing conduits and raceways through areas of �
high ambient temperature or radiant heat.
Size of Conduits and Raceways:
1. The size of conduits and raceways are normally shown on the Contract
Drawings. If a size is not shown on the Contract Drawings, or if a minimum
size is not stated in the Specifications, then the size of conduits and
raceways shall be in accordance with the NEC.
2. Conduits shall not be smaller than 11N for underground installations and
3/4fN elsewhere, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
Types of Conduits and Raceways:
1. Shall be installed as defined in the Contract Drawings.
2. As required by NFPA.
3. LFMC:
a. Install as the final conduit to motors, electrically operated valves,
primary elements (instrumentation), and electrical equipment that is
liable to vibrate.
b. Shall not be used as a conduit run.
c. Maximum length shall not exceed:
1) 361N to motors.
2) 241N to all other equipment.
E. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration.
1. New construction:
a. Sleeves and block outs: Set in masonry walls during erection.
b. Sleeves and block outs: Set in concrete during forming.
1) Material: Not harmful to the concrete.
2) Not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete.
F. Conduit Runs:
1
2.
All conduits within a structure shall be installed concealed unless otherwise
noted on the Contract Drawings.
Total of Bends in a Conduit Run:
a. Less than 270 degrees.
b. Provide pull boxes, condulets, or pulling elbows or tees as needed.
Marshall Street Sa►snes Filter Design Section ►Va �
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-8
�
�
�
�
�
��
�
G.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
3
4.
5.
Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angies to structural members or
building lines.
Maintain minimum 21N separation between all conduits.
Maintain minimum 61N separation between instrumentation and power
conduits.
6. Maintain minimum 121N separation from process, gas, air and water pipes.
7. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete:
a. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of
the slab, column or beam.
b. Place conduit and accessories after reinforcing steel has been laid.
c. Shall not displace the reinforcement steel.
d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/21N of concrete cover around conduit.
e. Do not run against reinforcing steel.
f. Provide 21N minimum of spacing between conduits.
g. Install expansion/deflection fittings wherever conduit spans structural
or expansion joint.
Fietd Bending of Conduits:
1. Utilize tools, equipment, methods and recommendations by the
manufacturer to make all field bends.
2. The internal diameter of conduit shall not be reduced or distorted.
Field Cutting and Threading Conduits:
1. Utilize tools, equipment, methods and recommendations by the
manufacturer to field cut and thread conduit.
2. All field cut conduit shall be smooth and evenly chamfered on the inside.
3. All fietd threaded conduit shall be clean and degreased before applying a
zinc rich paint.
Terminating Conduits:
1. NEMA 1 enclosures:
a. Top: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
b. Side: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
2. NEMA 2/12/12K enclosures:
a. Top: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings.
b. Side: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
�
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-9
�
Aa
3. NEMA 3/3R/3S/13 enclosures:
a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats.
b. Side: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings.
c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
4. NEMA 4/4X enclosures:
a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats.
b. Side: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats.
c. Bottom: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats.
5. NEMA 5 enclosures:
a. Top: Sealing locknuts with insulated throats.
b. Side: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings.
c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings.
6. NEMA 6/6P enclosures:
a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved cable
gland fittings.
b. Side: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved
cable gland fittings.
c. Bottom: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved
cable gland fittings.
7. NEMA 7/8/9 enclosures:
a. Enclosures shall be provided with integral conduit hubs.
Conduit Seal Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
In each conduit entering or leaving a Class I area.
In each conduit in a Class I Division 1 area entering or leaving an enclosure
containing switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays, resistors or other
apparatus which may produce ares, sparks or high temperature.
In each conduit 21N or larger in a Class I Division 1 area entering or leaving
an enclosure containing terminals, splices and taps.
In each conduit in a Class I Division 2 area entering or leaving an enclosure
required to be approved for use in Class I environments.
In each conduit in a Class II location between an enclosure required to be
dust ignition-proof and an enclosure that is not required to be dust
ignition-proof.
In each conduit in a corrosive area entering or leaving that area and entering
or leaving an electrical equipment enclosure in that area.
So that the filler plug and drain is accessible.
Complete with approved sealing fiber and compound.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-10
�
�
�
K. Conduit Coatings:
� 1. The protective coating of conduits, fittings, and accessories shall be
maintained.
� a. Repair PVC-RGS utilizing a patching compound, of the same
material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit;
or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicone
composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape.
� 1) The total nominal thickness: 40MIL.
2. Repair surfaces that will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation.
' L. Power Cable Pulling Preparation
� 1. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before power cables are pulled.
2. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/41N smaller than the mtenor of the
conduit, to remove obstructions.
� 3. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit.
� 4. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until
power cables are pulled.
5. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shatl be used to pull power cables in rigid
� non-metallic conduit systems.
END OF SECTION
,
�
�
�
�
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Conduit and Raceway
0992-0205 16111-11
�
t
�
�
�
SECTION 16115 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT, MANHOLES AND
HANDHOLES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
' 1.2
�
�
�J
�
�
�
�
A. Section Includes manholes; handholes; puil-boxes; and underground power, controi,
and instrumentation conduits and ductbanks.
B. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of
specification Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections
referenced therein shall be applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials
(AASHTO).
2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):
� a) A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008 Edition.
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Contract Drawings indicate the intended location of manholes, handholes
and pull-boxes; and routing of ductbanks and direct buried conduit. Field
conditions may affect actual routing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
� 1.4
�
�
A. Direct-buried conduit means individual (single) underground conduits without
concrete encasement.
B. Direct-buried ductbank means multiple underground conduits, in a common trench,
without concrete encasement.
C. Concrete encased ductbank means any underground conduit or combination of
underground conduits encased in a common concrete envelope.
SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 — Submittals and Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic
Requirements.
B. Fabrication and layout drawings:
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-1
,
�
1. Provide cross-sectioned sketch of each ductbank.
a) Dimension spacing between conduits.
b) Dimension concrete envelope and reinforcing, where applicable.
2. Provide ductbank and direct-buried conduit profile.
a} Dimension from grade to ductbank and direct buried conduit.
b) Dimension from ductbank and direct buried conduit to other utilities
in the route.
3. Certifications.
4. Test reports.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Section 01300.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Precast manholes, handholes and pull-boxes:
a) Oldcastle Precast
b) Utility Vault Co.
2. Manhole and handhole covers:
a) Neenah.
b) Utility Vault Co.
3. Cable racks:
a) Unistrut.
b) B-Line.
c) Condux International, Inc.
d) Underground Devices, Inc.
4. Cable pulling irons:
a) Condux International, Inc.
5. Ground rods and grounding equipment:
a) See Section 16450 — Grounding and Bonding.
6. Ground wire:
a) See Section 16450 — Grounding and Bonding.
. 7. Duct terminators:
a) Condux International, Inc.
8. Conduit:
a) See Section 16111- Conduit and Raceway.
9. Duct spacers:
a) Underground Devices, Inc.
b) Condux International, Inc.
10. Precast cable trench:
a) Concast
b) Trenwa.
11. Warning Tape:
a) W. H. Brady Company.
b) Seton Nameplate Company.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-2
� 2.2
�
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
u
MATERIALS
A. Handholes and Pull-Boxes:
Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Boxes and covers are required to conform to all test provisions of
ANSI/SCTE 77 "Specification For Underground Enclosure Integrity"
for Tier 15 applications at a minimum unless otherwise noted on the
drawings.
In no assembly can the cover design load exceed the design load of
the box.
All components in an assembly (box 8� cover) are manufactured
using matched surface tooling.
All covers are required to have a minimum 0.50 coefficient of friction
in accordance with ASTM C 1028.
2. Pre-Cast steel reinforced concrete:
a
c.
C+7
Boxes are required to meet ASTM C 858 with 4000PS1 minimum
compressive strength concrete and designed for AASHTO H-20
loading unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.
Tongue-and-grove double sealed joints on mating edges of pre-cast
components. The joints shall firmly interlock adjoining components
and provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Joints
shall be sealed with approved watertight joint sealant as prescribed
in the manufacturer's installation specifications and conforming to
AASHTO M198, Type B. Sealing material shall be instatled in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Knockout panels or pre-cast individual conduit openings may be
used. Blockout panels are not acceptable.
Cover:
1) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron,
suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing
surfaces shall be used.
2) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design.
3) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters
"Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral
letters no less than 21N high as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
3. Cast-In-Place:
a. Comply with Section 03300 unless otherwise specified herein.
b. Constructed as detailed on the Contract Drawings.
c. Cover:
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-3
�
0
B. Manholes:
1) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron,
suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing
surfaces shall be used.
2) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design.
3) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters
"Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral
letters no less than 21N high as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Shall have an AASHTO live load rating of H-20, unless otherwise
noted in the Contract Drawings or Specifications.
Pre-Cast steel reinforced concrete:
a
�
c.
.�
e.
Boxes are required to meet ASTM C 858 with 4000PS1 minimum
compressive strength concrete and designed for AASHTO H-20
loading unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.
Tongue-and-grove double sealed joints on mating edges of pre-cast
components. The joints shalt firmly interlock adjoining components
and provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Joints
shall be sealed with approved watertight joint sealant as prescribed
in the manufacturer's installation specifications and conforming to
AASHTO M198, Type B. Sealing material shall be installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Knockout panels or pre-cast individual conduit openings may be
used. Blockout panels are not acceptable.
Minimum interior dimensions shall be 4FT Wide x 4FT Long x 6FT
Tall.
Cover:
1) Minimum access opening dimensions:
a) Rectangular — 261N x 221N
b) Round — 261N Diameter
2) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron,
suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing
surfaces shall be used.
3) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design.
4) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters
"Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral
letters no less than 21N high as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
2. Cast-In-Place:
a. Comply with Section 03300 unless otherwise specified herein.
b. Constructed as detailed on the Contract Drawings.
c. Shal{ have an AASHTO live load rating of H-20, unless otherwise
noted on the Drawings.
d. Minimum interior dimensions shall be 4FT Wde x 4FT Long x 6FT
Tall.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-4
�
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
�j
�J
L_J
i
r
'
�
�
�
�_J
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
�
E
F
G.
0
J
e
Cover:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Minimum access opening dimensions:
a) Rectangular — 261N x 221N
b) Round — 261N Diameter
Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron,
suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing
surfaces shall be used.
The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design.
The upper side of each cover shall have the tetters
"Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral
letters no less than 21N high as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Cable Racks:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized hot-rolled steel; or Lexan.
2. 120LBS minimum loading capacity.
3. Three-point locking to resist twisting.
Cable Pulling Irons:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel.
2. 6000LBS minimum pulling load.
Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment:
1. See Section 16450 —Grounding and Bonding.
Ground Wire:
1. See Section 16120 — Wire and Cable.
Duct Terminators:
1. Wndow type.
2. ABS plastic.
3. Proide for conduit entrance.
4. Designed for installation into manhole, handhole or pult-box walls for a
watertight seal.
5. Sufficient space between terminator walls to allow for placement of rebar
and concrete.
Conduit:
1. See Section 16111 — Conduit and Raceway.
Duct Spacers:
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-5
1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene.
2. Interlocking.
3. Provide 21N minimum spacing between conduits.
K. Warning Tape:
1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers:
a) W H Brady Company, Catalog S-10, #91296.
2. Material: Polyethylene.
3. Thickness:3.5MIL.
4. Tensile strength: 1750PS1.
5. Size: 61N wide (minimum).
6. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded:
a) Message continuously printed.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Comply with Section 16050 — Materials and Methods, for trenching,
backfilling and compacting.
3. Buried conductor warning tape:
a. See Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
B. Manholes, Handholes and Pull-Boxes:
1. Shape: Manholes, handholes and pull-boxes may be either square or
rectangular.
2. Size:
a. Manholes shall have minimum interior dimensions of 48 x 481N with
a minimum interior height of 721N unless other dimensions are
detailed on the Contract Drawings.
b. Handholds shall be sized for the number of conduits entering unless
other dimensions are detailed on the Contract Drawings.
1) Minimum interior dimensions shall be 24 x 171N with a
minimum depth of 361N.
c. Pull-Boxes shall be sized for the number of conduits entering unless
other dimensions are detailed on the Contract Drawings.
3. Precast or cast-in-place:
a. Optional unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings or
Specifications.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-6
,
,
4. Precast manholes, handholes and puli-boxes shall be installed in
� accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for "subject to occasional
heavy vehicles."
a. Do not use precast manholes handholes, pull-boxes in roadways.
�
r
5. For cast-in-place construction, comply with Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
6. Provide minimum 121N of tamped crushed rock or gravel prior to setting
manhole, handhole or pull box.
7. Construct manholes, handholes and pull-boxes approximately where shown
� on the Contract Drawings. Determine the exact locations after careful
consideration has been given to location of other utilities, grading, and
paving.
,
�
�J
�
�
a. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation
and construction of manholes, handholes and pull-boxes.
8. Grout or seat all joints:
a. For precast construction, comply with the manufacturer's
instructions.
b. For cast-in-place construction, comply with Section 03300 — Cast-in-
Place Concrete.
Set frames and covers:
a. For manholes, handholes and pull-boxes located in roadways, paint
with two coats asphaltic paint before setting and set top of covers
flush with finished surface of paving.
b. For manholes, handholes and pull-boxes not located in roadways,
set top of covers 21N above finished grade. Slope surrounding grade
away from edge to insure water drains away from opening.
c. Install sufficient number of concrete extensions between top of
manhole, handhole or pull-box frame as required to elevate cover to
existing grade level.
10. Support cables on watls by cable racks:
a. Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks:
1) Quantity of hooks as required by the number of conductors.
2) Minimum of (2) cable hooks per rack.
b. Install a minimum of (2) racks on each wall in each manhole,
handhole and pull-box.
c. Space cable racks so that both ends of cable splices will be
supported horizontally.
d. In manholes, install (1) spare hook on each rack.
e. Install a cable-pulling iron in each wall opposite each ductbank
entrance.
11. Grounding: In each manhole, drive copper ground rod into the earth and
extend ground rod approximately 61N above finished floor.
a. In precast structures, drill openings in floor for ground rod.
, Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section iva
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-7
►�
L�
12
13.
b. Connect all metallic conduits, racks, and other metallic components
to ground rod by means of #8AWG minimum tinned copper wire and
approved grounding clamps.
Provide an 181N DIA sump in the bottom of each manhole and hand hole.
After installation is complete, backfill and compact soil around manhoies and
hand holes.
C. Underground Conduits:
1. Concrete encased ductbank:
a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits completely
encased in minimum 21N of concrete.
b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that top of concrete encased
duct, at any point, is not less than the minimum depths established
by the NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions):
1) PVC-RGS conduit: 241N.
2) PVC sch-40 conduit: 241N.
3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic:
a) All applications: 241N.
4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings.
c. Under traffic areas (roadways, parking lots, etc.) and for a distance
10FT either side of the traffic area, and elsewhere as defined on the
Contract Drawings or specified, the concrete shall be reinforced in
accordance with Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3
Direct-buried duct bank:
a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits directly buried
in earth.
1) Lay conduits on minimum 21N sand base completely encased
by 21N of selected backfill containing no stones or other hard
material larger than 1/21N diameter.
b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that the top selected backfill at
any point, is not less than the minimum depths established by the
NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions).
1) PVC-RGS conduit: 241N.
2) PVC sch-80 conduit: 241N.
3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic:
a) All applications: 241N.
4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings.
Direct-buried conduit:
a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits directly buried
in earth.
1) Lay conduit on minimum 21N sand base completely encased
by 21N of selected backfill containing no stones or other hard
material larger than 1/21N diameter.
b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that top of the selective
backfill, at any point, is not less than the minimum depths
established by the NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions).
1) PVC-RGS conduit: 241N.
2) PVC sch-80 conduit: 241N.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
LJ
�
�_ I
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section iva �
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-8
u
�
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
4.
3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic:
a) Ali applications: 241N.
4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings.
Underground conduits and ductbanks shall comply with the following:
a. Minimum grade shall be 41N per 100FT or as detailed on the
Contract Drawings.
1) Low point shall be at one end of the conduit run.
b. During construction and after conduit installation is complete; plug
the ends of all conduits.
c. Provide conduit supports and separators of concrete, plastic, or other
suitable nonmetallic, non-decaying materiaf designed for that
d
e
0
pu rpose.
1) Concrete encasement supports shall provide a uniform
minimum clearance of 21N between the bottom of the trench
and the bottom row of conduit.
2) Separators shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 21N
between conduits.
3) Place supports and separators for PVC conduit on maximum
centers as indicated for the following trade sizes:
a) 11N and less: 2FT.
b) 1-1/4 to 31N: 4FT.
c) 3-1/2 to 61N: 6FT.
4) Ptace supports and separators for RGS conduit on maximum
centers as indicated for the following trade sizes:
a) 11N and less: 8FT.
b) 1-1/4 to 2-1l21N: 10FT.
c) 31N and larger: 12FT.
5) Securely anchor conduits to supports and separators to
prevent movement during placement of concrete or soil.
6) Do not place concrete or soil until conduifs have been
observed by the Engineer.
Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 61N horizontally.
Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1) Make plastic conduit joints by uniformly brushing a plastic
solvent cement on inside of plastic coupling fitting and
outside of conduit ends. Slip conduit and fitting together with
a quick one-quarter turn twist to set joint tightly.
Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 5
degrees by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 251N.
1) Sweep bends shall be made up of one curved section.
Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs.
1) Minimum radius of 181N for conduits less than 31N trade size
and 361N for conduits 31N trade size and larger.
After the conduit run has been completed, pull a standard flexible
mandrel having a length of not less than 121N and a diameter
approximately 1/41N less than the inside diameter of the conduit
through each conduit. Then pull a brush with stiff bristles through
each conduit to remove any foreign material left in conduit.
Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in pull-cords.
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /va
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-9
�
D. Warning Tape:
2
1) Install a 1/8iN polypropylene pull-cord free of kinks and
splices in all unused new ducts.
2) Extend pull-cord 3FT beyond ends of conduit and fasten to
prevent loss of pull-cord in conduits.
Transition from PVC to RGS conduit with a minimum of 3FT prior to
entering a structure or going above ground.
1) Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2) PVC conduit may be extended directly to pull, junction and
transformer boxes; manholes and handholes.
Where conduits enter transformer boxes; manholes and handholes:
1) Terminate PVC conduits in end bells.
2) Terminate PVC-RGS conduits in insulated bushings.
Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit,
and direct-buried wire and cable.
a. 61N below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is 121N or more
below finished grade.
b. 31N below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is less than
121N below finished grade.
Provide warning tape as follows:
a. Electrical trenches and ductbanks or directly buried conduit:
1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1 st line),
"BURIED ELECTRIC LINE" (2nd line).
2) Letters: 1-1/41N minimum.
3) Interval: Continuous.
4) Color: Red and black letters.
0
c.
Trenches and direct-buried or conduit encased telephone lines:
1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1 st line),
"BURIED TELEPHONE LINE" (2nd line).
2) Letters: 1-1/4fN minimum.
3) Interval: Continuous.
4) Color: Orange with black letters.
Trenches with direct-buried or conduit encased computer or SCADA
system communications lines:
1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1 st line),
"BURIED COMPUTER LINE" (2nd line).
2) Letters: 1-1l41N minimum.
3) Interval: Continuous.
4) Color: Orange with black letters.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the Owner with two sets of precast cable trench cover removal tools.
END OF SECTION
��
..-,
�_�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
LI
�
���
�
�
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section iva ,
UG Conduit, Manholes and Handholes
0992-0205 16115-10
�
�
�
�
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE: 600 VOLT AND BELOW
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, test, and place in satisfactory operating
condition, ready for service, all cables and wires indicated on the Contract Drawings
and as specified herein or required for proper operation of the installation, with the
exception of internal wiring provided by electrical equipment manufacturers. The
work of connecting cables to equipment, machinery, and devices shall be
considered a part of this Section. All hardware, junction boxes, bolts, clamps,
insulators, and fittings required for the installation of cable and wires system shall be
furnished and installed by the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and other material required to
substantiate conformance with the requirements set forth on the Contract Drawings
and in Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements, and Section 01300 -
Submittals. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, detailed
specifications and product data sheets for the power, control, and instrumentation
cable required for this project.
C. The wire and cable to be furnished and installed for this project shall be the product
of manufacturers who have been in the business of manufacturing wire and cable
for a minimum of ten (10) years.
D. Reference Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General
Conditions and Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, the Contractor shall obtain from the
wire and cable manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests
3. Wring Identification Methods.
Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
SHOP DRAWINGS
�
1:3
C
Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and
data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the
proposed material's compliance with the Contract Documents.
Partial, incomplete, or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
' Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-1
�
1
2
3
Material specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used
and methods of fabrication.
Cable pulling calculations.
Wiring identification methods and materials.
1.4 IDENTIFICATION
�
i
��
A. Each cable shall be identified as specified in Part 3, EXECUTION, of this �
Specification.
1.5 CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS
A. The Contractor shall submit a list with a minimum of four manufacturers standard
lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each type of lubricant required.
Lubricant shall be non-hardening type.
1.6 CABLE PULL CALCULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall submit cable pulling calculations and shall be performed by a
currently registered professional electrical engineer. The calculations shall define
pulling tension and sidewall loading SWBP (sidewall bearing pressure) values for all
cable installations rated 600V with #1/OAWG conductors and larger greater than 200
feet in length. The calculations for straight horizontal cable installations rated 600V
with #1/OAWG conductors and larger less than 200 FT are not required.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The wire and cable covered by this Specification is intended to be standard
equipment of proven performance. Wire and cable shall be designed, constructed
and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate
satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and shown on the Contract
Drawings. Only one manufacturer for each cable type shall be permitted.
2.2 600V POWER WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Q
600V rated cable and wire shall consist of stranded, copper conductor with
insulation rated XHHW-2, 90°C for wet locations and THHN, 90°C for dry or damp
locations.
Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM-68, B-33 and B-189, Class B or C
stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum size wire
shall be #12AWG.
2.3 600V CONTROL CABLE
A. 600V rated control cable shall consist of stranded, copper conductor with insulation
rated THWN, 75°C for wet locations and THHN, 90°C for dry or damp locations. �
The individual conductors of the multiple conductor cable shall be color coded for
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa �
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-2
�
l:3
proper identification. Color coding shall be equai to ICEA S-68-514, Table K-1.
Cables shall meet requirements of IEEE-383.
Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM B-8 and B-33 or B-189, Ctass B or
C stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum wire size
shall be #14AWG.
600V SHIELDED MOTOR POWER CABLE FOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
I1
�
C
Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, the power connection between the
variable frequency drive (VFD) and the associated motor shall utilize a shielded
three-conductor plus ground conductor VFD output cable.
Shielded motor power cables with #2AWG and smaller conductors shall have an
overall polyvinyl chloride jacket, utilize XLPE conductor insulation with 100 percent
rated ground conductor, overall foil shield, 85% TC braid and drain wire.
Shielded motor power cables with #1AWG and larger conductors shall have an
overall polyvinyl chloride jacket, utilize XLPE conductor insulation with three-
symmetrical BC grounds, two spiral copper tape shields.
D. Shielded Motor cable shall meet the following requirements.
1. Utilize high-strand tined copper conductors.
2. Lower capacitance suitable for longer runs
3. Sunlight and oil resistant.
4. Suitable for Class I and II; Division 2 hazardous locations.
5. Rated for 90 Deg. C temperature for wet or dry locations.
6. Pass UL 1685 vertical tray flame test
E. 600V rated shielded motor power cable shall be Belden 29500 series, or equal.
LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE WIRE AND CABLE
A. The lighting and receptacle branch circuit wire shall consist of stranded, copper
conductors with insulation rated THWN, 75°C for wet locations and THHN, 90°C for
dry or damp locations.
:
L
Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM-B8, B-33 and B-189, Class B or C
stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum size wire
shalt be #12AWG.
Lighting and receptacle cables and wire shall be manufactured by the General
Cable Company, Southwire Cable Company or equal.
INSTRUMENTATION SIGNAL CABLE (STP)
A. The instrumentation cable for analog signals shall be individually shielded twisted
pair cable (STP) or individually shielded twisted multi-pair cable. Conductors shall
be tin or alloy coated, soft, annealed copper, #16AWG minimum with a minimum of
19 strands with 600V rated insulation for 75°C. Pairs shall have 100% coverage foil
shields with a#18AWG tinned copper drain wire. Outer jackets shall be chromed
polyvinyl chloride.
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-3
�
2.7
f:3
�
Instrumentation cables to be direct buried shall be UL labeled for direct buried '
service.
DATA CABLE (CAT-6e) �
A. All data cables shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 (Category 6e), #24AWG copper, plenum
B. rated and ETL Type-CMP.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 600V CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
l:?
C
The cable and wires shall be installed as specified herein and shown on the
Drawings.
The cables shall be terminated in accordance with the cable and/or termination
product manufacturer's instructions for the particular type of cable.
To minimize oxidation and corrosion, wire and cable shall be terminated using an
oxide-inhibiting joint compound recommended for "copper-to-copper" connections.
D. Splices shall not be allowed in the underground duct, manhole and handhole
systems. If splices are required, the Contractor shall obtain approval in writing from
the Engineer prior to splicing. Exterior splicing material shall be heat shrink
insulation HDT or equal. No "Butt-Splicing" of AC or DC circuit control conductors or
instrumentation cable shall be allowed.
E
F
Wire and Cable Sizes
1. The sizes of wire and cabfe shall be as shown on the Drawings, or if not
shown, as approved by the Engineer. If required due to field routing, the
size of conductors and respective conduit shall be increased so that the
voltage drop does not exceed 3%.
2. Minimum wire size within contro4 panels, motorcontrol centers, switchboards
and similar equipment shall be #12AWG for power and #14AWG for control.
Number of Wires
�
�
� _�
�
��
�
�
�
�
C�
1. The number of wires indicated on the Contract Drawings for the various �
control, indication, and metering circuits were determined for general
schemes of control and for particular indication and metering systems.
2. The actual number of wires installed for each circuit shall, in no case, be less
than the number required; however, the Contractor shall add as many wires
as may be required for control and indication of the actual equipment
selected for installation at no additional cost to the Owner. The addition of
conductors shall be coordinated with and approved by the Engineer to avoid
violations of the NEC regarding conduit fill.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Wire and Cab/e: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-4
�
�
�
�
,
�
�
�
u
�
�
I
�
�
�
�
�I
L�
�
�
�
�l
�
H
J
K.
Wiring Identification
1. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner and/or Engineer to come to an
agreement regarding wire and cable identification prior to developing a wire
and cable schedule.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a wire and cabte schedule in an
electronic spreadsheet type file format indicating the wire and cable tag
number, to and from destinations, size, usage description, and device
terminals.
3
4
5
All wiring shall be identified with a unique wire or cable tag number and shall
be labeled at each termination. Tag numbers shall correspond with the
accepted wire and cable schedule and shall not be duplicated.
Wire identification shall be accomplished through the use of a printer with
white, polyolefin heat shrinkable wire marking sleeves.
All single-phase and three-phase wiring shall be color coded at each
termination. The color coding is applicable to all power, control, alarm,
signal, and instrumentation cables, and conductors.
Cable Installation
1. All interior cable not protected by a compartment enclosure shall be run in
conduit.
Wring Supplies
1.
2.
Only electrical wiring supplies manufactured under high standards of
production and meeting the approval of the Engineer shall be used.
Rubber insulating tape shall be in accordance with ASTM Des. D119.
Friction tape shall be in accordance with ASTM Des. D69.
Training of Cable
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to train cables
around cable vaults within buildings and in manholes in the outdoor
underground duct system. Sufficient length of cabte shall be provided in
each manhole and vault so that the cable can be trained and racked in an
approved manner. In training or racking, the radius of bend of any cable
shall be not less than the manufacturer's recommendation. Atl manhole
cables shall be arc and fire-proofed. The training shall be done in such a
manner as to minimize chaffing.
Connections at Control Panels, Limit Switches, and Similar Devices
1. Where stranded wires are terminated at panels, and/or devices, connections
shall be made by solderless lug, crimp type ferrule or solder dipped.
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-5
�
L
M
2. Where enclosure sizes and sizes of terminals at limit switches, solenoid
valves, float switches, pressure switches, temperature switches, and other
devices make 7-strand, #12AWG, wire terminations impractical, the
Contractor shall terminate external circuits in an adjacent junction box of
proper size and shall install #14AWG stranded wires from the device to the
junction box in a conduit. The #12 AWG field wiring shalf also be terminated
in the same junction box to complete the circuit.
Pulling Temperature
1. Cable shall not be flexed or pulled when the temperature of the insulation or
of the jacket is such that damage will occur due to low temperature
embrittlement. When cable will be pulled with an ambient temperature within
a three day period prior to putling of 40°F or lower, cable reels shall be
stored during the three day period prior to pulling in a protected storage area
with an ambient temperature not lower than 55°F and pulling shall be
completed during the work day for which the cable is removed from the
protected storage.
Color Coding
1. Conductor insulation shall be color coded as follows:
a) 480V AC Power:
Phase A - BROWN
Phase B - ORANGE
Phase C - YELLOW
Neutral — GREY
b) 120/208V or 120/240V AC Power:
Phase A - BLACK
Phase B - RED
Phase C - BLUE
Neutral — WHITE
c) 120VAC Control:
Ungrounded conductors — RED
Ungrounded conductors, foreign source - YELLOW.
d) 24VAC Control:
All wiring — ORANGE
e) 24VDC Power:
Positive Lead - RED
Negative Lead — BLACK
fl 24VDC Control:
�
'
r
�
�
�
�
r
�
�J
�
�J
�
�
�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va �
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-6
�
u
Ij
�l
,
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
'!I
u
L__I�
'
�
u
�
�
9)
Ungrounded conductors — BLUE
Grounded conductors — BLUE w/ WHITE stripe
Equipment Grounding Conductor:
All wiring — GREEN
2. Conductors #4AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded with a separate
color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used consistently
throughout the system. Larger cables shall be coded by the use of colored
tape.
3.2 INSTRUMENTATION / DATA CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
�
�
Grounding of cable shield shall be accomplished at one end point only.
A raceway containing instrumentation / data cable shall be installed to provide the
following clearances:
1
2
Raceway installed parallel to raceway conductors energized at 480 through
208 volts shall be 18 IN and 208/120 volts shall be 12 IN.
Raceway installed at right angles to conductors energized at 480 volts or
120/208 volts shall be 6 IN.
Where practical, raceways containing instrumentation / data cable shall cross
raceway containing conductors of other systems at right angles.
D. Where instrumentation / data cables are installed in panels, etc., the Contractor shall
arrange wiring to provide maximum clearance between cables and other
conductors. Instrumentation / data cables shall not be installed in same bundle with
conductors of other circuits.
E. Additional pullboxes shall be furnished and installed for ease of cable pulling and the
cable manufacturer's recommended conduit fill factor shall be foltowed. Where
required for specifically directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall moisture seal
the cables at all connections with OZ Gedney Type "CSB", or equal, sealing
bushings.
F. All cable, insulation and jacket shall have adequate strength to allow for it to be
pulled through the conduit systems. Sufficient conductors shall be installed to
provide space and serve future equipment where shown and specified. All
conductors shall be color coded and all wires shall be suitably tagged with
permanent markers at each end.
3.3 TESTING
A. All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required:
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-7
B
C
D
E
Shop Test
a.
Q
Prior to the first shipment of each size of power, control, and
telephone / data cable to be furnished and installed under this
Contract, samples of each size of cable shall be subjected to
complete physical and electrical factory production tests at the
manufacturer's plant. Other cable and wiring shall be tested in
accordance with the applicable ICEA Standards. Six copies of
certified test data sheets shalf be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to installation at the site. Subsequent shipment of
each size of wire shall be covered by certificates of compliance
which shall list Contractor's name, point of delivery, reel numbers,
size of wire, length of wire, and date of shipment. Certificates shall
attest the wires and cables comply with specification requirements
and that wires and cables are equal in every respect to wires and
cables which have been successfully tested.
All test data or certificates shall be notarized and submitted.
2. Field Tests
a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements
specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010 -
Electrical, Basic Requirements.
b. After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for insulation
levels and continuity. Insulation resistance between conductors of
the same circuit and between conductor and ground shall be tested.
Testing for insulation levels shall be as follows:
1) For 600V rated power and control cable, apply 1,OOOVDC
from a Megaohmeter for a11600V wires and cabfes installed
in lighting, control, power, indication, alarm and motorfeeder
circuits. Testing for continuity shall be "test light" or "buzzer".
2) 600V rated instrumentation signal cable shall be tested from
conductor to conductor, conductor to shield, and canductor to
ground using a volt-ohmmeter. The resistance value shall be
200 megaohms or greater.
Low voltage wires and cables shall be tested before being connected to motors,
devices or terminal blocks.
Voltage tests shall be made successively between each conductor of a circuit and
all other conductors of the circuit grounded.
If tests reveal defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall make the necessary
repairs or shall replace the cable as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost
to the Owner.
All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall supply all
testing equipment.
END OF SECTION
�
�
�
�
�
r
�
�
�
�
��
��
,
��
�
r�
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va '
Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below
0992-0205 16120-8
�
SECTION 16130 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Outlet, pull and junction boxes.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Contract and Bidding Requirements.
2. Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Refer to Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Refer to Section 01300 — Submittals
2. Refer to Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Contract and Bidding Requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the foltowing manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Galvanized steel boxes:
2. Appleton Electric Co.
3. Steel City.
4. Raco.
B. Corrosion-resistant boxes:
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section lVa
Out/et Pull and Junction Boxes
0992-0205 16130-1
2.2
1. Hoffman Engineering Co.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
C. Hazardous location boxes (Class I, II & III):
1. Appleton Electric Co.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
3. Killark.
4. O-Z/Gedney.
D. Raintight and watertight boxes:
1. Appleton Electric Co.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
E. Terminal boxes:
1. Hoffman Engineering Ca
F. Exposed switch and receptacle boxes:
1. Appleton Electric Co.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
3. Killark.
MATERIALS
A. Pull and Junction Boxes for Wet Areas:
1. Material: 14GA steel with polyester powder coating inside and out over
phosphatized surfaces.
a. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts.
b. Stainless steel clamps on four sides.
c. Flat cover with oil resistant gasket.
d. NEMA 4 classification.
e. UL listed.
2. Pull and Junction Boxes for Corrosive Areas:
a. Material: 14GA steel with powdered epoxy resin coating inside and
out or fiberglass reinforced polyester material.
3. Fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes:
a. Hinged door with latch and lockout.
b. Neoprene door gasket.
c. Grounding bushing(s).
d. NEMA 4X classification.
e. UL listed.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va �
Outlet Pull and Junction Boxes
0992-0205 16130-2
,
'
�
�
,
�
L�
�
r
�
�
!�
'
��
�
�
�
4.
5
0
7
Pull and Junction Boxes for Hazardous Areas:
a. Material: Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free cast aluminum.
b. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub equipped.
c. Flat bolted-down or threaded cover with neoprene gasket.
d. Stainless steel hex head screws.
e. Explosionproof, UL listed for Class 1 Groups C and D.
Large Pull and Junction Boxes (100 CU IN and larger):
a. Located in wet and corrosive areas:
1) NEMA 4X with stainless steel screws.
b. Type 304L welded stainless steel:
1) Constructed of 14GA 304L stainless steel with seams
continuously welded, ground smooth with no knockouts.
2) Rolled lip around all sides.
3) Rigid handles for covers larger than 9SF or heavier than
25LBS.
4) Split covers when heavier than 25LBS.
Terminal Boxes:
a. Galvanized 16GA steel box provided with p{ain blank screw cover,
subpanel, and terminal points.
b. Refer to Drawing for dimensions and number of terminals.
c. Terminal blocks shall be screw-post barrier-type with white marker
strip.
d. Rated 20 ampere, minimum 600V.
Fiberglass Cable-Pulling Enclosure:
a. Use: Access points to facilitate pulling of electrical cables in buried
conduit runs.
b. Size and quantity: As shown on Drawings.
c. Type: Rectangular fiberglass composite, suitable for direct burial
pedestrian traffic on top, -50 DegF, chemical, sunlight, and weather
resistant.
d. Provide matching top with "ELECTRIC" logo.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use cast metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs in hazardous areas.
C. Use Type FS and FD boxes in wet areas and where exposed rigid aluminum conduit
is required.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Ouf/et Pull and Junction Boxes
0992-0205 16130-3
Cl
D.
E.
F.
G
H
J.
K.
L.
M
N.
O
P.
Q
Use epoxy resin coated, stainless steel, cast aluminum or fiberglass boxes for
corrosive areas.
Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs of like
material to maintain enclosure NEMA rating.
Use outlet boxes sized to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed.
Use boxes sized to accommodate conduit tying into box.
Install pull boxes or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to
facilitate pulling of wires or making connections.
Make covers of boxes accessible.
Install pull boxes or junction boxes rated for the area classification.
Install rigid conduit squarely into boxes that do not have hubs or are drilled and
tapped.
Install with locknut on the inside and outside with insulating bushing on inside.
Install conduit into boxes with hubs, or that are tapped, using thread lubricant.
Do not use back-to-back boxes on this Project.
Seal all points of conduit entry into fiberglass cable-pulling enclosures for a
waterproof installation.
Support outlet boxes for incandescent fixtures and other ceiling-mounted devices in
lay-in acoustical tile ceilings by bar hangers anchored to ceiling construction
members which do not interfere with tile removal.
Do not use meter boxes for junction boxes.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filfer Design Section IVa �
Outlet Pull and Junction Boxes
0992-0205 16130-4
'
'
1
�
'
�
�
�
�
,
,
'
�
�
�
�
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING and BONDING
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding systems complete in accordance
with the minimum requirements established by Article 250 of the NEC. Article 250
of the NEC shall be considered as a minimum requirement for compliance with this
Specification.
B. Grounding of all instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed
in accordance with the manufacturer/system requirements and IEEE 1100-92,
Powering and Grounding of Sensitive Electronic Equipment. Conflicts shall be
promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer.
C. In addition to the NEC requirements, building structural steel columns shall be
permanently and effectively grounded:
D. Reference Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
E. Additional requirements for grounding are shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.2 TESTING
A. All tests shall be perFormed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required:
1. Witnessed Shop Tests
None required.
2. Field Tests
Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in
the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010 — Electrical, Basic
Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General
Conditions and Section 01300- Submittals, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Reports of certified field tests. Each submittal shall be identified by the
applicable Specification section.
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Grounding and Bonding
0992-0205 16450-1
'
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and
data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the
proposed equipmenYs compliance with the Contract Documents.
�
�
Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials
used and methods of fabrication.
2. Drawings and written description of how the Contractor intends to furnish
and install the grounding system.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by these specifications shall be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the
trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
2.2 GROUND RODS AND GRID
A. Ground rods shall be rolled to a commercially round shape from copper-clad steel
manufactured by the molten-welding process or by the electro-formed process
(molecularly bonded). They shall have an ultimate tensile strength of 75,OOOPSI
and an elastic limit of 49,OOOPSI. The rods shall be not less than 3/41N diameter by
10FT in length; and the proportion of copper shall be uniform throughout the length
of the rod. The copper shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.0131N at any point
on the rod.
B. The maximum resistance to ground of a driven ground rod shall not exceed 100HM
under normally dry conditions. Where the resistance obtained with one (1) ground
rod exceeds 100HM, additional ground rods shall be installed not less than 10FT on
centers. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non
current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems,
grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways and neutra! conductors of wiring
systems shall be grounded.
The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be
extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the
water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp or lug connection to a plugged
tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted
to the street side of the flanged connection. If there is not suitable metallic water
,
�
'
'
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
r
,
�
�
L�
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa '
Grounding and Bonding
0992-0205 16450-2
'
,
�I
,
,
service to the facility, the ground connection shall be made to the driven ground rods
on the exterior of the building.
Where ground fault protection is employed, care shall be taken so that the
connection of the ground and neutral does not interFere with the correct operation of
the ground fault protection system.
� 2.3 FITTINGS
�
I�i
,
I_�
�
,
�
'
2.5
A. Grounding connections to equipment shall be bolted. Cable end connections may
be made by use of the crucible weld process or bolted type connectors. Bolted type
connectors for this application shall consist of corrosion resistant copper alloy with
silicone bronze bolts, nuts and lock-washers which are designed for this purpose.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. A green, insulated equipment grounding conductor, which shall be separate from the
electrical system neutral conductor, shall be furnished and installed for all circuits.
Equipment grounding conductors shall be furnished and instalied in all conduits.
Use of conduits as the NEC required equipment grounding conductor is not
acceptable.
B. Where specified or shown a 31N strap shall be furnished and installed as the
grounding conductor.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDS
A. Equipment grounds shall be solid and continuous from a connection at earth to all
distribution panelboards. Ground connections at panelboards, outlets, equipment,
and apparatus shall be made in an approved and permanent manner.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Metal surfaces where grounding connections are to be made shall be clean and dry.
Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scale, rust, grease, and dirt.
Copper and galvanized steel shall be cleaned with emery cloth to remove oxide
before making connections.
B. Ground Grid:
A main ground grid shall be provided for each structure and interconnecting
structure grids consisting of driven ground rods. The ground rods shall be
driven deep enough to obtain a ground resistance of not more than 100HM
and shall be interconnected by the use of copper cable bus (31N strap
minimum), or a bare copper conductor sized to the largest service entrance
ground, welded to the rods by the crucible weld process. The grounding
cables shall be installed after the excavations for the building have been
� Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Grounding and Bonding
0992-0205 16450-3
'
��
completed and prior to the pouring of concrete for the footings, mats, etc.
Copper "pigtails" shall be connected to the ground system and shall enter
the buildings and structure from the outside and shall be connected to steel
structures, and equipment as described in this Section and as required to
provide a complete grounding system.
Grounding conductors shall be continuous between points of connection;
splices shall not be permitted.
3. Where conductors are exposed and subject to damage from personnel,
traffic, etc., conductors shall be installed in PVC sch-80 raceway.
4. Connections to ground rods shall be exposed to permit maintenance and
inspection for continuity and effectiveness of grounding system.
5. Where subsurtace conditions do not permit use of driven ground rods to
obtain proper ground resistance, rods shall be installed in a trench or plate
electrodes shall be provided, as applicable and necessary to obtain proper
values of resistance.
6. Conduit that enters equipment such as motor control centers, switchboards,
switchgear, variable frequency drives, instrument and control panels, and
similar equipment shall be bonded to the ground bus, where provided, and
as otherwise required by the NEC.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Fi►ter Design Section IVa
Grounding and Bonding
0992-0205 16450-4
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
,
�
,
�
'
�
'
�
,
�
��
�
'
�
,
,
�
�
,
�
'
'
'
'
'
��
�l
'
,
SECTION 16475 - SAFETY / DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install separately mounted, individual disconnect
switches as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. 16010 — Electrical, Basic Requirements.
1.2 TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required:
1. Witnessed Shop Tests: None required.
2. Field Tests: Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements
specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010 —
Electrical, Basic Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General
Conditions and Section 01300 - Submittals, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Spare Parts List
Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and
data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the
proposed equipmenYs compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without
review for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials
used and methods of fabrication.
2. Complete layout and installation drawings with clearly marked dimensions
for each type/size/rating of disconnect switch.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section ►Va
Safety Disconnect Switches
0992-0205 16475-1
E��
1.6
3. Assembled weight of each unit.
D. The shop drawing information shali be complete and organized in such a way that
the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being
met. Copies of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs,
and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific
equipment items that the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be
submitted.
TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS
A.
B.
C.
The equipment shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble,
service, repair, and adjust the equipment, and with all spare parts as recommended
by the equipment manufacturer.
One complete set of spare fuses for each ampere rating installed shall be furnished
and delivered to the Owner at the time of final inspection.
Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific
sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1
lot of packing material" are not acceptabfe.
D. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts
inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate
number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the
same parts number.
IDENTIFICATION
A. Each equipment item shall be identified with a nameplate. The nameplate shall be
engraved indicating the circuit number and equipment name with which it is
associated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment
of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the
trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. Switches shall be manufactured by Square-D, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, General
Electric, Allen-Bradley, or Siemens.
2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
'
'
�
u
'
,
��
'
,
,
�I
'
'
,
�
A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type and/or as specified in these �
Specifications. Switches shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Contract
Drawings and as required by the NEC. Handles shall be lockable.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Safety Disconnect Switches
0992-0205 16475-2
,
'
'
'
�
�
,
,
�
'
I�i�
'
�
��
�
'
�
,
r
�
�
1
:
C.
Switches shall be NEMA Type HD, single throw, externally operated, fused or non-
fused as required. Switches shall be of the poles, voltage, and ampere ratings as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
Disconnect Switches shall be provided in following enclosures as a minimum based
one their location. Multiple ratings of enclosures may apply.
1. Indoor dry areas: NEMA 1A
2. Indoor damp areas: NEMA 12
3. Corrosive or indoorwet process areas: NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel or non-
metaflic
4. Outdoor areas: NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel.
5. Hazardous areas: suitable for the Class, Division, and Group to suit the
application.
Disconnect switches shall be quick-make, quick-break and with an interlocked cover
which cannot be opened when switch is in the "ON" position and capable of being
locked in the "OPEN" position.
E. A complete set of fuses for all switches shall be furnished and installed as required.
Time-current characteristic curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series
with circuit breakers shall be coordinated for proper operation. Fuses shall have
voltage rating not less than the circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All disconnect switches to be mounted 601N above the floor, at the equipment height
where appropriate, or where shown otherwise.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fuses of various types as required with the
continuous ampere ratings as required or shown on the Contract Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Safety Disconnect Swifches
0992-0205 16475-3
SECTION 16483 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
�
, PART 1
1.01
�
�
'
,
�1
_�
�
� 1.02
�
'
'
LJ
'
�
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section provides specification requirements for adjustable frequency
drives, variable speed drives or herein identified as AC Drives for use with
NEMA B design AC motors.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The AC Drive manufacturer shall furnish, fiefd test, adjust and certify all
installed AC Drives for satisfactory operation.
Any exceptions/deviations to this specification shall be indicated in writing
to the specifying engineer in the submittal documentation.
AC Drives shatl fit in locations as shown in the contract documents.
AC Drives shall operate auxiliary equipment such as seal water valves,
motor space heaters, and include safety and equipment protection
interlocks as shown in the contract documents.
The AC Drive manufacturer shall be responsible for providing all
equipment specified under this section, and furnishing the equipment to
the Contractor for installation.
REFERENCES
NFPA-70 "National Electric Code (NEC)"
ANSI C84.1 "Electric Power Systems and Equipment - Voltage Ratings
(60Hz)"
CSA� C22.2 No.14-95 "Industrial Control Equipment"
UL508A "Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels"
E. UL508C "Standard for Safety for Power Conversion Equipment"
F. NFPA 79 "Electrical Equipment of Industrial Machines/Industrial
Machinery
G. NEMA ICS7 "Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable Speed Drives
Marshall Streef Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
' Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-1
�
H. NEMA ICS7.1 "Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation, and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems
NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000V maximum
J. IEC 61800-2 "Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 2:
General requirements - rating specifications for low voltage adjustable
frequency AC power drive systems"
�
L.
IEC 61800-3 "Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3:
EMC product standard including specific test methods"
IEC 61800-5-1 "Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-
1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
M. IEC 61800-6 "Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 6:
Guide for determination of types of load duty and corresponding current
ratings."
N.
O
1.03
A.
1.04
EGSA 101 P"Engine Driven Generator Sets - Performance Standard"
IEEE 519 "Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems"
SUBMITTALS
All submittals shall be in accordance with Specification 01340 — Shop
Drawings, Project Data and Samples.
B. Approval drawings shall be furnished for Engineer's approval prior to
factory assembly of the AC Drives. These drawings shall consist of
elementary power and control wiring diagrams and enclosure outline
drawings. The enclosure drawings shall include front and side views of the
enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown, conduit entrance
locations and nameplate legend details.
C. Standard catalog sheets showing voltage, horsepower, maximum current
ratings and recommended replacement parts with part numbers shall be
furnished for each different horsepower rated AC Drive provided.
WARRANTY
A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a finro (2) year warranty
beginning from substantial completion of the project, and shall guarantee
that the equipment furnished is suitable for the purpose intended and free
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-2
�
'
'
�
�
J
,
�J
�
'I
�
,
�
LJ
��
�
CI
,
�
L�
�
�
'
�
'
'
'
�
'
�
,
'
'
1.05
A.
B.
C.
from defects of design, material and workmanship. In the event the
equipment fails to perform as specified, the equipment manufacturer shall
promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the
Owner (including handling, shipment, labor, travel time and expense
costs).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9001 facitity.
The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be UL LISTED
according to UL508C Power Conversion Equipment. A UL label shall be
attached inside each enclosure as verification.
The AC Drive shall be designed constructed and tested in accordance
with NEMA, NEC, VDE, IEC standards.
D. Every power converter shall be tested with an actual ac induction motor,
100% load and temperature cycled within an environmentat chamber at
104°F. Documentation shall be furnished to verify successful completion
at the request of the engineer.
E. All Drive door mounted pilot devices shall be tested to verify successful
operation. Documentation shall be furnished upon written request of the
engineer.
F.
1.06
A.
PART 2
2.01
A.
The AC Drive shall undergo QA test procedures and be submitted to a hi-
pot test with all enclosed devices mounted and wired, prior to shipment.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Operations and maintenance Manuals shall be submitted as outlined in
Specification 01730 — Operation and Maintenance Data.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
The AC Drive shall be provided by ABB, or approved equal.
B. AC drive shall be ABB ACS 800 series, direct torque controls, Yaskawa,
or Allen-Bradley including the following features: VFD, Bypass starter with
service Switch, NEMA 12 enclosure with fans and filters, Input Circuit
Breaker, 480 volt with factory authorized start-up.
Marshall Street Sa/snes Fitter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-3
2.02
C. Drive output rating shall be a minimum of 96 Amps at 480 Voits and shall
be suitable for operation with 60 to 75 HP, submersible Pump Motors.
D. Drive shall include control interfaces as shown on the drawings and as
specified. The VFD remote control shall be through an Allen Bradley
Ethernet IP interface
E. Drive enclosure shall be a standard manufactured assembly by the drive
manufacture with dimensions of 84"H X 31.5"W x 24"D, NEMA 12 with
front ventilation. Drives assembled into an enclosure by an OEM are not
acceptable. There shall be no restriction on space requirements between
the sides and rear of the floor mounted enclosures.
'
'
LJ
'
F. Alternate control techniques other than pulse width modulated (PWM) are
not acceptable. �
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The Drive shall be solid state, with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
output. The drive shall be a Direct Torque Control (DTC) AC to AC
converter utilizing the latest isolated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT)
technology. The Drive shall employ Direct Torque Control (DTC) inner
loop torque control strategy that mathematically determines motor torque
and flux every 25 microseconds (µs) (40,000 times per second). The drive
must also provide an optional operational mode for scalar or V/Hz
operation.
B. Ratings
The Drive shall be rated to operate from 3-phase power at 230VAC
to 500VAC +10/-10%, 48Hz to 63Hz. The Drive shall employ a full
wave rectifier to prevent input line notching and operate at a
fundamental (displacement) input power factor of 0.97 at all speeds
and loads. The Drive efficiency shall be 98% or better at full speed
and load. An internally mounted AC line reactor or DC choke shall
be provided to reduce input current harmonic content, provide
protection from power line transients such as utility power factor
correction capacitor switching transients and reduce RFI emissions.
2. The overvoltage trip level shall be a minimum of 30% over nominal,
and the under voltage trip level shall be a minimum 35% under the
nominaf voltage.
3. Output voltage and current ratings shall match the adjustable
frequency operating requirements of standard 460VAC, 3ph, 60Hz,
NEMA design A or NEMA design B motors. The overload current
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-4
LJ
�
'
�
.--.
'
,
'
'� J
�l
'
'
'
�
�
�
'
r
,
�
,
i
�
'
'
�
�
,
L�'
�
capacity shall be 110% of rated current for one (1) minute out of
five (5). Output frequency shall be adjustable between OHz and
300Hz. Operation above motor nameplate shall require
programming changes to prevent inadvertent high-speed operation.
The drive's switching pattern shall be continually adjusted to
provide optimum motor flux and avoid the high-pitched audible
noise produced by motors energized by conventional PWM drives.
The drive shall be furnished in a UL Type 1 listed enclosure rated
for operation at ambient temperatures between 0° and 40°C at an
altitude not exceeding 3300 feet, with relative
95% and no condensation allowed. The drive
from atmospheric contamination by chemical
particles pre IEC 721-3-3, classes 3C2 and 3S2
protected from vibration per IEC 68-2-6
displacement 1 mm, 5Hz to 13.2Hz and max.
13.2Hz to 100Hz).
Control Functions and Adjustments
humidity less than
shall be protected
gasses and solid
. The drive shall be
(max. sinusoidal
acceleration 7m/s2,
1. An intelligent start-up assistant shall be provided as standard. The
Start-up assistant will guide the user through all necessary
adjustments to optimize operation and will include "plug and
produce" operation, which recognizes the addition of
options/fieldbus adapters and provides the necessary adjustment
assistance.
2. Start-up data entries shall include motor nameplate power, speed,
voltage, frequency and current.
3. A motor parameter ID function shall automatically define the motor
equivalent circuit used by the sensor less vector torque controller.
4. A PID speed/torque loop regulator shall be provided with an auto
tune function as well as manual adjustments.
5. A selection of six (6) preprogrammed application macro parameter
sets shall be provided to minimize the number of different
parameters to be set during start-up. Macros included as standard
are as follows: Factory Default, Hand/Auto, PID Control, Sequential
Control, and Torque Controf. A selection of two (2) user defined
macros shall are also be available.
6. Start/Stop control functions shall include finro (2) or three-(3) wire
start/stop, coast/ramp stop selections, optional dynamic braking
and flux braking.
7. The AFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or
reverse) and accelerate or decelerate to reference without safety
tripping or component damage (flying start). The AFD shall atso
be capable of flux braking at start to stop a reverse spinning motor
prior to ramp.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-5
,;�
E
10
11
The AFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an
overcurrent, overvoltage, under voltage, or loss of input signal
protective trip. The number of restart attempts, trial time, and time
befinreen reset attempts shall be programmable.
Accel/Decel control functions shall incfude two (2) sets of ramp time
adjustments with linear and three (3) s-curve ramp setections.
Speed/Torque control functions shall include:
a) Adjustable min. /max. speed and/or torque limits
b) Setection of up to 15 preset speed settings or external speed
control
c) Three (3) sets of critical speed lockout adjustments.
d) A built-in PID controller to control a process variable such as
pressure, flow or fluid level.
e) Reference signal processing shall include increase/decrease
floating point control and control of both speed/torque and
direction using a"joystick" reference signal. Two (2) analog
inputs shall be programmable to form a reference by
addition, subtraction, multiplication, minimum selection or
maximum selection.
Output control functions shall include:
a) Flux optimization to limit the audible noise produced by the
motor and to maximize efficiency by providing the optimum
magnetic flux for any given speed/torque operating point.
b) Current and torque limit adjustments to limit the maximum
Drive output current and the maximum torque produced by
the motor. These limits shal! govern the inner loop torque
regulator to provide tight conformance with the limits with
minimum overshoot.
c) A torque regulated operating mode with adjustable torque
ramp up/down and speed/torque limits.
12. The Drive shall be capable of sensing a loss of load (broken belt /
broken coupling} and signal the loss of load condition. The drive
shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad
warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus.
Relay output shall include programmable time delays that will allow
for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false
underload condition.
13. The Drive shall have programmable "Sleep" and "Wake up"
functions to allow the drive to be started and stopped from the level
of a process feedback signal.
14. Two (3) programmable critical frequency fockout ranges to prevent
the AFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-6
�
'
�
�
�
'
�
�
t
'
�
�
�
'
'
�
'
I�
1
1
LJ
�
�
'
�
�
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
�
�
0
E
Static and Dynamic Performance
1. Open loop static speed regulation shall be 0.1 % to 0.3% (10% of
motor slip). When motor speed feedback is provided from a
suitable encoder, closed loop speed regulation shall be 0.01 % or
better. Dynamic speed accuracy shall be 0.3-0.4 %-sec or better
open loop and 0.1-0.2 %-sec or better-closed loop.
2. Torque response time shall be 5ms or less. In the torque regulating
mode, torque regulating accuracy shall be 4% or better.
Operator Control Panel (Keypad)
1. Each Drive shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control
panel (keypad) consisting of a four- (4-) line by 20-character back-lit
alphanumeric display and a keypad with keys for Run/Stop,
Local/Remote, Increase/Decrease, reset, menu navigation and
parameter select/save.
2. All parameter names, fault messages, warnings and other
information shall be displayed in complete English words or
standard English abbreviations to allow the user to understand
what is being displayed without the use of a manual or cross-
reference table.
3. Other languages selectable in addition to American English (Am)
shall be as follows: English (European), French, Spanish,
Portuguese, German, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish,
Czech and Polish.
4. The Display shall have contrast adjustment provisions to optimize
viewing at any angle.
5. The control panel shall include a feature for uploading parameter
settings to control panel memory and downloading from the control
panel to the same drive or to another drive.
6. All Drives throughout the entire power range shall have the same
customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless
of horsepower rating.
7. The keypad is to be used for local control, for setting all
parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus.
8. The keypad shall be removable and insertable under drive power,
capable of remote mounting, and shall have iYs own non-volatile
memory.
9. During normal operation, one (1) line of the control panel shall
display the speed reference, and run/stop forward/reverse and
local/remote status. The remaining three (3) lines of the display
shall be programmable to display the values of any three (3)
operating parameters. At least 26 selections shall be available
including the following:
a) Speed/torque in percent (%), RPM or user-scaled units
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Freq�ency Drives
0992-0205 16483-7
b)
c)
d)
e)
�
9)
Output frequency, voltage, current and torque
Input voltage, power and kilowatt hours
Heatsink temperature and DC bus voltage
Status of discrete inputs and outputs
Values of analog input and output signals
Values of PID controller reference, feedback and error
signals
h) Control interface inputs and outputs shall include:
F. I/O Capabilities
1. Six (6) discrete inputs, all independently programmable with at least
25 input function selections. Inputs shall be designed for "dry
contact" inputs used with either an internal or external 24 VDC
source.
,�
2. A minimum of three (3) form C relay contact outputs, all
independently programmable with at least 30 output function
selections. Relay contacts shall be rated to switch 2 Amps at
24VDC or 115/230VAC. Function selections shall include
indications that the drive is ready, running, reversed and at set
speed/torque. General and specific warning and fault indications
shall be available. Adjustable supervision limit indications shall be
available to indicate programmed values of operating speed, speed
reference, current, torque and PID feedback.
3. Three (3) analog inputs, one (1) +/- OVAC - 10VAC and two (2)
4mA - 20mA, all independently programmable with at least ten (10)
input function selections. A differential input isolation amplifier shall
be provided for each input. Analog input signal processing
functions shall including scaling adjustments, adjustable filtering
and signal inversion. If the input reference (4-20mA or 2-10V) is
lost, the AFD shall give the user the option of the following: (1)
stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable
preset speed, (3) hold the AFD speed based on the last good
reference received, or (4) cause a warning to be issued, as
selected by the user. The drive shall be programmable to signal
this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the
serial communications bus.
4. Two (2) analog outputs providing 4mA to 20mA signals. Outputs
shall be independently programmable to provide signals
proportional to at least 12 output function selections including
output speed, frequency, voltage, current and power.
Drive Control communications
1. communication interFace modules shall be provided utilizing Allen
Bradley Ethernet communication protocol. Communications
modules shall be connected to the drive by Cat. 6 cables via a RJ-
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-8
'
�
�
,
�
�
�
�
�
�
'
��
3
45 connector I/O shall be accessible through the serial
communications adapter.
Communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to, run-
stop eontrol; speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative
PID control adjustments, current limit, and accel/decel time
adjustments. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the
Distributed Drive Controller (DDC) to monitor feedback such as
process variable feedback, output speed/frequency, current (in
amps), % torque, power (kV�, kilowatt hours (resettable), operating
hours (resettable), relay outputs, and diagnostic warning and fault
information. Additionally, remote Local Area Network (LAN) VFD
fault reset shall be possible. A minimum of 15 field parameters
shatl be capable of being monitored. The DDC system shall be able
to monitor if the motor is running in the AFD mode or bypass mode
(if bypass is specified) over serial communications.
The AFD shall allow the DDC to control the drive's digital and
analog outputs via the Ethernet interface. The Ethernet
communications interface shall allow for Digital Output DO (relay)
control and Analog Output (AO) controf. This control shall be
independent of any AFD function. Examples of possible DO usage
are as follows: Opening check valves, opening discharge valves,
starting auxiliary equipment, etc. In addition, the status of the DO's
is available over the communications link. Examples of possible
AO usage are as follows: Controlling a bypass valve position,
throttling valve position, etc. In addition, the status of the AO's is
available over the communications link.
4. The AFD shall have built-in to its logic fifteen (15) blocks of
adaptive programming capable of twenty (20) different functions.
These blocks shall be connectabfe to drive actual signals and
functions allowing the user to tailor the drive to the specific
application requirements without additional hardware. These
blocks shall be programmable through the standard operator panel
and through the use of a DriveAP Microsoft Windows0-based
software.
Protective Functions
2
For each programmed warning and fault protection function, the
drive shall display a message in complete English words or
Standard English abbreviations. The five (5) most recent fault
messages and times shall be stored in the drive's fault history.
The drive shall include internal MOV's for phase to phase and
phase to ground line voltage transient protection.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-9
t
�
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Output short circuit and ground fault protection rated for 65,000
amps shall be provided per UL508C without relying on line fuses.
Motor phase loss protection shall be provided.
The drive shall provide electronic motor overload protection
qualified per UL508C.
Protection shall be provided for AC line or DC bus overvoltage at
130% of maximum rated voltage or under voltage at 65% of min.
rated voltage and input phase loss.
A power loss ride through feature will allow the drive to remain fully
operationat after losing power as long as kinetic energy can be
recovered from the rotating mass of the motor and Ioad.
Stall protection shall be programmable to provide a warning or stop
the drive after the motor has operated above a programmed torque
level for a programmed time limit.
Underload protection shall be programmable to provide a warning
or stop the drive after the motor has operated below a selected
underload curve for a programmed time limit.
Over-temperature protection shall provide a warning if the power
modute temperature is less than 5°C below the over-temperature
trip level.
Input terminals shall be provided for connecting a motor thermistor
(PTC type) to the drive's protective monitoring circuitry. An input
shall also be programmable to monitor an external relay or switch
contact (klixon).
2.03 OPERATOR CONTROLS
A. Industrial rated control operators and pilot devices shall be door mounted
and used independently of the keypad display control modes of Hand-Off-
Auto, VFD- OFF-BYPASS, etc. as required. The Keypad Display shall be
mounted on front of the drive cabinet.
Control modes shall function as follows:
1. Hand — The Hand mode shall allow manual operation of start, stop
and speed control. The AC drive shall start when the control
operator is in the Hand mode and run and at low speed setting of
the drive or higher as required by the position of the manual speed
potentiometer. This mode shall function as 2-wire control and
automatically restart after a power outage or auto restart after fault.
2. Off - The "OfP' position of the control operator shall stop the AC
drive and prevent it from restarting while in the "OfP' position. This
�
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Variable Frequency Drives �
0992-0205 16483-10
'
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
position shall also reset the AC Drive after a fault condition has
occurred.
3. Auto - The Automatic mode shall receive an auto start contact to
control start and stop of the AC Drive. This contact shall also start
and stop bypass (if used) when both the Automatic mode and
• Bypass modes of operations are selected. In Automatic mode the
user shall remotely reset the AC Drive by opening and closing the
Auto-start contact. Speed control shall be from a customer
supplied 4-20mA signal.
B. The AC Drive shall include door-mounted "VFD Run", "VFD Fault",
"External/MOL Fault" and "Bypass Run" pilot lights. All pilot lights shall
Utilize LED lamps.
2.04 SYSTEM CONTROL AND INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
A. The following additional controls and interface requirements shall be
provided:
1. Seal Water Solenoid — The AC Drive shall proved 120Vac/50VA to
operate the seal water solenoid whenever the motor is energized.
� 2. Check Valve Sequencing — The AC Drive shall provide a circuit that
shuts down the drive whenever a user supplied check valve limit
switch does not open within a specified time. This circuit shall
� provide an illuminated reset push button to indicate improper
sequence.
�
�
�
�
3.
�
Provide N.C. Contacts and 120V AC power source for motor
winding space heater.
Auxiliary Contacts — The AC Drive shall provide the following
auxiliary contacts to indicate the following conditions:
1 N.O. contact to indicate DRIVE RUN
1 N.O. contact to indicate VFD FAULT
1 N.O. contact to indicate BYPASS RUN
1 N.O. contact to indicate AUTO MODE
1 N.O. contact to indicate HAND MODE
HARMONIC MITIGATION EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The AC Drive shall be provided with a line reactor mounted inside the
enclosure.
� --
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
� 0992-0205 16483-11
�
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
3.02
3.03
3.04
�
c
Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as
indicated.
Do not install AC Drive equipment until the building environment can be
maintained within the service conditions required by the manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A. Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be
protected from site contaminants and debris in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
INSTALLATION
A. The Drive manufacturer shall provide adequate drawings and instruction
material to facilitate installation of the Drive by the Contractor. Installation
shall comply with manufacturer's instructions, drawings and
recommendations.
B. The AC Drive manufacturer shall provide a factory certified technical
representative to supervise the Contractor's installation, testing and start-
up of the AC Drives furnished under this specification as required. The
technical representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has
been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. A Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each
drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall
be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy
kept on file at the manufacturer. A copy of all drive configuration
parameters and their associated settings programmed into each VFD shall
be provided to the Owner at the completion of start-up and shall be
included in the final O&M.
TRAINING
A. The AC Drive manufacturer shall arrange for an on-site training course of
a minimum of 2 training days, provided by a representative of the AC
Drive manufacturer plant and/or maintenance personnel.
END OF SECTION
Marshal! Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Variable Frequency Drives
0992-0205 16483-12
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
��
�
SECTION 16671-TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS)
1 kV OR LESS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.1
1.2
THE REQUIRMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
(TVSS) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as
specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. The TVSS equipment shall provide effective high-energy protection against transient
surges, temporary over voltages, voltage swells and high-frequency noise
attenuation for power, control and telephone/data circuits 1 kV or less and as shown
on the Contract Drawings.
C. The TVSS units and atl components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable UL standards.
D. The TVSS equipment installation shall conform to tocal code requirements and the
National Electric Code (NEC).
E. All materials and workmanship shall be of the highest quality.
DEFINITIONS
�:����:��
C. SCCR:
D. SPD:
1. Type-I
ElectroMagnetic Interference
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
Short Circuit Current Rating
Surge Protection Device
Permanently connected between the secondary of the utility
transformer and the line or load side of the service entrance
overcurrent device and intended to be installed without an
e�ernal overcurrent device.
2. Type-II: Permanently connected to the load side of the service
entrance overcurrent device including branch circuit panels.
3. Type-III: Connected from the electrical service panel to the point of
utilization with a minimum conductor length of 30 FT.
4. Type-IV: Component and/or component assemblies.
E. SVR: Suppressed Voltage Rating
F. TOV: Temporary Over Voltage
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section /Va
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-1
G. TVSS: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a) C62.41, IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
2
3
4
,�
1.4 SUBMITTALS
G1
�
b) C62.43, IEEE Certified by NRTL as "Secondary Surge Arrestor".
c) C62.45, IEEE Guide for Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to
Low-Voltage AC Power.
International Electrotechincal Commission (IEC):
a) 61024, Protection of Structures against Lightning.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a) LS-1 (1992), Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 285.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL):
a) 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters
b) 1449, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include unit dimensions, weights,
installation instructions, wiring details, rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnish specialties and accessories. Include the following documents:
1. Suppressed Voltage Rating.
2. Symmetrical Fault Current Withstand Ratings.
3. Provide independent third-party testing lab report indicating device is
capable of surviving the specified number of 8x20 micro-second waveforms.
4. Spectrum Analysis based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50
kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device noise attenuation equals or exceeds
50 dB at 100 kHz.
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa �
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-2
�
1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
C
C
E.
F
5. Survivability of multiple TOV events for Type-1 and Type-II devices.
Product Certificates: For TVSS/SPD devices, signed by third-party NRTL testing
agencies certifying compliance with the following standards:
1. UL 1283
2. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 Revision
3. IEEE C62.34 Secondary Surge Arrestor
4. NEMA LS-1 (1992) Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices
Qualification Data: Third-Party testing lab or U.S. Department of Labor/OSHA
approved NRTL.
Field Quality-Control test reports, including the following:
1. Test procedures used. Include single impulse testing data that matches label
rating, including fuses or upstream breaker.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective actions taken to achieve requirements.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type or series of TVSS/SPD devices to
include emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties: The manufacturer shall provide a futl ten (10) year warranty from the
date of installation against any TVSSlSPD device part failure when installed in
compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or
local codes.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Advanced Protection Technologies Inc.
Current Technology
Eaton/ Cutler Hammer
Innovative Technology
General Electric
Square-D
Approved Equivalent
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD (TYPE-I)
A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module
with EMI filtering and the following features:
1. The SPD unit tested at 200kA interrupting capacity (AIC).
� Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Transient Vo/tage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-3
'
I:�
C
D
E.
2. The SPD unit shall provide overvoltage protection as follows:
a) >1800 cycles at 180°/o of rated voltage to 0.7 OHM load
b) Test Report included
3. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
4. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral
bus and ground bus.
5. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutra! bus and ground bus.
6. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current.
7. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing.
8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
9. Monitoring system capable of the following:
a) Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages.
b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current.
c) EMI filter status.
d) Percentage of protection available.
10. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed.
11. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of
protection status.
12. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison.
13. Field replaceable surge protection modules.
Peak Single-Imputse Surge Current Rating of 200 kA per mode.
Connection Means: Permanent
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480/277V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire,
grounded wye circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800V for 480/277V
2. Line to Ground: 1000V for 480/277V
3. Neutral to Ground: 900V for 480/277V
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta
circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 1500V for 480V
2. Line to Ground: 2000V for 480V
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section /Va
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-4
�
l_ �
�
�
�
t_:
�
�
�
�'
�
F
EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and
evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992.
2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD/ MCC SPD (TYPE-II)
A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module
mounted externalfy to the panelboard or MCC with EMI filtering and the following
features:
1. Supplied with fuses rated at 200kA interrupting capacity (AIC}.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral
bus and ground bus.
4. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus.
5. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current or
dedicated fuse or breaker.
6. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing.
7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Monitoring system capable of the fotlowing:
a} Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages.
b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current.
c) Percentage of protection available.
9. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed.
10. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of
protection status.
11. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison.
12. Field replaceable surge protection modules.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating of 150kA per mode.
C. Connection Means: Permanent
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480/277V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire,
grounded wye circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 900V for 480/277V
2. Line to Ground: 900V for 480/277V
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section IVa
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-5
2.4
3. Neutral to Ground: 900V for 480/277V
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta
circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 2000V for 480V
2. Line to Ground: 1500V for 480V
F. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and
evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992.
LIGHTING PANELBOARD SPD (TYPE-II)
A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module
mounted externally to the panelboard with EMI filtering and the following features:
1. Supplied with fuses rated at ZOOkA interrupting capacity (AIC).
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral
bus and ground bus.
4. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus.
5. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current or
dedicated fuse or breaker.
6. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing.
7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Monitoring system capable of the following:
a) Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages.
b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current.
c) Percentage of protection available.
9. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed.
10. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of
protection status.
11. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison.
12. Field replaceable surge protection modules.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating of 80kA per mode.
C. Connection Means: Permanent
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Section IVa �
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-6
�
�_�
�
��
�
❑�
E
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 208/120V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire,
grounded wye circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400V for 208/120V
2. Line to Ground: 500V for 208/120V
3. Neutral to Ground: 500V for 208/120V
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 240V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta
circuits shall be as follows:
1. Line to Line: 1000V for 240V
2. Line to Ground: 800V for 240V
F. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and
evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD)
A. For Dual Rated Surge Protection (listed as both Surge Arrestor and SPD) for service
entrance, product can be placed on either Line or Load side of the Service Entrance
Equipment.
1. Provide and install circuit breakers or fuses as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. For all remaining SPD devices:
1. Provide and install circuit breakers or fuses as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Install SPD devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses
between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do
not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not connect neutral and
ground leads together.
Q
E
SPD devices shall not be integrated with Switchgear or Panelboards as
recommended by IEEE-1100, Section 8.4.2.5.
All SPD devices shall have the raceway between the SPD and the switchgear
enclosure sealed with approved fire sealant. The sealant shall prevent vapors from
entering the switchgear enclosure.
3.2 PLACING EQUIPMENT INTO SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panelboards, control
panels or telephone/data equipment to their sources until surge protection devices
are installed and connected.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Marshall Street Sa/snes Filter Design Section lVa
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-7
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Contractor shall engage a factory-authorized service
representative to perform inspections, field tests and adjustments to the equipment
including all connections. Service Representative shall report results in writing to
the Engineer.
1. Verify that the electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's
written instaltation instructions and requirements.
2. After installation of SPD devices but before circuitry has been energized, test
for compliance with requirements.
3. Complete installation checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
4. Remove and replace malfunctioning SPD devices and retest as specified as
above.
END OF SECTION
Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design Seciion IVa
Transient Vo/tage Surge Suppression
0992-0205 16671-8
�
� APPENDIX
ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION
�
Table of Contents:
� OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS
• Instructions for Addendum to Agreement
• ODP Agreement Form
o Addendum to Agreement
o Attachment "A"
� o Attachment "B"
o Attachment "C"
o Attachment "D"
� • Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/Invoicing
• Request to Requisition Form
�
PROJECT PERMITS — FDEP PERMIT PENDING
�
�
� Appendix.doc l0/9/2008
�
�
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
� ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
� CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 06-0022-UT
� 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must compiete the Addendum
to Agreement for Construction of the Marshall Street Salsnes Filter Design project.
� 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum.
3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a
Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor
� responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work.
4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to:
� City of Clearwater
Attention: Tom Robertson — Engineering Specialist I
Phone: 727-562-4749
Fax: 727-562-4755
100 South Myrtle Ave #220
Clearwater FL 33756
� 5. tf you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to:
Name, Tom Robertson — Engineering Specialist I
Phone: 727-562-4749
� Fax : 727-562-4755
E-Mail: tom.robertson@myclearwater.com
�
�1
�
�
�
�
ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT No. 06-0022-ut
In reference to contract # dated , between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and
_ , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows:
1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order
to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax.
2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and
incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall
govem the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner.
� 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally
applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the
Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other
amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used.
4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's
authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "D".
5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner
acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials
directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax.
This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement.
CITY OF CLEARWATER:
Date:
City Manager/Owner
ATTEST:
City Clerk
(City's Corporate Seal)
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Carlos Colon
Assistant City Attorney
LI
CONTRACTOR:
Date:
Contractor
ATTEST:
Secretary
�
�
ATTACHMENT "A"
FROM CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER)
TO. (CONTRACTOR)
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
PROJECT; MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN NO. 06-0022-UT
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment
� which wilf be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct
purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction
material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will
include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number.
�
��
�
��
2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for
consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a
description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the
Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying
documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and
guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to
the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that
the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the
project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other
arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all
services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from
the action of the Contractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materiafs are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all
shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that
each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase
Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the
supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract.
5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine
prior to acceptance of goods at time of de{ivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are
identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or
non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such
nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the
defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or
interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the
Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or
should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner,
resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages.
6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's
Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account manthly to the
Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such
materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all
materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. Alf repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall
be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor.
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the
Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
�
9. The Owner shali indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties �
incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner
treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the
Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such
matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, �
proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished
Materials.
10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of �
Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or
object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to
the site and any defects in such materials. �
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a
listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. �
The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption
number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be
reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The
Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the �
end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to
provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at
the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option.
12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor �
invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications.
13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner-Furnished Material
shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor.
�
�
��
�
� FROM
�
��
ATTACHMENT "B"
NTRACTOR)
TO (SUBCONTRACTOR)
OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN NO. 06-0022-UT
1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment
� which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make
direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of
construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase
Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number.
2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for
consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as
a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices.
3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by
the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities,
verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and
guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to
the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time
that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into
the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and
other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor
shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify
and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to
suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor.
4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all
shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure
that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase
Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the
supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The
Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract.
5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine
prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials
are identical to the materiafs ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers
defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not
utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the
Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without
undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates
into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it
either knew or should have known by perFormance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages
to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or
delay damages.
6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into
� Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account
monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating
portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work.
�
�
l_J
7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all
materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall
be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subconVactor.
8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession,
the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials.
�
9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties �
incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner
treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the
Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such �
matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptfy notify Owner of any audit, assessment,
proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished
Materials.
10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of
Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur
or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials
delivered to the site and any defects in such materials.
11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a
listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials.
The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption
number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be
reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The
Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the
end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to
provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the
Subcontractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the
Subcontractor's option.
�
�'
From
� To _
�
�_�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
ATTACHMENT "C"
Project _ MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN NO. 06-0022-UT
CONTRACTOR)
(SUBCONTRACTOR)
This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In
order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished
in the following manner:
1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax.
2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater
(owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials.
3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf
of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read:
To: Supplier
For: Material per attached Subcontractor order,
4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor.
Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner)
for payment.
5.City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive
change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax.
It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each
month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle.
1
�
�
�
�
ATTACHMENT "D"
PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX
CREDITS
1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materiais with vendor information required (see vendor
application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount.
2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of
electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number.
3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director.
4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or othenivise distribute purchase order as requested.
� 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner
Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount
of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment
requests (monthly).
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�.
6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be
submitted for approval as indicated below:
7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order:
a. General Contractor
b. Architect
c. Project Manager
d. Engineering/City Manager
e. Purchasing/for processing only
f. Finance/for processing only
��
�
LJ
�J
�
PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO REQUISITION
and RECEIVING/INVOICING
CITY OF CLEARWATER
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN — NO. 06-0022-UT
Contractor:
CEI:
Addendum to Aqreement for Construction:
See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement.
Process procedures for tax savinqs:
2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor.
3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s):
4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition.
5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager
to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important
to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby
reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change
and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total
contract commitment. Before sendinq to the Purchasinq Manaqer, the schedule will be
forwarded to the Owner's Representative, CEI and Contractor's representative for approval.
We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEI's contact person(s) forthis process.
6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines
of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the
Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are
purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary.
7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change
order (Recommendation is that iYs done on the final C/O).
Process procedures for request to repuisition forms:
1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc)
2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number.
3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions.
4. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%.
5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices.
6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to
requisition.
7. City staff will complete the charge code line.
Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier:
a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system
� (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, rectaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each
system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge
code.
�
�
�
b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachment
should include estimated quantities and tvpes of materials. Cost information is optional.
Procedures where a detailed line item proqosal is not available:
c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as
the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier.
�
�]
d. Materiais on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line
items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the
appropriate charge codes.
The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's
authorized procurer(s):
The o�cial approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized
personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers:
NOTE: Anv materials ordered bv the contractor that are not included on the City's issued purchase
order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the Citv issued purchase order MUST
be separatelv ordered pursuant to a purchase order directly between the supplier and the
contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separatelv from the materials supplied pursuantto
the Citv issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Request to
Requisition to increase the amount of the ODP purchase order for that supplier.
Process procedures for receivinq and invoicinq:
1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor`s representative will veri the materials are in usable condition and
the quantity received.
2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor
to the attention of .
3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached,
must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with
the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error,
it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions:
a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not
in excess of that amount.
b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice
for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier.
c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must
be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or
approvals as all other invoices to be paid.
4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation
but must follow the approval process as all other invoices.
5. After approval the Contractor will forward the origina! invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's
Owner Representative:
City of Clearwater
Department Engineering
Attn: Tom Robertson
100 South Myrtle Ave #220
Clearwater FL 33756
6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the
original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing.
7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice.
8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the
approval of the Contractor.
9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the appropriate
line(s) on Contractor's P.O.
Closinq of Contractor's P.O.:
1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the
Contractor's P.O.
�
� ���������
,�..� . , ,
t3
PUBLIC WORKS
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
General Item Description:
Vendor:
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Receiving Location (Ship to):
Street Address:
City/State/Zip:
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code: (City will complete)
Phone No:
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Line # Qu8llti $, 2tC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOtal
Date:
Requesting Official
Approving Official
Date:
Title and Organization - Contractor Title and Organization — C.E.I. Services
Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention
according to City of Clearwate�'s Records Management Program.
Page 1 of 2
Appendix.doc
� oi9i2oog
�
� �� �
� ___ ���� �
�
U
PUBUC WORKS
REQUEST TO REQUISITION
STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER
(Continuation page)
Requested by:
Phone Number:
Date Needed by:
Expense Code:
Units Detailed Description Price Per
Line # Qu811t1t $, 2tC. (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each TOtal
Completed forms are routed for approval to conVacted C.E.&I. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to �
City of Cleanvater's Records Management Program.
Page 2 of 2 �
Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 �
i
�
�
�
��
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
� Appendix.doc
,
PROJECT PERMITS
FDEP PERMIT PENDING
10/9/2008
SECTION V
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents:
CONTRACTBOND .....................................................................................................................1
CONTRACT.................................................................................................................................. 3
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6
PROPOSALBOND ...................................................................................................................... 7
AFFIDAVIT.................................................................................................................................. 8
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9
PROPOSAL.................................................................................................................................10
CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................. 13
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ..................................................................Error! Bookmark not defined.
020812 SectionV.doc
Page i
Zisizoiz
C
'
� STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
BOND NUMBER: 6 0 6 6 3 9 9
CONTRACT BOND
,
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC Diversified, Inc.
' as Contractor and Westfield Insurance Company (Surety) whose home address is One Park
Circle, Westfield Center, OHIO 44251 .
� HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater,
Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: Two Million Three Hundred and
Seventv-Eight Thousand Three Hundred and Seven Dollars and Eighty Cents ($2,378,307.80)
' for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and
assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of
, 2012 entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for:
'
l _J
�
�
l__J
�
'
�
'
�
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully
copied herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the
Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the
one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract
documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of
Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the
Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be
made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless
the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury ar conduct, want of care or
skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents
or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans
furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make
payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or
indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of
the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and
Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the
said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may
be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or
indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of
the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of
said contract.
020812 Contract for Signature.docx Page 1 of 15 2/8/2012
'
'
CONTRACT BOND
�2)
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors,
' administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said
Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be
recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corparation by
' reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance
thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor ar his agents or
servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or
' the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done;
as aforesaid, or otherwise.
1
�
,
'
'
'
And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs,
executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the
Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work,
embraced by said Contract.
And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of
time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or
the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it
does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms
of the contract or to the work or to the specifications.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this
day of , 2012. • � .
' oanne
'
�
�.� ,
son/Secretary
WITNESS:
����
COUNTE IGNED:
' ��
'
' 020812 Contract for Signature.docx
'
Page 2 of 15
TL Diversified, I�ic:•"
CON CTOR =
- - - ---_ _ : �.1� -
" ,, _
By. __ _ . _ �= � ,'
Thurston Lamberson%'Presiden��
, , ,,��,`'''
Westfield Insurance Com�panV
SURETY ,., '�r i' :: '
B � ',:�t� `
Y�
ATT E -IN-FA�T : '
Theodore J. Jedlick_':r; '
�� �; �, `
y, .,
. ���1
2/8/2012
u�
C
u
I
u
'
�
'
�
'
'
LJ
'
C
'
,
,
'
THIS POWER Of ATTORNEY SUPERCEDES ANY PREVIOUS POWER BEARING THIS SAME
POWER # AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 04h5/10, FOR ANY PERSON OR PERS�NS NANIED BELOW.
� ��f1Gi"al
Power
of Attorney
POWER NO. 0992202 04
Westfield insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance CQ.
CERTIFIED COPY Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
Westfield Center, �hio
Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPRNY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a'Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly
organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfieid Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEOOQRE J. JEDLICK
of DAVIE and State of FL its true and Iawfui Attorney(sj-i�-Fact, with fuli power and authority hereby conferred in its name,
place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver arry and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other inshzrnents a� coMracts ot
suretY�P'------------------------------------------------------------ •
LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE �3UARANTEE, MORTOAGE DEFlCIENCY, MORTGA(iE
�D�WTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, s�aled with the corporate
seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Diredors of each of the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
"8e tt Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Sacretary or any Fidelity 8� Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall
be and is hereby vested with full pawer and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney�s)-in-Fact to represent and act for
and on behaif of the Company subject to the following provisions:
The Attorney-in-Fact may be given fuil power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, ackna�vl�ige and
deliver, any and ali bonds, recognizances, contracts, agr�ments of indemnity and other �nditiona� or obligatory undertakings and any and ail
notices and documeMs canceting or terminating the Company's Ilability thereunder, and any such instruments so ex�uted by any such
Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary."
'8e it Furiher Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereaRer aff'ixed to any
power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certincate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile
seal shall be valid and binding upwi the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached' (Each adopted at a meeting
heid on February 8, 2000).
!n Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATI�NAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OH10 FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Exeaidve and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed thfs 15th day of
APRIL A.D., 2010 . .
Corporate n'
Seais O��'���c'�,
Amxeci �v� .A. ��o�
�z ��� �
�
�� z � ��
state of Ohio �+""
County of Medina ss.:
�
�• 1848 �
• ;:
+�.._�_. •.
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OH10 FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
�� ` , .
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
On this lbth day of APRIL A.D., 2010 , before me personaily came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me kna�vn, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, 011i0; that he is Senio� EXeCutive of WESTFIEL� INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
instrument; that he knows the seais of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by tike ord�.
Notarial � •
•
sea� �PR� A L. s
arrxea �\�ltll/j ,t`
2���� !`f
• ^ . William J. Kahelin, A ney at Law, Notary PubJic
State of Ohlo � � o My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohfo Revised Code)
County of Medina ss.: , q ���
`�...Tf O F �
I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE CAMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS
INSURANCE COMPAPIY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a PoNver of Rttorney, execut� by said
Companies, which is still in full force and effect; artd Turthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directws, set aut in the Power of Attorney are
in fuli force and eife�t.
in Witness Whereof, I have her�nto set my hand and afflxed the seals of said Companies at Westf+eld Center, Ohio, this day of
A.D., . ,
�SY�'�'+ti .`���40NA( j'.
���»,,,_ ,u� :`O P, .�SG�A :
���f�x �'Jl�as � �`'� cr ,T �:qC'1
,�� a7L.ri�� � i c~n ; �.3L' .f�l� ; m
�'';� ,r` � "�' :'o:
•,,y e ':Z7 .._ ' * ' •.r°'•
orsnsr� r.......tis..sa� �nr_n��
�
�;1946;;
* �•.,_�! _� ' •
�i�� �
Frank A. Carrino", Secret s`��
� # ,
This �C��TI�,A�'�" �nade and ent�reci ir��o this � day of CLu �' , 2i}l� by and b��we�r� the
�ity t�f' �learv�at�r, F'lorid�, a municipal; ctsrpor��ion, �aereina er design�ted as the ",�ity", �nd
TI..� i)IV��I�1�`I��l►. INC., �af tl�e City of FALI�TTp +Count� af '�lezATE� aa�d ��ate
o�'i lcsrada. herein�ft�r t�e�ig�ated �� ihe "C'.mntr�ctor",
�v�TI+N�S�E°T�:
"Th�t th� p�rties tc� tl�i� �ontra�t each ic� �onsideration �f'th� und��kirt�s� promises �nd a�m��ts
c�r� t�ie �art c�f ��t}��n c�rein etrntaine�, dt� hereby� �ndert�ke, p�ar�ais� and a�ree a� f�►lit���.
Th� �c�ntractc�r, and h�� or �cs succ�ss�rs, ass�gns, �x�cut�rs ar �ztmit��s�rator�, �n cc�ns��t�c�ti�n �af` the
sums af �n�►ney' as h�rein af��r s+et forth to be p�id by th� City and t+� the C�niractor, shali an� wiil ai
th�ir awn �r�st and ex}sense p�rform all lal��, furnis�a a�i rr�a.�erials, trwls and equiprnent i'ac t�te,
fallo�i��.
h;tA�SI�A�L �Tl��'�' SAL�N�S F�LTER DESTGN (a6-�022-UT}
FOIL THE SLi1Vi AF .,�.�2,�78,..�0'7.8U
In acec�rda�ce with �uci� �aropc��arl �nd te��inic�l supple�ntai specifications and such other s�cial
prcavisions and drawin��� if any, whieh wil[ #� submitted by the �ity, together wi#h ar�y
advert�sernent, ins�ructit�ns t� biddea�s� �enecal cc�nda'tions, propasal and ban�i, whict� may b� herecc�
att�ci��, a�d �t�y drav,rin�s �f any� which' innay t�e herein r�f�rred ta, are her�b� made a�art af this
cantract, and all �f �aid �rork to 'be p�tft�rmed anc! �ttmp(et+��t b}� t�e cantractor t�nd its suc�cessoz�
an� as�i�ns� s�tll be fuily �ompleted in a gc�c�d �nd workmanl�k� rr�anner t� t�►� s�tisfactac�n t�f' the
�ity:
I�'th� +�ontr�ctr�r shoul� f�il t� c�cnply wiih any� +�f fihe "t�errns,;cc�nditiQrts, provision� or stipul�tion�
as conitain�ed herei� wit�tin the time sp�ci�ed %r comp�etion of thc work #o be �erfarmed by the
C�ntractar, then the �ity, may at its optic�n, �vaii "rCself o�f any or all r�medies provid�d c�n its behalf
and shall have th� right to �roceed to cgmplete such wc�ri€ as �antractor is oblig�ted to p�r�'orm in
acc�rd�n�� with the provisions as c�ntain�d herein.
T�I� �41Y'TRAC'I"t?R A�D HI� OR l:T� SUCCES5f3RS AND ASSI�NS DC3�� I�EItET�Y
,�.G�E T�J A��U1VyiE 'T�I� �!��'EtV�� (}�` AN'� LEGAL A�Ttt'�N WH�CH MAY BE
13Itt�UGk�T A.G:A�,�'i�FST THE CITY AS A RES�iL�` �F THE, �CIIV��"RACTQR'S �,GTPVTTIES
AR�SIt�V"G �iUT U� "�'Hi� �(iNTRA,CT �,1'+TD FUT�THER,MUTtE, IN CONSIDE�AT`IC?N +D�
T�I� 'TEP:�t�, STIPCTI.r�T"�Q�N� Al'+1D CfJJ�iDi`l'It�NS AS C(i�"�AINE:C� H�RE1N, AGR�ES
T� HC�L� THE �IfiY FREE A�D F�AAR�I�LE�� FRCfM :AN'1� A1�Sii AGL �LAIM5 �UI2
�AMAGES, CCiSTS �J� SUITS, JUD+��IEI�ITS t�R. DECR�E� RES�JLTit�G �tC)� �NY
CLAT�i� i1�IAAE' UNDE�2 THT� itiii�`T�tAC�` AGAIN�T T`H� Ci'T'Y Ult 'TI�
Ct}N`iRAC'TflR t�R TII� Cf1I�TRAC`T'C�R'S S�lB-001'+TTRAC�"t�It�, A�GENTS, �ERVA:I�TS'
U12 EN�"LCI�EES RE�LiLTiN+G F'RUlVi AC"�`I�'ITI�S �Y THE A��'C?�tEMEN`�"I{)NE�
C(}NT'RAC�'OR' S�$-f:CiIYTRACTC1Ri AGE�T`T ��RVANTS O�. EMP`LU�EES.
�?"?f�li�i C:o�ct for Si�nature.da�:� P��e 3 eai IS �J8J2�)12
'
'
'
'
'
'
�
'
'
'
'
�J
'
'
�J
�
'
'
CONTRACT
�2)
In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements:
In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or
national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees
or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the
provisions of the non-discrimination clause.
The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including
contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractars far
standard commercial supplies or raw materials.
It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the
event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated
herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be
due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the
Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per
da� shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the
Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to
be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor
to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract.
It is further mutually agreed between the Ciry and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of
this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and
conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or
sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to
be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own
expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional
bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the
City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and
provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful
performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form
satisfactory to it.
020812 Contract for Signature.docx Page 4 of 15 2/8/2012
0
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By:
William B. Horne, II
City Manager
Countersigned:
By:
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
020812 Contract for Si�ature.docx
Page 5 of 15
(Seal)
Attest:
Rosemarie Call
City Clerk
Approved as to form:
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Attorney
T Diversi�ied,` tn�C.
(C n actor) � � " �'� _
� � f�� -
_ ,,� -
AL _
Thurston Lambersori;"'pre�,ident
,,,�„��`''t
Zisi2oia
CONTRACT
(3)
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and
have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written.
CITY OF CLEARWATER
IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA
By: , � t,vv,. . -k}�
i iam B. Horne, II
City Manager Attest:
Countersigned:
��'_ ht.(,h. l{� C ' �.� _
Rosemarie Call
City C rk
B '" a��1 �� C� �� �� �' Ap ovedas orm:
Y�
George N. Cretekos,
Mayor
Camilo Soto
Assistant City Attorney
(Contractor must indicate whether Corporation,
Partnership, Company or Individual.)
(Contractor)
By: (SEAL)
(The person signing shall, in his own
handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own
name, and his title; where the person is signing
for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show
his authority to bind the Corporation).
020812 Contract for Signature.docx Page 5 of 15 2/8/2012
�
t
�
C�,
L
CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT
�CORPORATION FORNn
STATE OF FLORIDA
COUNTY OF MANATEE
On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to
administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn,
deposes and says:
That he is the (TITLE)
' of TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. , a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located
at 271917TH Street East, Palmetto, Florida 34221 (herein, the "Contractor").
�
�
'
,
That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of
, 20 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal
corparation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of:
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors,
laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature
nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work
against the described property.
' That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes,
and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in
full satisfaction and discharge of said contract.
'
�I
That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract.
The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of
the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes.
' Sworn and subscribed to before me
This day of , 20.
'
,
,
u
NOTARY PUBLIC
My Commission Expires:
, 020812 Contract for Signature.docx Page 6 of 15
:
AFFIANT
PRESIDENT
2isnz
�I
'
'
� _J
'
C'
�
C
'
PR�pOSAI., BQND
{Not to be fiIled ouf if a cei7ified chcck is suhmitied)
KNOWN ALL MEiti' BY THCSL PRES�NTS: Thai we, tl�c unders�gned,
�'I,�I�.aversified, Inc. asi'rincipal,a�id
. s�f ield In._ surance Co��s Surety, w}io's address is� ._"__
Qr�..Park Circle,Westfield Center,OH 4425
rhe Cily oCCleasu�ater, FJorida, in thc; sui.i of Ten Percent � arc l�eld ac�d fi�-mly bouitd unfo
Do�lars (� 10 0 )(being a minimuin of 10% of Conh�aetor's total bid amoui�t) for ti7c payment of
----.______.
whieI�, ���elf a►ic� tc•uly to be made, v,�e liereby joi3itly anc! se��erally bind oui-selves, our heirs, exee�ita��s,
�dtninistrators, successors attc€ ;tssigzis.
`�'(2c conditiar� of tl�e above obtigatio�i is such ttiat if ihe attached Proposal of
,TLC Diversified, Inc. .�
---------�..___..--- _------- d5 PJ'iI1C1�)�1I, and , --- ..._..
St31'(;iy, fbr work s�ecifie<i as� Y ��..�ield Insurance Co . � zS
F Ma�shall Street Salsnes
__..._._.._..__�. Filter Project
all as sti;�ulated i3� saicfi PF•oposal; 1�y doing al1 waric ineidenta] thereto, in �eeorclance with tl�e ��l���s a►xl
spc;cifications p��oti�ac�ed i�cr�for, afl witliin Pinellas Cot3nty, is acce��ied anci llle conlraet awartfed to i}�e
abo��e nai�3cd bidde��, �nd N�e said ��idder shall withizl ten days aftcr notic� af said aw<�r•<f cn[er into a
contract, ❑� �vriting, ar�d fiunisi� the t�equire�l Pcrfc�i•1na��cc Bor�d witli surcty or sureties to be ap��raved
by tl�e City Manager, ti�is o€�tibatic�n slz<ilI Ge void, othc�,��ise tI�e same slzall bc i�l fi�Il force and vit�tue by
1�«� aric� ihc �ull ��uozu�t oi' lhis I'ro}3osa1 I3o��d �a�;ll 1�e paid tc� tt�e City as stipulated or lic�uidaced
tia�iiagcs.
Si�;ncc! t1�is _� 8� day of May
�� _ _-
' ('.'rincipaI miist i�tclicate ��vlict�ie��
co�poi�atian, p���•t��c��slli��, contpany
Ol' 31]CIlVK�IiZf�
'
rllt, ])CI'S(7I1 SI�Illfle s11�I1, i�3 hi; c����n
t li�nd��,��itin�;, sign tl�c Principai's
178t1)C, I:]S OLNq ]i8111C 8[1(� I]IS llli�:
tf�c t3crson si��li;�g for � co�•a�oratiot�
� i�zust; lry af�davit, shotiv I�is autl�orit�Y
to I�inc( tl�e corpoiation.
1
�
' f 1'p� i' 1C� 1 ir�s:\'.:?oi
20_12_ � v �.,. � .
�,
-------�_
�,�� . ,. _._'� 4
-..... . .
Thurston La� � erson/Pres �de�it .`°
e ' E`•
TLC Diversif.��d, Inc. ,>
- . _. . ..____. . . ,
1'riiicipal _ .. ��,. � �
J'i3;..' � �„���i
I3Y�...��_` ,_
_ -- ---�---_ _......_.—
Ticic r ey-In-Fact
Theodore J . Jed��:e'�
_._.._._.._____,... . �, .
----____..__.._.._;.-�._....� . , -
C;,
�7 ,
,.. . . ,
.I�.�.S.�.�_i_�.1d...Insirx.arice Cq.
St�rc.ty �°_
. r , T�,
` ✓ �_ ��,' t -,
� l.s'�;
� � •:�1 4 i'a
TH1S POWER OF ATTORNEY SUPERCEDES ANY PREYIOUS POWER BEARING THIS SAME
POWER �# AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 04t15M0, FOR ANY PERSON OR PERSONS NAMED BELOW.
. + POWER NO. 0992202 04
General
Power
of Attorney
Westfield Insurance Co.
Westfield National Insurance Co.
Ohio Farmers Insurance Co.
CERTIFIED COPY Westfield Center, Ohio
Know Afl Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD fNSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAI INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO
FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a"Company' and collectively as "Companies,' duly
organized and existing under the laws af the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these
presents make, constitute and appoint
THEODORE J. JEDLICK
of DAVIE and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact; with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name,
place and stead, to e�cecute, acknowiecige and deliver arry and a11 bonds, recogrmza�es, undertakings, or other iratrunents or coMracts of
sureh�shiP- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - •
LIIAITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE CiUARANTEE, U/ORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE
���, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS.
and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fuliy and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate
seal of the applicable Company and duiy attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming ali that the said Rttorney(s)-in-Fact may do in
the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each af the
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY:
"Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & 5urety Operations Executive or other Executive shali
be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for
and on behalf of the Company subjec[ to the foilanring provisions:
ihe Attorney-in-Fact. may be given fuii p�+ver and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Compa�y, to execute, acknowiedge and
deliver, any and ail bonds, recognizances, contrads, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obiigatory undertakings and any and ali
notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's iiabi{ity thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such
Attorney-in-Fact shali be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary."
"8e it Further Resoived, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter afflxed to any
power of attarney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certiflcate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimfle
seai shali be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached "(Each adopted at a meeting
held on February 8, 20�0).
In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE CAMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE
COMPRNY have caused these presents to be signed by their Sertiar Facecutive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 15th day of
APRIL A.D., 2010 . .
Corporate �
Seals ��� •� «'.,��C�'R�
Affixed �r����Ar ��`i
��; ���..��
������
State of Ohio -'"'�"'�
County of Medina ss.:
.�•�j�nNAt /�y'�.
••',�e ;• ' • ;`S'G%:
�o•'SEAL • �':
�:. :'o:
. , * , ,``,`,
''��..u���,��•`
�
�;164e;;
♦'•.._�__. '♦
WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY
WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY
OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY
� ~ � �
By:
Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive
On this lbth day of APRIL A.D., 2M0 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Se�ior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD
NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above
instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed
by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order.
Notarial `
i �
sea� p1Al. S
Affixed '�p' ��`!�i%fJ 'ln
2��� �� T
. William J. Kahelin, A ney at Law, Notary Public
State of �hio . A+� ��o My Commission Do� Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code)
County of Medina ss.: '.� q ��r
`��'� O¢ �.a�
I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OH10 FARMERS
INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certity that the a�ve and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said
Companies, which is still in fuil force and effect; ar►d furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Rttorney are
in fuli force and eftect. e�
!n Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seafs of said Companies at Westfieid Center, Ohio, this � v day of
m�7 A-�-�� ►� � . .
� ................ �,««.+...,._
`�riy��, � .,••.��pNf1� �ry•.
`O.�'''�'".�d''0�► :�0:� '':4G,A?
���y s�� t"o ;u,;: -v`
�Z .7�i.�'3�L p : m:, sFi' �i m
�'ir s'"�.!ss.,�./��•t :?�s. : O;
_ .,,�, '' � * • '�, ,.
BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02)
�
�:, 1648 ; ;
� � --� -• � •
�i�� �
Frank A. Carrino", Secret S��
SECTION E— SID SUBMtiTAL FORM ��—�
FLORiDA TRENCH SAFETY ACT
CERTIFICATION AIVD DISCLOSURE STA7�MENT
The undersigned acknowledges ihe requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Section SS3.6o et, seq. Florida Statutes).
A. The Bidder further acknowledges thai ihe Florida Trench Safety Act, {the Act) establishes the Federal excavation safety standards
set forth at 29 C.F.R. Section 1926.fi50 Subpaet P, as the inter+m state staRdard until such time as the siate of Florida, through its
Depariment of Labor and Employmenf Security, or any successor agency, adopts, updates, or revises said interim standard. This State
of Florida standard may be suppiemented by special shoring requirements established by the State of Florida or any of its politicai
subdivisions.
B. The 8idder, as Contractor, shall comply with ail applicable excavatioNtrench safety standartis.
C. 7he coniractor shall consider the geotechnical data available from the Couniy, if any, the Contracior's own sources, and all other
relevant information in its design of the trench safety system to be employed on ihe subject ProJect. The Contractor acknowEedges
sole responsibilities for the seleclion of the data on which it relies in designing the safety sysfem, as wefl as for the system itself.
D. The amounts that the 8idder has set forth for pipe installation includes ihe following excavationitrench safety measures and the
iinear feet of trench excavafed under each safety measure. These units, costs, and unit vaiues shall be disclosed so(ely for the
purpose of compliance with procedural requiremenis of the Act. No adjustmeni to the Agreement Time or price shail be made for
any difference in the actuat number of linear feet of trench excavation. exceot as mav ha ntnPrw��A nmvitiari �� r�,o�o r�,�+��,.t
For Information Oniy, fVot for Payment Purposes $
8idder may use addiiional sheets as necessary to extend ihis form. Failure to complete ihe above may result in the bid being declared non-
responsive.
The amount disclosed as the cost of compliance with the appiicable trench safety reGuirements does noi constitute the extent of the
Contractor's obligaiion to comply with said standards. The Contractor shall exiend additional sums at no additional cost to the County,
if necessary, to comply with the Act (except as otherwise be provided).
Acceptance of ihe bid to which this certification and disciosure applies in no way represents that the County or iEs representatives has
evaluated and ihereby defermined thaf the above costs are adequate to comply wifh the applicable trench safety requirements nor
does it in any way relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibiliiy to comply wiih the applicable trench safety requirements.
rsifi
Name and TitEe Thurston Lamberson
Address:
2719 17th Street East
Palmetto, FL 34221
- President
(941) 722-0621 / (941) 722-1382
ielephonelFax
59-2513308
Federal Empioyee ID NO. (FElN}
tlambersonC�ticdiversified.com
Emaii of Account Representative �
DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM
The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from
time to time, hereby certifies that
TLC Diversified, Inc. does:
(Name of Business)
1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited
in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees
for violation of such prohibition.
2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the
business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug
counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties
that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.
3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual
services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1).
4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a
condition of working on the commodities, or contractual services that are under
bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement, and will notify the
employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo contendere to any
violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any
controlled substance law of the United States, or any State, for a violation
occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.
5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse
assistance, or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's
community, by any employee who is so convicted.
6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through
implementation of this section.
As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully
with the above requirements.
Bidders Signature
Thurston Lamberson, President
May 24, 2012
Date
'
'
'
t
�
'
lI
'
�
'
�
'
�
'
L
,
'
PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME FORM
SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133(3) (a), FLORIDA STATUTES ON
PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES
THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SWORN TO IN THE PRESENCE OF A
NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER
OATHS.
1. This sworn statement is submitted to City of Clearwater, FL �
Thurston Lamberson President
(print individual's name and title)
for
TLC Diversified. Inc.
(print name of entity submitting sworn statement)
whose business address is
2719 17th St. E., Palmetto, FL 34221
and (if applicable its Federal Employer ldentification Number (FEIN) is
59-2513308
2. I understand that a"public entity crime" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(g), Florida
Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to
and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an
agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States,
including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be
provided to any public entity or an agency or political subdivision of any other
state or of the United States and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery,
collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation.
3. I understand that "convicted" or "conviction" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(b),
Florida Statutes means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime,
with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record
relating to charges brought by indictment of information after July 1, 1989, as a
result of a jury verdict, non jury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo
contendere.
4. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(a), Florida Statutes
means:
'
'
1
1J
'
�
LJ
,
C
l�
�
'
'
'
,
'
�
a. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime;
or
b. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the
management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity
crime. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives,
partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in
the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one person of shares
constituting a controlling interest in another person, or a pooling of
equipment or income among persons when not for fair market value under
an arm's length agreement, shall be a prima facie case that one person
controls another person. A person who knowingly enters into a joint-
venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in
Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate.
5. I understand that a"person" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(e), Florida Statutes
means any natural person or entity organized under the laws of any state or of the
United States with the legal power to enter into a binding contract and which bids
or applies to bid on contracts for the provision of goods or services let by a public
entity, or which otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public
entity. The term "person" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners,
shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in management of
an entity.
6. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true
in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. Please indicate which
statement applies:
X Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers,
directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who
are active in management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity have been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989.
The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers,
directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members or agents who
are active in management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989.
The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers,
directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who
are active in the management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been
charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989.
However, there has been a subsequent proceeding before a Hearing Officer of the
State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered
by the Hearing Officer determined that it was not in the public interest to place
the entity submitting this sworn statement on the convicted vendor list (attach a
copy of the final order).
I UNDERSTAND THAT THE SUBMISSION OF THIS FORM TO THE
CONTRACTING OFFICER FOR THE PUBLIC ENTITY IDENTIFIED IN
PARAGRAPH ONE ABOVE IS FOR THAT PUBLIC ENTITY ONLY AND,
THAT THIS FORM IS VALID THROUGH DECEMBER 31 OF THE
CALENDAR YEAR IN WHICH IT IS FILED. I ALSO UNDERSTAND THAT
I AM REQUIRED TO 1NFORM THE PUBLIC ENTITY PRIOR TO
ENTERING INTO A CONTRACT IN EXCESS OF THE THRESHOLD
AMOUNT PROVIDED 1N SECTION 287.017 FLORIDA STATUTES FOR
CATEGORY TWO OF ANY CHANGE 1N THE 1NFORMATION
CONTAINED IN THIS FORM.
(Signature)
Thurston Lamberson, President
Sworn to and subscribed before me this 24`I'
Personallv known to me.
.ih,��;�si-..�:.,..
a�"
�r �, -�' : Not�ry Public — State of Florida
F~ 4 � �
�� � ;� _
- ;— f �
� � � �� ,
� �;
''=,;� Nptary Stamp:
'-%r..., ,,��.�'
r��
1N�0�► Klbr YoollE
. . �aan► �e • saM a aaw.
",,� �► ca�. �pna w► zo, tot
.,,,.., co�w:aoA,r � �e�a
day of Mav , 2012
�
Linda Kay oore
u
'
�
'
'
'
1
C
�
'
'
1
1
february 25, 20l 1
RE: Authority to Sign Legal Documents
TO WHOM IT' MAY CONCERN;
CORPORATE ii�SOLUTION
TLC Diversified, Inc., being a legal Corporation oi•ganized undcr the Laws of the State of
Florida in April, 1985, Mr. Thurston Lamberson and R�1i•s. Jo�i�ne R. Lamberson and
having 100% of the outstanding shares of said Corporation owned since March of 89
declares the fotlowing as a matter of record.
Mr. Thurston Lambcrson, President, shall h�ve full power and �uthority to sign any and all
Legal and Binding Documents and make all commitmeiits of tiirhatever nature for TLC
llivcrsi�ed, Inc.
Si�ned this 25th day of Feb, 2011
���
�. ... y _. _ . . ._�:.._...—�cmc.Y � .
__� .:.
1 ��.� , _ : --+-�
'F���_ ...._.___� rr�_�_: ___ .
.
Thurston I,amberson
President
� ,� � )
-.— —'
d�oannc RyL'an�berson
Vice-President
' Si�or•t2 to and subscribed before me Thurston Lamberson, and Joannc R Lairibersou rvhotn
1 know this 25th dati- of Fcb, 2011.
�j�,l�� �G ��`�
� Linda �aj� � or�e
Notar,y Public
�
l_ J
'
'
iti'ty C'oinmission E:xpires; March 20, 2012
� -..., ________._ _
.�"Y`� L3�iDA KA1' �� _. �
:F �_ .JC)F2F
- c MY t:r).t4��AISSION ;i 01?1'7p83t3 I
���d!�'� 'XPIRE:� t;?,t�:•h 1_U 2G12
(407jJ98?�I.' ... .�,::u i .:;rvica.earr�. , i
��
CI
'
AFFIDAVIT
(To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation)
STATE OF FLORIDA )
COUNTY OF FLORIDA )
' Joanne Lamberson being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is
Secretary of TLC Diversif ied, Inc .
a corporation organized and e�sting under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having
its principal office at:
' 2917 17th Street East, Palmetto, Manatee, FL 34221
Street & Number City County State
11
'
�
L�,
�
�
'
'
L
�
�
Af�iant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of
TLC Diversified, Inc.
. (Name of Corporation)
Affiant further says that Thurston Lamberson is President
(Officer's Name) (Title)
of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Marsha 11 S t. S a 1 s ne s F i 1 t e r De s ign
for said corporation by virtue of Resolut ion of the Board, Feb . 2 5, 2 O 11
(state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of the Board of
Directors. If eso tion ' o adoption).
a�ant
Joanne amberson/Secretary
Sworn to before me this 24th day of
LMIOJ► Kirlr M00lIE
Noanr hMe - t1.a a Norle.
' �► co�. ��+r.. �ar to. �o�t
r
,� Conm�iNloa �► � 1lNN
�
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
'
�
Page 8 of 15
May , 20 12 .
/ � ��
�
� � ublic _
��
Linda Kay Moore
Type/print/stamp name of Notary
Notary Public
Title or rank, and Serial No., if any
2/8/2012
STATE OF FLORIDA
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
)
COUNTY OF �ATEE )
Thurston Lamberson
President
being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is
of TLC Divers if ied, Inc .
the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that
said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder
on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or
indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from
bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or
communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to
fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any
advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed
contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder
has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data
relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof.
Sworn to and subscribed before me this 2 4 th day of
UN011 I� MOOpE
. . �an r�r�e - aw a �w.
Ah Caa�a�. E�/Na Mr �0. Z01
Con�nNulal I B� 1NM�
.,��� ..
v
r"-
n ,
= t
n �Y <�
F _ .�)
a�
"Ar, � ... � � � .
!.
'
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
'
'
Page 9 of 15
i ____
Affiant
Thurston Lamberson/President
May ,2012 .
�/�Uc
�
�7otary Pt�blic _ ��
Linda Kay Moore
2�O�ZO�2
,
'
PROPOSAL
(1)
TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for
�ORIGINAL
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-U�
and doing such other work incidental thereto, a11 in accordance with the contract documents, marked
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT�
Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents
' signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of
the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract
without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to
' be done, ar without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all
the pertinent docuxnents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is
hereby charged with this notice.
�
�
'
'
'
�
L��
i
[J
1
'
'
The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties
interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the
Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications,
General Condirions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such
investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and
agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form
of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or
apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General
Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and
hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit:
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 10 of I S 2/8/2012
'
'
'
t
'
'
'
'
�
�
'
PROPOSAL
�2)
If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall
fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may,
at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal
shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to
become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be
retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the
City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this
Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein.
Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Westf ield Insurance Company
Bank, for the sum of
(being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount).
Ten Percent
The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows:
(If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the
names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the
name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's
improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman,
agent, supplier, ar employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder).
NAMES: ADDRESSES:
Thurston Lamberson/President/5539 2nd Ave. Circle W.,Palmetto,FL 34221
' Joanne Lamberson/Secretary/5539 2nd Ave. Circle W.,Palmetto,FL 34221
'
Signature of Bidder: ,� � "� , -- _ �>
' Thurston Lamberson/President
(The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Parinership, Company or Individual).
,
'
,
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
�I
'
Page 1 I of 15
?isi2o�z
PROPOSAL
(3)
The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title.
Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by
a�davit, show his authority, to bind the corporation.
Principal: TLC Diversif ied, Inc .
By: -- Title: Thurston Lamberson/President
Business Address of Bidder: 2 719 17 t h S t re e t Ea s t
City and State: Palmetto, FL Zip Code 34221
Dated at TLC Diversified, Inc .,�S 24th day of 1"IaY , A.D., 2012 ,
State of Incorporation is Florida
02081� SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 12 of 15 2/8/2012
'
'
'
CITY OF CLEARWATER
ADDENDUMSHEET
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and
Specifications.
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx
Addendum No. 1 Date: 0 5/ 21 / 2 012
Addenduxn No. 2 Date: 0 5/ 2 2/ 2 012
Addendum No. 3 Date: 0 5/ 2 3/ 2 012
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No. Date:
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Date:
Page 13 of l5
C Diversified, Inc.
(Name of Bidder)
(Signature of Officer)
Thurston Lamberson/President
(Title of Officer)
May 24, 2012
(Date)
2isizo i 2
BIDDER'S PROPOSAL
PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN (06-0022-UT)
CONTRACTOR: TLC Divers if ied, Inc .
Q gv �rL.
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL $ 7d ,30 7•�'�' (Numbers)
BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL Ti.v� /hi/ ie.� S�sAr ii..y�� �f�L�!�
��l /r 5��.,.G t.� SS/%� h�.,.�_/9�� ,��1�� ,r `�D/!� u ' _
(Words)
THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS ffiS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT
PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR
EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF
OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES
AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER,
IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL
GOVERN.
MARSHALL STREET SALSNES FILTER DESIGN
PROJECT NO.: 06-0022-UT
BID TAB
BID ITEMS UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE TOTAL
1 Mobilization/Demobilization LS 1 $ Z� G� QO $�l��.�0
2 Demolition LS 1 $�� D0� �$�� � p. �v
3 Marshall Street Improvements
3a. Civil / Site (yard, piping, backfill, LS 1 $ $
grading, sidewalk, sodding, etc.) ���l7- �� _pa
3b. Mechanical (pumps, above grade LS 1 $ $
piping, appurtenances, etc. y��Ql� ��
3c. Structural (Concrete, pads, slabs, LS 1 $ $
catwalks, grating, handrail, etc.) ��� ° oJ
3d. Electrical (Power supply, panels, LS 1 $ $
modifications, etc.) ����v �
Instrumentation & Controls
3e. (Pa j els, equipment, modifications, LS 1 $�� �� ���
etc. -�
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page l4 of l5 2/8/2012
�
LJ
�
'
'
�
'
'
t
'
�
1
�
'
lJ
'
4 Paving, Grading and Drainage LS 1 $ $
� D ro a �-�
5 Sludge Removal from Clarifiers CY 500* $ // 0D $ s'' �p D a
6a Salsnes Filters Package EA 2 $ $ ,l
(Equipment Only) - ODP �iv� D/6. ,�ly7' �-�a �D
6b Salsnes Filters Sales Tax EA 2 $�D �3/ $�/ �G �.�
6c Salsnes Filters LS 1 $ $
a��ou�, �'° � . ��
7a Magnetic Flow Meters — ODP EA 4 $ $
ITEM � ?� � �� _aa
7b Magnetic Flow Meters Sales Tax EA 4 $ p�`, � $ 3 �
T �
7c Magnetic Flow Meters LS 1 $��0. �$��I ��
.
SUBTOTAL (ITEMS 1-7c) $ $
8 Owners Contingency LS 1 $ $
o?l a�o g .
TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COST (ITEMS 1 THRU 8) $ $ Sa
.? 7� �
*Quantitv is the Enaineer's estimate of sludae remainina in the primarv clarifiers based on 25% of the total volume.
�
�
�
020812 SectionV - 5-23-12 (2).docx Page 15 of 15 2/8/2012
'
'
AFFADIVIT TO CONTRACT
� CONTRACT LANGUAGE TO BE ADDED TO ANY CONTRACT AWARDED OR
RENEWED ON OR AFTER JULY 1. 2012 THAT IS FOR OR GREATER THAN
$1,000,000.
'
'
t
'
�
�
'
�
�
'
�
'
'
�
,
��
Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran
Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible
for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of
Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million
($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or
response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or
engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or
response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for
purposes speciiically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or
Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling,
possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal
property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce.
The certification form (the Certification) is atta.ched hereto, and it must be submitted,
along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or
response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If
the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been
placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into
or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification
fortn, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged
in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1,
2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the
submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies
mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole
discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist:
A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized
Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the
following must occur):
1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July l, 2011.
2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July
1, 2011.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
contract with the company or entity.
r�
' B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria:
' 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012.
2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012.
3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to
t contract with the company or entity.
4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal
plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new
' business operations in Cuba or Syria.
Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a
' contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than
one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the
above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the
' contract is offered.
The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies
' as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form.
�
'
'
'
LJ
'
�
'
'
1
'
�
1
'
'
'
�
'
'
SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND
SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM
THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED PRIOR TO AWARD.
FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR
SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE.
The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that:
The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the
requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in
Cuba and Syria; and
2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to
participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum
Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and
, 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging
in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring,
developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment,
' facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military
equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and
�
'
1
�
lJ
'
'
'
'
4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal,
subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing,
no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the
Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with
Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba
and Syria.
Auth ' ed Signature
Dalas Lamberson
Printed Name
Vice President Production
Title
TLC Diversified, Inc.
Name of Entity/Corporation
1
�
'
�J
1
'
'
'
'
1
'
'
'
�
1
t
'
STATE OF I— � a ��d�.
COUNTY OF Mo►t�a�t.p
The foregoing instrument was cknowledged before me on this � day of
, 20l �, by p►S Y5o (name of erson whose signature
is being ' ed) as the i ,� S. (title) o L i = .(name of
corporation/entity), personally known to herein , or produced a
type of identification) as identificati n, and ho did/did not take
an oath.
_ _,
,,,,,,,,,, .
,�t R'' P�e;;., T. MONACO
'���' '`��z Notary Pubiic - State of Florida otary Public
. .
;y�,' 'v; My Comm. Expires Sep 9, 2014
�:'y�y,, �,�;:° Commission # EE 24899
NOTA.RYSEAL ABOVE
Printed Name: 0 (1 C--�
My Comm' ion
Expires: 1 at' ��-(